PDS Data Manager

Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide Document Number Version Date Pages DPDS3-PB-200034A PDS 7.1 April 2002 1-684 DPDS3-PB-200034B PDS 7.2 February 2003 685-694

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, orimplied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be consideredcommitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of thislicense.

No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or itsaffiliated companies.

Trademarks

CLIX, Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. DBACCESS, DesignReview, DIALOG, EE Raceway,FrameWorks, Project Engineer, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks oftheir respective owners.

Copyright

1984-2002 Intergraph CorporationAll Rights Reserved

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; containsconfidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may notbe provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in TechnicalData and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial ComputerSoftware — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.

Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation

Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

If You Need Assistance________________

If You Need Assistance

Intergraph Online

Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’sproducts, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.

Support

For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect tohttp://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp.

If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most up-to-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web athttp://www.intergraph.com.

Intergraph Directory

The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If youare outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.

Intergraph General Information

All countries — 1-256-730-2000

Training Registration

1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only)

1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)

Mailing Address

Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore300 Intergraph WayMadison, Alabama 35758U.S.A.

You can also reach us by electronic mail at [email protected].

3

________________

Documentation Contacts

We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and othereducational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentationor where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by:

Mail Intergraph Process, Power & OffshoreDocumentation Manager300 Intergraph WayMadison, AL 35758

4

Table of Contents________________

Table of Contents

If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ 3Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. 3

Preface ................................................................................................................................................. 15

General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 17

Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 18Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 19

1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 21

1.1 Project Organization ............................................................................................................ 221.2 Reference Data Overview ................................................................................................... 23

1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction ..................................................................... 27Graphic Commodity Data Introduction .............................................................................. 27Material Description Data Introduction .............................................................................. 28Standard Note Library Introduction .................................................................................... 28Label Description Library Introduction .............................................................................. 29Piping Assembly Library Introduction ................................................................................ 29

1.3 Reference Database Introduction ........................................................................................ 301.4 Delivered Reference Data ................................................................................................... 311.5 Reference Data Setup .......................................................................................................... 32

2. PDS Environment ........................................................................................................................ 33

PD Shell ....................................................................................................................................... 34

PD_Shell Form Conventions .............................................................................................. 37Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms .............................................................................. 37Batch Processes ................................................................................................................... 40

Help .............................................................................................................................................. 41

3. Reference Data Manager .............................................................................................................. 43

3.1 Data Security ....................................................................................................................... 453.2 Reference Data Archival ..................................................................................................... 46

4. Reference Data Location .............................................................................................................. 47

4.1 Reference Database Management Data ............................................................................... 484.2 Default Project Control Data ............................................................................................... 53

5

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 5. Piping Job Specification ............................................................................................................... 55

5.1 Material Reference Database Structure ............................................................................... 565.2 Neutral File Input ................................................................................................................ 59

5.2.1 Piping Materials Class Data (201) .......................................................................... 625.2.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) .......................................................... 675.2.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) .............................................................. 775.2.4 Instrument Component Specification Data (204) ................................................... 815.2.5 Tap Properties Data (205) ....................................................................................... 855.2.6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) ....................................... 885.2.7 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) .................................................... 915.2.8 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) .......................................................... 955.2.9 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) .................................................................. 985.2.10 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) .......................................... 101

5.3 Spec Writer .......................................................................................................................... 103

5.3.1 RDB Options File .................................................................................................... 1055.3.2 Piping Materials Class Data Command .................................................................. 113

5.3.2.1 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data .............................................. 114

5.3.3 Piping Commodity Data Command ........................................................................ 117

5.3.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data ............................. 1195.3.3.2 Implied Data ............................................................................................. 1265.3.3.3 Add Entry to Material Description Library .............................................. 128

5.3.4 Piping Specialty Data Command ............................................................................ 129

5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data ................................. 130

5.3.5 Instrument Data Command ..................................................................................... 133

5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data .......................................... 134

5.3.6 Tap Properties Data Command ............................................................................... 137

5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data .......................................................... 138

5.3.7 Commodity Implied Data Command ...................................................................... 140

5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data ....................... 141

5.3.8 Table Checker ......................................................................................................... 144

5.4 Piping Job Specification Manager ...................................................................................... 145

6


5.4.1 Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options ....................................... 1485.4.2 Delete Option .......................................................................................................... 1515.4.3 Report Option .......................................................................................................... 152

5.5 Piping Job Spec Report Manager ........................................................................................ 154

5.5.1 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. 1555.5.2 Report Format Form ................................................................................................ 157

5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form .............................................................. 1595.5.2.2 Format Deletion Form .............................................................................. 161

5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form ........................................................................... 163

5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ......................................................... 1655.5.3.2 Search Criteria Form ................................................................................ 1675.5.3.3 Discrimination Data Revision Form ........................................................ 1695.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Deletion Form ......................................................... 171

5.5.4 Report Form ............................................................................................................ 173

5.5.4.1 Report Creation Form .............................................................................. 1755.5.4.2 Revise Report Form ................................................................................. 1785.5.4.3 Report Deletion Form .............................................................................. 1815.5.4.4 Report Approval Form ............................................................................. 1835.5.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form .................................................................. 184

5.5.5 Report Management Defaults Form ........................................................................ 186

6. Piping Job Specification Tables ................................................................................................... 189

6.1 PJS Tables and Functions ................................................................................................... 190

6.1.1 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table ..................................................... 1916.1.2 Nominal Piping Diameters Table ............................................................................ 1946.1.3 Thickness Data Tables ............................................................................................ 1976.1.4 Materials Data Table ............................................................................................... 2006.1.5 Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations ........................................... 203

Delivered Equations ........................................................................................ 204

6.1.6 Branch Insertion Tables .......................................................................................... 2086.1.7 Gasket Separation Table ......................................................................................... 2126.1.8 Fluid Code Table ..................................................................................................... 214

6.2 RDB Tables ......................................................................................................................... 215

6.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) ...................................................................... 2166.2.2 Bend Deflection Table (G04) .................................................................................. 2196.2.3 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) ................................................. 221

7

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________

6.2.4 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) ....................................................................... 2226.2.5 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) ......................................................................... 2236.2.6 Weld Type Table ..................................................................................................... 2266.2.7 Weld Clearance Table ............................................................................................. 2286.2.8 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table .......................................................................... 2296.2.9 Bolt Commodity Code Table .................................................................................. 2306.2.10 Gasket Diameter Table .......................................................................................... 2316.2.11 Field Fit Length Table ........................................................................................... 2326.2.12 Component Mirror Table ...................................................................................... 2336.2.13 Operator Mirror Table ........................................................................................... 2346.2.14 Default End Preperation Table .............................................................................. 2366.2.15 MTO Tables and Functions ................................................................................... 237

6.3 Piping Job Specification Tables Command ........................................................................ 239

6.3.1 Options .................................................................................................................... 2406.3.2 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 2426.3.3 Compress Library .................................................................................................... 2426.3.4 Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... 2426.3.5 Create/Interactive Spec Tables ................................................................................ 2436.3.6 Create/Batch Spec Tables ....................................................................................... 2446.3.7 Revise Spec Tables ................................................................................................. 2456.3.8 Delete Spec Tables .................................................................................................. 2476.3.9 Report on Spec Tables ............................................................................................ 2486.3.10 List Spec Tables .................................................................................................... 2506.3.11 Extract Spec Tables ............................................................................................... 251

7. Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................................................ 253

7.1 Graphic Commodity Library ............................................................................................... 254

7.1.1 Symbol Processors .................................................................................................. 2567.1.2 Sub-Symbol Processor ............................................................................................ 2587.1.3 Physical Data Definitions ........................................................................................ 2597.1.4 Parametric Shape Definitions .................................................................................. 263

7.2 Physical Data Tables ........................................................................................................... 266

7.2.1 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library ....................................................... 2677.2.2 Example of Physical Data Look-Up ....................................................................... 268

7.3 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................... 270

7.3.1 Connect Point Data ................................................................................................. 2707.3.2 Bends and Branches ................................................................................................ 2717.3.3 Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges .................................................................................... 2727.3.4 Pipe, Tubing, and Hose ........................................................................................... 273

7.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager ................................................................................ 275

8


7.4.1 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 2777.4.2 Compress ................................................................................................................. 2777.4.3 Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... 2777.4.4 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data .......................................................... 2787.4.5 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................. 2797.4.6 Revise Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... 2817.4.7 Delete Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................ 2837.4.8 Report Graphic Commodity Data ........................................................................... 2847.4.9 List Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................ 2857.4.10 Extract Graphic Commodity Data ......................................................................... 286

7.5 Physical Data Library Manager ........................................................................................... 287

7.5.1 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 2907.5.2 Compress ................................................................................................................. 2907.5.3 Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... 2907.5.4 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data ......................................................... 2917.5.5 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data ................................................................. 2927.5.6 Revise Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... 2947.5.7 Delete Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... 2967.5.8 Report Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................... 2977.5.9 List Physical Commodity Data ............................................................................... 2997.5.10 Extract Physical Commodity Data ........................................................................ 300

8. Table Formats and Naming Conventions ..................................................................................... 303

8.1 Table Conventions .............................................................................................................. 304

8.1.1 Table Names ............................................................................................................ 3048.1.2 Comments ............................................................................................................... 3048.1.3 Revision Markers .................................................................................................... 3058.1.4 Component Tables .................................................................................................. 3058.1.5 Units ........................................................................................................................ 3068.1.6 Fields (Input/Output Columns) ............................................................................... 3088.1.7 NPD Values ............................................................................................................. 3098.1.8 Rating ...................................................................................................................... 3098.1.9 Schedule/Thickness ................................................................................................. 3108.1.10 Weight Tables ....................................................................................................... 3138.1.11 Abbreviations ........................................................................................................ 314

8.2 Table Requirements ............................................................................................................ 315

8.2.1 Tables Required for Piping Components ................................................................ 315

8.2.1.1 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C) ................................................. 3168.2.1.2 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) .................................... 317

8.2.2 Tables Required for Instrument Components ......................................................... 318

9


8.3 Generic Tables .................................................................................................................... 319

8.3.1 Variables for Generic Tables ................................................................................... 3208.3.2 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) ..................................................................... 3248.3.3 Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) ................................... 3268.3.4 Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) ................. 3288.3.5 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) ........................................................................ 3308.3.6 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30) .................................................................... 3328.3.7 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50) ......................... 333

8.4 Piping Component Tables ................................................................................................... 334

8.4.1 Variables for Specific Tables .................................................................................. 3368.4.2 Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A) .......................................... 3398.4.3 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B) ............................... 3418.4.4 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data

(P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A) .................................................................. 3428.4.5 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data

(P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B) ............................................................................. 3448.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) .............................. 3458.4.7 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B) .... 3478.4.8 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data

(P51,P52,P59) ......................................................................................................... 3488.4.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A) ............................ 3508.4.10 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data

(P60B) ................................................................................................................... 3518.4.11 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data

(P61,P62,P63,P64,P65) ......................................................................................... 3528.4.12 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components .......................................... 354

8.5 Instrument Component Tables ............................................................................................ 355

8.5.1 Instrument Body (I80 and P80) ............................................................................... 3558.5.2 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) ......................................................................... 358

9. Material Description Data ............................................................................................................ 361

9.1 Material Data in the Material Reference Database ............................................................. 3669.2 Short Material Description Library ..................................................................................... 3679.3 Long Material Description Library ..................................................................................... 3729.4 Specialty Material Description Library ............................................................................... 3749.5 Material Description Library Manager ............................................................................... 376

9.5.1 Create Library ......................................................................................................... 3789.5.2 Unapproved ==> Approved .................................................................................... 3789.5.3 Load/Revise Interactive .......................................................................................... 3799.5.4 Load/Revise Batch .................................................................................................. 3809.5.5 Replace Interactive .................................................................................................. 3819.5.6 Replace Batch .......................................................................................................... 3829.5.7 Report Option .......................................................................................................... 383

10

Table of Contents________________ 10. Table Checker ............................................................................................................................ 385

10.1 Table Checker Form ........................................................................................................ 389

10.1.1 Using the Report Commands ............................................................................ 39010.1.2 Report Format Form .......................................................................................... 392

10.1.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form ...................................................... 39410.1.2.2 Format Deletion Form ...................................................................... 396

10.1.3 Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................. 398

10.1.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ................................................. 40010.1.3.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form ................................................ 40210.1.3.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form ................................................. 404

10.1.4 Report Form ...................................................................................................... 406

10.1.4.1 Report Creation Form ...................................................................... 40810.1.4.2 Revise Report Form ......................................................................... 41110.1.4.3 Report Deletion Form ...................................................................... 41410.1.4.4 Report Approval Form ..................................................................... 41610.1.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form .......................................................... 418

10.1.5 Report Management Defaults Form .................................................................. 420

10.2 Sample Table Checker Output ........................................................................................ 422

11. Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager ................................................................................ 437

11.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager .............................................................................. 438

11.1.1 Create Library ................................................................................................... 44011.1.2 Compress ........................................................................................................... 44011.1.3 Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. 44011.1.4 Create Data ........................................................................................................ 44111.1.5 Revise Data ....................................................................................................... 44211.1.6 Report Data ....................................................................................................... 44411.1.7 List Data ............................................................................................................ 44511.1.8 Delete Data ........................................................................................................ 44611.1.9 Extract Data ....................................................................................................... 447

12. Standard Note Library ................................................................................................................ 449

12.1 Standard Note Library Manager ...................................................................................... 453

12.1.1 Create Library ................................................................................................... 45512.1.2 Compress ........................................................................................................... 45512.1.3 Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. 45512.1.4 Create Standard Note Type ............................................................................... 456

11


12.1.5 Revise Standard Note Type ............................................................................... 45712.1.6 Report Standard Note Library Contents ............................................................ 45912.1.7 List Standard Note Data .................................................................................... 46012.1.8 Delete Standard Note Data ................................................................................ 46112.1.9 Extract Standard Note Type .............................................................................. 46212.1.10 Load Database ................................................................................................. 463

13. Label Description Library .......................................................................................................... 465

13.1 Label Types ..................................................................................................................... 466

13.1.1 Displayable Attribute Labels ............................................................................. 46613.1.2 Alphanumeric Labels ........................................................................................ 46613.1.3 Displayable Attribute Message ......................................................................... 46613.1.4 Commodity Code Attribute Message ................................................................ 46713.1.5 Isometric Drawing Labels ................................................................................. 46713.1.6 Report Labels .................................................................................................... 46813.1.7 Clash Management Labels ................................................................................ 468

13.2 Label Description Library Manager ................................................................................ 471

13.2.1 Create Library ................................................................................................... 47213.2.2 Compress Library .............................................................................................. 47213.2.3 Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. 47213.2.4 Create Label Data .............................................................................................. 473

13.2.4.1 Create Label Graphic Data ............................................................... 47513.2.4.2 Create Label Attribute Data ............................................................. 47813.2.4.3 Mass Annotation Options ................................................................. 484

13.2.5 Revise Label Data ............................................................................................. 48513.2.6 Delete Label Data .............................................................................................. 48713.2.7 Report Label Data ............................................................................................. 489

13.3 Label Library Merger ...................................................................................................... 495

13.3.1 Label Library Merger Interface ......................................................................... 495

13.3.1.1 File Menu ......................................................................................... 497

13.3.1.1.1 Open Source Label Library 1 ....................................... 49713.3.1.1.2 Open Source Label Library 2 ....................................... 49713.3.1.1.3 Open Destination Library ............................................. 49713.3.1.1.4 Information ................................................................... 49713.3.1.1.5 Exit ............................................................................... 498

13.3.1.2 Edit Menu ......................................................................................... 499

13.3.1.2.1 Select All ...................................................................... 49913.3.1.2.2 Unselect All .................................................................. 499

12


13.3.1.2.3 Invert Selection ............................................................ 49913.3.1.2.4 Edit Label Number ....................................................... 49913.3.1.2.5 Edit Label Description ................................................. 49913.3.1.2.6 Delete ........................................................................... 49913.3.1.2.7 Validate ........................................................................ 49913.3.1.2.8 Compress Destination Library ..................................... 50013.3.1.2.9 Copy to Destination ..................................................... 50013.3.1.2.10 Clear Error Messages ................................................. 500

13.3.1.3 Help Menu ........................................................................................ 501

13.3.1.3.1 Contents ....................................................................... 50113.3.1.3.2 About Library Merger .................................................. 501

13.3.2 Workflow .......................................................................................................... 502

14. Piping Assembly Library ........................................................................................................... 505

14.1 Piping Assembly Language ............................................................................................. 506

14.1.1 PAL Keywords .................................................................................................. 50614.1.2 Placing Taps in Assemblies .............................................................................. 52014.1.3 Sample Piping Assembly Files ......................................................................... 521

14.2 Piping Assembly Library Manager ................................................................................. 525

14.2.1 Options .............................................................................................................. 52514.2.2 Create Library ................................................................................................... 52714.2.3 Compress ........................................................................................................... 52714.2.4 Unapproved ==> Approved .............................................................................. 52714.2.5 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data ......................................................... 52814.2.6 Create/Batch Assembly Data ............................................................................ 52914.2.7 Revise Piping Assembly Data ........................................................................... 53014.2.8 Delete Piping Assembly Data ........................................................................... 53214.2.9 Report Assembly Data ...................................................................................... 53314.2.10 List Assembly Data ......................................................................................... 53414.2.11 Extract Assembly Data .................................................................................... 535

15. Reference Database Revision Manager ...................................................................................... 537

15.1 Reference Data Conflict Report ...................................................................................... 54015.2 Table Change Report ....................................................................................................... 54615.3 Reference Data Impact Report ........................................................................................ 551

15.3.1 Examples ........................................................................................................... 551

15.4 Proposed RDB Changes Report ...................................................................................... 555

16. Verify RDB Library ................................................................................................................... 561

13

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Appendix A: Reference Data Manager Error Messages .................................................................. 565

Appendix B: Codelists ..................................................................................................................... 567

B.1 General Comments .................................................................................................................... 569B.2 Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets ............................................................. 569

Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 667

Index .................................................................................................................................................... 675

14

Preface________________

Preface

Document Purpose

This document is a reference guide for the Reference Data Manager module of thePDS 3D products. PDS 3D uses interactive graphics and database managementtechniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design.

The Reference Data Manager module is one part of the overall Plant Design System.It is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3Dmodules. It enables you to control and standardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can alsomodify the reference data to reflect company practices and standards.

This document is designed as a reference; it is organized around the structure of theproduct rather than presenting a typical work flow. Use this guide when you need tolook up a specific Reference Data Manager function.

Document Prerequisites / Audience

This document is intended for project managers who have a working knowledge ofthe PDS 3D Modules. Knowledge of relational database systems and basic filemanipulations is recommended. You should also be familiar with a text editor, suchas Notepad, vi, or EMACS.

Related Documents/Products

Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operatePDS 3D, along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supportedby RIS. Currently, these include Informix, Oracle, and Ingres. Informationabout RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents:

Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual

Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide

For more information on related aspects of the PDS 3D products, consult thefollowing documents:

Project Administrator Reference Guide

Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide

Equipment Modeling Reference Guide

15

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Report Manager Reference Guide

About this Document

This document contains front matter, numbered sections, appendices, a glossary, andan index. Much of this document is devoted to a description of the forms used tosetup and maintain reference data.

Section 1 Provides an overview of the product. It describes generalinformation, terms, and work flow.

Section 2 Describes the product environment. This includes informationon accessing the product and common conventions for workingin the PDS 3D modules.

Section 3 Describes the main Reference Data Manager form used to accessthe product.

Sections 4-16 Describe the individual libraries and managers which make upthe Reference Data Manager including operating steps for eachform within the manager.

Appendices Provide additional information related to the Reference DataManager such as error messages, and file listings.

Additional Information

The following informational files are delivered with the software in the directory.

File Name Contents

readme.txt Describes changes and additions to the product since the lastversion. For a fixes release, the fixes are appended to the top ofthe initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product.Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describewhat problems have been fixed. Provides special notices to thecustomer. Lists any exceptions made to the certification.

16

Preface________________

General Conventions

This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certainwords or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you toscan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identifycommonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.

Typefaces

Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software isdoing. For example,

The text is placed in the viewing plane.

Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Commandpaths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example,

Choose File > Open to load a new file.

Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken bythe user. For example,

Select first segment of alignment

Bold TypewriterIndicates what you should literally type in. For example,

Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file.

Normal TypewriterIndicates an actual file or directory name. For example,

The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.

17


Symbols

This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify specialinformation:

<C> Command button<D> Data button (usually the left mouse button)<R> Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button)<T> Tentative button (usually the center mouse button)

Note — Important supplemental information.

Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.

Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software isdoing or how it processes information.

Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form.

More information — indicates there is additional or related information.

Need a hint — used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing theexercises.

Keyboard Conventions

The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys anddescribes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through theuse of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations.

ALT Alternate keyCTRL Control keyDEL Delete keyENTER Enter keyESC Escape key

CTRL+z To hold down the Control key and press Z.ESC,k To press the Escape key, then K.

18

Preface________________

Terminology

Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins anaction. For example,

Click Apply to save the changes.

Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by pickingit with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. Afterselecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. Forexample,

Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete toremove it from the directory.

In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such asselecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphicelements from the design file. For example,

Select the line string to define the graphic template.

Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a designfile. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-selectby double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-heldcursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, youtentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord.

Double-click To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-heldcursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you areclicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.For example,

Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface.

Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse orhand-held cursor.

Type To key a character string into a text box.

Key in To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute thedefault action.

In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data willenter the data and move the cursor to the next field.

19


20

1. Intro

du

ction

Introduction________________

1. Introduction

Welcome to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) module of the Plant Design System of software.Intergraph’s plant design software can be used to design any type of plant—from petrochemical plants, offshoreplatforms, chemical and pharmaceutical plants, consumer products (food, beverages, cosmetics, soap, paper, andso forth), to power plants, waste water treatment plants, and cogeneration facilities.

Specifically, the Plant Design System (PDS) integrates many discipline-specific software modules; thesemodules automate the many phases of a plant design project. Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is one ofthese modules.

In PDS, placement of piping components is driven by the specification. The PDS reference data provides theselection criteria for the piping commodity items that are found in the piping job specification and the pipingcommodity libraries that are delivered with the product. This data is contained in the reference database (RDB)and can be used by other projects.

The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for thePDS 3D modules. This reference data ensures consistency in the definition of piping specifications andcommodity libraries. It is used to control and standardize the PDS 3D modules to reflect company practices andstandards.

21


1.1 Project Organization

Since a process plant such as a refinery can be extremely large, PDS uses the followingorganization to break the plant into smaller pieces that can be handled more easily.

A project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. Theproject is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. Each project contains all theinformation required to work in a PDS task.

The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of Piping projects. EachPiping project consists of a project control database, project design database, piping andequipment models, reference models (structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway), a set ofdrawings, and a collection of reference data. The reference data may be specific to oneproject or shared by more than one project.

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administratorbefore you can use any of the other 3D PDS modules. Refer to the Project AdministratorReference Guide for more information on setting up a project.

22

1. Intro

du

ction

Reference Data Overview________________

1.2 Reference Data Overview

The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) enables you to define and modify the referencedata for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data is used to ensure consistency in thedefinition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It enables you to control andstandardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can also modify the reference data to reflect companypractices and standards.

The Reference Data for PDS 3D is composed of the following basic components:

Spec/Material Database

Table 201 - Piping Material Class Data

Table 202 - Piping Commodity Specification Data

Table 203 - Piping Specialty Specification Data

Table 204 - Instrument Component Specification Data

Table 205 - Tap Properties Data

Table 211 - Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data

Table 212 - Piping Commodity Implied Material Data

Table 231 - Component Insulation Exclusion Data

Table 232 - Flange Insulation Exclusion Data

Practice Specific Reference Data

Physical Dimension Tables

Piping Job Specification Tables

Short Material Descriptions

Long Material Descriptions

Specialty Material Descriptions

23


Practice Independent Reference Data

Graphic Commodity Data

Standard Note Library

Label Description Library

Piping Assembly Library

The Reference Data Manager supports both approved and unapproved reference data for aproject. The Project Control Database contains complete file management data for both anapproved and unapproved version of each type of reference data such as the Piping JobSpecification or the Graphic Commodity Library. This allows revisions to take place inunapproved files while other processes read the approved files. Once the information in theunapproved files has been verified, it can be posted to the approved reference data files.

The following figure illustrates the various pieces of reference data required to place a 6" gatevalve in a piping model and report on the placed component. It depicts how the various partsthat make up PDS work together. Whenever possible, this placement example will be usedthroughout the rest of this document. For example, the discussion of the physical dimensiontables will use the tables called to place the gate valve as examples.

24

1. Intro

du

ction

Reference Data Overview________________

25


26

1. Intro

du

ction

Piping Job Specification Introduction________________

1.2.1 Piping Job Specification Introduction

The Piping Job Specification (PJS) provides selection criteria for piping commodity items,piping specialty items, and instruments. The information for the Piping Job Specification iscontained in the following files:

Specification/Material Reference Database - database containing the definitions forpiping materials classes, commodity items, specialty items, and tap properties tables.

Spec Table Library - library containing the specification tables referenced in the PJS.

The information in the Specification/Material Reference database and Spec Table Librarytables is also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can extract and modify.

The Piping Job Specification Manager enables you to create or revise the specificaton datain the Material Reference Database. You can use the interactive (forms-driven) specificationwriter or define/revise the data using ASCII neutral files.

The Piping Job Spec Tables command enables you to create, revise, and delete tables in theSpec Table Library.

Graphic Commodity Data Introduction

The graphic commodity data is used to define commodity items, specialty items, andinstruments. The Graphic Commodity Library contains the parametric symbol definitionsrequired to place piping and instrument components in a 3D model. When you place acomponent the system uses the Piping Job Specification to select the appropriate componentfrom the parametric symbol definition library which then accesses the component dimensionaldata.

The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries:

Graphic Commodity Library - contains the parametric definitions for the commodityitems.

Physical Dimension Libraries - contains dimension data for the commodity items. (Adifferent Physical Dimension Library is required for each type of practice such as, U.S.,DIN, or British Standard)

Spec Table Library - contains the specification tables referenced in the PJS.

The parametric descriptions and dimension tables are also delivered in the form of textlibraries which you can extract and modify using the Graphic Commodity LibraryManager and Physical Data Library Manager.

27


Material Description Data Introduction

The Material Description Data is accessed for

Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database

Other miscellaneous reporting

Interfaces to the material control system

Stress analysis

Isometric drawing extraction.

The Material Description Data consists of the commodity item data which is not stored in theDesign Database, which is not required for the creation of graphic symbologies, and which isnot part of the geometric data. This data is contained in the following files:

Material Data in the Specification/Material Database - database tables containingdefinitions for commodity items, criteria for implied material, and weld data.

Short Material Description Library - contains the short material descriptions forcommodity items and taps.

Long Material Description Library - contains the long material descriptions forcommodity items.

Specialty Material Description Library - contains the material descriptions for specialtyitems.

The material descriptions are also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can modifyand post to the libraries.

The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create, revise, and delete data inthe Material Description Libraries. You can use the Piping Job Specification Manager toload the material data tables in the Specification/Material Database.

Standard Note Library Introduction

The text for code-listed attributes and standard notes is stored in the Standard Note Library.All attributes identified as code-listed are actually stored as integer values. The code list textassociated with the integer is stored in the Standard Note Library. Information in the StandardNote Library is identified by note number and note type. Output from the library consists offree-format text which forms the standard note.

28

1. Intro

du

ction

Piping Job Specification Introduction________________

Label Description Library Introduction

The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following label types used inPDS 3D:

Orthographic drawing view specific labels

Orthographic drawing view identification labels

Orthagraphic drawing - user input

Displayable attribute messages

Commodity code attribute messages

Isometric drawing labels

Report labels

Clash management labels

These labels are intelligent graphics with links to the material database.

The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for alabel (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (whatinformation comprises the label.)

Piping Assembly Library Introduction

The Piping Assembly Library contains the piping assembly definitions which define theparameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in themodel.

A Piping Assembly object library and text library which contain the definitions for basicassemblies are included in the product delivery.

29


1.3 Reference Database Introduction

A database is a collection of formatted data which conforms to a set of predefined rules. TheSpecification/Material Reference Database is composed of a set of tables (entities) whichrepresent categories of data. A table is a defined set of attributes which describe an item, suchas the Piping Commodity Data table.

An attribute is a single type of information to be stored about an item, such as nominaldiameter or end preparation. Each attribute has a column number in the database table and aname which describes the piece of information to be stored. The actual information stored inthe database is referred to as the attribute value. This value is a fixed data type; it can beeither numeric, alphanumeric, or code-listed.

numeric data types can be either real (decimal) or integer. These attributes are used forquantitative values such as pressure or temperature.

alphanumeric data types (also called character) are used for textual information such ascomponent names or descriptions.

code-listed data types are a special integer values which help standardize and speed updata entry. A code list is a set of acceptable values for a particular attribute which canbe referred to by an index number. A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value isdefined using one of the selections from a particular code list set.

30

1. Intro

du

ction

Delivered Reference Data________________

1.4 Delivered Reference Data

The following reference data is delivered in the reference database products for thecorresponding practices (such as RDUSRDB or RDDINRDB).

LibraryFile Description Object Text

Physical Dimension Table Library us_pcdim.l us_pcdim.l.t

Piping Job Specification Table Library us_pjstb.l us_pjstb.l.t

Short Material Description Library us_shbom.l -

Long Material Description Library us_lgbom.l -

Specialty Material Description Library us_spbom.l -

For the DIN RDB substitute din_ for us_ in the listed library file names.

The following reference data, which is not unique to any specific practice, is delivered in thePD Shell product in the \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib directory.

LibraryFile Description Object Text

Graphic Commodity Library pip_gcom.l pip_gcom.l.t

Piping Assembly Library assembly.l assembly.l.t

Label Description Library labels.l -

Standard Note Library std_note.l std_note.l.t

31


1.5 Reference Data Setup

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administratorbefore you can use the Reference Data Manager. Refer to the Project AdministratorReference Guide for information on

Loading PDS 3D products.

Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.

Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.

Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.

In addition to the information specified in the Project Administrator Reference Guide, youshould complete the following steps before using the Reference Data Manager.

Load the appropriate Reference Data product (such as RDUSRDB for U.S. Practice orRDDINRDB for DIN Practice).

Edit the pds.cmd file to identify the text editor to be used when revising reference datathrough the Reference Data Manager forms. You can specify any text editor that hasbeen loaded on the workstation. The default setting for Windows NT systems isNotepad.

$ENV {’PD_EDITOR’} = ’<absolute path to preferred editor executable>’;

Edit the pds.cmd file to define PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL to control the commitinterval for use in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. Thishas the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The defaultcommit value is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance.

Identify the location of the Reference Data files as described in Reference DataLocation, page 47.

32

2. En

viron

men

t

PDS Environment________________

2. PDS Environment

The PDS 3D software supports a variety of applications. All the supported applications use acommon interface that is controlled by the PD Shell program. This ensures consistencyacross applications and minimizes the amount of time required to learn the product.

The PDS 3D modules provide a simple user interface through extensive use of forms. Themodules also provide an on-line Help capability for easy access to information while workingin the product.

The PDS 3D software uses available nucleus tools such as MicroStation and FORMS. Itsupports standard software such as NFS, NQS, and RIS required to set up data across anetwork. This design facilitates the use of non-PDS tools such as relational databases andthird party software.

The PD_Shell Environment and all batch jobs in the PDS 3D products interface toIntergraph’s Network Licensing System.

33


PD Shell

The PD Shell program provides access to the various functions that are associated with thePDS 3D Modules. You can access the Plant Design System Environment form by

Double-clicking the PD_Shell icon on Windows NT workstations.

This executes a control script that defines all of the environment variables that are needed torun the product, and it identifies the location of the product files. These files can be locatedon the workstation or a server on the network. See pds.cmd in the Project AdministratorReference Guide for more information on this file. The script also activates the Plant DesignSystem Environment form.

This form identifies the active project(s) and provides access to all the PDS functions.

Options

Schematics Environment — Provides access to the PDS 2D modules that are used tocreate and modify piping and instrumentation diagrams, process flow diagrams, andinstrumentation database records.

Equipment Modeling — Provides access to the Equipment Modeling module, whichprovides an interactive graphics environment that is used to create and revise equipmentmodel graphics and database information.

FrameWorks Environment — Provides access to the FrameWorks module, whichprovides an environment that is used to create and revise structural models, create andrevise structural drawings, and propagate structural models.

34

2. En

viron

men

t

PD Shell________________ Piping Designer — Activates an interactive command environment that is used tocreate piping and in-line instrumentation in the model; revise existing model graphicsand database information; and verify the integrity of the data in the model.

Electrical Raceway Environment — Provides access to the Electrical Racewaymodule, which provides an interactive environment that is used to create and reviseraceway models and access raceway utilities.

Piping Design Data Manager — Provides access to a set of options that are used toverify the integrity of the graphic and database information that is associated with amodel.

Piping Model Builder — Enables you to create piping graphics from a nongraphicsenvironment. This module is used with PD_Design to create an accurate 3D model ofthe piping network.

Pipe Support Designer — Activates an interactive command environment that is usedto create pipe supports in the model, and revise existing pipe support model graphicsand database information.

Pipe Stress Analysis — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract informationfrom piping models for input to third-party pipe stress analysis products.

Interference Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to check forinterferences among project models and to control approved interferences.

Isometric Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to extractisometric drawings from piping models and to review or plot the created isometricdrawings.

Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and manipulatedrawings and drawing views; provide access to the interactive graphics environment fordrawings; and provide access to a plot manager and vector hiddenline manager.

DesignReview Integrator — Activates a set of forms that are used to extractinformation to form label files for use in DesignReview and to review data from aDesignReview session.

Report Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and revise reportformat files and report on information in a project including Material Take-Off reports.

Project Administrator — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to create aproject, create and revise project files, define project seed data, and control the project.

Reference Data Manager — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to controlthe reference data for a project including Piping Job Specification data, GraphicCommodity Data, Alphanumeric Commodity Data, Standard Note Library, LabelDescription Library, and Piping Assembly Library.

35


Other Fields

User ID — Used for access control. This field also sets the Review User ID for use inthe Interference Manager module.

If access control has been defined, you must key in a valid user ID as defined by yoursystem manager to gain access to the projects. Refer to the Access Control Manger inthe Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide, for more information onusing access control.

If access control has not been defined, no entry is required for this field.

Password — Key in the password for the specified user ID.

Project List Field — Displays the defined projects for the network and allows you toselect the active project. The system lists all the defined PDS projects (2D-only, 3D-only, and 2D & 3D). An error is displayed if you select an option that is incompatiblewith the active project. For example, if the active project is a 2D-only project, youcannot access the the Interference Manager module.

If access control has been defined, only those projects for which you have some level ofaccess are displayed.

Message Area — Displays prompts and messages that are associated with the activeprocess. Error messages are displayed in red.

36

2. En

viron

men

t

PD_Shell Form Conventions________________

PD_Shell Form Conventions

The following Conventions describe how to respond to the various buttons, lists, and promptsthat make up the environments. The display size of forms and dialog boxes in the non-Microstation graphics environment are independent of the size of the workstation’s displaysystem. Most forms contain the same basic features: buttons, fields, text, and other gadgets.In general, anything you find on a form is called a gadget.

Selecting Options

You move through the PD Shell forms by selecting function buttons or other gadgets from theform. Select means to place the screen cursor (which appears as an arrow) on top of a screengadget and press <D>.

For most of the forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and acceptthe data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) andthen selecting the Accept button.

You use the select action to select functions, access other forms, activate data fields, togglebuttons, select from lists, scroll through data displayed on the screen, and so on.

The following summarizes other basic actions you use in the environments:

Enter — When keying in any data in a key-in field, press the <ENTER> or <Tab> keyfor the data to be entered into the system. You can also press <ENTER> or <Tab> tomove through a set of key-in fields.

Delete — If you make a mistake while keying in text, press the <Delete> key to erasecharacter(s) to the left of the cursor.

Common Tools on the PD Shell Forms

There are many gadgets in the environments that are common to most or all of the forms. Thefollowing describes these tools.

Standard Commands

The PD Shell forms have a set of standard buttons in the upper right corner of most of theform windows. The available commands vary from form to form depending on the type ofoperation.

The Help button activates on-line Help for the active form. Help remains active until youdelete the Help window.

37


The Shell button exits the active form and returns control to the base manager that isassociated with the active form. For most forms this returns to the Plant Design SystemEnvironment form.

The Top button exits the active form and returns control to the top form of the active branch.

The Cancel button cancels or exits from the active form. Control returns to the immediatelypreceding form in the hierarchy.

The Accept button accepts a selection or operation. Depending on the active form or option,the active form remains active so that you can repeat a similar operation or control returns tothe preceding form.

The Restart button clears any key-in fields on the form that have values you can modify.

Scrolling List

Some screen menus have a scrolling list of projects or applications. You need to scroll a listonly if more options are available than can be displayed in the window. To scroll a list, selectthe arrow buttons on the side of the list. The list scrolls up or down depending on whicharrow you select.

The scrolling list has an arrow pointing up and an arrow pointing down. Thesearrows scroll lists line by line. There is a button that slides between these twoarrows to indicate your position on the list. To page through the list, select thespace above or below the sliding button. The list pages up or downaccordingly.

You can also select the slider and, while pressing <D>, slide the button up or down the bar.The items scroll through the window as you move the button. The size and position of thebutton on the scroll bar is an indication of the number of lines and the relative position withinthe list.

All commands that display a list of design areas or models order the list alphanumerically bythe design area number or model number in ascending order.

In some forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept the datain that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and thenselecting the Accept button.

38

2. En

viron

men

t

PD_Shell Form Conventions________________ Key-in Fields

Screens that accept keyboard input have key-in fields. These fields are box-shaped and dark gray. You can select a key-in field and key in a new value. Abar cursor appears in the active key-in field. Key in your input, and press<Return>. To change a field, reselect the field and key in the new information.Key-in fields have a maximum number of characters depending on the item thatis being defined.

If you select a key-in field for a code-listed attribute, the system activates a form that lists thecode list values for the selected field.

MicroStation requires lowercase characters for the file specification and path name of alldesign files. Therefore, the system automatically converts any input for the file specificationand path name of a design file (such as a model or drawing) to lowercase before loading intothe Project Control Database.

Display-List Boxes

A display-list box is located at the end of some key-in fields. It lets you selectdata from a list instead of keying in information. For example, there is adisplay list associated with the Authorization key-in field shown. At the end ofthe field, there is a small box with horizontal dashes. When you select thisdisplay list box with the screen cursor, an associated list of valid input valuesdisplays. Select an item from the list to enter its value into the field.

Shift Left and Shift Right buttons

At the bottom of some key-in and display fields, there are two buttons marked witharrows. These buttons are called shift left and shift right buttons.

Often, you can key in more characters than a field display shows. Shift Left moves the textdisplay to the front of the field; Shift Right moves the text display to the end of the field.

Toggle

A toggle field on a screen menu enables you to select one of two possible choices, one ofwhich is always displayed. Place a data point on the toggle field to toggle between the twochoices.

Roll-Through List

A roll-through list shows one choice at a time of a list that can be several items long.Place a data point on the roll-through list to scroll through the available options. Theoption displayed is active.

39

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Standard Window Icons

When using this software in the CLIX environment, you can press <D> along the edge of aform or any area not occupied by a button, key-in field, or other gadget, to display a box oficons. You can manipulate form windows just like any other workstation window.

The following list defines the available window icons.

Collapse/RestoreRepaint

Pop-to-bottomModify/Resize

Pop-to-topRestore Size

Batch Processes

When you install the PDS 3D applications, the system creates the necessary batch queues forthat application. Refer to Loading PDS Products in the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide for a listing of the batch queues.

PDS 3D uses these batch queues to allow you to continue working in the environment whilethe system processes a request. Many of the batch processes can be delayed for submission ata specified time.

When you submit a batch process the system sends an electronic mail message to the mailpath of the default login reporting the jobs completion status. The mail message also includesany error log information.

40

2. En

viron

men

t

Help________________

Help

On-line Help is a special feature of your application software. Help provides instant access toinformation from the application reference documents, such as command descriptions andexplanations, prompt sequences, and much more.

There are several avenues you can take to find information about a command or subject. Forinstance, Help provides

A table of contents that lists subjects by topic and subtopic (in a hierarchy).

An alphabetized index of every command or subject that has been documented for thesoftware.

A glossary to help you become familiar with product-specific terms.

The ability to move up, down, back, and forth through Help by using cross-referencesand links to primary and secondary commands.

The ability to quickly search through Help for information on a specific subject orcommand.

When you first select Help, the Help Table of Contents is displayed in a pop-up window.Select a topic from this list or select a command from the menu to display an article in thepop-up window.

Whenever possible, PDS Help is context sensitive. For example, if you select the help iconfor a given form, Help that is specific to that form is displayed.

The Help window has buttons that you can use to manipulate either Help or the window itselfas follows:

41

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Scroll Bar — Moves up or down in an article that is displayed in the Help window.

Help Command Buttons — Enable you to move around in the Help file.

Cancel or File > Exit — exits Help and closes the Help window.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Help button from the command window or form.

If you select Help while using a command, help on the active command is displayed. Ifno command is active, the table of contents is displayed.

2. Use the command buttons or scroll bar to move around in Help.

— OR —

Exit Help.

42

3. Referen

ce D

ata Man

ager

Reference Data Manager________________

3. Reference Data Manager

The Reference Data Manager provides access to the various functions associated with thePDS 3D Reference Database. Select the Reference Data Manager option from the PD Shellform.

Select the option to be performed.

Spec Writer — Used to create, modify, and delete information in the MaterialReference Database using a forms interface. See Spec Writer, page 103.

Piping Job Specification Manager — Used to create, modify, and delete informationin the Material Reference Database using neutral files. See Piping Job Specification,page 55 and Piping Job Specification Manager, page 145.

Piping Job Specification Tables — Used to create, modify, and delete information inthe Piping Job Spec Table Library. See Piping Job Specification Tables, page 189 andPiping Job Specification Tables Command, page 239.

Piping Job Spec Report Manager — Used to define and generate reports of data inthe Material Reference Database. See Piping Job Spec Report Manager, page 154.

Graphic Commodity Library Manager — Used to create, modify, and delete graphiccommodity library data (Eden modules). See Graphic Commodity Library, page 254and Graphic Commodity Library Manager, page 275.

Physical Data Library Manager — Used to create, modify, and delete physical data(dimension tables) in object and text libraries. See Physical Data Tables, page 266 andPhysical Data Library Manager, page 287.

43

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Material Description Library Manager — Used to create and modify alphanumericcommodity data. See Material Description Data, page 361 and Material DescriptionLibrary Manager, page 376.

Support Tutorial Definition Manager — Used to create, revise, and delete data in theTutorial Definition Library. See Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager, page 437.

Standard Note Library Manager — Used to create, revise, and report the code listsand standard notes associated with the PDS 3D modules. See Standard Note Library,page 449 and Standard Note Library Manager, page 453.

Label Description Library Manager — Used to define the graphic parameters for alabel (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label(what information comprises the label). See Label Description Library, page 465 andLabel Description Library Manager, page 471.

Piping Assembly Library Manager — Used to create, revise, and delete pipingassembly definitions in the Piping Assembly Library. The Piping Assembly Language(PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (groupof components) automatically in the model. See Piping Assembly Library, page 505and Piping Assembly Library Manager, page 525.

Table Checker — Used to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Edenmodules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project.See Table Checker Form, page 389.

Reference Database Revision Manager — Used to create a set of reports forcoordinating revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which arerequired in the model. See Reference Database Revision Manager, page 537.

Reference Database Management Data — Used to define the filenames for ReferenceDatabase Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You candefine both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. See Reference DatabaseManagement Data, page 48.

Default Project Control Data — Used to define the default location for the sourcefiles used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files, program files, and report files).See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

44

3. Referen

ce D

ata Man

ager

Data Security________________

3.1 Data Security

The Reference Data Manager provides data security features for the following reference datalibraries in the event of accidents such as, electrical power surges and network failures. Thesefeatures also protect the libraries in the event that a library is being shared by multipleprojects, and different users in different projects mistakenly attempt to revise one of thelibraries simultaneously.

Graphic Commodity LibraryPhysical Data LibraryPiping Job Specification Table LibraryShort Material Description LibraryLong Material Description LibrarySpecialty Material Description LibraryStandard Note LibraryLabel Description LibraryPiping Assembly Library

When you enter the Reference Data Manager to create, revise, or delete data in any of thethese libraries, the system creates a temporary file for that library. This temporary file isnamed <library_specification>.c and will be created in the same directory location as theobject libary. Once you successfully exit the applicable library manager, the system deletesthe temporary file. If a PDS user is unable to exit the Reference Data Manager for anyreason (such as a power failure), the system displays a dialog box when the next user entersthe Reference Data Manager to revise that library. You must decide which of the followingsituations applies and respond accordingly.

If you are certain that the warning results from a previous unusual exit, make one of thefollowing decisions.

— If a corrupted library (including the corresponding source library and revisionlibrary) has been restored from a backup, select the accept option.

— If you are concerned with the integrity of the library for any reason, select the exit

option. Then restore the library, the corresponding source library, and thecorresponding revision library to their previous state (before the last revisions).

If you are aware that a different user may be revising that library within a differentproject, select the exit option.

This feature requires that PDS users have write access to the directory in whichthe libraries reside. The Reference Data Manager will display an errormessage, if the user does not have privileges for write access to the applicabledirectory and the user will not be able to revise that library.

When a PDS user exits a data creation or revision session, the Reference Data Managerverifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within the library. The system displays anerror if the Reference Data Manager determines that an error exists in the binary tree structure.In this event, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library.

45


3.2 Reference Data Archival

PDS includes a Project Archival Manager to provide archival and retrieval facilities forprojects, including reference data. For more information about the Project ArchivalManager, see Project Archival Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide. Forspecific information about archiving reference data, see Reference Data in the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide.

46

4. Referen

ce D

ata Lo

cation

Reference Data Location________________

4. Reference Data Location

This section describes the options used to define the location of the Reference Data files onthe network.

Reference Database Management Data — Defines the location for ReferenceDatabase Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You candefine both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. See page 48.

Default Project Control Data — Defines the default location for the source files usedto load the RDB files (such as neutral files, language files, and report files). See page53.

47


4.1 Reference Database ManagementData

This option activates the Reference Database Management Data form used to define thefilenames for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spectables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Reference Database Management Data from the Reference Data Managerform.

2. Select RDB File Type

Select the RDB file from the list of files. You can use the scroll arrows to scrollthrough the listed files.

The system identifies the file for the selected field in the fields at the bottom of the form.There are no default settings for these files; you must define the applicable filelocations before you can continue.

Material/Specification Reference Database — This field identifies the MaterialReference Database for the project. Refer to the Project Setup Manager in theProject Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this database.

Piping Job Specification Table Library — This field identifies the location ofthe Piping Job Spec Table library.

48

4. Referen

ce D

ata Lo

cation

Reference Database Management Data________________ Short Material Description Library— This field identifies the library which contains the short bill-of-materialdescription for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda fortaps.

Long Material Description Library— This field identifies the library which contains the long BOM description forall piping commodity items. The long BOM description is only used forrequisitions.

Specialty Material Description Library — This field identifies the librarywhich contains the BOM description for engineered items, in-line instruments,and pipe supports. This library tends to be customer-specific.

Standard Note Library — This field identifies the location of the standardnote library.

Label Description Library — This field identifies the location for the labeldescription library.

Piping Assembly Library — This field identifies the location for the PipingAssembly library. This library contains the symbol definitions for assemblies.

Graphic Commodity Library — This field identifies the library whichcontains the Eden modules used to place components in the model.

Physical Data Library — These fields identify the library files which containthe physical data tables for a range of geometric industry standards.

Commodity Synonym Library — This field identifies the user-defined librarywhich contains the map for translating the default piping commodity names usedin the P&ID Task to names specified by the user in the Piping Job Specification.

Orthographic Drawing Borders — This field identifies the drawing border filesto be used when creating drawings. A set of border files are delivered to thedirectory win32app\ingr\pddraw\border. You must specify which style ofborders is to be used.

3. Key in any changes to the selected RDB files. Refer to Delivered Reference Data, page31, for a listing of the delivered reference data files.

If you specify an unapproved file, the system will use the unapproved file for allReference Data Manager operations (such as revising entries in a library.)

Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide forinformation on setting the choice of data for a model file or drawing.

4. You can select Approved –> Not Approved to copy the approved definition of theselected RDB file to the Not Approved fields. Select confirm to update the information.

49

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Refer to the individual managers for information on posting the unapprovedinformation to the approved files.

5. You can select Default All Library Locations to define a default location for allapproved and all unapproved library files.

6. You can select Copy All Standard Libraries to copy the delivered library files to aspecified location.

7. Select Accept following each change to the reference data to accept the specified filelocation.

— THEN —

Select Cancel to exit the form.

Options

Default All Library Locations

This option assigns a default network address, pathname, and file specification to the variousReference Database libraries for both the approved and unapproved libraries. You canoverride any of these default specifications by selecting the appropriate library and keying inthe file information.

Specify Default Nodename

Key in a default network address and pathname to be used for all approved ReferenceDatabase libraries and a network address and pathname to be used for all unapprovedlibraries.

The file specifications for all libraries are determined automatically on the basis of theindustry practice and the following naming convention.

When copying the Not Approved library to the Approved library, the copy will notoccur if the approved library is the most recent or has the same date as theunapproved library.

50

4. Referen

ce D

ata Lo

cation

Reference Database Management Data________________ Library Filename

Graphic Commodity Library pipe_gcom.lLabel Description Library labels.lStandard Note Library std_note.lPiping Assembly Library assembly.lPiping Spec Table Library pjs_tbl.lShort Material Description Library short_bom.lLong Material Description Library long_bom.lSpecialty Description Library spclty_bom.lPhysical Data Library <standard>_pcdim.l

The text to be used for the <standard> is determined in the following manner.

Practice Prefix

U.S. Practice usEuropean - DIN dinEuropean - British Standard bsEuropean - Practice A euaEuropean - Practice B eubInternational - JIS jisInternational - Australian ausInternational - Practice A inaInternational - Practice B inbCompany Practice cmp

Copy All Standard Libraries

This option copies the delivered Reference Database libraries from the applicable productdirectories to the disk locations specified in the Reference Database Management data of theProject Control database.

This option provides a new user with a simple method to create a Reference Database usingRDB products delivered by Intergraph. This is not intended for use in a productionenvironment.

The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the PD Shell product.

Graphic Commodity LibraryLabel Description Library

Standard Note LibraryPiping Assembly Library

The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the applicable ReferenceDatabase product (such as, rdusrdb or rddinrdb).

Physical Data LibraryPiping Spec Table LibraryShort Material Description Library

Long Material Description LibrarySpecialty Description Library

51

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The system also copies the applicable Table Revision Management Libraries for the PipingSpec Table Library and Physical Data Libraries.

The text to be used for the standard is determined in the following manner.

Practice Prefix

U.S. Practice usEuropean - DIN dinEuropean - British Standard bsInternational - JIS jisInternational - Australian aus

The list of available products is determined from the list of exported variables as specified inthe pds.cmd shell script. Therefore, this command presently searches for the followingexported variables:

Product Practice

RD_USRDB U.S. PracticeRD_DINRDB DINRD_BSRDB British StandardsRD_JISRDB JISRD_AUSRDB Australian

The file specification recorded in the Project Control Database, and not that of the library inthe delivered product, will be used for the destination library.

If the RDB product resides on a remote server (or workstation), you mustmanually mount the directory that includes the RDB product and change theexported variable in the pds.cmd shell script accordingly.

The system will display an error message for any of the following conditions.

Any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project are in use (locked). Noneof the libraries are copied.

The network address for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the projectare undefined. None of the libraries are copied.

The network address and path name for any of the active Reference Database librariesfor the project cannot be mounted. None of the subsequent libraries are copied.

52

4. Referen

ce D

ata Lo

cation

Default Project Control Data________________

4.2 Default Project Control Data

This option defines the default location for common reference files used by the project (suchas neutral files, report files, and library files). You can also change these file locations duringthe operation of the applicable managers.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Default Project Control Data from the Reference Data Manager form todefine the default location for the RDB source files.

2. Select the field to be defined and key in the location of the source files and theassociated node name.

Piping Eden Path / Node — The default location for the Eden source files.

Dimension/Spec Table Path / Node — The default location of the DimensionTable and Spec Table source files.

Piping Spec Path / Node — The default location for the neutral files to be usedto load the Specification/Material Reference Database and Material DescriptionLibraries.

Assembly Path / Node — The default location for the Piping AssemblyLanguage source files.

Standard Note Library Path / Node — The default location for the StandardNote (code list) source files.

53

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Equipment Eden Path / Node — The default location for the Equipment Edensource files.

TDF Table Path / Node — The default location for the Equipment tabledefinition files.

Model Builder Path / Node — The default location for the model builderlanguage source files.

3. Accept any changes to the Project Control Data.

54

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Job Specification________________

5. Piping Job Specification

The Piping Job Specification (PJS) defines the characteristics, properties, design standards,and company practices associated with piping commodity items, piping engineered items, andinstruments. When you select an item for placement in the model, the system uses the activeparameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to search the Piping JobSpecification for the selected item. Then the system reads the PJS for the parameters requiredto define the item.

55


5.1 Material Reference DatabaseStructure

The Material Reference Database contains a set of tables which define the Piping JobSpecification data. The numbers in parentheses indicate the database table number.

Piping Materials Class Data (201) - see page 62.

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) - see page 67.

Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) - see page 77.

Instrument Component Specification Data (204) - see page 81.

Tap Properties Data (205) - see page 85.

Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) - see page 88.

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) - see page 91.

Reference Database Revision Management Data (213)

Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) - see page 95.

Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) - see page 98.

Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) - see page 101.

The Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class Data.

The Reference Database Revision Management Data table is totally system-defined. It stores the revision dates for the other database tables in theMaterial Reference Database. The revision dates are updated automaticallywhen you use the Piping Job Spec Manager to load, revise, or delete data inthese database tables.

Attribute Types

The following conventions are used to designate the field type for database attributes.

character(n) alphanumeric field n characters in length

integer long (double word) integer

short short integer

56

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Material Reference Database Structure________________ double real (floating point) value

standard note nnnn Standard Note Type for code-listed attribute

Code-Listed Attributes

A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value must be defined using one of the selectionsfrom a particular code list in the Standard Note Library. In the following databasedescriptions attributes which are code-listed are identified by a standard note number at theend of the line following the field type description. For example, the line

6. fluid_code , character(6) , SN 125

indicates that fluid_code is defined in terms of code list numbers belonging to StandardNote 125, Fluid Code/Connector Type. A possible entry for this attribute would be 197 forchlorine gas (GCL). Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the code list sets associated withPDS 3D.

Connect Point Data

The Piping Commodity, Piping Specialty, and Instrument database tables classify connectpoint dependent data about a component in terms of green and red connect points. Thefollowing conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data:

If data is only shown under the green connect point, it applies to all ends of thecomponent.

If a component has ends with different nominal diameters (regardless of other endproperties) the larger nominal diameter is designated as the green connect point.

If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties whichdiffer, the following rules apply:

— If the ends have different termination types (regardless of the values forschedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest codelistnumber are designated as the green connect point.

— If the termination types are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thicknessdiffer, the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point.

57


NPD Units

Nominal piping diameter is defined as a special coded number (NPD units) with the followingformula.

For metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters)

For English units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000.

This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments formetric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for English units.

58

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Neutral File Input________________

5.2 Neutral File Input

A neutral file is an ASCII text file used to load information into the the Material ReferenceDatabase. The neutral file must conform to the following rules:

There must be an entry for each user-defined parameter in the Material ReferenceDatabase. For certain attributes you can use a dash (-) to indicate that a default value beused.

The SEQUENCE statement can be used to define the order of entries in the neutral file.

The system_unique_no attribute is never user-defined. Therefore, itshould not be included in the neutral file data or in the list of attributesdefined by the SEQUENCE statement.

Each entry (attribute) can begin at any point along the input. You can set the spacingbetween each entry by specifying SINGLE_SPACING or DOUBLE_SPACING as thefirst item in the file. If you do not define the spacing, double spacing is used.

For single line comments, place an exclamation point (!) at the beginning of the line.All comments are disregarded by the system.

You can place blank lines anywhere in the file for readability. These lines do not effectthe information being copied.

You can use any of the three PDS conventions to enter fractional Nominal PipingDiameters. The entries

2-1/2 2.5 2 1/2

are all equivalent ways of entering the same figure.

If you use the SINGLE_SPACING option 2 1/2 can be used only ifenclosed by single quotes (’2 1/2’)

You can use both metric and English units. The default system of units must bedeclared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. Entries areautomatically interpreted as English. To declare the system of units add the appropriateunits marker to the entry:

mm for metric" for English

The Tap Properties Table must include the Table Name along with other data by usingthe TABLE statement.

59


SEQUENCE Statement

The SEQUENCE statement is an optional statement which can be used to define the order ofthe parameters in the neutral file. If the SEQUENCE statement is used it must be placedbefore any entries. The SEQUENCE statement can only be used once per file.

If the SEQUENCE statement is omitted, it is assumed that the parametersappear in the order defined by PDS.

Format

SEQUENCE= P1 P2 P3 P4 ... Pn

where:

SEQUENCE= keyword which can be entered in either upper or lower case letters.

P1,P2,...Pn parameters 1 through n. The values of P1...Pn are the parameter numbersassigned by PDS, and their position tells the system the order in which toenter them.

At least two spaces must separate the keyword and each parameter.

Examples

SEQUENCE= 5 3 4 1 2

The first parameter read corresponds to PDS parameter #5, the second to PDS parameter #3,the third to PDS parameter #4, the fourth to PDS parameter #1, and the fifth to PDS parameter#2.

You can use the convention *Pn to indicate an attribute that is not defined in the neutral file.All of the *Pn attributes should be placed at the end of the SEQUENCE statement followingthe list of included attributes. For example,

SEQUENCE= 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *4 *5*21 *22

ORDER Statement

Neutral files translated from VAX PDS data may contain an ORDER statement rather than aSEQUENCE statement. This statement performs the same function as the SEQUENCEstatement except that it lists the order of the attributes as they were defined in the VAX PipingJob Specification Database.

60

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Neutral File Input________________

TABLE Statement

The TABLE statement defines a table name to be associated with a particular set of data. Theactive table name remains unchanged until another TABLE statement is encountered. TheTABLE statement can be used more than once in a neutral file.

Format

TABLE= table_name

where

TABLE= keyword which can be entered in upper or lower case letters.table_name the name of the table associated with the following data.

There must be at least one/two spaces (depending on the default spacing selected) between thekeyword and the table_name.

For example, the Tap Properties Table below defines two tables (C001, and C002) by usingthe Table keyword to segregate the data for each table being defined.

Double_SpacingOrder= 2 3 5 4 6 7

! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=2 Date=12-May-1995

Table= C001! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code

0.375 691 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX> 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064

0.5 691 - 591 NREQD E$50591XXX::30 691 - 591 NREQD E030591XXX32 691 - 591 NREQD E032591XXX34 691 - 591 NREQD E034591XXX36 691 - 591 NREQD E036591XXX42 691 - 591 NREQD E042591XXX48 691 - 591 NREQD E048591XXX

Table= C002! Description= SWE CL6000 default taps! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code

0.375 691 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX> 0.5 1 CL6000 421 NREQD E$50421072

0.5 691 - 591 NREQD E$50591XXX::34 691 - 591 NREQD E034591XXX36 691 - 591 NREQD E036591XXX42 691 - 591 NREQD E042591XXX48 691 - 591 NREQD E048591XXX

61


5.2.1 Piping Materials Class Data (201)

The piping materials class data is independent of nominal piping diameter and commodityitem. A piping materials class defines a classification of components based on design dataand service limits. Much of the design data is stored in tables so that common informationcan be accessed by more than one piping materials class.

The Piping Materials Class Data table contains 23 attributes.

1. system_unique_no , integer

2. piping_mater_class , character(16)

This attribute identifies the service number, spec class, spec name, or spec number.

3. revision_no , character(2)

This attribute identifies the revision number for the data in the piping materials class. Itis user-defined and is not updated automatically when the piping commodity data forthat piping materials class is revised.

The revision number of the unapproved Material Reference Database isincremented only, when you specify a new revision number in the neutral file.

The revision number of the approved Material Reference Database is updated tothat of the unapproved Material Reference Database, when the unapproved data isposted to the approved Material Reference Database.

4. version_no , character(2)

This attribute represents the version number, as determined by the system, for the datain this piping materials class (including the Commodity Item data). The versionnumber starts with A and is incremented (B,C,D,...) when you revise the pipingmaterials class. This attribute is under the complete control of the system.

The Piping Job Spec Manager increments this attribute when the piping commoditydata for that piping materials class is revised or reloaded. When that piping materialsclass is posted from the unapproved to the approved Material Reference Database, theversion number for that piping materials class is reset to A in the unapproved MaterialReference Database.

5. revision_date , character(10)

This user-defined attribute can be used to define a date for the latest revision to the datain a piping materials class.

6. fluid_code , character(6) , SN 125

This attribute can be used to define the type of fluid for which the piping materials classis intended.

62

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Materials Class Data (201)________________ You can specify

a single fluid code value (such as 521 for process) from code list set 125.

the name of a fluid code table to define a set of fluid code values. Refer to FluidCode Table, page 214, for more information.

To use the specified fluid code(s), you must also set the Fluid Code Control toggle toYes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. Refer to theProject Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on thisform.

7. mater_of_construct , character(6)

This attribute defines the materials of construction class for the piping materials class.This code has a detailed definition outside the scope of PDS that represents the decisionof the Project Metallurgist regarding the piping system. It is required for reporting andmaking matches and comparisons with values for this parameter from the Piping DesignDatabase. This parameter includes the material code.

8. corrosion_allow , double

This attribute defines the corrosion/erosion allowance that applies to the pipingmaterials class. It is required for reporting and to calculate the wall thickness of pipingcomponents whose thickness is not specifically included in the piping materials class.

9. mat_description , short , SN 148

This code-listed attribute is a generic description of the materials used for this pipingmaterials class (such as carbon steel). This attribute is only used for reporting.

10. service_lim_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the table used to determine maximum pressure as a function oftemperature. This table includes the pressure and temperature sets that form theboundary for which the commodity items, engineered items, and instruments includedin this piping materials class are suitable (unless you define a lower maximumtemperature limit for a specific commodity item). You must insure that all commodityitems within the piping materials class are acceptable within the boundary of this table.

Refer to Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table, page 191, for moreinformation on this table.

11. diameter_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the nominal piping diameter table used to verify valid nominalpiping diameters in this piping materials class. Refer to Nominal Piping DiametersTable, page 194, for more inforamtion.

63


12. thickness_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the thickness data table used in piping wall thicknesscalculations for this piping materials class. Refer to Thickness Data Tables, page 197,for more information.

13. materials_table , character(6)

This parameter defines the materials data table used to determine the material propertiesrequired for piping wall thickness calculations in the piping materials class. Refer toMaterials Data Table, page 200, for more information.

14. thickness_equation , character(6)

This attribute identifies the default piping wall thickness equation to be used for thispiping materials class. If a schedule/thickness parameter for an item specifies thedefault calculation, then this equation is used to perform the piping wall thicknesscalculation. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations, page 203,for more information.

15. branch_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the branch insertion table used to determine the name of thebranch commodity item to be used for tee and lateral branches. The item name isdetermined as a function of branch geometry, run size, and branch size. The output ofthe branch table is the item name of a commodity item (AABBCC code).

Refer to Branch Insertion Tables, page 208, for more information.

16. tap_data_table , character(6)

This attribute defines the name of the tap properties table which includes thoseparameters required to define a tap on a specific commodity item. Refer to TapProperties Data (205), page 85, for more information.

17. vent_drain_macro , character(6)

This attribute is not currently used by the PDS software. Several vent and draindefinitions are contained in the delivered Piping Assembly Library.

18. gasket_separation , character(8)

This attribute is used to determine the actual gap that is assumed between seatingsurfaces of two mating bolted ends. It can coincide with, but is not necessarily thecompressed gasket thickness. You can override this value during a design session bychanging the type of gasket that applies to the joint. (You cannot override this value bydefining a specific gasket gap override value.)

This attribute exists as alphanumeric data.

64

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Materials Class Data (201)________________ A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a gasket separation value inthe physical subunits specified for the model.

All other values are assumed to identify a table name for gasket separation data asa function of nominal piping diameter in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library.Refer to Gasket Separation Table, page 212, for more information.

Refer to the description of gaskets in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guidefor more details.

19. standard_note_no_a , short , SN 499

20. standard_note_no_b , short , SN 499

These code-listed attributes provide the index numbers to CL499 for notes that apply tothis piping materials class. The input to the Standard Note Library is the note number.The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note.

In the delivered data, note numbers 1 through 199 are allocated for defining the PJS.

21. revision_mngt_date , integer

This system-defined attribute identifies the date of the latest revision for the data in thispiping materials class.

22. bend_deflect_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the Bend Deflection Table to be used for this piping materialsclass. This attribute is useful for defining specs for underground piping.

If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Bend DeflectionTable specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. Therefore,you need not define a Bend Deflection Table for each piping materials class in theMaterial Reference Database. Likewise, you need not revise any existing neutral filesto include this column.

Note that the Bend Deflection Table name in the Piping Materials Class data is limitedto 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. Themaximum length of the default Bend Deflection Table name, as specified with theProject Data Manager can be as many as 20 characters.

Refer to Bend Deflection Table (G04), page 219, for more information.

23. pipe_length_table , character(6)

This attribute identifies the Pipe Length Threshold Table to be used for this pipingmaterials class. This attribute is useful in defining specs for underground piping.

If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Pipe LengthThreshold Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager.Therefore, you need not define a Pipe Length Threshold Table for each piping materialsclass in the Material Reference Database.

65

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Note that the Pipe Length Threshold Table name in the piping materials class data islimited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. Themaximum length of the default Pipe Length Threshold Table name, as specified withthe Project Data Manager can be as many as 13 characters.

Refer to Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07), page 222, for more information.

Neutral File Format

The following is a sample neutral file for the Piping Material Class database table. Entries inthis table should be sorted alphanumerically by Piping Materials Class.

The Sequence= keyword in a piping materials class data neutral file does not require *21 forthe revision management date. Any previously created piping materials class data neutralfiles will not require any revision as a result of this change.

Sample Files

A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\classes.pmc. A set of sample files depicting variousoptions are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory.

bend_tbl.pmcequiv_npd.pmcfluid_code.pmcfpipe.pmc

gasket.pmcgskt_tbl.pmcmetric_npd.pmc

pharm.pmcpiplen_tbl.pmcthickness.pmc

66

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)________________

5.2.2 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)

The Piping Commodity Specification Data defines all the components, pipes, bolts, andgaskets associated with a particular Piping Materials Class. It defines the standardcomponents found in a manufacturers catalog (commonly referred to as off-the-shelfcomponents). Because the Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the PipingMaterials Class, a separate set of commodity items must be defined for each Piping MaterialsClass.

Information for connect point data is defined in terms of two types of connect points known asgreen and red connect points. Refer to Connect Point Data, page 270, for more informationon green and red connect points.

The Piping Commodity Specification Data table contains 28 attributes:


2. piping_mater_class , character(16) , index 1

This attribute identifies the Piping Materials Class for the piping commodity.

3. commodity_name , character(6)

This attribute identifies the commodity item name. This can be

a PDS commodity item name. Refer to the PDS Piping Component DataReference Guide for more information on item names.

a Piping Job Specification access name. If you do not use the AABBCC code,you must define a Commodity Synonym Library for proper communication withthe P&ID Task. The PDS commodity item names are also used with thedelivered Place Component forms. If you use a different code, you should createa forms customization file as defined in the Piping Designer.

4. option_code , short , SN 400

This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria.This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary commodityitem, a secondary commodity item, or another special option from the Piping JobSpecification.

This parameter is used as a commodity override in Piping Design. You can select theunique options (as defined in CL400) from a form. If no option is specified atplacement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary commodity item). Option 2 isreserved as the secondary commodity item.

Option codes 4001 to 4010 are used to specify manual input of bend data for pipebends.

67

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Option codes 4500 to 4999 are reserved for company practice (user-defined).

Option codes 5000 to 5999 are used to refer to implied components.

5. maximum_temp , double

This attribute is used if the commodity item is temperature dependent. It represents themaximum temperature for which this commodity item is acceptable. When acommodity item is retrieved from the Piping Job Specification, the system verifies thatthe normal operating temperature, the alternate operating temperature, the normaldesign temperature, and the alternate design temperature are less than this maximumallowable temperature. If this maximum is exceeded by any of these temperatures, thesystem automatically searches for another occurrence of the same commodity item.

For gaskets, to help determine the gap thickness at bolted joints, the maximumtemperature value is used as an input to the Gasket Gap Table. Proper entry oftemperature values in the PJS assists the definition of gap thicknesses whengaskets with different gap thicknesses are used in the same piping materials class.

If you specify the default value (-9999), no test is performed. Any reports createdfrom the Piping Job Specification depict this default value as alphanumericblanks.

The order in which entries of the same piping commodities with different maximumtemperature values are made in the PJS (PDtable_202) is not considered by the system;however, these entries must have the same option code in order to be considered by thecommodity selection in the Place Component command. When you do define the pipingcommodity, a maximum temperature value must be defined for each entry or an errormessage is displayed. To define the highest maximum temperature for the same pipingcommodity, set the maximum temperature equal to or greater than the maximumtemperature of the spec limits table for the applicable piping materials class instead ofusing an undefined value (’-’).

6. gcp_from_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)

7. gcp_to_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the green connect point (first size) in NPD units. The to value mustequal or exceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the rangein Tables 211 and 212. The applicable NPD value specified at placement is used tosearch for the suitable component in the Piping Job Specification.

The default system of units (" for inches, or mm for millimeters) must be declared oncein the beginning and each time the default system is changed. If no units are given, thevalue is automatically interpreted as inches.

8. gcp_end_prep , short , SN 330

68

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)________________ This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation for the green connect point. Thesystem determines the termination type based on the range of values

2 - 199 bolted terminations300 - 399 male terminations400 - 599 female terminations

You can define end compatibilities by using the End Preparation Compatibility Table.(Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide.)

9. gcp_rating , character(8)

This attribute identifies the pressure rating for the green connect point. This parameterexists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numericcharacters as being the pressure rating value.

Ratings can be expressed in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#, or OTxxxx.However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL, #, or OTcharacters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating isdefined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance with thefollowing criteria:

CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating

xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI orAPI.

OTxxxx refers to the rating of a connect point that meets the applicable ANSI orAPI rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. Anexample is a valve supplied with flanged ends that meets the bolting pattern ofANSI CL150 pressure rating but has pressure carrying characteristics differentfrom those of that ANSI rating.

For bolts and gaskets, you must use a numeric pressure rating (do notuse the characters CL, #, or OT). If any character entries areencountered, the system will be unable to locate the proper information.

Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and notin terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for otherfemale ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If suchrating values consist of alphanumeric characters, the system strips all alpha charactersfrom the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicabletables.

If the rating in the PJS is expressed in terms of alphabetic characters only, the systemuses the characters in accessing the data tables. The names of the data tables include allthe alphabetic characters included in the PJS.

GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain anominal fluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.

69

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ OTHER can be used to identify a non standard rating value.

NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends wouldnormally require the attribute rating as part of the table name, but for which arating does not apply. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.

10. gcp_sch_thk , character(8)

This attribute identifies the schedule thickness value for the green connect point. Thisparameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to Wall Thickness and BranchReinforcement Equations, page 203, for more information on this attribute.) In order ofpreference, schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of:

A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If a schedule nameexceeds the provided field length (for example S-SDR13.5) it is defined in termsof its wall thickness.

A specific schedule such as S-40, S-40S and S-80.

NREQD is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply:

— The thickness value is not required in purchasing the component.

— Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values.

— Either stress analysis is not applicable or, if applicable, the component is to beconsidered infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations.

A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in thesame physical units as nominal piping diameter. To insure compatibility betweenthe PJS, data tables, and wall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed in theform:

.xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inchx if the thickness is an even inchx.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger

Trailing zeroes are not included. Decimal points are not included for numberswithout decimals.

An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specificcalculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. Refer to Wall Thicknessand Branch Reinforcement Equations, page 203 for a more detailed description ofthe naming conventions for these calculations.

MATCH indicates the need to match the thickness of a component to that of thepipe of the same diameter and of option 1.

11. gcp_table_suffix , short , SN 576

70

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)________________ This code-listed attribute is used to further reference the source of the genericdimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. This attribute isalso referred to as the table suffix.

For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the green connect point.

For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihenumber) for pipes and fittings.

12. rcp_from_nom_diam , short

13. rcp_to_nom_diam , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the red connect point (second size). The to value must equal orexceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables211 and 212.

For a full size component, you should set these parameters to - (hyphen). In cases suchas a concentric reducer or weldolet, this value must be less than the corresponding greenvalue.

14. rcp_end_prep , short , SN 330

See gcp_end_prep.

15. rcp_rating , character(8)

See gcp_rating.

16. rcp_sch_thk , character(8)

See gcp_sch_thk.

17. rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577

This attribute is used to further reference the dimensional data for a specific component.

For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the red connect point.

For DIN standards, it represents the built-in length selection flag (or reihenumber) for valves and wall thickness selection flag for pipes and fittings.

A parametric definition is used when connection graphics are required in the model andorthographic drawings.

18. commodity_code , character(16)

The commodity code is a user-assigned code that together with the NPD andschedule/thickness uniquely defines the component. It defines the customer’scommodity code (or part number). This attribute is the index into the Material DataTables and the Material Description Library. The commodity code can be defined inone of three ways:

71

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Commodity codes with neither an * or a + prefix, indicate a commodity item thathas no associated implied components.

Commodity codes prefixed by an *, indicate a commodity item (primarycomponent) which has one associated implied component (such as a lap jointflange and stub end). For more information on defining * implied items, refer tothe PD_Report User’s Guide.

It is not recommended that specification implied (*) items be generatedby size change components (i.e. reducers, reducing flanges, etc.) as theNPD assigned by the system for the implied component can be eitherthe larger or smaller (green or red) NPD of the implying item based onhow the system traces the line.

Commodity codes prefixed by a +, indicate a commodity item (primarycomponent) which has one or more associated implied components as defined inTable 212.

The default length for a commodity code is 16 characters, but you can modify thislength if needed. This value is specified in two files: design.ddl and reference.ddl. Tocustomize the character length, modify the design.ddl file as follows:

In table 34 (Piping Component Data), modify the value in column 8.

In table 50 (Piping/Tubing Data), modify the value in column 12.

Modify the reference.ddl file as follows:

In table 202 (Piping Commodity Specification Data), modify the value in column18.

In table 211 (Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data), modify thevalues in column 2 and column 7.

In table 212 (Piping Commodity Implies Material Data), modify the values incolumn 2 and column 7.

When you modify these values, set the character limit to be one morethan the number of characters you actually want in the commodity code.This is necessary for you to add a * or + prefix if needed. For example,to create a 20-character commodity code, set the specified values to 21.

You must make these modifications before the project is created.

For valves, the commodity code also defines the name of the dry weight table (requiredfor stress analysis). For large diameter valves (25"+) it is used to build the name of theoperator dimension table.

72

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)________________

19. model_code , character(6)

This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or specvalves. Each model code is classified by

- Item name- option- size ranges- end preparations- ratings

The model code includes the definition of the graphic representation of the componentin the piping model. Depending upon the circumstances:

One or more model codes can be assigned to to a single Item Name (for example,GAT, GATR, and GATF are all used for 6Q1C01).

The same model code can be assigned to different Item Names.

For gaskets, this attribute can be used to prioritize gasket entries in the Piping MaterialsClass. The priority is set with a numeric value (integer or decimal) greater than zero.Non-numeric values are ignored by MTO and not considered to be a priority selection.The smaller the value the higher the priority. A value of 999999 is interpreted as anundefined priority.

20. PDS_sort_code , character(6)

This field can be used to specify the length (in subunits) for Purchased length pipe, orto specify the gasket diameter for gaskets. The gasket diameter table is used if thepds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The system uses the NPD todetermine the gasket inside and outside diameters.

If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to "_GKT", the gasket outsideand inside diameters are generated using the tablegasket_commodity_code_GKT.TBL.

If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is not "_GKT", the gasket outsidediameter is equivalent to the NPD of the rated component and the gasket insidediameter is undefined.

21. modifier , double

This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, miters, and valves. It has various usesdepending on the type of commodity item as defined below.

For pipe bends, it defines the bend radius of the pipe in terms of the numericfactor by which the nominal diameter of the pipe is to be multiplied to obtain thebend radius.

For pipe, it defines the joint quality factor (E) times 100 to be used during branchreinforcement calculations in those cases where the wall thickness is notcalculated.

73

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ For orifice flanges and drip ring tees, it defines the number of taps to be provided.A value of 1 defines a single tap. A value of 2 defines 2 taps, 180 degrees apart.A value of negative 2 (-2) defines 2 taps, 90 degrees apart.

For nippolets and nipples, it defines the length of the component.

For reinforcing pads and welds, it defines whether data about the component is tobe derived from tables in the system (0) or from the user by prompting (1).

For gaskets, it defines the gasket thickness to be used in procuring the gasket.This is the actual gasket thickness for MTO reports - not the compressed gasketthickness (gasket separation), which is derived from the Piping Materials Classdata.

For bolts, it defines whether the bolt is a stud bolt (0 or positive), or machine bolt(negative). The absolute value of this modifier, which ranges from 0 to 5,determines the applicable bolt extension.

For valves, it represents the code list number from CL550 (operator/actuatortype) which defines the symbol description and the source of the physical data forthe valve operator. If this value is a negative number (such as -3) the operator isnot displayed when placing the component.

22. geometric_standard , short , SN 575

This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industrystandard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specificgeometry of the commodity item can be deduced. This parameter represents the vendoror industry standard, and the material if either affects the dimensions of the commodityitem.

Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to US pipingpractices. Numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply toEuropean piping practices. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific companypractices.

23. weight_code , short , SN 578

This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines thetable to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for thosecases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differfor a specific geometric industry standard.

24. fabrication_cat , short , SN 180

This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of acomponent. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component wasfabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated).

25. materials_grade , short , SN 145

74

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202)________________ This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, andjoint efficiency for the component. This data is used in wall thickness calculations. Itcan also be used to access physical data in the Physical Data Library.



These code-listed attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in standard notetype 499 that apply to this commodity item. The input to the Standard Note File is thenote number. The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note.

In the delivered data, note numbers 200 through 599 are allocated for piping commodityitems.

28. input_form_type , short , SN 990

This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data withthe Spec Writer command.

Neutral File Format

The following is a partial listing of the sample neutral file for the Piping CommoditySpecification Data. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically bycommodity_name.

The Sequence= keyword in a piping commodity data neutral file does not require the *2 forthe piping materials class name. Any previously created piping commodity data neutral fileswill not require any revision as a result of this change.

75


Sample Files

A set of neutral file for US practice are delivered in the files\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\*.pcd (one for each piping materials class specified in theclasses.pmc file).

A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory.

bend_tbl.pcdequiv_npd.pcdfluid_code.pcdfpipe.pcd

gasket.pcdgskt_tbl.pcdmetric_npd.pcdpharm.pcd

pharmf.pcdpharmk.pcdpiplen_tbl.pcdthickness.pcd

76

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)________________

5.2.3 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)

This database table contains data for a specific specialty item. It is used to define thosespecialty items which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. Thespecialty items are defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by Piping MaterialsClass.

The Piping Specialty Specification Data table contains 26 attributes.

You can also place specialty items interactively in the model by defining thenecessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS databaseare required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping DesignGraphics Reference Guide for more information on placing specialty items.


2. piping_comp_no , character(20)

This attribute uniquely identifies the specialty component number. It is sometimesreferred to as Item Number.


This attribute identifies the piping specialty name. This can be a Piping JobSpecification access name or a PDS commodity item name.


This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria.This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, asecondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You canselect the unique options (as defined in standard note 400) from a form. If no option isspecified at placement, the primary item is used. Option 2 is reserved as the secondaryitem. This parameter is used as a component override in the Piping Designer.



These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the green connect point.


77

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ These attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. This valueis an intelligent code list. The system determines the termination type based on therange of values



These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. Thisparameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequentialnumeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description ofpressure rating under Piping Commodity Data for more information on standardformats.)


These attributes identify the schedule or thickness value for the green/red connect point.This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to the description of schedule andthickness for more information on standard formats.)


These code-listed attributes identify the source of the generic dimensional data, such asflange data or piping outside diameter data.

For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point.


11. rcp_from_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)

12. rcp_to_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these values are setto zero.


See gcp_end_prep.


See gcp_rating.


78

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Specialty Specification Data (203)________________ See gcp_sch_thk.

16.

rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577

See gcp_table_suffix

17. physical_data_id , character(8)

This parameter can be used to identify the name of the physical dimension table in thePhysical Data Library to be used for this engineered item.


This attribute can be used to define an arbitray index to a geometric data table forpiping specialties. This is an optional input.


This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, and miters. It represents the bend radius interms of the nominal piping diameter.


This attribute provides a reference to the source of the data (which is usually an industrystandard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specificgeometry of the commodity item can be deduced.


This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines thetable to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for thosecases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differfor a specific geometric industry standard.




This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, andjoint efficiency for the component. It can be used to access physical data in the GraphicCommodity Library.


79



These attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in 499 that apply to thisspecialty item. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output isthe free-format text which forms the standard note.

In the delivered data, note numbers 600 through 799 are allocated for piping specialties.



Neutral File Format

Sample Files

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\specialty.data.

A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical specialty items is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharms.data.

80

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Instrument Component Specification Data (204)________________

5.2.4 Instrument Component Specification Data(204)

This table contains the data for a specific instrument item. It is used to define the instrumentswhich are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The instruments aredefined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by PMC. The following data exists inthe Instrument table.

The Instrument Component Specification Data table contains 26 attributes.

You can also place instruments interactively in the model by defining thenecessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS databaseare required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping DesignGraphics Reference Guide for more information on placing instruments.


2. instrument_comp_no , character(20)

This attribute identifies the tag number for the instrument item. You can modify thecharacter length for this attribute.


This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or specvalves. This can be a Piping Job Specification access name, or a PDS commodity itemname. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for moreinformation on item names.


This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria.This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, asecondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You canselect the unique options (defined in a standard note) from a form. If no option isspecified at placement, the default option 1 is used. Option 2 is reserved as thesecondary item. This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design.



These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound tohigh bound) for the green connect point.


81

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ These code-listed attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point.The system determines the termination type based on the range of values



These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. Thisparameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequentialnumeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description ofpressure rating for more information on standard formats.)


These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point.(Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standardformats.)


These code-listed attributes reference the source of the generic dimensional data, suchas flange data or piping outside diameter data.

For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point.


11. rcp_from_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)

12. rcp_to_nom_diam , short (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound tohigh bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these parameters areset to zero.


See gcp_end_prep.


See gcp_rating.


See gcp_sch_thk.

82

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Instrument Component Specification Data (204)________________

16. rcp_table_suffix , short , SN 577

See gcp_table_suffix.

17. physical_data_id , character(8)

This parameter can be used to reference the set of physical data from the Physical DataLibrary to be used for this instrument item.


This attribute can be used to define an arbitrary index in the geometric data table forinstruments. This is an optional input.


This parameter, if applicable, is used to determine the type of valve operator forinstrument valves. It specifies the identification of the symbol description and thesource of the physical data for a valve operator.


This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industrystandard such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN; or a company standard) from which the specificgeometry of the commodity item can be deduced.


This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the instrument. It determines thetable to be used in finding the dry weight of the instrument. It is required for thosecases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differfor a specific geometric industry standard.




This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, andjoint efficiency for the instrument. It can be used to access physical data in the PipingGraphic Commodity Library.



These code-listed attributes provide the index number to standard notes in NL499 thatapply to this instrument. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. Theoutput is the free- format text which forms the standard note.

83

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ In the delivered data, note numbers 800 through 999 are allocated for instruments.



Neutral File Format

Sample Files

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\instrment.data.

A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical instruments is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharmi.data.

84

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Tap Properties Data (205)________________

5.2.5 Tap Properties Data (205)

This table contains the tap properties data that is a function of the tap properties table nameand the nominal piping diameter. These tables define the piping taps which can be added toany of the components included in a piping materials class. The system uses the informationin these tables and the nominal diameter to provide values for rating, end preparation,schedule/thickness, and tap code. Tap tables do not allow a NPD range; there must be anindividual entry for each tap diameter.

The NPD entry in the tap table should be either imperial units or metric units depending onthe NPD requirements of the project. For imperial units, enter the specified NPD, such as0.375. The software will provide a default unit of inches when the value is loaded into theproject. For metric NPD units, enter the units after the value on the first NPD entry.

For example:

! Diam Opt Rating Prp SC/Th Tap Code10mm 1 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX20 691 - 591 NREQD E$37581XXX

The Tap Properties Data table contains 8 attributes.

The following kinds of taps may be defined in this table:

No-hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of a pipe support trunnion. Forexample, a no-hole tap may be placed on an elbow or tee to allow the subsequentplacement of a pipe trunnion for a pipe support; the diameter of this no-hole tap must bedefined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed.

Hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of piping, piping components, andinstrument components. For example, a hole tap may be placed on a cap to allow thesubsequent placement of a reducing component such as a flatolet; the diameter of thishole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part onwhich placed. A hole tap can also be placed on a blind flange to allow the placement ofplain piping; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominaldiameter as the plain piping.

Hole taps that permit the venting or draining of a piping and/or instrument component.For example, a hole tap can be placed on an elbow downstream of a relief valve; thediameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as thedesired drain hole.

Component taps that represent a tap connection, rather than a hole. For example, asocketwelded component tap may be placed on a gate valve to represent a socketweldedconnection furnished by the valve manufacturer. The diameter of this component tapmust be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired connection.


85


2. tap_table_name , character(6)

This attribute identifies the name of the Tap Properties Data Table. These tables use thefollowing naming conventions:

first character: C

next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the tablename unique.

The combination of the tap properties table name, the tap NPD, and the tap option, mustbe unique.

3. nominal_piping_dia , short

This attribute defines the value for the nominal tap diameter.


This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria.This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, asecondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. If nooption is specified at placement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary item). Thisparameter is used as a component override in Piping Design.

5. end_preparation , short , SN 330

This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation. The system recognizes acertain range of values as being flanged termination types, another range as being buttwelded termination types, etc.

6. rating , character(8)

This attribute exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set ofsequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to thedescription of pressure rating for Piping Commodity Data for more information onstandard formats.)

7. sched_thick , character(8)

This attribute identifies the generic or specific schedule, a thickness value, or acalculation. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for Piping CommodityData for more information on standard formats.)

8. tap_material_code , character(10)

This optional attribute can be used to access the Material Description Library for thetap’s material description addendum. It must be a unique reference to the MaterialDescription Library, including material descriptions for commodity items. In reportingor isometric extraction, this text can be appended to either the short or long descriptionsof the component to which the tap applies.

86

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Tap Properties Data (205)________________ This attribute is also referred to as the Tap Code. Refer to the listing of the tapdescriptions in the Short Material Description Library, page 367, for more informationon the tap commodity code.

Neutral File Format

Double_Spacing

Sequence= 3 4 6 5 7 8

! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=2 Date=12-May-1988

Table= C001

! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps

! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code

0.375 691 - 591 NREQD E$37591XXX

> 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064

0.5 691 - 591 NREQD E$50591XXX

> 0.75 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$75421064

0.75 691 - 591 NREQD E$75591XXX

> 1 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E001421064

1 691 - 591 NREQD E001591XXX

> 1.25 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$2421064

1.25 691 - 591 NREQD E1$2591XXX

> 1.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$5421064

1.5 691 - 591 NREQD E1$5591XXX

> 2 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E002421064

2 691 - 591 NREQD E002591XXX

2.5 691 - 591 NREQD E2$5591XXX

> 3 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E003421064

3 691 - 591 NREQD E003591XXX

3.5 691 - 591 NREQD E3$5591XXX

> 4 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E004421064

4 691 - 591 NREQD E004591XXX

5 691 - 591 NREQD E005591XXX

6 691 - 591 NREQD E006591XXX

8 691 - 591 NREQD E008591XXX

10 691 - 591 NREQD E010591XXX

12 691 - 591 NREQD E012591XXX

14 691 - 591 NREQD E014591XXX

16 691 - 591 NREQD E016591XXX

18 691 - 591 NREQD E018591XXX

20 691 - 591 NREQD E020591XXX

24 691 - 591 NREQD E024591XXX

26 691 - 591 NREQD E026591XXX

28 691 - 591 NREQD E028591XXX

30 691 - 591 NREQD E030591XXX

32 691 - 591 NREQD E032591XXX

34 691 - 591 NREQD E034591XXX

36 691 - 591 NREQD E036591XXX

42 691 - 591 NREQD E042591XXX

48 691 - 591 NREQD E048591XXX

Sample Files

A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\taps.data.

A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical tap properties is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_tap.data.

87


5.2.6 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent MaterialData (211)

The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that isdependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness.

This table is used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports andrequisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometric drawingextraction.

There are multiple occurrences for a specific commodity code and a specific pair of green andred nominal piping diameters in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data tablebecause schedule/thickness is not included in the commodity code.

The Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table contains 10 attributes.


2. sys_commodity_code , character(16)

This parameter identifies the customer’s commodity code (or part number). You canmodify the character length for this attribute.

3. gcp_nom_diam , short

4. rcp_nom_diam , short

These coded attributes identify the nominal piping diameter for the green/red connectpoint in NPD Units.



These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point.This parameter exist as alphanumeric data.

A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If the schedule nameexceeds the provided field length it is defined in terms of its wall thickness.

A specific schedule such as S-40, S-60 and S-80.

NREQD is used if the thickness value is not required in purchasing thecomponent, empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thicknessvalues, stress analysis is not applicable.

A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in thesame physical units as nominal piping diameter.

88

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)________________ An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specificcalculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness.

7. commodity_code , character(16) , index 1

This attribute identifies the customer’s commodity code or vendor’s part number. It isnot required for the customer’s commodity code, if the customer’s commodity code isnot dependent upon nominal piping diameter or thickness.

8. weld_weight , double

This parameter represents the total weld required at all welded ends of the commodityitem.

9. unit_price , double

This attribute identifies the unit price (materials cost) for the commodity item.

10. manhours , double

This attribute identifies the unit manhours associated with the commodity item.

Neutral File Format

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pcd_size.data.

Data Retrieval

The data retrieval from the Size-Dependent Data table involves data for a commodity itemthat is dependent upon nominal piping diameter and schedule/thickness. This form of dataretrieval is used during the MTO report creation process.

89


inputs (search criteria)

pointer to the commodity item dependent dataNPD green - first sizeNPD red - second sizeschedule/thickness - green connect pointschedule/thickness - red connect point

outputs

customer’s commodity code or vendor’s part numberweld dataprice data (materials cost) - unit pricelabor data - unit manhours

90

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)________________

5.2.7 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)

The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodityitem that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and nominal pipingdiameter range.

This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and materialcontrol. It is reserved for spec implied material, such as caps or stubs, for a specificcommodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a commodity item(for example, cap screws).

The Piping Commodity Implies Material Data table contains 10 attributes.

The entries in this tables should not be confused with mating implied items(such as welds, bolts, nuts, or gaskets) which are generated automatically bythe system. Refer to the Report Manager (PD_Report) User’s Guide for moreinformation on implied items.

A unique commodity code must be defined for each commodity definition. For example, if acommodity code is defined for gate valves from 2" to 14", but you want a different descriptionfor an 11" gate valve, you must assign a new commodity code to the 11" valve.


2. sys_commodity_code , character(16)

This parameter identifies the customer’s commodity code (or part number), if it is notdependent upon nominal piping diameter. You can modify the character length for thisattribute.

3. gcp_from_nom_diam , short

4. gcp_to_nom_diam , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the greenconnect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range inthe Piping Job Specification.

NPD is defined as a special coded number with the following formula.

for Metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters)

for English Units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus5000. coded number = 32*diameter + 5000 (in)

This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mmincrements for metric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" incrementsfor the English System of Units.

91


5. rcp_from_nom_diam , short

6. rcp_to_nom_diam , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the redconnect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range inthe Piping Job Specification. For a full size component, these parameters should be setto ’-’.

7. commodity_code , character(16) , index 1

This attribute identifies the Piping Commodity code of the implied material. It is usedto generate an MTO line item as a result of a piping commodity item in the PipingDesign model. The implied material is generated by accessing the Piping CommodityLibrary - not by accessing the Piping Design database.

8. quantity , double

This attribute identifies the quantity of the implied material.

9. fabrication_cat , short


10. standard_note_no , short

This code-listed attribute provides index numbers to standard notes in CL499 that applyto this implied material.

92

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)________________

Neutral File Format

Sample Files

A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\implied.data.

A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical gasket data is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_212.data.

Data Retrieval

Data retrieval from the Implied Material Data table involves implied material data for acommodity item that is dependent on nominal piping diameter range. This form of dataretrieval is used during the MTO Report Creation process and Material Control.

93


inputs (search criteria)

pointer to the commodity item dependent data

outputs

Commodity code of the implied materialQuantity of the implied materialFabrication category of the implied materialStandard note for the implied material

94

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)________________

5.2.8 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)

The Component Insulation Exclusion Data is used to completely or partially exclude theinsulation of components on insulated lines with respect to interference checking.

For each piping component, piping specialty, or instrument component (excluding pipes) onan insulated line, the Piping Envelope Builder will search the Component InsulationExclusion Data Table on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulationshould be completely excluded from that component’s interference envelope.

green nominal piping diameter of the component (range search)

red nominal piping diameter of the component (range search)

heat tracing requirements (range search)

insulation purpose (range search)

normal operating temperature (range search)

For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component’scommodity name in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data.

If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, theapplicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component’s interferenceenvelope.

If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, thePiping Envelope Builder searches for the component’s model code using the same data.If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of model code, the applicableinsulation thickness will not be added to the component’s interference envelope.

Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the component’s interferenceenvelope.

For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches forthe component’s model code in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using thepreceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, theapplicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component’s interference envelope.Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the component’s interference envelope.

The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operatingtemperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment that is associated with the firstconnect point of the applicable component.

The Component Insulation Exclusion Data table contains 13 attributes.


95



This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined inthe Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3).

If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code.


For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the PipingCommodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19).

For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the PipingSpecialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3).

For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the InstrumentComponent Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3).

4. gcp_npd_from , short

5. gcp_npd_to , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.

6. rcp_npd_from , short

7. rcp_npd_to , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.

For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes.

8. heat_tracing_from , short , SN 200

9. heat_tracing_to , short , SN 200

These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound tohigher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements.

A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements arenot to be considered as part of the discrimination process.

10. insul_purpose_from , short , SN 220

11. insul_purpose_to , short , SN 220

These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lowerbound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose.

96

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231)________________ A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to beconsidered as part of the discrimination process.

12. nor_oper_temp_from , double

13. nor_oper_temp_to , double

These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound)for the component or instrument.

A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to beconsidered as part of the discrimination process.

The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for themaximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note thatnormal design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate designtemperature are not considered.

Neutral File Format

! DEFINE COMPONENT INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA

Single_Spacing

Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

- I15AS 4 12 - - 3 3 5 5 150 200

6Q2C76 - 4 12 - - 3 3 5 5 150 200

- REDE 4 12 2 10 3 3 5 5 150 200

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\component.data.

97


5.2.9 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232)

The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data provides for partial exclusion of flange insulationthickness from the generation of interference envelopes. This is an optional data table; if nodata is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has inprevious releases of PDS.

The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data in this table for each bolted end ofeach piping component or instrument component on an insulated line that are determined tobe insulated. The system only searches for components that passed the component insulationexclusion test, as described in Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231), page 95.

The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data on the basis of the following data todetermine whether or not insulation should be excluded from the flange outside diameter ofthat bolted end of the component.

nominal piping diameter of the bolted end (range search)

heat tracing requirements (range search)

insulation purpose (range search)

normal operating temperature (range search)

If matching criteria is found in the exclusion table for these conditions, the applicableinsulation thickness will not be added to the flange outside diameter of the bolted end of thatcomponent’s interference envelope. Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included inthe component’s interference envelope.

The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operatingtemperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment associated with the firstconnect point of the applicable component.

The Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes that are to consider the partialexclusion of insulation from the flange outside diameter of a bolted end, must berevised to accommodate this option. If you do not change any or all of the PipingEden modules for the interference envelopes, this table will have no impact and theinterference envelopes will include complete insulation, when applicable.

For example, the required modification to the interference parametric for the weldneckflange (FWN) is as follows:

!FLANGE - Interference ModuleInterference_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’F1A’

Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR )

Thickness_1 = Thickness_1 + CP_Offset_1Thickness_2 = Thickness_2 + CP_Offset_2

!Original Line! Facing_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation * 2!Modified Line

Facing_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1 + Insulation_1 * 2Facing_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2 + Insulation * 2

98

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232)________________

Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_1, Facing_OD_1 )Call Draw_Cylinder ( Thickness_2, Facing_OD_2 )

RETURNEND

The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data table has 9 attributes.


2. bolted_npd_from , short

3. bolted_npd_to , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument in NPD units.

4. heat_tracing_from , short , SN 200

5. heat_tracing_to , short , SN 200

These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound tohigher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements.

A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements arenot to be considered as part of the discrimination process.

6. insul_purpose_from , short , SN 220

7. insul_purpose_to , short , SN 220

These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lowerbound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose.

A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to beconsidered as part of the discrimination process.

8. nor_oper_temp_from , double

9. nor_oper_temp_to , double

These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound)for the bolted end of the component or instrument.

A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to beconsidered as part of the discrimination process.

The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for themaximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note thatnormal design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate designtemperature are not considered.

99


Neutral File Format

! DEFINE FLANGE INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA

Single_Spacing

Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4 12 3 3 5 5 150 200

4 12 3 3 5 5 150 200

4 12 3 3 5 5 150 200

100

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233)________________

5.2.10 Piping Construction Tolerance ExclusionData (233)

The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data can be used to completely or partiallyexclude construction tolerance from the generation of interference envelopes. This featureonly applies to Piping vs. Piping construction tolerances.

This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table the Piping Envelope builderwill continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS.

For each piping or instrument component, excluding pipes, the Piping Envelope Buildersearches Table 233 on the basis of the following data to determine whether the Piping versusPiping construction tolerance should be excluded from that component’s interferenceenvelope.

green NPD of the component (range search)

red NPD of the component (range search)

For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component’scommodity name in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using thepreceding data.

If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, theapplicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component’s interferenceenvelope.

If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, thePiping Envelope Builder will search for the component’s model code using the samedata. If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of the model code, theapplicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component’s interferenceenvelope.

Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the component’s interferenceenvelope.

For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches forthe component’s model code in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Tableusing the preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for thoseconditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component’sinterference envelope. Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in thecomponent’s interference envelope.

101

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data table has 7 attributes.



This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined inthe Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3).

If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code.


For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the PipingCommodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19).

For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the PipingSpecialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3).

For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the InstrumentComponent Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3).

4. gcp_npd_from , short

5. gcp_npd_to , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.

6. rcp_npd_from , short

7. rcp_npd_to , short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound tohigher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units.

For full size components use a dash (-) for these attributes.

Neutral File Format

! PIPING CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE EXCLUSION DATA

Single_Spacing

Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7

- I15AS 4 12 - -

6Q2C76 - 4 12 - -

- REDE 4 12 2 10

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\constol.data.

102

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Spec Writer________________

5.3 Spec Writer

This command provides a forms interface for interactively creating, revising, and managingthe following specification data. This interface provides more simplicity and flexibility to abeginner or a casual user, than defining specs with their respective neutral files:

Piping Materials Class Data (PDtable_201)

Piping Commodity Specification Data (PDtable_202)

Piping Specialty Specification Data (PDtable_203)

Instrument Specification Data (PDtable_204)

Tap Properties Data (PDtable_205)

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (PDtable_212)

Features

The Spec Writer provides the following general features:

User-specified options for customizing the input of data (RDB_options).

A direct interface to the unapproved Specification Material Reference Database.

On-line validation for the existence of a material description, once the commodity code(or component number) has been defined.

103

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Optional on-line Table Checker validation using pre-defined Table Checker reports.

Automated selections from the Standard Note Library for code-listed data. Theapproved Standard Note Library must have been defined to include the correct data foruse in the Material Reference Database.

Selectable list of acceptable model codes for a specified commodity name.

Context-sensitive user interface. The form options will vary depending on the itembeing defined. For example, the creation (and revision) of specification data for boltsand gaskets, will display only those inputs relevant for bolts or gaskets.

Context-sensitive on-line help that is linked to the Component Data Reference Guideand the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide.

104

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

RDB Options File________________

5.3.1 RDB Options File

The RDB Options File allows you to customize the data input operations for the InteractiveSpec Writer. You should define an RDB options list, named RDB_options in the projectdirectory. A default RDB options list is included in the PD_Data sample/data/ directory.

! RDB_options

!

! general items = three main toggles

!

SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF

LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF

SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF

!

! PDtable_201 items

!

SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, L

NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, D

BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, B

TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = DATABASE

GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN

THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, T

MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, M

FLUID_CODE = VALUE

MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = LIST

!BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = LIST, BENDEF

!PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = LIST, PIPLEN

STANDARD_NOTE = LIST

PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION

!

! PDtable_202 items

!

MODEL_CODE = LIST

VALVE_OPERATOR = LIST

!

!

COMMODITY_NAME<===>MODEL_CODES

!

! Pipe/Tube

PIPING = PIPE, TUBE

!

! Valves (6Q1C)

!

6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR

6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB

6Q1C03 = GATCON

6Q1C04 = GATBL

!

! Generic 3-way

6Q1C05 = BAL3P, GLO3W, PLU3W, SLI3W, 3WRV1

!

6Q1C06 = BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP

6Q1C08 = BAL3P

6Q1C11 = GLOSP, GLO, GLOF, GLOR

6Q1C12 = GLOASP, GLOA

6Q1C13 = GLO3W

6Q1C14 = GLOY, GLOYF, GLOYR

6Q1C16 = PLUSP, PLU, PLUVP, PLUFB, PLUF, PLUR

6Q1C18 = PLU3W

6Q1C19 = PLU4W

6Q1C22 = NEE

6Q1C26 = BFYLP, BFYHP

6Q1C30 = DIA, DIASP, DIAPL, DIAGL

6Q1C32 = KNF

6Q1C33 = SLI

6Q1C34 = SLI3W

6Q1C37 = CKALSP, CKAL, CKST, BDA, HOSA

6Q1C38 = CKLSP, CKSSP, CKL, CKLF, CKLR, CKS, CKSF, CKSR, CKSY, CKLRY

6Q1C39 = CKWF, CKWFSP

6Q1C40 = CKALSP, CKAL

6Q1C41 = CKST

6Q1C42 = CKAST

6Q1C43 = CKYST

105

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 6Q1C50 = CKBP

6Q1C51 = CKAR

6Q1C53 = BDA

6Q1C54 = BDY

6Q1C56 = PIN

6Q1C57 = FLO

6Q1C58 = FOOT

6Q1C62 = TKDR

6Q1C69 = DEL

6Q1C72 = HOS

6Q1C73 = HOSA

!

! Generic Vent/Drain Valve

6Q1C76 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP

!

! Generic Instrument Root Valve

6Q1C80 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP

!

6Q1C81 = 3WRV1

6Q1C82 = 4WRV1

!

! On-line Fittings (6P2C) and In-line Fittings (6Q2C)

!

6Q2C01 = FWN, FLWN, FSO, FL, FPL, FSSSO, FSSL, FSSPL, FLSSO, FLSL, FFIL, FS, FSW, FTHD, FCP

6Q2C03 = FRWN, FRSO, FRPL, FRS, FRSW, FRTHD

6Q2C04 = FEWN

6Q2C06 = FOWNA, FOWNAW, FOWNB, FOWNBW, FOSOA, FOSOAW, FOSOB, FOSOBW, FOSWA, FOSWAW, FOSWB, FOSWBW, FOTHDA

6Q2C08 = FBLD

6Q2C10 = BLSPO

6Q2C11 = BLSPC

6Q2C12 = BDISC

6Q2C13 = BLPAD

6Q2C14 = T1SPA, T2SPA1

6Q2C15 = BLSPA, OPSPA

!

! Generic End

6Q2C16 = FBLD, HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21, PLUG, CAPBV, CAPOT

!

6Q2C17 = HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21

6Q2C19 = PLUG

6Q2C21 = CAPBV, CAPOT

!

! Generic Conentric Diameter Change

6Q2C23 = REDC, SWGC, CPLR, INSR1, INSR2

!

! Generic Eccentric Diameter Change

6Q2C24 = REDE, SWGE

!

6Q2C25 = CPL

6Q2C26 = CPLH

6Q2C27 = REDC

6Q2C28 = REDE

6Q2C32 = CPLR

6Q2C35 = SWGC

6Q2C36 = SWGE

6Q2C39 = UN

6Q2C40 = UNO

6Q2C41 = UND

6Q2C43 = HC

6Q2C44 = BUSH

6Q2C46 = INSR1, INSR2

6Q2C47 = PIPB, PIPB2

6Q2C49 = E5

6Q2C51 = E11

6Q2C53 = E22

!

! Generic <45 Degree Direction Change

6Q2C55 = E5, E11, E22, E45TLR, PIPB, PIPB2

!

! Generic 45 Degree Direction Change

6Q2C56 = E45LR, E45, PIPB, PIPB2, E45LT, E453D, E45T3D, E45U, E45ST, E45S, E45L, M451, M452

!

6Q2C57 = E45

6Q2C59 = E45LR, E45TLR

6Q2C60 = E45LT

6Q2C61 = E453D, E45T3D

6Q2C63 = E45U

6Q2C65 = E45ST

106

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

RDB Options File________________ 6Q2C66 = E45S

6Q2C68 = E45L

6Q2C73 = E60

!

! Generic 45-90 Degree Direction Change

6Q2C75 = E90TLR, PIPB, PIPB2

!

! Generic 90 Degree Direction Change

6Q2C76 = E90LR, E90, E90SR, E90LT, E90R, E903D, E903T3D, E90U, E90ST, E90RST, E90S, E90L, PIPB, PIPB2, E90LT, M901, M902, M903, M9

!

6Q2C77 = E90

6Q2C79 = E90SR

6Q2C80 = E90LR, E90TLR

6Q2C82 = E90LT

6Q2C84 = E90R

6Q2C86 = E903D, E903T3D

6Q2C88 = E90U

6Q2C90 = E90ST

6Q2C91 = E90RST

6Q2C93 = E90S

6Q2C94 = E90L

!

! On-line Fittings (6P3C) and In-line Fittings (6Q3C)

!

6Q3C01 = R180

6Q3C03 = R180SR

6Q3C05 = R180LR

6Q3C07 = R180CL

6Q3C08 = R180MD

6Q3C09 = R180OP

6Q3C14 = M1, M2, M3, M4

6Q3C16 = M451, M452

6Q3C18 = M901, M902, M903, M904

6Q3C22 = T, TBT

6Q3C24 = TRB, TRBT

6Q3C25 = TRRB

6Q3C27 = TUOR

6Q3C28 = TUOB

6Q3C31 = TST

6Q3C34 = TRI

6Q3C36 = TDRA, TDRAW, TDRB, TDRBW

6Q3C38 = TBA

6Q3C45 = Y

6Q3C47 = L

6Q3C49 = LRB

6Q3C50 = LRRB

6Q3C52 = S90YB

6Q3C53 = S90YRB

6Q3C54 = L90YB

6Q3C55 = L90YRB

6Q3C60 = X

6Q3C62 = XRB

6Q3C63 = XRRB

6Q3C64 = XBA

6Q3C70 = SAD

6Q3C72 = SWOL

6Q3C73 = WOL

6Q3C74 = SOL

6Q3C75 = TOL

6Q3C76 = NOL

6Q3C77 = EOLLR, EOLSR

6Q3C78 = LOL

6Q3C79 = FOLHC

6Q3C80 = RPAD, RPAD2

6Q3C82 = RWELD, RWELD2

6Q3C84 = BWELD, BWELD2, BWELD3

6Q3C88 = NIP

6Q3C89 = NIPIL

!6Q3C95 = GASKET

!6Q3C97 = STUD

!6Q3C98 = NUT

!

!

!

VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST

!

! Handwheels

!

107

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ OP_0 = None Required

OP_3 = Handwheel

OP_4 = Handwheel if GCP>RCP

OP_5 = Handwheel, inclined

OP_9 = Wrench, short

OP_11 = Wrench, long

OP_17 = Lever

OP_19 = T-handle, short

OP_21 = T-handle, long

OP_25 = Handwheel, special

OP_27 = Wrench, special

OP_29 = Gear, top mounted handwheel

OP_31 = Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel

OP_33 = Gear, side mounted handwheel

OP_35 = Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel

OP_39 = Lever, quick-action

OP_40 = Post indicator

!

! Actuators

!

OP_411 = Diaphragm, type 1



OP_431 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 1



OP_451 = Regulator type 1



OP_491 = Single acting cylinder type 1



OP_511 = Doulble acting cylinder type 1



OP_531 = Pilot operated cylinder type 1




OP_571 = Motor type 1




OP_611 = Digital type 1

OP_651 = Electro-hydraulic type 1

OP_652 = Electro-hydraulic type 2

OP_811 = Weight type 1

OP_851 = Manual type 1




OP_891 = Spring type 1

END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST

You can use the following keywords to customize the settings in the RDB options file.

General Items

For piping commodities, you can verify that a material description has been defined in theShort Material Description Library and/or the Long Material Description Library. For pipingspecialties and instruments, you can verify that a material description has been defined in theSpecialty Material Description Library.

SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON,the short material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.

108

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

RDB Options File________________ If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.

LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON,the long material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.

SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON, thespecialty material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code.

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.

PDtable_201 items

SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list ofService Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification TableLibrary) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search todetermine the list of tables. (Use L for the delivered tables.)

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key inthe table name.

NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> — If set toLIST, a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping JobSpecification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as asubstring search to determine the list of tables. (Use D for the delivered tables.)


BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a list of Branch Tables(as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. Youmust specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables.(Use B for the delivered tables.) The list is filtered to only include the unique tables,where the branch angle is 90 degrees.


You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two differentpiping materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both45 degrees and 90 degrees, and the other only allows 90 degreeintersections. The Reference Data Manager will not detect this problem.

TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = KEYIN or DATABASE — If set to DATABASE, alist of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapprovedMaterial Reference Database) is displayed.

109

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key inthe table name.

GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set toLIST, a list of Gasket Separation Tables (as defined in the approved Piping JobSpecification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as asubstring search to determine the list of tables. (Use G for the delivered tables.)


When listing the Gasket Separation Tables, the list of tables is restrictedto unique names, excluding the underbar (_) and the pressure ratingvalue that follows. In other words, the list of Gasket Separation Tableswill not include the pressure rating (G001 instead of G001_1500).

THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST,a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job SpecificationTable Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring searchto determine the list of tables. (Use T for the delivered tables.)


MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST,a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job SpecificationTable Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring searchto determine the list of tables. (Use M for the delivered tables.)


FLUID_CODE = VALUE — Specify a default fluid code value to be used for thepiping materials class.

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is that you donot intend to define this data, unless you specify the name of a Fluid Code Table.

FLUID_CODE_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a listof Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification TableLibrary) is displayed. You must specify a prefix (such as FC) to be used as a substringsearch to determine the list of tables.


MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list ofmaterials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed.

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key inthe value.

110

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

RDB Options File________________ BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST,a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job SpecificationTable Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring searchto determine the list of tables.


PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, <prefix> — If set to LIST, a listof Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification TableLibrary) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search todetermine the list of tables.


STANDARD_NOTE = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of standard notes (asdefined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed.

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode will to key inthe value of the standard note.

PDtable_202 items

MODEL_CODE = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of acceptable modelcodes (determined by the commodity name) is displayed. (See keywordCOMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES for more information.)

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of acceptable modelcodes is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value.

VALVE_OPERATOR = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of valve operatortypes (as defined in the RDB options file) is displayed. (See keywordVALVE_OPERATOR_LIST for more information.)

If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of valve operatortypes is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value.

PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION — This keyword is used if you require that all(or some) orifice flanges have two taps oriented 90 degrees apart. By default orificetaps are oriented 180 degrees apart on the outside diameter of the flange.

If this keyword is not included in the RDB options list, the relative tap orientation fortwo taps will always be 180 degrees.

COMMODITY_NAME <===> MODEL_CODES — This keyword precedes the list ofassociations between commodity names and their acceptable model codes. This listmust be defined to use the LIST option for MODEL_CODE.

111

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The association between a commodity name and the acceptable model codes for thatcommodity name is defined as follows.

<commodity_name> = <model_code_A>,<model_code_B>, ...

6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB

You can define as many as 50 model codes, separated by a comma, for each commodityname.

The delivered RDB options list includes a list of acceptable model codes for thereference data provided with PDS.

VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST — This keyword precedes the list of valve operator typesand their corresponding descriptions.

The list of valve operator types is defined as follows.

<valve operator type> = <description>

OP_0 = None RequiredOP_3 = Handwheel

The delivered RDB options file includes a list of valve operator types for the referencedata provided with PDS. The description is for information only to aid the user inselecting the proper valve operator type.

END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST — This keyword must follow the valve operator listas a delimiter.

112

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Materials Class Data Command________________

5.3.2 Piping Materials Class Data Command

The Piping Materials Class Data command can be used to create a piping materials classdefinition in Table 201 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing pipingmaterials class definition.

Options

Create — The system activates the Create Piping Materials Class Data form.

Revise By Keyin — The system activates the Revise Piping Materials ClassData form. Key in the name of the piping materials class to revise in thePiping Materials Class field.

Revise By List — Select the piping materials class to be revised from thedisplayed list of piping materials classes (as defined in the UnapprovedMaterial Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates theRevise Piping Materials Class Data form with the data for the selected pipingmaterials class.

113


5.3.2.1 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data

The Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data form is used to create or modity the definitionof a piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the inputfields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions

The system highlights the mandatory input fields (those that must be specified). Once youdefine a valid input for a mandatory field the system will drop the highlight for that field.

Refer to RDB Options File, page 105 for information on defining list options for theapplicable input fields.

Refer to Piping Materials Class Data (201), page 62 for more information on the attributesfor the Piping Materials Class Data table (201).

Mandatory Input Fields

Piping Materials Class (keyin) — Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for thepiping materials class to be defined. The system verifies that specified piping materialsclass does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.

Gasket Separation (keyin) — Key in the value for the gasket separation for this pipingmaterials class.

— OR —

114

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data________________ Gasket Table (keyin or list) — Key in the table name or select from the list of tables(as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list of GasketSeparation Tables will exclude the pressure rating value.

Service Limits (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Service Limits Table for thispiping materials class or select from a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in theapproved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Diameter (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Nominal Piping Diameter Table forthis piping materials class or select from a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (asdefined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Branch Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Branch Table for this pipingmaterials class or select from a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved PipingJob Specification Table Library). The list will only include the unique tables, where thebranch angle is 90 degrees.

You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different pipingmaterials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. The Reference DataManager will detect this problem.

Tap Data (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Tap Properties Data Table for thispiping materials class or select from a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined inPDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database).

The unapproved tap properties data is referenced, since all specification data within theMaterial Reference Database is approved in one operation.

Optional Data - Wall Thickness

This data is required for piping commodities, where the schedule or thickness is not explicitlydefined in the piping materials class or in a wall thickness table.

Corrosion Allowance (keyin) — Key in a numeric value, if wall thickness calculationsare to be used.

Thickness Equation (list) — Select one of the displayed wall thickness equations.

ANSI B31.3-1987 EL01ANSI B31.1a-1986 EJ01

The corresponding name for the thickness equation is loaded into the Piping MaterialsClass Data Table.

Thickness Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Thickness Data Table forthis piping materials class or select from a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined inthe approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

115

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Materials Data Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Materials Data Tablefor this piping materials class or select from a list of Materials Data Tables (as definedin the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Optional Data

The following data is not not required and can be defined or not defined based on yourcompany practices.

Materials Description (keyin or list) — Key in the numeric value for the materialsdescription in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select fromthe list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library).

Revision (keyin) — Key in up to two alphanumeric characters for the revision number.

Revision Date (keyin) — Key in up to ten alphanumeric characters for the date. Thecurrent date will not be entered automatically.

Note that the Reference Data Manager creates and maintains a separate revisionmanagement date on the basis of the current date and time which can be used in thereporting of reference data.

Fluid Code (keyin list) — Define a default fluid code to be used for the pipingmaterials class.

— OR —

Fluid Code Table (keyin list) — Key in the name of the Fluid Code Table for thispiping materials class or select from a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in theapproved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Materials of Construction (keyin) — Key in upt to six alphanumeric characters.

Bend Deflect Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Bend Deflection Tablefor this piping materials class or select from a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as definedin the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Pipe Length Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Pipe Length Table for thispiping materials class or select from a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in theapproved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Standard Note Number (keyin or list) — Key in the note number in the StandardNote Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of standard notes (asdefined in the approved Standard Note Library).

116

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Commodity Data Command________________

5.3.3 Piping Commodity Data Command

The Piping Commodity Data command can be used to create a piping commodity definitionin Table 202 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping commoditydefinition.

Options

Create — Select the Piping Materials Class for the commodity item to becreated from the list of piping materials classes (as defined in the UnapprovedMaterial Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates theCreate Piping Commodity Specification Data form.

Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the piping materials class for thecommodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to berevised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept.The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data formwith the data for the selected piping commodity.

Revise By List — Select the piping materials class for the commodity item tobe revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes and selectAccept. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayedList of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates theRevise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for theselected piping commodity.

Copy — You can use the Copy option in conjunction with the Revise optionsas a cut-and-paste feature. This command requires that both the source pipingmaterials class data and the destination piping materials class have beencreated.

You can copy a complete piping materials class, including the pipingcommodity specification data or selectively copy specific commodities. Selectthe option for the items to be copied.

Source and Destination Piping Materials Class - These are active fields that,when selected, display the piping materials class list. Select the source pipingmaterials class from the displayed list, then select Accept. Select thedestination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept.

Select All - This option copies the specification data for all pipingcommodities within the selected source piping materials class to the specifieddestination piping materials class.

Select From List - Select the source piping materials class from the displayedlist and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from thedisplayed list and select Accept. Then select the piping commodity to becopied from the list of all piping commodities within the source pipingmaterials class.

117

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Select Gaskets - Select the source piping materials class from the displayedlist and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from thedisplayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data forall gaskets within the source piping materials class to the destination pipingmaterials class. Gaskets are recognized on the basis of the gasket commodityname, as specified through the Project Data Manager.

Select Bolts - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed listand select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from thedisplayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data forall bolts within the source piping materials class to the destination pipingmaterials class. Bolts are recognized on the basis of the bolt commodity name,as specified through the Project Data Manager.

Short Commodity Material Description ON/OFF — You can set this toggleto ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity codehas been defined in the Short Material Description Library.

Long Commodity Material Description ON/OFF — You can set this toggleto ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity codehas been defined in the Long Material Description Library.

If the Material Description toggle is set to ON and no corresponding materialdescription is found for a specified commodity code, the system activates theAdd Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to MaterialDescription Library, page 128.

118

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data________________

5.3.3.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity SpecificationData

The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form is used to create or modify thedefinition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating anew definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You mustspecify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions

Refer to RDB Options File, page 105, for information on defining options for the applicableinput fields.

Refer to Piping Commodity Specification Data (202), page 67, for information on theattributes for the Piping Commodity Specification Data table.

Where possible, the system verifies that the specified value is valid for the applicable pipingmaterials class. For example, NPD values are checked against the associated diameters tablein the approved Piping Job Spec Table Library.

Commodity Type — This field can be used to select the type of piping commoditydata to be created based on the settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard NoteLibrary.

General FittingsPipe BendsOrifice FlangesBranch NipplesBranch ReinforcementValves

PipingTubingGasketsBoltsNuts

The system will modify the form fields to reflect the data that is specific to that type ofcomponent. The system stores the commodity type as the input_form_type within thePiping Commodity Specification Data Table of the Material Reference Database.

119

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Any input fields that are not used for a specific piping commodity type will be de-activated. The General Fittings category will allow input in all the input fields. Thisform is used for any piping commodity that does not fall within any of the other types.

General Fittings, Pipe Bends, OrificeFlanges, Branch Nipples, BranchReinforcement, and Valves

Commodity Name (keyin)From NPD - First Size (keyin)To NPD - First Size (keyin)End Preparation - First Size (list)

Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) — This data is automatically set to undefined(blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.

Table Suffix - First Size (list)

Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list) — Attribute 10. This data is automatically setto undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.

Commodity Code (keyin) — Key in the commodity code for the piping commodity.When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a systemcommodity code and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the size-dependent commodity code in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material DataTable.

The system automatically translates the specified commodity code to be upper-case.

You can use the Implied Data option to specify implied data for this pipingcommodity. Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command, page 140 for information onproject-specific implied data. Refer to Implied Data, page 126 for information onclass-specific implied data. The default is that implied data does not apply.

For the revise command, the prefixes for implied data are not displayed as part of thecommodity code, although the prefix will be loaded in the database. For implied data(project-wide or class-specific), the system will display the toggle setting rather thanshowing the prefix in the commodity code field.

Model Code (keyin or list) — Attribute 19. Key in the model code or select the modelcode from a list of acceptable model codes (as defined by commodity name in the RDBoptions file).

Geometric Industry Standard (list)Weight Code (list)fabrication category (list)

120

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data________________ Define the following data for any reducing components. This data will not apply to either theorifice flange or branch nipple commodity type.

From NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Attribute 12. Key in the lowest second size forwhich this specification data applies.

To NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Attribute 13. Key in the highest second size forwhich this specification data applies.

You can optionally define the following fields when two ends of that component requiredifferent data. By PDS convention, if you specify a red End Preparation, you must specify thecorresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.

End Preparation - Second Size (list)

Pressure Rating - Second Size (keyin) — This data is set to undefined (blank) for thebranch reinforcement commodity type.

Table Suffix - Second Size (list)

Schedule/Thickness - Second Size (list) — This data is set to undefined (blank) forthe branch reinforcement commodity type.

The following data must be defined for the designated [component types]. The setting isstored in the modifier attribute.

Bend Radius (keyin) [Pipe Bend] — Key in the bend radius for the pipe bend.

Number of Taps (toggle) [Orifice Flanges] — Set the toggle for the number of taps (1or 2) on the orifice flange. If applicable, set the orientation of the taps as 90 degrees or180 degrees. This toggle only appears for orifice flanges that have two taps.

Nipple Length (keyin) [Branch Nipples] — Key in length of the branch nipple.

Reinforcement Data (toggle) [Branch Reinforcement] — Set the toggle for the sourceof the branch reinforcement data to By System or By User.

If you select the by user branch reinforcement option, the commodity option code isautomatically defined with a value of 699 (User-defined), as required by PDS.

Valve Operator (keyin or list) [Valves] — Key in the valve operator type or select thevalve operator type from a list of valve operator types. The list of valve operator typesand the corresponding descriptions are defined in the RDB options list.

Valve Operator Display (toggle) [Valves] — Set the toggle to ON or OFF todetermine whether the valve operator is displayed in the model.

Modifier (keyin) — You can define this value for specific piping commodities notcovered by the previous list.

121

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You can define the following optional data depending on your requirements.

Commodity Option (list) — Attribute 4.

Max Temperature (keyin) — Attribute 5. If no value is specified, the default value(undefined) is assigned automatically.

Materials Grade (list) — Attribute 25.

Standard Note Number (list) — Attributes 26 and 27. Select the note for thiscommodity from the list of standard notes defined in the approved Standard NoteLibrary.

PDS Sort Code (keyin) — Attribute 20. The specified value is automatically convertedto upper-case.

Specification data for piping

You must define the following data for piping. The piping commodity name is definedautomatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager.

From NPD - First Size (keyin)To NPD - First Size (keyin)End Preparation (list)Pressure Rating (keyin)Table Suffix (list)Schedule/Thickness (list)

Joint Quality Factor (keyin) (For wall thickness calculations) — In lieu of theschedule/thickness, you can request that the wall thickness be computed automaticallyby the system by specifying the joint quality factor for wall thickness calculations. Thesystem multiplies the joint quality factor by 100, add a *C prefix to designate that thedefault calculation is to be used, and loads the value into the schedule/thicknesscolumn. For example, if the joint quality factor is 0.95, this value will be ’*C095’.

Note that this is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the branch reinforcementcalculations.

Commodity Code (keyin)

Model Code (toggle) — Set the toggle to By System (PIPE) or By User (*FPIPE).

Geometric Industry Standard (list)Weight Code (list)Fabrication Category (list)

You can optionally define the following data for piping.

122

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data________________ End Preparation - Second Size (list)Commodity Option (list)Max Temperature (keyin)

E, Reinforcement (keyin) — Define the joint quality factor (E) for piping for whichbranch reinforcement calculations apply. The system multiplies the joint quality factorby 100 and loads it in the modifier column.

This is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the wall thickness calculations forthe piping.

Purchased Length (keyin) — You can key in the purchased length of the piping insub-units. This value is stored in the PDS sort code attribute.

Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)End Preparation - Other (list)

Specification data for tubing

Define the following data for tubing. The tubing commodity name is defined automatically,as specified through the Project Data Manager.

From NPD - First Size (keyin)To NPD - First Size (keyin)End Preparation - First Size (list)Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin)Table Suffix - First Size (list)Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list)Joint Quality Factor (keyin)Commodity Code (keyin)Geometric Industry Standard (list)Weight Code (list)Fabrication Category (list)

You can optionally define the following data for tubing.

End Preparation - Second Size (list)Commodity Option (list)Maximum Temperature (keyin)E, Reinforcement (keyin)Purchased Length (keyin)Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)End Preparation - Other (list)

123


Specification data for gaskets

Define the following data for gaskets. The gasket’s commodity name is definedautomatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the activeproject’s selection of MTO options applicable to gaskets for reference.

From NPD - First Size (keyin)To NPD - First Size (keyin)End Preparation - First Size (list)Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin)Table Suffix - First Size (list)Commodity Code (keyin)

Gasket Thickness (keyin) — Key in the gasket thickness to be reported through theReport Manager. This value is loaded into the modifier column.

You must define the following specification data for gaskets, when the alternate gasket searchoption has been enabled for MTO through the Project Data Manager. Otherwise, the inputfields will be disabled.

Alternate End Preparation (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values asdefined in the approved Standard Note Library.

Alternate Pressure Rating (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define thepressure rating.

Alternate Table Suffix (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as defined inthe approved Standard Note Library.

You can optionally define the following data on the basis of the user-specific requirements forgaskets.

Commodity Option (list)Max Temperature (keyin)Fabrication Category (list)Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)

Specification data for bolts

You must define the following data for bolts. The bolt’s commodity name is definedautomatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the activeproject’s selection of MTO options applicable to bolts for reference.

From NPD - First Size (keyin)To NPD - First Size (keyin)Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin)Table Suffix - First Size (list)Commodity Code (keyin)Bolt Extension (keyin)

124

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data________________ You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements forbolts.

Commodity Option (list)Fabrication Category (list)Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)

Specification data for nuts

You must define the following data for nuts. The commodity name is defined automatically,as specified through the Project Data Manager.

Max Temperature (keyin)Commodity Code (keyin)

You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements fornuts.

Fabrication Category (list)Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)

125


5.3.3.2 Implied Data

When defining a piping commodity, you can select the Implied Data option to indicate thatthe commodity will have an associated implied item that will be included in MTO reports.After selecting the option, set the toggle to Class Specific.

This option is intended for implied components that are not unique within the project. A lap-joint flange is an example of the primary component, where the stub-end is the impliedcomponent.

Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command, page 140 for information on Project Specificimplied data.

When you select Accept to define a primary component, the system modifies the form displayto allow you to define the specification data for the implied component.

When you accept the specification data for the implied component, the system prefixes anasterisk (*) to the commodity code of the primary component to indicate that implied data ispresent.

Field Descriptions

The following specification data for the implied component are determined by thecorresponding data for the primary component. This data is displayed in review only fields.

Commodity Name — Same as the primary component.

Commodity Option — The commodity option code for the implied component is set tothe primary component’s commodity option code plus 5000.

126

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Implied Data________________ From NPD — same as the primary component.

To NPD — same as the primary component.

Model Code — same as the primary component.

You can optionally define the following specification data for the implied component basedon your reporting requirements. The values for the implied component default to thecorresponding values for the primary component, except for the commodity code.

End Preparation (list)Pressure Rating (keyin)Table Suffix (list)Schedule/Thickness (list)

Commodity Code (keyin) — Key in the commodity code for the implied item. Thesystem converts this value to upper-case.

When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a somewhatarbitrary value, referred to as the system commodity code, and will be used by theReport Manager to reference the size-dependent commodity code.

Geometric Industry Standard (list)Weight Code (list)Fabrication Category (list)Modifier (keyin)Max Temperature (keyin)Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)

PDS Sort Code (keyin) — (optional). The system converts the value to upper-case.

127


5.3.3.3 Add Entry to Material Description Library

This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in theappropriate Material Description Library (short, long, or specialty). Refer to MaterialDescription Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.

Requirements

The Material Description toggle must be set to ON.

If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless bothof the following conditions are met:

The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the materialdescription has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project DataManager.

The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels asthe means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.

Description — Key in the material description for the specified commodity code andselect Accept.

The system adds the specified entry to the Material Description Library.

128

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Specialty Data Command________________

5.3.4 Piping Specialty Data Command

The Piping Specialty Data command can be used to create a piping specialty definition inTable 203 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping specialty definition.You can also add specialty descriptions to the Material Description Library.

Options

Create — Select the type of specialty (Piping Specialty or Valves from thelist. Then key in the component number for the specialty item to be createdand select Accept. The system activates the Create Piping SpecialtySpecification Data form.

Revise By Keyin — Key in the component number of the specialty to bemodified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping SpecialtySpecification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty.

Revise By List — Select the piping specialty to be revised from the displayedList of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates theRevise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selectedpiping specialty.

Specialty Material Description — You can set this toggle to ON to verifythat the material description for a specified commodity code has been definedin the Specialty Material Description Library.

If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the AddEntry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to MaterialDescription Library, page 128.

129


5.3.4.1 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data

The Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form is used to create or modify thedefinition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating anew definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You mustspecify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions


Refer to Piping Specialty Specification Data (203), page 77, for information on the attributesfor the Piping Specialty Specification Data table.

Mandatory Input Fields

Piping Component Number (keyin) — Key in the piping component number, whichuniquely identifies the piping specialty. The system verifies that the piping componentnumber does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.

From NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the piping specialty.Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.

To NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the piping specialty.Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field isonly visible if an applicable specialty type is selected.

130

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data________________ End Preparation - First Size (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values asdefined in the approved Standard Note Library.

Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define thepressure rating.

Table Suffix - First Size (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as definedin the approved Standard Note Library.

Schedule/Thickness (list) — Select from the list of schedule/thickness values asdefined in the approved Standard Note Library.

Model Code (keyin) — Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define thepiping specialty.

Physical Data ID (keyin) — Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into thegeometric data table for piping specialties.

Sort Code (keyin) — Key in the sort code to be used as an arbitrary index into thegeometric data table for piping specialties. The system will convert the value to upper-case.

Fabrication Category (list) — Select from the list of fabrication category values asdefined in the approved Standard Note Library.

You must define the following data for any reducing component.

NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Key in the second size value for the piping specialty.Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.

You must define the following data for valves. This data is stored in the modifier attribute.

Valve Operator (keyin or list) — Key in the valve operator type or select the valveoperator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).

Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) — Set the toggle to determine whether thevalve operator will be displayed in the model.

Specialty Type (field) — This field can be used to select the type of piping specialtydata to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard NoteLibrary. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Typepick list, then select the preferred data type.

131


The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping SpecialtyData Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990.

Optional Input Fields

You can optionally define the following data, when two ends of the component requiredifferent data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specifythe corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.


You can optionally define the following data depending on you requirements for pipingspecialties.

Weight Code (list)Geometric Industry Standard (list)Modifier (keyin)Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)

132

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Instrument Data Command________________

5.3.5 Instrument Data Command

The Instrument Data command can be used to create an instrument definition in Table 204of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing instrument definition. You can alsoadd descriptions to the Material Description Library.

Options

Create — Select the type of instrument (Instruments or Valves) from the list.Then key in the component number for the instrument to be created and selectAccept. The system activates the Create Instrument Specification Data form.

Revise By Keyin — Key in the component number of the instrument to bemodified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise InstrumentSpecification Data form with the data for the selected instrument.

Revise By List — Select the instrument to be revised from the displayed Listof Instruments and select Accept. The system activates the Revise InstrumentSpecification Data form with the data for the selected instrument.

Specialty Material Description — You can set this toggle to ON to verifythat the material description for a specified commodity code has been definedin the Specialty Material Description Library.

If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the AddEntry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to MaterialDescription Library, page 128.

133


5.3.5.1 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data

The Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data form is used to create or modify thedefinition of an instrument. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the inputfields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) forall the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions


Refer to Instrument Component Specification Data (204), page 81, for information on theattributes for the Instrument Specification Data table.

Instrument Component Number (keyin) — Key in the component number, whichuniquely identifies the instrument. The system verifies that the component numberdoes not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.

From NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the instrument. Boththe from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.

To NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the instrument. Both thefrom and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field is onlyvisible if an applicable instrument type is selected.

End Preparation - First Size (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values asdefined in the approved Standard Note Library.

134

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data________________ Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define thepressure rating.

Table Suffix - First Size (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as definedin the approved Standard Note Library.


Model Code (keyin) — Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define theinstrument.

Physical Data ID (keyin) — Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into thegeometric data table for instruments.

Sort Code (keyin) — Key in the code to be used as an arbitrary index into thegeometric data table for instruments. The system will convert the value to upper-case.


You must define the following data for any reducing component.

NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Key in the second size value for the instrument. Boththe from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.

Instrument Type (field) — This field can be used to select the type of instrumentcomponent data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of theStandard Note Library. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer DataForm Type pick list, then select the preferred data type.

The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping SpecialtyData Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990.

You can optionally define the following data, when two ends of the component requiredifferent data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specifythe corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.


135

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You must define the following data for valves. This information is stored in the modifierattribute.

Valve Operator (keyin or list) — Key in the valve operator type or select the valveoperator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).

Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) — Set the toggle to determine whether thevalve operator will be displayed in the model.

You can optionally define the following data depending on your requirements for instruments.

Weight Code (list)Geometric Industry Standard (list)Modifier (keyin)Materials Grade (list)Standard Note Number (list)

136

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Tap Properties Data Command________________

5.3.6 Tap Properties Data Command

The Tap Properties Data command can be used to create a tap properties definition in Table205 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing tap properties definition.

Options

Create — Key in the name of the tap table to be defined. The system activatesthe Create Tap Properties Data form.

Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the tap table to be modified. Thesystem activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for theselected tap table.

Revise By List — Select the tap table to be revised from the displayed List ofTap Properties Data (as defined in the Unapproved Material ReferenceDatabase) and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Tap PropertiesData form with the data for the selected tap table.

137


5.3.6.1 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data

The Create/Revise Tap Properties Data form is used to create or modity the specification datafor taps. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for themandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions


Refer to Tap Properties Data (205), page 85 for more information on the attributes for theTap Properties Data.

Tap Table Name (keyin) — Key in up to six characters for the table name. Thecombination of the tap properties table name, the tap nominal piping diameter, and thetap option code must be unique.

Nom Piping Diameter (keyin) — Key in the nominal piping diameter for this tapproperties definition.

Tap Option (list) — Select from the list of tap option codes as defined in the approvedStandard Note Library. If you do not select a tap option code, the default value (one) isassigned automatically.

End Preparation (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined inthe approved Standard Note Library.

138

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Tap Properties Data________________ Rating (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating.


Tap Material Code (keyin) — During the tap properties data creation process, if theShort and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed toinsert Tap Material Code data into the Short Material Description Library. This is thecode that may optionally be used by MTO for appending the tap’s material descriptionto that of the component which has been tapped.

If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored,unless both of the following conditions are met:

— The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the materialdescription has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the ProjectData Manager.

— The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labelsas the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.

This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code inthe appropriate (short) Material Description Library. Refer to Material DescriptionData, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.

Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept.This code must be a unique index into the project’s Material Description Libraries.

The system converts the specified tap material code to upper-case, then adds thespecified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries.

139


5.3.7 Commodity Implied Data Command

The Commodity Implied Data command defines the specification data for impliedcomponents in Table 212 or the Material Reference Database. These implied components arereported by MTO with the primary component in situations where the implied data isindependent of the piping materials class (used throughout the project).

Options

Create — Key in the system commodity code of the implied component to becreated. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Implied MaterialData form.

Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the piping materials class for thecommodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to berevised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept.The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data formwith the data for the selected piping commodity.

Revise By List — Select the implied component definition to be revised fromthe displayed list of Commodity Implied Data and select Accept. The systemactivates the Revise Piping Commodity Implied Data form with the data forthe implied component definition.

140

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data________________

5.3.7.1 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied MaterialData

The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form is used to create or modifythe definition of an implied component. When creating a new definition, the system willjump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin orselection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Field Descriptions


Refer to Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212), page 91 for more information on theattributes for the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data table.

System Commodity Code — Key in the commodity code for the primary component.The system converts the value to upper-case.

For this type of implied data to be reported with the primary component, thespecification data for the primary component must have enabled the option in eachpiping materials class for which this implied data applies.

From Diameter (First Size) — Key in the lowest first size value for which this impliedspecification data applies.

To Diameter (First Size) — Key in the highest first size value for which this impliedspecification data applies. The to value must equal or exceed the from value.

141

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ From Diameter (Second Size) — For reducing components, key in the lowest secondsize value for which this implied specification data applies. In cases where the pipingcommodity represents both a full-size component and a reducing component, this valueshould equal the corresponding first size NPD. Otherwise, for a reducing component,this value must be less than the corresponding first size value.

To Diameter (Second Size) — For reducing components, key in the highest secondsize value for which this implied specification data applies. The to value must equal orexceed the from value.

Commodity Code (keyin) — During the commodity implied data creation process, ifthe Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed toinsert Commodity Code data into the Short and Long Material Description Libraries.

If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored,unless both of the following conditions are met:

— The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the materialdescription has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the ProjectData Manager.

— The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labelsas the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.

This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code inthe appropriate Material Description Library (short or long). Refer to MaterialDescription Data, page 361, for more information on material descriptions.

Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept.This code must be a unique index into the project’s Material Description Libraries.

142

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data________________ The system converts the specified commodity code to upper-case, then adds thespecified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries.

Quantity (keyin) — Key in a whole number or a decimal value for the quantity of theimplied component per primary component.


Standard Note Number (list) — You can optionally select from the list of standardnotes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

143


5.3.8 Table Checker

You can use the Table Checker option to perform on-line Table Checker validation for thedefined piping commodity specification data. When this option is enabled, table checkervalidation will be performed for all piping commodities, except:

implied data specific to the piping materials class

gaskets

bolts

nuts

When you enable this option, the system displays a list of the defined Table Checker reportsfor the project. Select the report validation to be performed and select Accept.

Refer to Table Checker Form, page 389 for more information on creating a Table Checkerreport definition.

144

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Job Specification Manager________________

5.4 Piping Job Specification Manager

This command enables you to load all of the database tables which make up the Piping JobSpecification portion of the Material Reference Database. You can also extract neutral files ofthe data contained in the Material Reference Database.

Before Using This Command

Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on creating aproject and creating the approved and unapproved Specification/Material ReferenceDatabase.

You must have installed the applicable reference database files (such as USRDB orDINRDB).

Use the Default Project Control Data option to set default settings for PipingSpec Path and Piping Spec Node to point to the location of the neutral files.The default settings are maintained in the Project Control Database.

You can also change these settings during the operation of the Piping Job SpecManager. However, such changes are temporary; they will not update the defaultlocations.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Piping Job Specification Manager option from the Reference DataManager form.

The system displays the Piping Job Specification Manager main form used to select thetype of data to process.

145


The data manipulation procedure for each of the database tables is similar. You canperform the following activities for each of the entities.

2. Select Option

Select Unapprove ==> Approve to post the data from the unapprovedSpecification/Material Reference Database to the approved database.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit

Toggle between Submit Immediately to submit the report for immediate processing, orDelayed Submit to specify a time to submit the report for delayed processing.

When delayed submission is selected, you will be prompted Accept Time or Re-specify Submit Time. Enter the day, hour, and minute, then select AM or PM.

— OR —

Select the command for the database table to be loaded.

The system displays the options for the selected item. The following illustration reflectsthe screen for Piping Materials Class.

146

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Piping Job Specification Manager________________

Select Option

Select the option for the type of action to be performed.

Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset from a neutral file. See page 148.

Delete existing entries. See page 151.

Report on the entity data (create a neutral file). See page 152

147


5.4.1 Load, Replace, and Replace CommoditySubset Options

These options enable you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material ReferenceDatabase.

The Replace Commodity Subset option is only available for the SizeDependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands.

Refer to the database descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral file formatsused in defining the delivered PJS and material data.

Load adds the contents of the neutral file(s) to the information currently in thatdatabase table of the Specification/Material Reference Database.

Replace deletes all entries in the respective database table and then loads new entriesfrom the neutral file.

Replace Commodity Subset revises (deletes and replaces) previously created size-dependent or implied commodity data for a specific commodity or group of commoditycodes specified in a neutral file. This option is only available for the Size DependentMaterial Data and Project Implied Material Data commands.

The neutral files for the delivered USRDB data are in the directory

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data

classes.pmc — the neutral file for the Piping Materials Class Data.

*.pcd — The neutral files for the Piping Commodity Data are stored in a set of files ofthe format pmcname.pcd. (For example, 1c0031.pcd defines all the commodity itemsfor piping materials class 1c0031.)

list.pcd — a file that lists the neutral file names of all the delivered pcd files for thedifferent piping materials classes.

taps.data — the neutral file for Tap Properties Data.

implied.data — the neutral file for Project Implied Material Data.

A set of sample neutral files are delivered in the directory

\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data

specialty.data — a sample neutral file for Piping Specialty Data.

instrment.data — a sample neutral file for Instrument Data.

148

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset Options________________ pcd_size.data — a sample neutral file for Size Dependent Material Data.

You can copy the files and make changes before loading the information into the database.


You can define the variable PD_COMMIT_INTERVAL= in the control.sh file to control thecommit interval in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. This hasthe same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The default commitvalue is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Load/Replace (or other load or replace) option. See the description above,for differences in Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset.

2. Specify Neutral File Name

Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be copied.

For Piping Commodity Data you can load or replace a single file or a list of files.To process a list of files, create a list file which list each neutral file on a separateline. The file list.pcd contains a list of all the delivered neutral files.

For Size-Dependent or Implied Commodity Data, you can replace specificcommodity codes or all the entries in the database. To replace specificcommodity codes, create a neutral files which contains only the commodity codesto be replaced.

For the Load option, the system displays a dialog box to indicate that the data loadedwill be appended to existing data. Select Accept to continue.

3. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.

For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s).

149


4. Accept to Create New Records or Exit

Select Accept to begin processing the request.

Job Has Been Submitted

The system submits the load/replace request as a batch job. Once the job is completedthe system sends a mail message indicating the completion status of the load (successfulor unsuccessful).

The system also creates a set of log files in the \tmp directory.

pmc.log — Piping Materials Class Data

pcd.log — Piping Commodity Data

specialty.log — Piping Specialty Data

instrument.log — Instrument Data

taps.log — Tap Properties Data

pcd_size.log — Size-Dependent Material Data

implied.log — Project Implied Material Data

These log files contain the following information.

The name of the neutral file being loaded

The completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful)

The line number that caused the failure if the neutral file was not loaded.

150

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Delete Option________________

5.4.2 Delete Option

This option enables you to delete entries from the Piping Job Specification.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Delete option.

The system displays a list of all the items in the database for the selected class of data.

2. Select the item to be deleted from the database.

3. Accept to Delete Materials Class

Select Accept to begin deleting the data.

151


5.4.3 Report Option

The Report options enable you to create neutral files using the information in theSpecification/Material Reference database. The order and field lengths of the data in theneutral file is determined by a format file named spec_order.max. This format file is expectedto reside in the same network address and directory specified for the report output. A defaultformat file is delivered with the PD_Data product in the file\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format\spec_order.max.If the spec_order.max file is not found at the specified output directory, the system will usethe default spec order.

If an unapproved Specification/Material Reference database exists for the active project, youcan select the database to process: approved or unapproved.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Report option from one of the data forms (such as the Piping CommodityData form).

For Piping Commodity Data select the appropriate PCD from the list.


Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name andFile Path information.

3. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.

For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s).

4. Accept to Create Report

Select Accept to create the specified neutral file.

Job Has Been Submitted

The system creates the neutral file and a log file named specmgr.log.

152

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Option________________

Example spec_order.max File

!

! This file contains the spec attribute order and their maximum attribute

! lengths required for creating spec output neutral files. When creating

! spec reports the system will default an attribute order and set of

! attribute lengths. The user can edit these attribute orders and

! lengths in this file ( spec_order.max ). If this file is in the

! directory where the software is being run the orders defined in

! this file will be used as the default attribute order and lengths.

201 = 2,16 3,3 4,3 5,10 6,7 7,7 8,8 9,6 10,6 11,6 12,6 13,6 14,6 15,6 16,6 17,6 18,8 19,6 20,6

202 = 3,6 4,6 5,7 6,6 7,6 8,6 9,8 10,8 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,8 17,6 18,16 19,6 20,6 21,7 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 26,6 27,6

203 = 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6

204 = 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6

205 = 3,8 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,8 8,10

211 = 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,8 10,8

212 = 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,6 10,6

153


5.5 Piping Job Spec Report Manager

This command activates the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form. It is used to generatereports from the Specification/Material Reference Database with the report definition data.The Piping Job Spec Report Manager stores the report record and location records for eachdiscrimination data file and format file in the Project Control Database. The numbered recordsare used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.

Options

Report Format — Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create,revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For moreinformation, see Report Format Form, page 157.

Report Discrimination Data — Displays the Discrimination Data form, which youcan use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as wellas the file itself. For more information, see Report Discrimination Data Form, page163.

Report — Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, andapprove report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page173.

Report Management Data — Displays the Report Management Defaults form,which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the defaultnodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used forsetup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 186.

154

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Using the Report Commands________________

5.5.1 Using the Report Commands

Understanding Report Files and Records

The Piping Job Spec Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, anddatabase records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitionsexplain all of the files and records in the reporting process.

Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outsideof the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what dataappears in the report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted inthe report. Without the format file(s), Piping Job Spec Report Manager reports cannot beprocessed. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting.

Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file sothat it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the ProjectControl Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, theformat record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data thatis used for report processing but is not an actual file.

Discrimination Data File and Record

The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It isan ASCII file that is created interactively using the Piping Job Spec Report Manager.

The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name andlocate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for eachdiscrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same waythat the format record is used to access a format file.

Report Output and Record

The Piping Job Spec Report Manager creates a report using the specifiedformat,discrimination, and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory onthe specified node.

The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate areport, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that isused for report processing but is not an actual file.)

155


Group Workflow

There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use theReport Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the reportdefinition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and pathon each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default,simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification.

The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination datarecord, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report DiscriminationData options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file,and their corresponding records have been established.

Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.

156

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Format Form________________

5.5.2 Report Format Form

When you select the Report Format option from the Piping Job Spec Report Managerform, the Report Format form is displayed.

This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the formatfile in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy arecord and its corresponding ASCII format files.

The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will bedisplayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the file’slocation has been entered into the project control database.

Options

Create — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add anew record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, seeFormat Creation/Revision Form, page 159.

Copy — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of anexisting format file from the project control database along with the correspondingASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page159.

Revise — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of anexisting format file in the project control database. For more information, see FormatCreation/Revision Form, page 159.

157

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format filefrom the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reportingcannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 161.

158

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Format Creation/Revision Form________________

5.5.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form

When you select Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Piping JobSpec Report Manager form is displayed.

This form creates, copies, or revises a record in the project control database; this recorddefines the location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format ofthe report. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDSdata.

Field Descriptions

Number — A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in theproject control database used to identify the record of the format file.

Description — A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.

File Specification — The file name of the format file to reference.

File Path — The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.

File Node — The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. Thisfield retains the active setting.

Before Using this Form

You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with thePD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file forSpec Reporting reporting is named piping_rdb.fmt.

For more information on the delivered sample format files, see the PD_Report User’s Guide.

159


Operating Sequence

1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.

A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record,go to Step 3.

2. Select Report Format

From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then select Accept.

Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.

3. Specify Report Format Data

Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in eachfield. Then select Accept.

The project control database is updated.

160

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Format Deletion Form________________

5.5.2.2 Format Deletion Form

When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally deletethe associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records,discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their databaserecords.

Fields and Options

Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-characterdescription of a report record in the project control database.

Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted.When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file.When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence


From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

161


2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.

The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

162

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Discrimination Data Form________________

5.5.3 Report Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, theDiscrimination Data form is displayed.

This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specifieddirectory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, ordeleted as needed.

A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in areport. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project controldatabase record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to beassociated with a specific report.

Options

Create — Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a newdiscrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created.For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form, page 165.

Copy — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existingdata file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For moreinformation, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 169.

Revise — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifiesdiscrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discriminationdata file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the projectcontrol database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page169.

163

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as wellas its associated record in the project control database. For more information, seeDiscrimination Data Deletion Form, page 171.

164

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Discrimination Data Creation Form________________

5.5.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form

Commands

Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved orunapproved.

Search Criteria — Defines search criteria for specified attributes in theSpecification/Material Reference Database.

Field Descriptions

Number — Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record to becreated by discrimination. The number can be up to 24 characters in the Project ControlDatabase. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination datafile.

Description — Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40characters in the Project Control Database.

File Specification — Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to create.

The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.

165

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ File Path — Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This fieldretains the active setting.

File Node — Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. Thisfield retains the active setting.

166

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Search Criteria Form________________

5.5.3.2 Search Criteria Form

You can define search criteria to restrict the elements to be reported based on databaseattributes. The default is no search criteria. This option enables you to define search criteriafor specified attributes in the Spec Database.

If you do not restrict the piping materials class attribute for Piping CommodityData, all piping materials classes will be reported.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Search Criteria option from the Discrimination Data form.

2. Select Entity

Select the database entity that contains the data to be restricted.

The system displays the attributes for the selected entity.

3. Select Attribute

Select the attribute to be restricted.

The system displays the selected attribute and displays a list of operators.

167


4. Select Operator

Select the required operator to define the search criteria.

The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value.

5. Enter Attribute Value

Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywherewithin the attribute value (do not use wild cards).

If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard notelibrary. Select the value and select Accept.

The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria.

6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator

Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternativecondition.

— OR —

Accept the defined search criteria.

168

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Discrimination Data Revision Form________________

5.5.3.3 Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the DiscriminationData Revision form displays. This form enables you to copy or revise a discrimination datafile from the specified directory and its record from the Project Control Database. The copieddiscrimination data file can then be modified.

First, the system displays the Record Number display list as shown below on the left. Afteryou select and Accept the discrimination data file you need, the system then displays thediscrimination data identification fields. These fields are used to define the record as shownbelow on the right.

Commands


Search Criteria — Defines search criteria for specified attributes in theSpecification/Material Reference Database.

Field Descriptions

Number — Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record with up to24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identifythe record of the discrimination data file.

Description — Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40characters in the Project Control Database.

File Specification — Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to reference.

169

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project.

File Path — Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This fieldretains the active setting.

File Node — Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. Thisfield retains the active setting.

If prompted to... Do this:Select Discrimination Data Select the record number of the discrimination data

file to revise and select Accept.Specify Discrimination Data Key in any changes to the discrimination data record

displayed in the information fields, and select asmany of the Discrimination Data options as necessaryto define the discrimination data file.

170

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Discrimination Data Deletion Form________________

5.5.3.4 Discrimination Data Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



171




172

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Form________________

5.5.4 Report Form

When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.

This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holdsspecifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description,and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate areport.

The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is includedin the format file.

At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the followinginformation:

Report Output — The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, andreport node, path, and file name.

Format — The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.

Discrimination Data — The report discrimination data number, description, and filelocation (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data isalso included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), searchcriteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.

Search Criteria — The report search criteria number, description, and file location(node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list ofmodel numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable),and sorting sequence.

173


Options

Create — Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record andgenerates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 175.

Revise — Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from anexisting or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page178.

Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and thecorresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 181.

Approve — Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report.For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 183.

Multi-Create — Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiplereports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page184.

174

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Creation Form________________

5.5.4.1 Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.

Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records arestored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly.

Fields and Options

Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of thereport file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the reportfile short name.

Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not thetitle in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the reportis contained in the format file.

Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).

Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains theactive settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on theReport Management Dataform. For more information, see Report ManagementDefaults Form, page 186.

Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will belocated. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if youhave specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information,see Report Management Defaults Form, page 186.

175

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the activereport. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Selectthe appropriate format file, and click Accept.

Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used togenerate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discriminationdata files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.

Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used togenerate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteriafiles is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.

Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear aspecification, click Accept without selecting a file.

If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has searchcriteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in thisfield, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria fieldtakes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discriminationdata.

Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.

Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. This is aread-only field; you cannot edit it.

Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field isoptional.

Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision.This field is optional.

Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and thendeletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available printqueues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it.

Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves thereport output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues isdisplayed. Click on a queue to select it.

Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report.

Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Specifies when the report will beprocessed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields displayfor you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

176

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Creation Form________________

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Create.

The Report Creation form is displayed.

2. Specify Report Data

Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file,discrimination data file, and search criteria data file.

3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to beprinted.

4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and timethat the report is to be submitted.

5. Click Accept to save the report file.

177


5.5.4.2 Revise Report Form

When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.

This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project controldatabase. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record withoutgenerating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report outputfile without updating the report record.

Fields and Options




Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains theactive settings.

Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will belocated. This field retains the active settings.

Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the activereport. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Selectthe appropriate format file, and click Accept.


178

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Revise Report Form________________ Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used togenerate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteriafiles is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.










Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the reportwill be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additionalfields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data — Specifies revision of the report dataonly (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (ReviseReport and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the reportoutput file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and clickAccept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report andData without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the reportfile and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to ReviseData Only, and click Accept.

If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title,this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and thereport output file is generated.

179


Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Revise.

The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.

2. Select Report

From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.

The fields update to display the selected report file specifications.

3. Revise Report Information

Update the report record information as needed.




180

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Deletion Form________________

5.5.4.3 Report Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



181




182

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Approval Form________________

5.5.4.4 Report Approval Form

When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.

Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attributeis set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way foryou to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a reportis revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.

Options

Number — The 24-character unique name (also called short name) of the report record.

Description — The 40-character description of the report record.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Approve.

The Report Approval form is displayed.

2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.

The Approval form is displayed.

For more information, see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report User’sGuide.

183


5.5.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form isdisplayed.

Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.

Fields and Options

Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the reportfile in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file shortname.

Description — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.





184

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Multiple Submit Form________________

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.

The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.

2. Select Reports for Submission

From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected;select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.


4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) orlater (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the dateand time that the report is to be submitted.

5. Click Accept to submit the reports.

185


5.5.5 Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the ReportManagement Defaults form is displayed.

This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of thereport definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.

Fields

Report Path — Specifies the default path of the report output files.

It is recommended that you not send output reports to your system’stemporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory.

Report Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report outputfiles are located.

Report Format Path — Specifies the default path of the format files.

Report Format Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on whichformat files are located.

Report Discrimination Data Path — Specifies the default path of the discriminationdata files.

186

5. Pip

ing

Job

S

pecificatio

n

Report Management Defaults Form________________ Report Discrimination Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the systemon which discrimination data files are located.

Report Search Criteria Data Path — Specifies the default path of the report searchcriteria data files.

Report Search Criteria Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the systemon which report search criteria data files are located.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.

The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.

2. Accept or Exit

In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report outputfiles, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then clickAccept.

187


188

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Piping Job Specification Tables________________

6. Piping Job Specification Tables

Nonphysical data such as branch calculations or gasket separation are stored in the Spec TableLibrary or hard-coded in the system. The Spec Tables for US practice are delivered in thefollowing files:

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l - object library\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l.t - text library

These libraries contain the Piping Job Specification tables and the other special tables whichcontain nonphysical data.

The data in the Spec Table Library falls into two basic categories.

Specification Tables - Referenced in the Piping Materials Class Specification Data ofthe Material Reference Database. See page 190.

RDB Tables - Referenced in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff formsof the Project Data Manager. See page 215.

You can use the Piping Job Specification Tables command to create a new Piping JobSpecification Table library or to create, modify, or delete tables in an existing library. Seepage 239.

189


6.1 PJS Tables and Functions

The following special tables and functions are provided in the Spec Table Library. Thesetable/equation names are defined in the Piping Materials Class Specification Table of theSpecification Material Reference Database.

Temperature and Pressure Service Limits table

Nominal Piping Diameter table

Thickness Data table

Materials Data table

Piping Wall Thickness equation

Branch Reinforcement calculation

Branch Insertion table

Gasket Separation table

Fluid Code table

190

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table________________

6.1.1 Temperature and Pressure Service LimitsTable

The temperature and pressure service limits table includes the sets of temperatures andpressures that define the boundaries of acceptability for a piping materials class. These limitscan be dictated by factors such as strength of components and materials used. You mustinsure that each of the components included in the piping materials class meet the indicatedtemperature and pressure limits.

You can define both positive and negative values for temperature. However, you can onlydefine positive values for pressure. The units of measure for the pressure and temperaturevalues in the table are defined as a part of the table description.

The system uses the information in this table to insure:

The highest temperature from the TDB does not exceed the highest temperature value inthe table

The lowest temperature in the TDB is not less than the lowest value in the table

For a given temperature, the pressure from the table is not less than any of thecorresponding pressure(s) from the TDB.

This table is limited to 100 temperature and pressure values.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’LWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Input_Interpolation 1, Next_OneUnits= DF, PSIG

! Temperature PressureWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZWWWW ZZZZZZEND

191


Example

Table_Data_Definition ’L1001’! Description= B16.5 CL150-1.1, -20 to 800! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=13-Feb-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Input_Interpolation 1, Next_OneUnits= DF, PSIG

! Temperature Pressure-20 285100 285200 260300 230400 200500 170600 140650 125700 110750 95800 80END

Parameters

Table_Data_Definition (character-6) — This parameter specifies the name of theTemperature and Pressure Service Limits Table. These tables use the following namingconventions.

— first character: L

— second character: the pressure rating of the piping materials class as defined by thefollowing code:

1= CL1502= CL3003= CL4004= CL6005= CL9006= CL15007= CL2500

8= GRAVHD9= OTHERA= CL125F= CL800G= CL2000H= CL3000J= CL4500

K= CL5000L= CL6000M= CL9000N= CL10000R= CL15000T= CL20000V= CL30000

— third, fourth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make thetable name unique.

Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One — This statement tells the system to interpolatebetween known values for the temperature value. The statement must be included asshown in the table format for the desired interpolation to take place.

Temperature (real) — This field identifies the maximum temperature value. Youcan use both positive (+) and negative (-) values. Values are assumed to be positiveunless otherwise indicated.

192

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table________________ Pressure (real) — This field identifies the value for pressure corresponding to thepreviously defined temperature. Negative (-) values are not accepted in this field.

193


6.1.2 Nominal Piping Diameters Table

The NPD Tables consists of the diameters for piping and tubing which are valid within anypiping materials class which references this table. The system verifies any NPD input in thePiping Design TDB.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’DWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0Units= NPD_IN

! DiamWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWEND

This table can also be used to define the equivalency for English and metric diameters. Theoutput column defines the English equivalent for the matching metric size.

Neutral File Format - English/MetricEquivalency

Table_Data_Definition ’DWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN

! Metric DiamWWWWW WWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWW WWWWWEND

194

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Nominal Piping Diameters Table________________

Examples

Table_Data_Definition ’D036’! Description= From 0.5 to 36! By=NP Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=22-Jan-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0Units= NPD_IN

! Diam0.50.7511.5234681012141618202224262830323436END

Table_Data_Definition ’DB001’! Description= From 6mm to 900mm (0.375 to 36)! By=aw Ckd By= Rev=1 Date=17_jul 1989No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN

! metric diam, imperial diam10 0.37515 0.520 0.7525 140 1.550 280 3100 4150 6200 8250 10300 12350 14400 16450 18500 20550 22600 24650 26700 28750 30800 32850 34900 36END

195


Parameters

Table_Data_Definition (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the NPDtable. These tables use the following naming conventions:

— first character: D

— second, third, and fourth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to makethe table name unique.

Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) — This field identifies the value fornominal diameter. You can use the value ET_AL to indicate that any nominal diametervalue from the TDB which is equal to or greater than the value in the preceding line isan acceptable nominal diameter for the PMC.

196

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Thickness Data Tables________________

6.1.3 Thickness Data Tables

Thickness data is determined as a function of the table name and nominal piping diameter.These tables include the minimum, retirement, thread, and preferred thicknesses required inthe calculation of piping wall thickness. The tables provide the actual thickness; not aschedule. Therefore, there must be an individual entry for each diameter. You cannot use anNPD range. PDS requires that the schedule/thickness values be in inches.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’TWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN

! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/ThicknessesWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’TA501’! Description= A,0.063CA,0.0071D<=24, 0.0075D>=26! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=31-Jan-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN

! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses0.5 .147 .06 - S-160 - - - -0.75 .154 .06 - S-XS - - - -1 .179 .06 - S-XS - - - -1.5 .2 .06 - S-XS - - - -2 .154 .06 - S-STD - - - -3 .216 .06 - S-STD - - - -4 .237 .07 - S-STD - - - -6 .28 .1 - S-STD - - - -8 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -10 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -12 .250 .1 - S-STD - - - -14 .250 .12 - S-STD - - - -16 .250 .12 - S-STD - - - -18 .250 .12 - S-STD - - - -20 .250 .13 - S-STD - - - -22 .250 .15 - S-STD - - - -24 .250 .15 - S-STD - - - -26 .3125 .17 - S-10 S-STD - - -28 .3125 .19 - S-10 S-STD - - -30 .3125 .20 - S-10 S-STD - - -

197

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 32 .3125 .21 - S-10 S-STD - - -34 .3125 .23 - S-STD - - - -36 .3125 .24 - S-STD S-XS - - -END

Parameters

Table_Data_Definition - Thickness Data Table Name (character 6) — This fieldidentifies the name of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions:

— first character: T

— second character: code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size forwhich threaded components are used in the piping materials class, as defined below.Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies toaluminum alloys, stainless steels, and non-ferrous alloys.

A= Criteria 1 with no threaded componentsB= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameterC= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameterD= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameterF= Criteria 2 with no threaded componentsG= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameterH= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameterI= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameterZ= Special criteria

— third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which thetable is intended, per the following criteria:

1= None2= 0.020"3= 0.030"4= 0.050"5= 0.063"6= 0.10"7= 0.125"8= 0.188"9= 0.250"A= 405 cladB= 410S clad

C= 304 cladD= 304L cladE= 316 cladF= 316L cladG= 317 cladH= 317L cladJ= 321 cladL= Cement linedM= Epoxy linedN= Glass linedO= Kynar lined

P= Polyester linedQ= Polypropylene linedR= PTFE linedS= Saran linedT= Teflon linedU= TK31 linedV= R11 linedW= R15 linedX= R18 linedY= Other 1Z= Other 2

— fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the tablename unique.

Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) — This parameter identifies the desiredvalue for nominal diameter.

198

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Thickness Data Tables________________ Min Thick - Minimum Required Thickness (real) — This parameter represents theleast thickness, inclusive of corrosion allowance and mill tolerance, which is acceptablefor a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. Thisvalue is only used in piping wall thickness calculations.

Ret Thick - Retirement Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the leastthickness, exclusive of corrosion allowance, thread allowance, or mill tolerance, whichis acceptable for a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must beprovided. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations.

Thread Thick - Thread Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the thicknessfor threaded pipe that must be added to the calculated wall thickness to account for thepresence of threads. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. It isonly used in piping wall thickness calculations.

Preferred Schedule/Thicknesses 1 through 6 (real) — These parameters representthe schedules and/or thicknesses you prefer be used as a result of a piping wallthickness calculation. Values in the table are arranged in ascending thickness sequence.The system rounds the calculated wall thickness to the next higher preferred thickness.You are restricted to a limit of six preferred thicknesses. PDS requires that these valuesbe in inches.

199


6.1.4 Materials Data Table

The Materials Data Table consists of the materials data that is a function of the table name,material grade, wall thickness range, and temperature. These tables include the propertieswhich are required for the calculation of piping wall thickness. You must insure that units ofmeasure used in the Materials Table are consistent with those used in the correspondingTemperature-Pressure Table(s).

Note that you can express the mill tolerance as either a thickness percentage or a tolerancevalue. Only one value can exist per table entry. If values exist for both, the system only usesthe mill thickness percentage.

The system uses the materials grade and temperature to access the information in the table andprovide the values of thickness range, coefficient Y, allowable stress (S), and the applicablemill tolerance. Once the actual thickness is calculated for the component, the calculationsoftware compares that value with the thickness range. If the thickness range is exceeded, thenext entry in the materials table for the applicable materials grade and temperature is soughtand the calculation process is repeated.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’MWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6Input_Interpolation 2, Next_OneUnits= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN

! Mill Tol! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % ValueWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZWWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZEND

200

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Materials Data Table________________

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’ML01’! Description= ASTM A53-B, A106, API 5L-B! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=24-Feb-87No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6Input_Interpolation 2, Next_OneUnits= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN

! Mill Tolrnce! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value142 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -142 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -142 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -142 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -142 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -142 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -142 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -142 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -142 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -142 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -142 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -162 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -162 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -162 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -162 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -162 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -162 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -162 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -162 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -162 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -162 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -162 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -116 -20 - - .4 20000 12.5 -116 100 - - .4 20000 12.5 -116 200 - - .4 20000 12.5 -116 300 - - .4 20000 12.5 -116 400 - - .4 20000 12.5 -116 500 - - .4 18900 12.5 -116 600 - - .4 17300 12.5 -116 650 - - .4 17000 12.5 -116 700 - - .4 16500 12.5 -116 750 - - .4 13000 12.5 -116 800 - - .4 10800 12.5 -END

Parameters

Table_Data_Definition - Materials Data Table Name (character 6) — This fieldidentifies the number of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions:

— first character: M

— second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention:

A= ASME Section I [Power Boilers]B= ASME Section III [Nuclear]C= Do not use

D= ASME Section VIII-1 [UnfiredVessels]

201


E= ASME Section VIII-2 [UnfiredVessels]

J= ANSI-B31.1 [Power]K= ANSI-B31.2 [Fuel Gas]L= ANSI-B31.3 [Petroleum]M= ANSI-B31.4 [Oil Transport]

N= ANSI-B31.5 [Refrigeration]P= ANSI-B31.8 [Gas Transmission]Q= ANSI-B31.9 [Building Services]T= APIV= AWWA

— third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the tablename unique.

Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One — This statement must be included as shown forinterpolation to take place. Interpolation is used for all the output fields, if required.

Mat Gr - Material Grade (integer - standard note 145) — This code-listedparameter identifies the materials grade. This compound attribute includes the code,specification, grade, temper, and joint efficiency to be used for the component.

Temp - Temperature (real) — This field identifies the applicable temperature for aset of material properties.

Thick - Wall Thickness Range - low (real)

Range - Wall Thickness Range - high (real) — These fields identify the lower andupper wall thickness bounds for a set of material properties. You can enter positivenumbers or blanks. A blank indicates that the properties apply regardless of thethickness of the component. You cannot define this range in terms of schedule.

Y - Coefficient Y (real) — This parameter represents the coefficient Y correspondingto the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positive number or ablank.

S - Allowable Stress (real) — This parameter represents the allowable stresscorresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positivenumber or a blank. S is the basic allowable stress for the material excluding casting,joint or structural grade quality factor (E).

Mill Tol % - Mill Thickness Percentage (real) — This parameter represents the percent of the wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for pipe material.Enter the mill tolerance to be considered for the material as a percent of nominalthickness; such as 12.5%.

Mill Tol Value - Mill Thickness Value (real) — This parameter represents the actualwall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for plate material. Enter thevalue of mill tolerance to be considered for the material; such as 0.01 inch.

202

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations________________

6.1.5 Wall Thickness and Branch ReinforcementEquations

These equations define formulas for the calculation of piping wall thickness and branchreinforcement to resist positive pressure. The actual equations and their logic are hardcodedin the software. PDS requires that the thickness value be defined in inches.

Thickness equations have project unique names which must follow the following convention:

first character: E

second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention:

A= ASME Section I [Power Boilers]B= ASME Section III [Nuclear]C= Do not useD= ASME Section VIII-1 [Unfired Vessels]E= ASME Section VIII-2 [Unfired Vessels]J= ANSI-B31.1 [Power]K= ANSI-B31.2 [Fuel Gas]L= ANSI-B31.3 [Petroleum]M= ANSI-B31.4 [Oil Transport]N= ANSI-B31.5 [Refrigeration]P= ANSI-B31.8 [Gas Transmission]Q= ANSI-B31.9 [Building Services]T= APIV= AWWA

third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the equationname unique.

If the equation name is provided as part of the definition *Cyyy in theSchedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table, theequation name must be limited to the format Ex; no third or fourth character can bedefined.

203


Delivered Equations

The thickness and branch reinforcement logic for the following equations are hardcoded in thesoftware.

EJ01

Source - ANSI-B31.1.1986 [Power Piping]Thickness logic from paragraph 104.1, equation 3Reinforcement logic from paragraph 104.3.1(D)

tm =2(SE+Py)

PD_________ + A

EL01

Source - ANSI-B31.3c.1986 [Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping]Thickness logic from paragraph 304.1, equation 3aReinforcement logic from paragraph 304.3.3 & Code - Appendix H

t =2(SE+PY)

PD_________

where

P Design pressureD Pipe outside diameterS Allowable stress read from the Materials tableE Joint quality factor determined from the wall thickness attribute Cxxx where

xxx is 100 times EY Coefficient Y read from the Materials tableA Additional Thickness (in inches)

Refer to the spec access example below for more information on how the wall thicknessequation is used to determine the actual wall thickness value.

General Considerations

The following considerations apply to both thickness equations and branch reinforcementcalculations.

Pressures and temperatures used in thickness/branch reinforcement calculations arederived from data in the Piping Design TDB. Both normal and alternate pressure andtemperature conditions are considered. If actual values exist for the normal design orthe alternate design pressure/temperatures, the corresponding operating conditions areignored. If default values exist for BOTH sets of design conditions, both normal andalternate operating conditions are used. At least one complete set of conditions must bedefined.

204

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Delivered Equations________________ Once the proper pressure and temperature sets are determined, their units of measure areconverted to those used in the Temperature-Pressure Table associated with the PipingMaterials Class to which the component belongs. Refer to the descriptions of theTemperature-Pressure Table and Materials Table to insure consistency between units ofmeasure. Conversions are performed using the procedures and conversion factorsdefined for the Units of Measure in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

Only positive pressure is considered. The system reports an error if you request athickness calculation involving a vacuum condition (negative pressure).

Independent sets of thickness/reinforcement calculations are carried out for eachapplicable pressure/temperature set. In each calculation set, table values that aretemperature dependent are determined on the basis of the temperature applicable to thecalculation set being considered. The thicker calculated thickness is used.

Thickness Equations

The following considerations apply to thickness equations.

Thickness calculations are triggered by specifying an equation name in theSchedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. Anasterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation ortable lookup to be used for wall thickness. The letters that form this code have thefollowing meaning:

— C is the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determinedby calculations using the thickness equation defined in the thickness_equationattribute of the Piping Materials Class Data table.

— yyy is the casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100. This factor isone of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. If you are defining acalculation to be performed on a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match thethickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe shouldbe entered here.

For components with ends having different nominal diameters, independent sets ofthickness determinations are performed for each NPD. One or more ends may need tobe calculated, as determined by specific *Cyyy entries in the Piping CommoditySpecification Data table. The larger thickness (calculated or predefined) is used. Forexample:

— A 20" x 10" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy, 20"end and a 0.55" thick, 10" end. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5"thickness. A 0.55" thick reducer is used.

— A 24" x 20" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *Cyyy, 24"end and a *Cyyy, 20" end. The calculation of the 24" end results in a 0.6"thickness. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5" thickness. A 0.6" thickreducer is used.

205

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ All thickness calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E).The value for this factor is yyy/100, where yyy is defined in the entry *Cyyy madeunder the Schedule Thickness attribute for the Commodity Item under consideration.

Branch Reinforcement

The following considerations apply to branch reinforcement calculations.

The need to perform a branch reinforcement calculation is triggered by

— the placement of a generic branch component with the actual item name determinedfrom a branch table. (See Branch Insertion Tables.)

— the presence of more than one item name in the Preferred Branch AABBCC Codesfields of the applicable branch table.

— the applicable branch reinforcement being either a reinforcing weld or a reinforcingpad.

All calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E). The valuefor this factor is yyy/100, where yyy is defined in the Modifier attribute for entries withan item name of PIPING.

The fillet welds joining reinforcing pads to the header and to the branch are consideredin determining the available reinforcement area.

Spec Access

The execution of a pipe wall thickness calculation is performed when the variablePIPE_OD_n is encountered in the physical data definition of a pipe or component. Therefore,pipe outside diameter must be calculated or retrieved from a table before the wall thicknesscan be used as part of a table name.

Once the actual thickness is calculated, it is compared against the thickness range in theMaterials table and the retirement thickness in the Thickness Data table. The system uses thegreater of these values as the uncorroded wall thickness. Then the system adds the corrosionallowance from the PMC, the thread thickness from the wall thickness table, and the milltolerance from the Materials table. This revised thickness is compared against the minimumthickness value in the Thickness Data table. The larger of these two values is comparedagainst the preferred thickness value in the Thickness Data table, and the next largestpreferred value is used for table look-ups and is stored in the design database.

If the Thickness Data table uses schedules as preferred thickness, the schedules are translatedto an actual thickness by a table look-up from a table of the form

MALWT//Term_type//shc_thick//generic_flag//weight_code

206

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Delivered Equations________________ and output 2 gives the actual wall thickness.

Verification of Schedule Thickness

You can set an option in the RDB to determine how the piping segment overrideschedule/thickness value will be handled during wall thickness calculations. By default, thepiping segment schedule/thickness override is used in place of the value determined from thePiping Job Specification.

207


6.1.6 Branch Insertion Tables

A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. You mustspecify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the reinforcement data.

Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the pipingsystem as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for theintersecting lines. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Y’s and crosses.For them, the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design.

The types of tee branch connections include branch weld, coupling, threadolet, reducing tee,tee with reducing insert, nipolet, branch weld with reinforcing pad, sockolet, tee, weldolet, teewith reducing bushing, and reducing tee with reducer(s).

The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when noreinforcement component has been specifically defined.

The system uses the information in this table and the header nominal diameter (first size) andbranch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to be usedat the intersection. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’BWWWW_WW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6

! Nom Diam Preferred Branch! Header Branch AABBCC CodesWWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’END

208

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Branch Insertion Tables________________

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’BA501_90’! Description= A,0.063CA, Use with TA501! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=3 Date=17-Aug-1988No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6

! Nom Diam Preferred Branch! Header Branch AABBCC Codes0.75 0.75 ’6Q3C22’ - -1 0.75 ’6Q3C24’ - -1 1 ’6Q3C22’ - -1.5 0.75 ’6Q3C24’ - -1.5 1 ’6Q3C24’ - -1.5 1.5 ’6Q3C22’ - -2 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -2 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -2 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -2 2 ’6Q3C22’ - -3 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -3 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -3 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 3 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -3 3 ’6Q3C22’ - -4 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -4 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -4 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 4 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 4 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -4 4 ’6Q3C22’ - -6 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -6 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -6 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 6 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 6 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 6 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -6 6 ’6Q3C22’ - -8 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -8 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -8 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 8 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 8 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 8 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 8 6 ’6Q3C73’ - -8 8 ’6Q3C22’ - -10 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -10 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -10 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 10 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 10 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 10 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -10 6 ’6Q3C82’ - -10 8 ’6Q3C82’ - -10 10 ’6Q3C22’ - -12 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -12 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -12 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 12 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 12 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 12 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -12 6 ’6Q3C82’ - -12 8 ’6Q3C82’ - -12 10 ’6Q3C82’ - -12 12 ’6Q3C22’ - -

END

209


Parameters

Table_Data_Definition - Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) — This fieldidentifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the BranchTable entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of intersectionbetween the header and the branch.

These tables use the following naming conventions:

— first character: B

— second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum sizefor which threaded components are used in the PMC, as defined below. Criteria 1applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys,stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys.

A= Criteria 1 with no threaded componentsB= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameterC= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameterD= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameterF= Criteria 2 with no threaded componentsG= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameterH= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameterI= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameterZ= Special criteria

— third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which thetable is intended, per the following criteria:

1= None2= 0.020"3= 0.030"4= 0.050"5= 0.063"6= 0.10"7= 0.125"8= 0.188"9= 0.250"A= 405 cladB= 410S clad

C= 304 cladD= 304L cladE= 316 cladF= 316L cladG= 317 cladH= 317L cladJ= 321 cladL= Cement linedM= Epoxy linedN= Glass linedO= Kynar lined

P= Polyester linedQ= Polypropylene linedR= PTFE linedS= Saran linedT= Teflon linedU= TK31 linedV= R11 linedW= R15 linedX= R18 linedY= Other 1Z= Other 2

— fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the tablename unique.

The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection. Negativevalues and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid.

However, when dealing with branch reinforcements, negative values and values lessthan 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI B31.1 and ANSIB31.3).

210

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Branch Insertion Tables________________ The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD.

Nom Diam Header - NPD for Run (integer) — This field identifies the nominaldiameter of the header at the intersection. This is the member with the largest nominaldiameter.

Nom Diam Branch - NPD for Branch (integer) — This field identifies the nominaldiameter of the branch member at the intersection. This is the member with thesmallest nominal diameter.

Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) — These field identify thecommodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection.

— If only one item name is listed, no branch reinforcement calculation is performed.The specified item is placed at the intersection.

— If two or more item names apply in one line, the system calculates the branchreinforcement thickness. The system tests the listed item names sequentially (fromleft to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied.

Therefore, these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (forexample, reinforcing welds, followed by reinforcing pads, followed by weldolets.)

Typically, the codes are from one of the following types:

— Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads.

— Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets.

— Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.

211


6.1.7 Gasket Separation Table

These tables define the gasket gap to be used for a given nominal diameter and maximumtemperature.

For each bolted end, the system uses the applicable table, the NPD of the end, and themaximum temperature for the gasket to be used at the end, to determine the gap thickness tobe used at the end. Lines in this table are sorted by NPD first and maximum temperaturesecond.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’GWWW_WWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN

! Diam TMx Gaskt GapWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZWWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’G001_1500’! Description= SP-1000 deg F , RJ-1001 deg F! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=24-Jun-1987No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN

! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap0.5 1000 .1250.75 1000 .1251 1000 .1251.5 1000 .1252 1000 .1253 1000 .1254 1000 .1256 1000 .1258 1000 .12510 1000 .12512 1000 .12514 1000 .12516 1000 .12518 1000 .12520 1000 .12524 1000 .1250.5 1001 .160.75 1001 .161 1001 .161.5 1001 .162 1001 .123 1001 .12

212

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Gasket Separation Table________________ 4 1001 .126 1001 .128 1001 .1610 1001 .1612 1001 .1914 1001 .2216 1001 .3118 1001 .3120 1001 .3824 1001 .44END

Parameters

Table_Data_Definition - Gasket Gap Table Name (character 6) — This fieldidentifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the entrydefined in the Piping Materials Class with the rating of the bolted end to which thegasket gap applies. These tables use the following naming conventions:

— first character: G

— next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table nameunique.

— The second part of the table name is the rating of the components to which itapplies. The characters CL and # are not included in the rating designation.

Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter — This field identifies the applicable NPD value.The units of measure used to define the NPD must match the NPD units to be used inthe Piping model.

TMx - Maximum Temperature — This field identifies the maximum temperature forthe gasket as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute5). (The system must find a match of the commodity item temperature and the value inthis column for successful retrieval of data.)

The units of measure used to define the temperature must be the same as the units usedin the Temperature Pressure Service Limits table.

Gasket Gap — This field identifies the full gasket gap to be used.

213


6.1.8 Fluid Code Table

Fluid Code tables can be used to limit the number of fluid codes which are valid for aparticular Piping Material Class. A Fluid Code table works much like the Diameters table.Where the Diameters Table contains a valid set of diameters for a PMC, the Fluid Code tablecontains a set of valid Fluid Codes for a PMC.

To use a Fluid Code table,

Specify the name of the Fluid Code Table in the fluid_code attribute of the PipingMaterials Class definition.

Set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of theProject Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) ReferenceGuide for more information on this form.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’FC001’! Description= By Process Vendor! By=SCC Ckd By=SCC Rev=1 Date=12-OCT-90No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0Units= INT

521522524527530533536539542545550END

Parameters

Table_Data_Definition (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the FluidCode table. These tables use the following naming conventions:

— first and second character: FC

— third, forth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 to 999 used to make the tablename unique.

Fld Cd (integer) — This field list the code list numbers for the valid fluid codes fromcode list set 125.

214

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

RDB Tables________________

6.2 RDB Tables

The following reference data tables are defined in the Spec Table Library. These tablesrequired to provide basic data for the performance of the software.

TNF Table Name

G02 COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME

G04 BEND_DEFLECTION

G06 PIPE_RUN_LENGTH

G07 PIPE_LENGTH

G11 BOLT_LENGTH

WELD_TYPE_TABLE

WELD_C10031

DRV_WELD_DEF

CommodityCode_BLT (Bolt Commodity Code Table)

CommodityCode_GKT (Gasket Diameter Table)

FIELD_FIT_LENGTH

Component_Mirror_Table

Operator_Mirror_Table

Default_End_Prep

MTO Tables and Functions

The system uses the settings in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of theProject Data Manager to determine the applicable names for these basic tables.

Refer to Table Formats and Naming Conventions, page 303, for informationon the basic conventions used for PDS tables.

215


6.2.1 Commodity Item Name Table (G02)

The commodity item name table is used when placing a component at the vertex of anexisting piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). It enables youto relate the component types (1 to 70) hard-coded in the software with the applicable ItemNames. As the system processes the segment for component placement, it uses the derivedItem Name from this table to reference the Piping Commodity Specification data in theSpecification Material Reference Database.

When placing change of direction components, this table is used in conjunction with the BendDeflection Table.

The table name format that applies to this table is:

TNF=G02 COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME’! Description= Correlation of hardcoded component types and AABBCC codes! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=16-May-1989No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= INT, AN*6

! Comp AABBCC! Type Code1 ’PIPING’2 ’TUBING’3 ’HOSE’4 ’6Q2C23’5 ’6Q2C01’6 ’6Q2C01’7 ’6Q2C76’8 ’6Q2C75’9 ’6Q2C56’10 ’6Q2C55’11 ’6Q3C45’12 ’6Q3C60’13 ’6Q2C47’14 ’6Q2C84’15 ’6Q3C47’16 ’6Q3C49’17 ’6Q3C50’18 ’6Q3C25’19 ’6Q3C47’20 ’6Q3C77’21 ’6Q3C82’22 ’6Q3C80’

> 23 ’6Q3C88’> 24 ’6Q2C24’25 ’6Q1C76’26 -27 -28 ’6Q2C16’29 ’6Q2C19’30 ’6Q2C21’31 ’6Q2C08’32 -33 -34 -

216

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Commodity Item Name Table (G02)________________ 35 -36 -37 -38 ’IND’39 -40 -41 ’6Q2C49’42 ’6Q2C51’43 ’6Q2C53’44 ’6Q2C06’45 ’6Q3C89’END

The meaning of the various component types is outlined below:

Comp Type Definition1 Piping (not used by the software)2 Tubing (not used by the software)3 Hose (not used by the software)4 Concentric diameter change5 Flange in bends6 Flange in other components7 90 degree directional change8 45-90 degree directional change9 45 degree directional change10 < 45 degree directional change11 True Y12 Equal size cross (if not equal size, software will handle as a branch)13 > 90 pipe bend14 90 degree reducing elbow15 Lateral (not used by the software)16 Reducing lateral17 Reducing run and branch lateral18 Reducing run and branch tee19 Lateral (not used by the software)20 Elbolet (used by Compute for Elbolet under the Tap command)21 Reinforcing weld22 Reinforcing pad23 Branch nipple25-27 vent/drain valve A - C28 end29 plug30 cap31 blind flange32-37 Closing component A - F38-40 Instrument indicator A - C41 5.625 degree bend42 11.25 degree bend43 22.5 degree bend44 Orifice flange45 In-line nipple51-60 Pipe-like commodity item 1 - 1061-70 Pipe-like model code 1 - 10

217

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ If you do not want to place one of the above component types as part of automatic componentplacement, place a hyphen (-) for the Item Name.

218

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Bend Deflection Table (G04)________________

6.2.2 Bend Deflection Table (G04)

The bend deflection table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existingpiping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). The system uses thebend angle at the segment vertex to determine the type of component to be placed.

This table contains the following data

bend angle - low

bend angle - high

index into the Commodity Item Name table for a full size bend

index into the Commodity Item Name table for a reducing bend

This table defines which full size and reducing size component types will be placed for aspecified angle range. The angle is defined as the smallest angle that the continuation of onepipe run makes with the other run. The component types are defined in the commodity itemname table. (See Commodity Item Name Table (G02), page 216.) A value of 0 for the typeindicates that no reducing component should be placed for an angle range.

The system uses the bend angle to search this table for the matching range of bend angles.The system uses the index into the Commodity Item Name table for either a full size bend or areducing bend depending upon the nominal piping diameters of the line route segments thatform the bend. The system searches for an entry in the table where the angle is greater than orequal to the low bend angle and less than the high bend angle.

You can define more than one bend deflection table for a project provided they are givendifferent names. For example, one table can apply to underground piping and the other toaboveground piping. Refer to the Component Placement form in the Project DataManager for information on defining the bend deflection table for a project or model.


TNF=G04 BEND_DEFLECTION

219


Example

Table_Data_Definition ’BEND_DEFLECTION’! Description= Component type to use as function of angle between runs! By=EPZ Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=09-Nov-1987No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 2Units= DEC, DEC, INT, INT

! Angle Comp Type To Use! Low High Full Red0.1 44.9 10 044.9 45.1 9 045.1 89.9 8 089.9 90.1 7 1490.1 179.9 13 0END

The following listing shows the component types used in this example.

bend angle indexlow high full size reducing size0.1 44.9 10 ( < 45 trimmed bend) N/A44.9 45.1 9 (45 bend) N/A45.1 89.9 8 (45-90 trimmed bend) N/A89.9 90.1 7 (90 bend) 14 (reducing 90 bend)90.1 179.9 13 ( > 90 trimmed bend) N/A

220

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06)________________

6.2.3 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table(G06)

This table enables you to define the minimum allowable segment run length which can beplaced in the model during centerline routing. The values defined in this table do not apply tothe segment run automatically created by the software when placing components end to end.

The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe run of a piping segment exceeds theactive segment run length threshold. The threshold is determined from this table as a functionof nominal piping diameter. The only exception to this is for the small pipe run required forthe offset of an eccentric reducer. This threshold is used to insure that the pipe run betweentwo connected bends exceeds the fabrication length of the two bends.

The value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows:

DiamEntry Range of Diameters Covered

n1 nominal diameter < n1n2 n1 <= nominal diameter < n2n3 n2 <= nominal diameter < n3....n8n9 n8 <= nominal diameter

Using this scheme, you should look on the line following the actual segment NPD todetermine the minimum length. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table areallowed. For example, if you are placing a segment with 12 inch NPD, you can only placesegments greater than .75 inches in length.


TNF=G06 PIPE_RUN_LENGTH

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’PIPE_RUN_LENGTH’! Description= Minimum allowable piping segment run length! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, IN

! Diam Min Length2 0.256 0.5012 0.5024 0.7536 1.0096 1.00144 1.00192 1.00END

221


6.2.4 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07)

This table enables you to define the minimum and preferred allowable pipe lengths which canbe placed (manually or by automatic component placement).

The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe or tube exceeds the pipe lengththreshold, as defined in this table. The threshold is determined as a function of the nominalpiping diameter. This table is used during model creation and model revision activities toverify the nominal or theoretical pipe (or tube) length.

Any value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows:

DiamEntry Range of Diameters Covered

n1 nominal diameter < n1n2 n1 <= nominal diameter < n2n3 n2 <= nominal diameter < n3....n8n9 n8 <= nominal diameter

Using this scheme, you should look on the line following the actual NPD to determine theminimum length. Only lengths greater than the minimum length in the table are allowed. Forexample, if you are placing a pipe with 12 inch NPD, you can only place pipe runs greaterthan 3 inches in length.


For TNF=G07 PIPE_LENGTH

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’PIPE_LENGTH’! Description= Minimum and preferred allowable plain piping length! By=DCG Ckd By=GJH Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN

! Min Preferred! Diam Length Length2 2 26 2 312 2 424 3 636 3 996 3 12144 6 12192 6 12END

222

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)________________

6.2.5 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)

The data for bolts and gaskets is a function of nominal diameter, end preparation for eachmating flange, and pressure rating for each mating flange. The bolt length table supplies datafor machine bolts, stud bolts, and cap screws. It determines the bolt data required for bothregular and bolt-thru bolts. This table enables you to define the low and high range forcalculated bolt lengths and the corresponding preferred or purchased lengths of the bolt.

You can define up to 300 entries in this table.


For TNF=G11 BOLT_LENGTH

Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on bolt tables and bolttable logic.

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’BOLT_LENGTH’! Description= Preferred bolt lengths (maximum of 300 entries)! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=04-Aug-1987No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= IN, IN, IN

! Bolt Length Preferred! Low High Bolt Length0.0 1.5 1.51.5001 1.75 1.751.7501 2 22.0001 2.25 2.252.2501 2.5 2.52.5001 2.75 2.752.7501 3 33.0001 3.25 3.253.2501 3.5 3.53.5001 3.75 3.753.7501 4 44.0001 4.25 4.254.2501 4.5 4.54.5001 4.75 4.754.7501 5 55.0001 5.25 5.255.2501 5.5 5.55.5001 5.75 5.755.7501 6 66.0001 6.25 6.256.2501 6.5 6.56.5001 6.75 6.756.7501 7 77.0001 7.25 7.257.2501 7.5 7.57.5001 7.75 7.757.7501 8 88.0001 8.25 8.258.2501 8.5 8.58.5001 8.75 8.758.7501 9 99.0001 9.25 9.259.2501 9.5 9.5

223

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 9.5001 9.75 9.759.7501 10 1010.0001 10.25 10.2510.2501 10.5 10.510.5001 10.75 10.7510.7501 11 1111.0001 11.25 11.2511.2501 11.5 11.511.5001 11.75 11.7511.7501 12 1212.0001 12.25 12.2512.2501 12.5 12.512.5001 12.75 12.7512.7501 13 1313.0001 13.25 13.2513.2501 13.5 13.513.5001 13.75 13.7513.7501 14 1414.0001 14.25 14.2514.2501 14.5 14.514.5001 14.75 14.7514.7501 15 1515.0001 15.25 15.2515.2501 15.5 15.515.5001 15.75 15.7515.7501 16 1616.0001 16.25 16.2516.2501 16.5 16.516.5001 16.75 16.7516.7501 17 1717.0001 17.25 17.2517.2501 17.5 17.517.5001 17.75 17.7517.7501 18 1818.0001 18.25 18.2518.2501 18.5 18.518.5001 18.75 18.7518.7501 19 1919.0001 19.25 19.2519.2501 19.5 19.519.5001 19.75 19.7519.7501 20 2020.0001 20.25 20.2520.2501 20.5 20.520.5001 20.75 20.7520.7501 21 2121.0001 21.25 21.2521.2501 21.5 21.521.5001 21.75 21.7521.7501 22 2222.0001 22.25 22.2522.2501 22.5 22.522.5001 22.75 22.7522.7501 23 2323.0001 23.25 23.2523.2501 23.5 23.523.5001 23.75 23.7523.7501 24 2424.0001 24.25 24.2524.2501 24.5 24.524.5001 24.75 24.7524.7501 25 2525.0001 25.25 25.2525.2501 25.5 25.525.5001 25.75 25.7525.7501 26 2626.0001 26.25 26.2526.2501 26.5 26.526.5001 26.75 26.75

224

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)________________ 26.7501 27 2727.0001 27.25 27.2527.2501 27.5 27.527.5001 27.75 27.7527.7501 28 2828.0001 28.25 28.2528.2501 28.5 28.528.5001 28.75 28.7528.7501 29 2929.0001 29.25 29.2529.2501 29.5 29.529.5001 29.75 29.7529.7501 30 3030.0001 30.25 30.2530.2501 30.5 30.530.5001 30.75 30.7530.7501 31 3131.0001 31.25 31.2531.2501 31.5 31.531.5001 31.75 31.7531.7501 32 3232.0001 32.25 32.2532.2501 32.5 32.532.5001 32.75 32.7532.7501 33 3333.0001 33.25 33.2533.2501 33.5 33.533.5001 33.75 33.7533.7501 34 3434.0001 34.25 34.2534.2501 34.5 34.534.5001 34.75 34.7534.7501 35 3535.0001 35.25 35.2535.2501 35.5 35.535.5001 35.75 35.7535.7501 36 36END

225


6.2.6 Weld Type Table

This table defines the weld type code for a given pair of fabrication category values. Thefabrication category values are determined from the connect point data at each of the matingwelded ends.


WELD_TYPE_TABLE

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’Weld_Type_Table’! This Table nas NOT been CheckedNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= INT, INT, INT

! Fab Cat Fab Cat Weld Type

1 1 11 5 211 7 211 15 211 16 211 17 211 25 211 27 211 35 211 37 211 45 211 47 211 95 211 97 215 5 115 7 215 15 115 16 215 17 215 25 115 27 215 35 115 37 215 45 115 47 215 95 115 97 217 7 217 15 217 16 217 17 217 25 217 27 217 35 217 37 217 45 217 47 217 95 217 97 2115 15 1115 16 2115 17 2115 25 11

226

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Weld Type Table________________ 15 27 2115 35 1115 37 2115 45 1115 47 2115 95 1115 97 2116 16 1216 17 2116 25 2116 27 2116 35 2116 37 2116 45 2116 47 2116 95 2116 97 2117 17 2117 25 2117 27 2117 35 2117 37 2117 45 2117 47 2117 95 2117 97 2125 25 1125 27 2125 35 1125 37 2125 45 1125 47 2125 95 1125 97 2127 27 2127 35 2127 37 2127 45 2127 47 2127 95 2127 97 2135 35 1135 37 2135 45 1135 47 2135 95 1135 97 2137 37 2137 45 2137 47 2137 95 2137 97 2145 45 1145 47 2145 95 1145 97 2147 47 2147 95 2147 97 2195 95 1195 97 2197 97 21

227


6.2.7 Weld Clearance Table

This table contains information obtained from the NPD and the Weld Type table, which areretrieved from the piping model. Add a version of this table to the Physical Data Library foreach spec.


WELD_SpecName

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’WELD_1C0031’! Description= Weld Clearance Table! By=XXX Ckd By=XXX Rev=1 Date=01-22-1999No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4Units= NPD_IN, INT, NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN

! Weld Weld! NPD Type NPD Type Radius Overall! From From To To Increase Length

1 1 2 25 6 183 1 4 25 8 245 1 6 25 10 307 1 8 25 6 189 1 10 20 10 189 21 10 22 12 249 23 10 25 14 3011 1 12 25 10 30

END

Parameters

NPD From - NPD To (integer) — These parameters identify the range of nominalpiping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units. The Tovalue must equal or exceed the From value.

Weld_Type_From - Weld_Type_To (integer) — These parameters identify the rangeof weld type values (from standard note 1100). The To value must equal or exceed theFrom value.

Radius_Increase (integer - NPD Units) — This parameter identifies the increase tobe applied to the NPD of the weld for use in generating a cylinder to represent theconstruction tolerance envelope for the weld.

Overall_Length (integer) — This parameter identifies the length of the cylinder forthe weld construction tolerance envelope.

228

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Weld Graphics Dimensions Table________________

6.2.8 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table

This table provides the dimensions used to generate the graphical representation of welds in aDesignReview session. You may customize this table to modify the appearance of weldgraphics by weld type and diameter. The table name format that applies to this table is:

DRV_WELD_DEF

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’DRV_WELD_DEF’! Description= WELD GRAPHICS DIMENSIONS! TNF=G12T By=XXX Ckd By=XX Rev=0 Date= 04-Oct-2000No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4Units= NPD_IN, INT, NPD_IN, INT, DEC, DEC

! From_NPD From_Weld_Type TO_NPD To_Weld_Type Weld_Dia_Increase Weld_Thickness_NPD_Units

2 10 7 22 0.25 0.256 12 10 22 0.25 0.258 10 12 22 0.25 0.25END

Parameters

From NPD - TO _NPD (integer) — These parameters identify the range of nominalpiping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the weld in NPD units. The Tovalue must equal or exceed the From value.

From_Weld_Type - To_Weld_Type (integer) — These parameters identify the rangeof the weld type values (from standard note 1100). The To value must equal or exceedthe From value.

Weld_Dia_Increase (decimal) — This parameter identifies the percentage increase tobe applied to the NPD of the weld for use in displaying a cylinder to represent the weldin SmartPlant Review. For example, if the NPD is 6" and the increase is .25, thediameter of the weld cylinder would be 7 1/2" (6 x 1.25 = 7.5).

Weld_Thickness (decimal) — This parameter identifies the percentage to be appliedto the NPD of the weld to determine the thickness of the cylinder.

If this table is absent or if there is no NPD range encapsulating the WELDNPD, the weld graphics dimensions will be determined as follows:

— Diameter = 130% of the NPD at the weld.

— Thickness = 25% of the NPD at the weld.

229


6.2.9 Bolt Commodity Code Table

This table is used if the Basis of Bolt Commodity Code is set to Bolt Commodity Code Tablein the Project Data Manager. The system uses the bolt length and bolt diameter to find thecommodity code in the table.

If you define a bolt commodity code which is less than 17 characters, you should code ahyphen (-) in the third column.


Cmdty Code_BLT

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_BLT’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4Units= IN, IN, IN, AN*8, AN*8, AN*8

! Bolt Bolt Length Bolt Commodity Code! Diam Low High 1 2 3WWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWWWW WWWWWWW ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZZEND

230

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Gasket Diameter Table________________

6.2.10 Gasket Diameter Table

This table is used if the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The systemuses the NPD to find the gasket outside and inside diameters.


Cmdty Code_GKT

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_GKT’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN

! Gasket Diameter! NPD Inside OutsideWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

231


6.2.11 Field Fit Length Table

This table defines the pipe length adjustment for a given weld type. The weld type isdetermined from the connect point data at the mating welded ends.

This table is only used if the Field Fit Length option is activated on the Material TakeoffOptions form in the Project Data Manager. MTO reads the specified table and increases thepipe length at each welded end of the pipe based on the weld type at that specific end.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’Fit_Length_Table’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ

No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= INT, IN

! Weld Type Adjust.

1 ZZZZZZZ11 ZZZZZZZ21 ZZZZZZZ22 ZZZZZZZ

232

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Component Mirror Table________________

6.2.12 Component Mirror Table

This table is used for components which require non-symmetrical mirroring. It defines amirror option for a given eden module. This table is called through the use of the Edenkeyword TOGGLE_<INT>, where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1.

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’Component_Mirror_Table’

No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3Units= AN*6, INT, INT, INT

! Model Code Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

Parameters

Model Code — This columns list the model codes for components which require non-symmetrical mirroring. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module.

Option 1 — This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specificcommand instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This columncan have any of the following values.

— mirror logic in the Eden module. All items with these setting must have a tutorialaccessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE duringplacement.

For example, if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Edenmodule to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component.

— degrees instead of mirroring it.

The Model Code item will be rotated due to a specific non symmetrical definitionwhere there are no non symmetrical connect points involved.

— the specific item.

The item will not be mirrored due to specific non symmetrical definition. In otherwords, the item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration which has nonsymmetrical connect points involved.

Option 2 & Option 3 — These columns are not currently used.

233


6.2.13 Operator Mirror Table

This table is used for operators that require non-symmetrical mirroring. It defines a mirroroption for a given eden module. This table is called through the use of the Eden keywordTOGGLE_<INT>, where <INT> is an integer value as defined below for Option 1.

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’Operator_Mirror_Table’

! This Table has NOT been Checked!

No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3Units= AN*6, INT, INT, INT

! Model Code Option 1 Option 2 Option 3

OI_33 1 - -OI_35 1 - -OI_43 1 - -OI_53 1 - -A_1033 1 - -OP_331 1 - -OP_332 1 - -OP_333 1 - -OP_334 1 - -OP_351 1 - -OP_493 1000 - -OP_494 1000 - -OP_573 1000 - -OP_574 1000 - -OP_711 1000 - -OP_853 1000 - -OP_854 1000 - -

Parameters

Model Code — This columns list the model codes for operator which supportmirroring. The model codes is used as input by the calling Eden module.

Option 1 — This column represents the TOGGLE_<INT> Eden variable or specificcommand instruction used to control a non symmetrical mirror operation. This columncan have any of the following values.

— mirror logic in the Eden module. All items with these setting must have a tutorialaccessed in the Eden module to allow the user to change the TOGGLE duringplacement.

For example, if Option 1 = 1 check the TOGGLE_1 Eden variable in the Edenmodule to perform specific logic to compensate for a mirrored component.

— degrees instead of mirroring it.

234

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Operator Mirror Table________________ For example, if Option 1 = 1000 the Model Code item will be rotated due to aspecific non symmetrical definition where there are no non symmetrical connectpoints involved.

— tell the Mirror command to rotate the component 180 degrees instead of mirroringit.

The item is only stocked in one non symmetrical configuration and does not havenon symmetrical connect points involved.

Option 2 & Option 3 — These columns are not currently used.

235


6.2.14 Default End Preperation Table

The Default End Preparation Table is an optional table that can be used to automatically setthe end preparation of instruments and piping specialties that are being placed in a pipingmodel.

The system looks for a table with the name Default_End_Prep in the spec table library.

If the table does not exist in the library, the end prep for the instrument/specialtydefaults to the end prep of the connected piping component.

If the table exists in the spec table library and the active placement point is connected topreviously placed piping or a nozzle, the end preparation for the instrument or pipingspecialty is set based on entries in the table.

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’Default_End_Prep’!No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= INT, INT!!E_P_in E_P_out

331 441392 421441 331421 391

Data Retrieval

The system performs a table look-up using the active end preparation value. In the tableabove, the last line (421 391) indicates that the end prep for an instrument/specialtyconnected to a SWE (421) component, will default to PE (391).

If the table does not exist in RDB, the end prep for the instrument/ specialty defaults to theend prep of the connected piping component. In the example above, the instrument/specialtyend prep would default to SWE (421).

236

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

MTO Tables and Functions________________

6.2.15 MTO Tables and Functions

The following special tables and functions are used by the system during Material Take-Off.Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on the reporting process.

field fit length tables (not currently implemented)

preferred bolt length tables

preferred bolt length roundoff factor

nut allowance table

bolt diameter and bolt pattern specification

Gasket Outside and Inside diameter tables

Bolt Length/Diameter Commodity Code tables

237


238

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Piping Job Specification Tables Command________________

6.3 Piping Job Specification TablesCommand

This command enables you to access the library management options for the Piping JobSpecification Table Library. You can create a new library file or create, modify, or delete datain an existing Library. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post datafrom the unapproved library to the approved library.

The spec tables for US practice are delivered in the file us_pjstb.l in the RDUSRDB productdirectory.

The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is revised. This revisionmanagement data is recorded in a separate Table Revision Management Library, named<table_library>.l.r. If the library has been removed or deleted, the software regenerates thelibrary file.

With the 4.2 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Librarywas increased from approximately 16,000 bytes per table to 20,000 bytes per table.

With the 7.1 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Piping Job Spec Table Librarywas increased from approximately 20,000 bytes to 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Piping Job SpecTable library files in the Reference Database Management Data.

You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

Operating Sequence

The Piping Job Specification Tables command activates the Specification TablesLibrary/Data Management form used to control the contents of the spec table library.

239


6.3.1 Options

Create Library — used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library. See page242.

Compress Library — used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library. See page242.

Unapproved ==> Approved — used to copy the unapproved Piping Job Spec Tablelibrary to the approved library. See page 242.

Create/Interactive — used to compile table files and add the resulting code to thePiping Job Spec Table library. You can create a single table or specify a list of tablesto be created. See page 243.

Create/Batch — used to compile and add tables to the library via batch processing.See page 244.

Revise — used to select a table from the library for editing and compile the revisedtable definition. See page 245.

Delete — used to delete a specified table from the library. See page 247.

Report — used to create a report of the library contents. See page 248.

List — used to list the files contained in the library. See page 250.

Extract — used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing. Seepage 251.

240

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Piping Job Specification Tables Command________________

Field Descriptions

Refer to Default Project Control Data, page 53, for information on defining the defaultlocation for library files. You can also change the default file locations for each option at anytime.

241


6.3.2 Create Library

This option is used to create a new Piping Job Spec Table Library. It automatically createsthe object library (.l), the text library (.l.t), and table revision management library (.l.t.r) forthe library that is being created.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Job Spec Table Library names asdefined in the RDB Management Data.

Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library

Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, thesystem displays an error indicating the library already exists.

6.3.3 Compress Library

This option is used to compress the Piping Job Spec Table library. Any tables which havebeen deleted from the library will be removed.

6.3.4 Unapproved ==> Approved

This option copies the unapproved Piping Job Spec Table library to the approved library.

Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying

Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

242

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Create/Interactive Spec Tables________________

6.3.5 Create/Interactive Spec Tables

This option enables you to compile tables and add the resulting code to the spec table library.You can create a single table or specify a list of tables to be created.


To add more than one table to the library, create a list file in the Piping Spec Path directorywhich identifies the names of the table files to be added. This file should list one filename perline with no directory paths. All of the listed files must reside in the Piping Spec Pathdirectory.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file.

3. Specify Filename for processing

Key in the name of the table file or list file to be compiled and added to the activelibrary. (Refer to PJS Tables and Functions, page 190, for information on the tableformats.)

4. Accept or Select Other Option

Accept the file and begin processing.

243


6.3.6 Create/Batch Spec Tables

This option enables you to load table files into the Spec Table Library as a batch operation ata specified time.


To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names ofthe table files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (filename) per line.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create/Batch option from the Specification Tables Library/DataManagement form.

2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single table file or to List to process a list file.

3. Specify Filename for Processing

Key in the name of the table file or list file to be added to the active library.

4. Accept to Submit or Set Submit Time

Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.

For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the table files.

5. Accept the file and begin processing.

The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

244

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Revise Spec Tables________________

6.3.7 Revise Spec Tables

This option enables you to revise selected table files from the library. For each table to beedited, select the table, edit the file, and then compile the table and put it back in the library.The system updates the revision date for revised table in the Table Revision ManagementLibrary.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Revise option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2. Select Table for Revision

Select the table file to be revised and select Accept.

3. The system extracts the specified table from the library and activates the text editor(specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

245

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Make any changes to the displayed file.

When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it backinto the library.

If an error occurs in revising a table, the editor screen is invoked automatically to giveyou an opportunity to correct the problem.

4. The system redisplays the list of table files.

You can select another table to be revised as specified in step 2.

246

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Delete Spec Tables________________

6.3.8 Delete Spec Tables

This option enables you to delete tables from the Piping Job Spec Table Library. It alsodeletes the revision date for the table from the Table Revision Management Library.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Delete option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2. Select Module Name

Select the table files to be deleted from the list of tables. You can use the scroll bar toscroll through the available tables.

3. Select Module Name, Accept or Exit

Accept the selected tables.

The system deletes the tables from the Spec Table Library.

247


6.3.9 Report on Spec Tables

This option creates a report of information in the Spec Table Library. You can create a listfile of all the table files in the Spec Table library or create a detailed report of all the tablesmodified since a specified date.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Report option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Managementform.

2. Set the toggle to Default Report to create a list file of all the table files in the library.

— OR —

Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a revision date to process all tablesmodified since the specified revision date. The report lists the full contents of themodified tables with individual revision dates per line.

3. Set the toggle to Report on Unapproved or Report on Approved to define the sourceof information to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approvedand the unapproved library are being used.

4. Accept to Form Report or Revise Report Parameters

Select Accept to form the report using the default parameters, and proceed to step 6.

— OR —

Key in the file information (Node Name and File Path) for the location of the neutralfile to be created.

248

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Report on Spec Tables________________

5. Select Save, Print or Print/Save.

For Print or Print/Save, select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Referto the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guidefor more information on setting up multiple print queues.

If you select the Save or Print/Save option, the system creates a file named spec_tablesin the default source file location or in the location you specified.

6. Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time

Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, setthe time to process the request.

7. Accept to Create Report

Select Accept to create the specified report file.

249


6.3.10 List Spec Tables

This option displays all the tables for the Spec Table Library with the revision date of eachtable.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the List option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Management form.

2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available tables.

250

6. Pip

ing

Job

S

pec T

ables

Extract Spec Tables________________

6.3.11 Extract Spec Tables

This option enables you to extract a table file or set of table files from the Spec Table Libraryfor editing or printing.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Extract option from the Specification Tables Library/Data Managementform.

2. Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar toscroll through the available files. You can extract multiple tables at one time.

— OR —

Select Extract All to to bulk extract all the tables in one operation.

The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory forPiping Spec Data. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a filenamed PD_tbl_list.

If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file,otherwise it overwrites the file.

251


252

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Graphic Commodity Data________________

7. Graphic Commodity Data

The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries:

Graphic Commodity Library - The delivered file\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l contains parametric definitions for thecomponents. See page 254.

Physical Data (Dimensions) Library - The delivered file\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l contains American dimension data for components.See page 266.

Piping Job Specification Table Library - The delivered file\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l contains specification tables referenced in the PipingJob Specification. See page 189.

Refer to Reference Data Overview, page 23, for an illustration of the relationships amongthese libraries.

When you select a component for placement in the model, the system

uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) tosearch the Piping Job Specification (PJS) for the selected item name. If the selecteditem is found in the PJS database, the system reads the PJS for the parameters requiredto place the component. Included in this information is the model code (or specialtyitem number) for the selected component and the names of the spec tables defined forthe Piping Materials Class.

uses the model code (or specialty item number), derived from the PJS, to access thegraphic commodity library. The definitions in the graphic commodity library determinethe physical tables required to place the component and call the tables in the physicalcommodity library.

places the symbol graphics in the model design file and writes the nongraphicinformation for the component in the database.

This section describes the graphic commodity data used in placing components in the pipingmodel. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for a detailed description of theactual placement process.

253


7.1 Graphic Commodity Library

The Graphic Commodity Library (GCL) provides data for commodity items, engineereditems, and instruments. It is basically a catalog of component data which is accessed to

determine physical data based on user specifications (such as NPD and end preparation)

assign connect point data from the Piping Job Specification

define the parametric shape for the model graphics. The Graphic Commodity Libraryincludes data required for model creation, resymbolization for model presentation,interference detection, and any special functions of the Piping Job Specification, pipingindustry standards, or company design practices.

PDS Piping uses the Eden Parametric Language to define and place components, specialtyitems, operators, and envelopes. Eden is a high- level language (similar to FORTRAN) whichuses information from the Piping Job Specification and model to access parametric anddimensional data.

Eden is composed of three major modules

Symbol Processors

Physical Data Subroutines

Parametric Shape Definitions

These modules are designed to carry out two functions: data definition and graphicpresentation.

The data associated with these modules is delivered in the following files:

\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l - object library\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\pip_gcom.l.t - text library

The modular approach provides for more efficient storage of information in these libraries byenabling common information to be shared by different symbols.

The first line of each Eden module defines the type of module (such as symbol processor) andthe module name. This statement determines a two- character category code to be prefixed tothe module name in the object library. This prefix is only used by the system; it should not bekeyed-in as part of the module name.

254

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Graphic Commodity Library________________

The entries in the library use the following prefixes to identify the type of data.

SP Symbol ProcessorPD Physical Data Definition ModuleUF User Function ModuleMG Model Parametric Shape Definition ModuleDG Detailed Parametric Shape Definition ModuleIG Interference Envelope Parametric Shape

Definition ModuleSS Sub-Symbol Processor Module

Each module must be given a unique name within the graphic commodity library. Refer tothe PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide for information on creating or modifying thesemodules.

255


7.1.1 Symbol Processors

A symbol processor is the controlling function or logic used to produce the graphics for acommodity item, piping specialty, instrument, pipe support, or interference envelope. Duringcomponent placement, the symbol processor

accesses the active component design parameters

assigns connect points

Calls the required physical data modules

determines and calls the required parametric shape modules.

The system retrieves the active component parameters which are dependent upon a connectpoint from the PJS in terms of green, red, or tap connect point properties. The symboldefinition assigns the data corresponding to these connect point types (green, red, or tap) tothe physical connect point numbers (CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4 or CP5).

The first line of the Eden module defines the type of module and the module name. Thefollowing statement is used in the Eden modules to indicate a symbol processor module.

Symbol_Processor ’module name’

This statement tells the system to use the category code SP for the prefix. You should use thefollowing conventions in assigning the module name. The module name is determined by thetype of component being placed (commodity item or specialty item).

For a commodity item, the system searches for the New Item Name (model code) of thecommodity item as the module name. If the New Item Name is blank in theCommodity Item entity, the system searches for the Item Name as the module name.

For a specialty item, the system searches for the specialty item name (derived from thePJS) as the module name.

For an instrument, the system searches for the instrument name (derived from the PJS)as the module name.

The delivered symbol processors are identified in the library with the prefix SP.

The following lists the symbol processor SPGAT which is used to control the placement of agate valve.

256

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Symbol Processors________________ ! REGULAR PATTERN, BOLTED OR MALE ENDS GATE VALVESymbol_Processor ’GAT’

Call Assign_Connect_Point ( GREEN, CP1 )Call Assign_Connect_Point ( RED, CP2 )

physical_data_source = ’V1’ // Standard_TypeCall Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source )

parametric_shape = ’V1’Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape )

Valve_Operator = DABS ( Valve_Operator )If ( Valve_Operator .NE. 0 ) Then

If ( Valve_Operator .LT. 1000 ) ThenSubcomponent = ’OP’ // Valve_Operator

ElseSubcomponent = ’A’ // Valve_Operator

EndIfOperator_Orient = FALSE

EndIfStopEnd

257


7.1.2 Sub-Symbol Processor

A subcomponent call in a symbol processor module indicates a sub-symbol processor.Subcomponents are additions to symbols such as an operator on a valve.

The first line of a sub-symbol processor module indicates the module type and the modulename.

Sub_Symbol_Processor ’module name’

This statement tells the system to use the category code SS for the prefix.

The sub-symbol processor name for operators is a concatenation of the characters OP_ and themodifier value from the Commodity Item entity in the PJS database. The value is expressedas a code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type). If the value is a positive number(such as 3) the operator is placed with the valve. If the value is a negative number (such as -3)the operator is not placed with the valve. (This is useful in segregating large diameter valveswhich almost always have a valve operator from small diameter valves which frequently donot have an operator.)

The symbol processor for the gate valve calls a sub-symbol processor (Subcomponent = ’OP’// Valve_Operator) which places an operator on the valve. The following depicts the sub-symbol processor SSOP_3 which is used to control the placement of a hand wheel operator onthe valve.

! HANDWHEEL OPERATORSub_Symbol_Processor ’OP_3’

If ( Operator_Orient .EQ. TRUE ) Thenprompt = 1.0Call Prompt_to_Orient_Operator ( prompt )

EndIfphysical_data_source = ’OPERATOR_3’

Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source )parametric_shape = ’OP3’

Call Draw_Parametric_Shape ( parametric_shape )StopEnd

258

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Physical Data Definitions________________

7.1.3 Physical Data Definitions

The system uses the physical data definitions to determine the dimension data, weight data,and surface area data using the active design parameters. Physical data modules are identifiedby the statement

Physical_Data_Definition ’module name’

as the first line in the Eden module. This statement tells the system to use the category codePD for the prefix. This prefix is only used by the system; it should not be keyed-in as part ofthe module name.

The module name for a physical data module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2,... forvalves) and a generic type of geometric industry standard (such as AMS or DIN). You candefine multiple physical data modules for the same symbol depending on the type of standardbeing referenced (for example, V1_AMS for American standards and V1_DIN for Europeanstandards).

You can manage ten different sets of logic for table naming conventions for the followingindustry practices. The corresponding table suffix ranges and the suffix for the Piping Edenphysical data modules are indicated below.

Practice Range SuffixU.S. Practice 1-99 AMSEuropean - DIN 100-199 DINEuropean - British Standard 200-299 BRITISH_STDEuropean - Practice A 300-399 EURO_AEuropean - Practice B 400-499 EURO_BInternational - JIS 500-599 JISInternational - Australian 600-699 AUSInternational - Practice A 700-799 INT_AInternational - Practice B 800-899 INT_BCompany Practice 900-999 COMPANY

The geometric industry standard for a component is defined in the Piping Commodity Datatable of the Material Reference Database. Each component must be assigned a geometricindustry standard if it is to use physical data tables.

For most of the delivered symbols, the physical data modules are classified into twocategories: specific and generic. The specific physical data module is called by the symbolprocessor. This module then calls a generic physical data module.

Specific Physical Data Modules

The physical data module PDV1_AMS determines the specific dimensions (face-to-center andface-to-face) and other physical properties for a gate valve. This is the module called by thesymbol processor SP_GAT

259

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Physical_Data_Definition ’V1_AMS’

physical_data_source = ’VALVE_2_AMS’Call Get_Physical_Data ( physical_data_source )Call Read_Table ( Table_Name_A, input, output )

Surface_Area = Output_1Wet_Weight = Output_2F_to_C_Dim_1 = Output_3

If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 ) ThenF_to_C_Dim_2 = F_to_C_Dim_1

ElseF_to_C_Dim_2 = Output_4

EndIfF_to_F_Dim = F_to_C_Dim_1 + F_to_C_Dim_2

If ( Valve_Operator .LE. 24.0 ) ThenCall Read_Table ( Table_Name_W, input, output )Dry_Weight = Output_1

EndIfReturnEnd

Generic Physical Data Modules

The generic modules contain information which is common to more than one symbol such asflange thickness, gasket separation, and outside diameter. The physical data moduleV1_AMS calls another physical data module VALVE_2_AMS which contains the genericdimension data for all valves with two connect points.

Physical_Data_Definition ’VALVE_2_AMS’

Input_1 = Nom_Pipe_D_1

If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then

table_name = ’BLT’ // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green

Call Read_Table ( table_name, input, output )

Facing_OD_1 = Output_1

Thickness_1 = Output_2

Seat_Depth_1 = Output_3

Thickness_1 = Thickness_1 - Seat_Depth_1

CP_Offset_1 = Gasket_Sep_1

If ( Symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then

Thickness_1 = 0.0

Depth_1 = 0.0

Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0

Body_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1

Else

table_name = ’MAL_300_5’

Depth_1 = Thickness_1



Pipe_OD_1 = Output_2

Body_OD_1 = Pipe_OD_1

EndIf

Else

If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. MALE ) Then

table_name = ’MAL’ // Term_Type_1 // Gen_Flag_Green



Thickness_1 = 0.0

Depth_1 = 0.0

Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0

CP_Offset_1 = 0.0

Pipe_OD_1 = Facing_OD_1


Else

table_name = ’FEM’ // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green



Depth_1 = Output_2

Seat_Depth_1 = 0.0

Thickness_1 = 0.0

260

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Physical Data Definitions________________

If ( symbology .EQ. MODEL ) Then

Depth_1 = 0.0

CP_Offset_1 = 0.0

Pipe_OD_1 = 0.0


Else

CP_Offset_1 = -Depth_1





EndIf

EndIf

EndIf

If ( Term_Type_2 .EQ. Term_Type_1 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 )

Then

Facing_OD_2 = Facing_OD_1

Pipe_OD_2 = Pipe_OD_1

Body_OD_2 = Body_OD_1

Thickness_2 = Thickness_1

Depth_2 = Depth_1

Seat_depth_2 = Seat_Depth_1

CP_Offset_2 = CP_Offset_1

Else


If ( Gen_Type_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) Then

table_name = ’BLT’ // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red



Thickness_2 = Output_2

Seat_Depth_2 = Output_3

Thickness_2 = Thickness_2 - Seat_Depth_2

CP_Offset_2 = Gasket_Sep_2


Thickness_2 = 0.0

Depth_2 = 0.0

Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0


Else

Depth_2 = Thickness_2






EndIf

Else


table_name = ’MAL’ // Term_Type_2 // Gen_Flag_Red



Thickness_2 = 0.0

Depth_2 = 0.0

Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0

CP_Offset_2 = 0.0

Pipe_OD_2 = Facing_OD_2


Else

table_name = ’FEM’ // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // Gen_Flag_Red



Depth_2 = Output_2

Seat_Depth_2 = 0.0

Thickness_2 = 0.0


Depth_2 = 0.0

CP_Offset_2 = 0.0

Pipe_OD_2 = 0.0


Else

CP_Offset_2 = -Depth_2






EndIf

261


EndIf

EndIf

EndIf

Table_Name_A = Item_Name // Geo_Ind_Std // Term_Type_1

Table_Name_W = Commodity_Code



If ( Term_Type_1 .EQ. Term_Type_2 .AND. Nom_Pipe_D_1 .EQ. Nom_Pipe_D_2 )

Then

Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // ’A’

Else

If ( Gen_Type_1 .EQ. Gen_Type_2 ) Then

! Male X Male or Bolted X Bolted

! or Female X Female

Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Pr_Rating_1 // Term_Type_2 //

Pr_Rating_2 // ’A’

Else


! Male X Bolted and Male X Female

Table_Name_A = Table_Name_A // Term_Type_2 // Pr_Rating_2 // ’A’

Else


! Bolted X Male and Female X Male


Else

! Bolted X Female and Female X

Bolted


Pr_Rating_2 // ’A’

EndIf

EndIf

EndIf

EndIf

Return

End

262

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Parametric Shape Definitions________________

7.1.4 Parametric Shape Definitions

The parametric shape definition describes the graphics symbol (such as bend, flange, or valvebody) which is placed for the component in the model.

Parametric shape definitions are used to place symbol graphics in the model or defineinterference envelopes. This involves the following major functions

defining connect point geometry

placing connect points

moving the active location a specified distance

drawing a specific graphic shape

placing a center of gravity location.

Parametric shape definitions are divided into three basic types: model parametric shapes,detailed parametric shapes, and interference envelopes. The first line of the Eden moduleindicates the module type and the module name.

Model Parametric Shape Definitions

Model parametric shapes are used to define the symbol graphics to be placed in the model.For example, the parametric shaped module for a valve consist of a cylinder, two cones, and acylinder (flange, valve body, flange).

The first line for these modules is of the form

Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’module name’

This statement tells the system to use the category code MG for the prefix. This prefix is onlyused by the system; it should not be keyed- in as part of the module name.

The module name for a parametric shape module consists of a symbol type (such as V1, V2,...for valves).

The parametric shape module MGV1 determines the model graphics for a valve. This is themodule called by the symbol processor SPGAT. The parametric shape module MGOP3determines the model graphics for a hand wheel operator. This is the module called by thesub-symbol processor SSOP_3.

263

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’V1’

Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR )

Call Place_Connect_Point ( CP1 )

Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_Offset_1 )

Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_1, Facing_OD_1 )

length = F_to_C_Dim_1 - Thickness_1

diameter = 0.0

Call Draw_Cone ( length, Body_OD_1, diameter )


Call Place_COG_Location ( DRY_COG )

Call Place_COG_Location ( WET_COG )

length = F_to_C_Dim_2 - Thickness_2

Call Draw_Cone ( length, diameter, Body_OD_2 )

Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Depth_2, Facing_OD_2 )

Call Move_By_Distance ( CP_offset_2 )


Return

End

Model_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’OP3’

Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( OPERATOR )

Call Convert_NPD_to_Subunits ( Nom_Pipe_D_1, dia )

dist = dia + Min_Cyl_Dia * 0.5

angle = 90.0

radius = ( Dimension_2 - Min_Cyl_Dia ) * 0.5

Call Draw_Cylinder_With_Capped_Ends ( Dimension_1, Min_Cyl_Dia )

Call Move_by_Distance ( -dist )

Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Secondary )

Call Rotate_Orientation ( angle, Normal )

Call Move_Along_Axis ( -radius, Secondary )

Call Draw_Torus ( radius, angle, Min_Cyl_Dia )




Return

End

Detailed Parametric Shape Definition

Detailed parametric shapes are used to define more complex symbol graphics to be placed inthe model when the model symbology lock is set to detailed.

The first line for these modules is of the form

Detailed_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’module name’

This statement tells the system to use the category code DG for the prefix.

Interference Parametric Shape Definition

Interference parametric shapes are not used during component placement. They arereferenced during interference detection to determine the volume (interference envelope) to becompared for clashes with other elements. If a clash is detected during the interferencedetection process, the interference parametric shape is used to place an interference marker.Refer to the PDS Interference Checker / Manager Reference Guide for more information oninterference envelopes.

264

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Parametric Shape Definitions________________ Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition ’module name’

This statement tells the system to use the category code IG for the prefix.

If no interference module is found for a component, the system uses the modelgraphics module to determine the interference parametric shape.

265


7.2 Physical Data Tables

The physical data tables contain the physical data (dimensions, weights, and surface area)required for symbol creation, interference detection, stress analysis, and MTO reporting.These tables are segregated for commodity item data, engineered item data, and instrumentdata. Refer to Section 4 for a detailed description of the physical data tables and the tablenaming conventions used in PDS.

The physical data tables for US Practice are delivered in the following files:

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l - object library\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pcdim.l.t - text library

These libraries contain physical data for American standards. The physical data can be storedin one of ten physical data libraries. The system uses the geometric industry standard for aparticular commodity item (or specialty item) to determine which library to reference for thephysical data tables.

Geometric industry standard is expressed as a code list value from Standard Note Type 575.Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for standards that apply to American piping practices.Code list numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for standards that apply to European pipingpractices. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company practices.

By segregating data into separate physical data libraries you can access a subset of the totalphysical data available for a project. You can also build a specific set of physical data for aparticular project. The following table types are required for piping and instrumentcomponents.

Generic dimensional data

Generic tables contain data which is not specific to a particular symbol (such as flangeoutside diameter or flange thickness). These tables are identified by the prefix BLT,FEM, or MAL (for the termination type) and end with the extension .TBL (the tablename is independent of the name of the physical data module).

Specific commodity data

Specific tables contain commodity data which is specific to a particular component(such as dimensions, water weight, and surface area). These specific tables use themodel code or commodity code as part of the table name to classify data by symboltype.

— The system uses the water weight data to compute the wet weight using the specificgravity of the operating fluid.

fluid weight = water weight * specific gravity for fluid

operating weight = dry weight + fluid weight

266

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Physical Data Tables________________

— The surface area data enables the system to perform paint requirement calculationsand insulation weight calculations.

Specific commodity dry weight data

Piping Specialty physical data

The dimensions, dry weight, water weight, and surface area for specialty items can bestored in a set of tables or defined at placement.

Instrument physical data

The dimensional data, dry weight, water weight, and surface area for instruments can bestored in a set of tables or defined at placement.

You can form the name of a physical data table from attributes for the component (such asgeometry standard and end preparation). However, the table name cannot exceed 46characters.

7.2.1 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library

The data retrieval from tables in the Physical Data Library is restricted to two independentvariables and eight dependent variables. If only one independent variable is required, thennine dependent variables are allowed. If more independent variables are required, theadditional independent variable(s) must be a part of the table name. If nominal diameter isone of the independent variables, it must be listed first in the table.

267


7.2.2 Example of Physical Data Look-Up

In order to place the valve described earlier in this section, the system references the followingtables.

Generic Tables

The spec access for a six-inch gate valve defines the end preparation at both connect points asRaised Face Flanged End (code list value 21) which is a bolted connection. As shown in thelisting for VALVE_2_AMS, the table name for a bolted connection on a two-connect pointvalve is

table_name= ’BLT’ // Term_Type_1 // Pr_Rating_1 // Gen_Flag_Green

Using the values from the Piping Job Specification (PMC=1C0031, Item Name=6Q1C01), theactual table name will be

BLT_20_150_5

This table returns the outside diameter, flange thickness, and the seating depth for each end ofthe valve. Note that the termination type (20) is used rather than the actual end preparationvalue (21).

Specific Tables

The specific tables are used to define the main body of the valve. Refer to TableRequirements, page 315, for an outline of the types of tables which are required to place avalve. Since the termination type is the same at both ends of the valve (bolted), no redconnect point data is required. The required tables are found by referring to the Bolted(G)termination type.

MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A (P15A)

MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B (P15B) - This table is only required if more than eightoutputs are necessary to define a commodity item.

Commodity Code (P59)

Using this information, the dimension tables for a 6" gate valve are:

GAT_40_20_150_A

This table returns the face-to-center dimension for the valve. Table P15B is notrequired for a gate valve.

268

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Example of Physical Data Look-Up________________ VAABAHCCAA

This table returns the empty weight of the valve, including the weight of the operator.

If the end preparations were different at each end of the valve (such as female threaded bysocket welded) then a different set of tables would be required.

An additional table look-up is required to access the dimensional data for the valve operator.The following table is required to define the valve operator.

MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (P31A)

Using this table name format, the dimension table for a hand wheel operator on a 6" gatevalve is:

GAT_BLT_150_3_A

This table returns the stem length and the wheel diameter for the handwheel operator.

269


7.3 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data

7.3.1 Connect Point Data

As described in the Piping Job Specification description, connect point information forcommodity items, piping specialties, and instruments is classified in terms of green and redconnect points. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data:

For full-size components, data is only defined for the green connect point and applies toall ends of the component.

For size change components, data for commodity items, engineered items, orinstruments should be created with the green connect point representing the largerdiameter (first size) of the component and the red connect point diameter representingthe smaller diameter (second size).

If the end preparation is different at each end of the component, the end preparationshould be defined to match the green and red connect points.

If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties whichdiffer, the following rules apply:

— If the ends have different end preparations (regardless of the values forschedule/thickness) the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest code listnumber are designated as the green connect point.

— If the end preparations are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thicknessdiffer, the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point.

Schedule or thickness values should be defined for all applicable components. Refer toPJS Tables and Functions, page 190, for a detailed description of the methods fordefining the schedule or thickness value.

A flow direction component (such as a check valve) must be defined so that the flow isdirected from connect point 1 to connect point 2.

A tee type branch must be defined with connect point three on the branch leg of the tee.

The origin of a component must lie between connect point 1 and connect point 2.

Flanges should be defined with the green connect point representing the flangedconnect point and the red connect point representing the non-flanged connect point.

270

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Notes for Graphic Commodity Data________________ A valve operator is always placed at the component origin of the corresponding valvebody.

To insure consistency in pipe cut length calculations, the connect points of a componentshould be located using face-to-face or face- to-center dimension rather than end-to-endor end-to-center dimension.

A change of direction component placed by component center must be defined such thatconnect point 1 is on the primary axis.

7.3.2 Bends and Branches

For bend components (specific and generic), the item name and the new item namemust be unique with respect to the angle of the bend. In other words, you specify theangle of the bend by selecting the item name for the corresponding angle of the bend.

The number of joints in a mitre is required to compute the stress intensification factor(SIF). The graphics symbol description in the Graphic Commodity Library sets anattribute in the piping design database that defines the number of joints.

For miter bend components, the system requires that the item name and the new itemname be unique with respect to the number of miter joints of the bend. In other words,the item name specifies the number of miter joints of the bend.

For branches (tees and laterals), the system uses the first and second size to access thebranch table and determine the item name of the component to be placed at the branchpoint (intersection). Depending on the active values, the branch table may define asingle component, or a set of two or three components.

271


7.3.3 Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges

The data for the number of bolts and the bolt diameter is available with the flange datain the Physical Commodity Library as a function of nominal piping diameter, pressurerating, termination type, and geometric industry standard. However, the bolt data andthe flange data are stored in separate tables. Refer to the Report Manager ReferenceGuide for a description of the table access.

A lap joint flange is defined with the end preparation at one end as flanged and the otherend as lap.

The system determines the gasket separation at each connect point of a pipingcomponent and an instrument component by the following rules.

— If the end preparation for the connect point is flanged, the gasket separation for theconnect point is set to one-half the Active Gasket Separation. However, someflanged connections (lug, ring type joint, or wafer) have integral gaskets and do nothave a gasket separation. In this situation, the gasket separation at each connectpoint is set to zero.

— If the end preparation for the connect point is not flanged, the gasket separation forthe connect point will be set to zero.

Flange data exists in two tables

— The first table (BLT_Term_Rat_TS) contains the flange data required for modelingactivities (such as flange outside diameter and flange thickness).

— The second table (STUD_Rat_TS) contains flange data required for reporting oranalysis activities (such as bolt diameter, number of bolt holes, and nut extension).

272

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Pipe, Tubing, and Hose________________

7.3.4 Pipe, Tubing, and Hose

All tubing (such as fiberglass and copper) is specified in terms of piping outsidediameter rather than nominal piping diameter. All commodity item data in theAlphanumeric Commodity Library exists in terms of nominal piping diameter.

Mechanical joint and cast iron pipe can have various fixed lengths. Polypropylene-lined tube is purchased with flanged ends in various fixed lengths.

Piping wall thickness is defined it terms of NPD units rather than model units.

A piping converter component (which converts nominal piping diameter from onesystem of units to another system of units) must be defined in the PJS database for eachspecific pair of nominal piping diameters. You cannot specify a convertor componentfor a range of nominal piping diameters.

Flexible hose has flanged, screwed, or quick disconnect end preparations.

273


274

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Graphic Commodity Library Manager________________

7.4 Graphic Commodity Library Manager

This command enables you to create a new graphic commodity library or create and modifydata (Eden modules) in an existing library. Refer to Graphic Commodity Library, page 254,for more information on this library.

You can compile Eden source code, review and delete object code files, and insert, extract,and delete Eden source files from the library.

Select the Graphic Commodity Library Manager command from the Reference DataManager form.

Options

Create Library — Used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library.

Compress — Used to compress the Graphic Commodity library.

Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Graphic Commoditylibrary to the approved library.

Create/Interactive — Used to compile Eden source files and insert them in theGraphic Commodity Library. You can create a file or specify a list of files to becreated.

Create/Batch — Used to compile Eden source files and add the files to the library viabatch processing. used to compile Eden source files via batch processing.

Revise — Used to select an Eden module from the library, edit the file, and put therecompiled file back into the library.

275

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Delete — Used to remove an Eden module from the library.

Report — Used to create a report listing the library contents.

List — Used to display the Eden modules in the library.

Extract — Used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or printing.

You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the Eden modules to be listed.

Full List - Lists all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.

Sub-string - Limits the list to those Eden modules which contain a specified substring.

276

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Create Library________________


This option is used to create a new Graphic Commodity Library. It automatically creates theobject library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Graphic Commodity Library names asdefined in the RDB Management Data.



7.4.2 Compress

This option is used to compress the Graphic Commodity library. Any tables which have beendeleted from the library will be removed.


This option copies the unapproved Graphic Commodity library to the approved library.



277


7.4.4 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to compile Eden source code and add the resulting code to thegraphic commodity library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to becreated. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library, page 254, forinformation on naming conventions for Eden modules.

Before using this command

Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data tothe location of the Eden source files.

To add more than one Eden file to the library, create a list file which identifies thenames of the Eden source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry(source file name) per line. The list file and all of the source files should reside in thesource file directory.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create option.

2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file.


Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the activelibrary.

The system verifies the existence of the specified file.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules, as specifiedin the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.

You can use the default setting or modify these fields to override the default location forthis operation.



278

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data________________

7.4.5 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to compile Eden source code and insert the specified files into thegraphic commodity library via batch processing. You can process a single file or specify a listof files to be created. Refer to the description of the Graphic Commodity Library, page 254,for information on naming conventions for Eden modules.


Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data tothe location of the Eden source files.

To add more than one Eden file to the library, create a list file which identifies thenames of the Eden source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry(source file name) per line. The list file and all of the source files should reside in thesource file directory.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Batch Load option.



Key in the name of the Eden file or list file to be compiled and added to the activelibrary.

The system confirms the existence of the specified file.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the eden modules, as specifiedin the Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.


279



Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, setthe time to process the source files.



280

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Revise Graphic Commodity Data________________

7.4.6 Revise Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to select Eden modules from the library, edit the file, and thencompile the file and put it back in the library.


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the Eden modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Revise option.

The system displays the Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library.

2. Select Module for Revision

Select the Eden modules to be revised and select Accept.

281


3. The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor(specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

Make any changes to the displayed file.

When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it backinto the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file will not be recompiled.)

If the file compiles successfully, the system returns to Step 2. You can select anotherEden module to be revised or select Exit.

If an error occurs in revising a Piping Eden module or table, the system invokes theeditor automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem.

282

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Delete Graphic Commodity Data________________

7.4.7 Delete Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to delete Eden modules from the graphic commodity library.



Operating Sequence



2. Select Module for Deletion

Select the Eden modules to be deleted from the list of modules. You can use the scrollbar to scroll through the available files.

3. Accept or Select Other Module

Accept the selected modules.

The system deletes the modules from the Graphic Commodity Library.

283


7.4.8 Report Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to create a list file of all the Eden modules in the Graphic Commoditylibrary and their creation dates.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Report option from the Data Management form.

2. Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created or use thedisplayed defaults.

3. Select Print or Print/Save.

Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section onPlot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information onsetting up multiple print queues.

If you select the Print/Save option, the system will create a file named piping_eden inthe defined default source file location.


Select Accept to create the report file.

284

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

List Graphic Commodity Data________________

7.4.9 List Graphic Commodity Data

This option displays a list of Eden modules in the Graphic Commodity Library. The displayincludes

a description of the type of Piping Eden module, such as Physical Data Definition orModel Parametric Shape, at the end of each line.

the revision date of each Piping Eden module.

The module names are sorted alphanumerically within the list for each type of Piping Edenmodule.



Operating Sequence

1. Select the List option.


2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3. Select Cancel to exit the form.

285


7.4.10 Extract Graphic Commodity Data

This option enables you to extract an Eden module or set of Eden modules from the GraphicCommodity library for editing or printing.


Set Piping Eden Path and Piping Eden Node in the Default Project Control Data to thelocation of the Eden source files.


Operating Sequence

1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.

2. Select EDEN Module for Extraction

Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar toscroll through the available files. You can extract multiple files at one time.

— OR —

Select Extract ALL to bulk extract all the Piping Eden modules in one operation.

The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default edendirectory. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file namedPD_gc_list.


286

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Physical Data Library Manager________________

7.5 Physical Data Library Manager

This command enables you to access the library management options for the Physical DataLibrary. You can create a new library file or create, modify, and delete data in an existinglibrary. You can also create reports of the data in the library and post the contents of theunappoved library to the approved library. Refer to Physical Data Tables, page 266, for moreinformation on this library.

The system tracks revision dates for table entries when a table is being revised. This revisionmanagement data recorded in a Table Revision Management Library, named<table_library>.l.r. If the library has been removed or deleted, the software will regeneratethe library file.

This feature can be used to create revision management reports of components that requirereconstructing as a result of changes to any dimension tables since a specified date.

With the 4.2 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library wasincreased from approximately 16,000 bytes per table to 20,000 bytes per table.

With the 7.1 release, the limitation on the size of tables in the Physical Data Library wasincreased from approximately 20,000 bytes to 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Physical DataLibrary and Spec Table Library files in the Default Project Control Data.


Operating Sequence

1. Select Physical Data Library Manager command from the Reference Data Managerform.

287


2. Select Table Library

Select the active practice (such as U.S. Practice or European - Din) from the displaylist and select Accept.

The system loads the table list for the selected practice into memory.

3. You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the physical data tables tobe listed.

Full List lists all the tables in the Physical Data Library.

Sub-string limits the list to those tables which contain a specified substring.

4. Select Table Data Management Option

Select the option to perform.

Options

Create Library — Used to create a new Physical Dimension Library.

Compress — Used to compress the Physical Dimension library.

Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Physical Dimensionlibrary to the approved library.

Create/Interactive — Used to process table files and add the resulting code to theactive Physical Dimension library. You can create a single table or specify a list oftables to be created.

288

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Physical Data Library Manager________________ Create/Batch — Used to compile and add table files to the active library via batchprocessing.

Revise — Used to select a table file from the library for editing and put the revised fileback into the library.

Delete — Used to remove a table file from the library.

Report — Used to create a report of the library contents.

List — Used to display the table files in the active library.

Extract — Used to extract a table file from the library for editing or printing.

289



This option is used to create a new Physical Dimension Library. It automatically creates theobject library (.l), the text library (.l.t), and table revision management library (.l.t.r) for thelibrary that is being created.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Physical Dimension Library names asdefined in the RDB Management Data.



7.5.2 Compress

This option is used to compress the Physical Dimension library. Any tables which have beendeleted from the library will be removed.


This option copies the unapproved Physical Dimension library to the approved library.



290

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data________________

7.5.4 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert thespecified files into the active library. You can process a single table file or specify a list offiles to be created. Refer to the description of the applicable table file for information onnaming conventions and file formats.


Set the default table path and node in the Default Project Control Data.

To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies thenames of the table source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry(source file name) per line. The list file and all the source files should reside in thedefined default table directory.

Operating Sequence




Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the activelibrary.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the table files, as specified inthe Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.




The system processes the source file and, if successful, it stores the resulting object filein the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library.

291


7.5.5 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to process physical dimension table source files and insert thespecified files into the active library via batch processing. You can process a single table fileor specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the applicable table file forinformation on naming conventions and file formats.



To add more than one table file to the library, create a list file which identifies thenames of the table source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry(source file name) per line. The list file and all the source files should reside in thedefine default table directory.

Operating Sequence




Key in the name of the table file or list file to be processed and added to the activelibrary.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the table files, as specified inthe Default Project Control Data, at the bottom of the form.



Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, setthe time to process the source files.



292

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data________________ The system processes the source file and, if successful, it stores the resulting object filein the active library and stores the source file in the associated text library.

293


7.5.6 Revise Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to select a table file from the library, edit the file, and then put it backin the library.


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the tables to be listed.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the table files in the active library.


Select the table files to be revised and select Accept.

294

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Revise Physical Commodity Data________________



When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it backinto the library. (If you quit the editor, the table is not recompiled.)

The system returns to Step 2. You can select another table to be revised or select Exit.

295


7.5.7 Delete Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to delete a table file or set of table files from the active library. It alsodeletes the revision dates from the corresponding Table Revision Management Library.



Operating Sequence



2. Select Table for Deletion

Select the tables to be deleted from the list of tables. You can use the scroll bar to scrollthrough the available files.


Accept the files and begin processing.

The system deletes the table files from the active library.

296

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Report Physical Commodity Data________________

7.5.8 Report Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to create a report file of all the table files in the active library or thosedefined by the substring search criteria.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the reporting options on the form.

2. Revise Report Parameters

Set the toggle to Default Report to create a report that list the tables in the physicaldata library.

— OR —

Set the toggle to Revision Dates Report and key in a date in the Revision Date field toprocess all tables modified since the specified revision date. The report lists the fullcontents of the modified tables with individual revision dates per line.


4. Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created.

5. Select Save, Print or Print/Save.

297

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section onPlot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information onsetting up multiple print queues.

If you select the Save or Print/Save option, the system will create a file named<standard>_tables in the default source file location (where <standard> is a prefixdepending on the active practice).

U.S. Practice us International - JIS jisEuropean - DIN din International - Australian ausEuropean - British Standard bs International - Practice A inaEuropean - Practice A eua International - Practice B inbEuropean - Practice B eub Company Practice cmp

6. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, setthe time to process the request.



298

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

List Physical Commodity Data________________

7.5.9 List Physical Commodity Data

This option displays all the table files for the active library with the revision date of eachtable.



Operating Sequence





299


7.5.10 Extract Physical Commodity Data

This option enables you to extract a table file out of the active library for editing or printing.




Operating Sequence


2. Select Table for Extraction

Select the tables from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar toscroll through the available files.

The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default tabledirectory. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file namedPD_tbl_list. For example,

The current date and time is: Wed Apr 29 15:59:41 1992

File: PD_tbl2 is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_AFile: PD_tbl3 is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_BFile: PD_tbl4 is TDINBODY_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_CFile: PD_tbl5 is TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_AFile: PD_tbl6 is TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_BFile: PD_tbl7 is TDINOPER_SPECIFIC_7P1E01_I15AS_C

300

7. Grap

hic

Co

mm

od

ity Data

Extract Physical Commodity Data________________ If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file,otherwise it overwrites the file.

301


302

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Table Formats and Naming Conventions________________

8. Table Formats and NamingConventions

Tables are used to store data required for interactive processing of piping and instrumentcomponents. This section describes the tables which are included in the physical datalibraries. Refer to Physical Data Tables, page 266 for more information on these libraries.Also refer to Piping Job Specification Tables, page 189 for more information on tables.

303


8.1 Table Conventions

8.1.1 Table Names

Unless otherwise indicated, values for specific and generic parameters are stored in tableswhose names are derived from parameters in the PJS. When naming ASCII files in the textlibraries, if a dot (.) or a hyphen (-) is included in the Sc/Th column of the piping jobspecification, the dot or hyphen will be converted to a dollar sign ($) when the table name orASCII file name is created. The actual character, and not the $, is displayed in all fieldsrepresenting the actual attribute involved. The following examples illustrate how thicknessesare represented on the basis of the above rule:

Actual Characters ASCII equivalent.25 $251 11.375 1$375

With version 5.0, the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in atable name. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodityvalve, where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table.

Commodity codes are read verbatim when they are used to create table names.No conversion of dots (.) or hyphens (-), as described above, takes place. Alsonote that a dot (.) is not a valid character to include in a table name. For thisreason, they should not be included as part of commodity codes for valves.

8.1.2 Comments

You can include any number of comments in a table, using the conventions described below:

For single-line comments:

! XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX , or< XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX >

For multi-line comments:

< XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX >

where XXXX... represents the comment text.

304

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Table Conventions________________

8.1.3 Revision Markers

Table entries preceded by a karat (>) have been revised since their original release. Forexample, the section of the table shown below has been revised three times since it was firstdelivered.

8.1.4 Component Tables

The following conventions apply to the definition of columns in all the tables except tables forspecialty items.

The following line is required to define the number of input and output columns:

No_Inputs x No_Outputs x

The number of input columns must not exceed 2. The number of output columns mustnot exceed 9; it can be 0.

The following statements are used in some tables to indicate that values will beinterpolated.

Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One

Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One

305

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ A definition must be made using the following format regarding the units of measureused in each column of a table:

Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, INT, DEC, IN, RAT, IN, IN, IN

8.1.5 Units

Units are defined for each column of a table as follows:

Angle, degrees DEGAngle between runs, degrees DEC

Area, FT2IN2YD2MI2SCMSKM

Code-listed attributes INT

Density, LBF3LB_UKGALLB_USGALKIPFT3USTONFT3KG_LKG_DM3KGM3

Length, inches INLength, millimeter MMLength, inches decimal IN_DECLength, mm decimal MM_DEC

Mass, GRAINUSTONUKTONMGG

Nominal diameter, inches NPD_INNominal diameter, mm NPD_MM

Pressure, psig PSIGPressure, pascal gage PAGPressure, bar BARPressure, bar (gage) BAR_GPressure, atmospheres ATMPressure, inches water absolute INH20

306

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Table Conventions________________ Pressure, inches water at 32 deg INH20_32FPressure, inches mercury absolute INHGPressure, inches mercury at 32 deg INHG_32FPressure, kg per cm squared (gage) KG_CM2Pressure, kg per cm squared (absolute) KG_CM2_APressure, mm water at 4 deg MMH20Pressure, mm mercury at 32 deg MMHGPressure, megaPascal (gage) MPa_g

Rating RATCLxxx and xxx# are expressed as xxx

Schedule/thickness, inches SC_TH_INSchedule/thickness, millimeters SC_TH_MM

Stress, psi PSIStress, pascal PAStress, kpa KPAStress, mpa MPA

Surface area, square feet SFSurface area, square meter SMSurface area, square millimeter SMM

Surface area/unit,square feet per foot SFFsquare meter per meter SM_Msquare millimeter per meter SMM_M

Temperature, degrees Celsius DCTemperature, degrees Fahrenheit DFTemperature, degrees Kelvin DKTemperature, degrees Rankine DR

Unitless alphanumeric AN*xxwhere xx defines the number of characters

Unitless integer INTUnitless real number DEC

Weight, pounds LBWeight, kilogram KG

Weight/unit, pounds per foot LBFWeight/unit, kilograms per meter KGM

307


8.1.6 Fields (Input/Output Columns)

Attributes can consist of the following field types. The system determines the field typeon the basis of data provided in each table.

- NPD (for nominal diameter)- INTEGER2- REAL4 (floating point)- AN*x (alphanumeric, where x defines the number of characters up to a maximum

of 8)

All entries in the tables are left justified.

Field locations and field lengths defined with XXXXs, WWWWs and ZZZZZs in thisdocument are observed.

Fractions are not used to define any table value.

Adjacent columns in a table are separated by one or more spaces.

If a value in a table is not known, a hyphen (-) must be used in the corresponding field.The system interprets this entry as a blank value and displays a blank in reports,drawings, and other data outputs.

Real numbers without decimals can be expressed with or without a decimal point. Forexample, a nominal diameter of twenty inches can be expressed as 20, 20. , or 20.0. Forconsistency, all delivered tables use the value 20

All alphanumeric values in a table must be enclosed in single quotes (’ ’). For example,’ZZZZZ’

For tables with only one input column, the generic value ET_AL can be used in theinput column. The system translates this entry to indicate that values in theimmediately preceding line apply to any input value equal to or greater than the value inthe current line.

308

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats


8.1.7 NPD Values

The following table is used to correlate English nominal pipe diameters with theircorresponding metric values.

Nominal Pipe Diameter Nominal Pipe Diameterinches mm inches mm0.125 6 14.00 3500.250 8 16.00 4000.375 10 18.00 4500.500 15 20.00 5000.750 20 22.00 5501.000 25 24.00 6001.250 32 26.00 6501.500 40 28.00 7002.000 50 30.00 7502.500 65 32.00 8003.000 80 34.00 8503.500 90 36.00 9004.000 100 38.00 9505.000 125 40.00 10006.000 150 42.00 10508.000 200 44.00 110010.00 250 46.00 115012.00 300 48.00 1200

8.1.8 Rating

The following conventions apply to the rating attribute with respect to the naming of datatables:

Ratings can be expressed in the PJS in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#,or OTxxxx. However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude theCL, #, or OT characters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how therating is defined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance withthe following criteria:

CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating

xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API.

OTxxxx refers to a rating that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometricallybut not from a pressure carrying standpoint. An example is a valve supplied withflanged ends meeting the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but withpressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating.

Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and notin terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for otherfemale ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If suchrating values contain alphanumeric characters, the system strips all the alpha charactersfrom the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicabletables.

309

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ If the rating in the PJS is expressed in alphabetic characters only, the system uses thecharacters to access a data table. The names of the data tables include all the alphabeticcharacters included in the PJS.

GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominalfluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.

OTHER can be used to identify a nonstandard rating value.

NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normallyrequire the rating value as part of the table name, but for which a rating does not apply.This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.

8.1.9 Schedule/Thickness

Schedule or thickness values are shown for all applicable components. In order of preference,schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of:

Generic schedules, such as S-STD, S-XS and S-XXS. If the schedule name exceeds theprovided field length (for example, S-SDR13.5) it is defined in terms of its wallthickness.

Specific schedules, such as S-40, S-60 and S-80.

NREQD: This value is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply:

— The thickness value is not required to purchase the component.

— Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values.

— Either stress analysis is not applicable, or the component is considered to beinfinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations.

Specific wall thicknesses: To insure compatibility between the data tables, the PJS, andwall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed as defined below. Trailing zeroes arenot included. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals.

.xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inchx if the thickness is an even inchx.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger

*Cyyy: The need to perform a thickness calculation is triggered by an entry with theformat *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity. Theletters that make up this code have the following meaning:

— The character C ensures that the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of thecomponent is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined forthe piping materials class in the Default Wall Thickness Equation attribute of thePiping Materials Class entity.

310

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats


— The characters yyy define the casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E)times 100. This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. Ifyou are defining a calculation for a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match thethickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe shouldbe used.

MATCH: The need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of thesame diameter and of option 1 is triggered by an entry with the format MATCH in theSchedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity.

To minimize duplication when the same thickness can be expressed for metallic materials interms of either a generic or a specific schedule, the following convention is used. For a givennominal diameter, only the schedules shown in the line for that diameter are used in the PJSand in the data tables.

311

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ NomD

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-20

S-30

S-STD

S-40

S-40S

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-80S

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

S-XXS

0.125

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

0.250

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

0.375

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

0.500

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

0.750

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

1.000

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

1.250

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

1.500

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

2.000

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

2.500

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

3.000

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-160

S-XXS

3.500

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

4.000

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-120

S-160

S-XXS

5.000

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-120

S-160

S-XXS

6.000

S-5S

S-10S

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-120

S-160

S-XXS

8.000

S-5S

S-10S

S-20

S-30

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-60

S-XS

S-XS

S-80S

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

S-XXS

10.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-20

S-30

S-STD

S-STD

S-40S

S-XS

S-XS

S-80

S-80S

S-100

S-120

S-XXS

S-160

S-XXS

12.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-20

S-30

S-STD

S-40

S-40S

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-80S

S-100

S-XXS

S-140

S-160

S-XXS

14.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-20

S-STD

S-STD

S-40

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

16.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-20

S-STD

S-STD

S-XS

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

18.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-20

S-30

S-STD

S-40

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

20.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-STD

S-XS

S-STD

S-40

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

22.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-STD

S-XS

S-STD

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

24.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-STD

S-30

S-STD

S-40

S-60

S-XS

S-80

S-100

S-120

S-140

S-160

26.00

S-10

S-XS

S-STD

S-XS

28.00

S-10

S-XS

S-30

S-STD

S-XS

30.00

S-5S

S-10S

S-10

S-XS

S-30

S-STD

S-XS

32.00

S-10

S-XS

S-30

S-STD

S-40

S-XS

34.00

S-10

S-XS

S-30

S-STD

S-40

S-XS

36.00

S-10

S-XS

S-30

S-STD

S-40

S-XS

38.00

S-STD

S-XS

40.00

S-STD

S-XS

42.00

S-STD

S-XS

44.00

S-STD

S-XS

46.00

S-STD

S-XS

48.00

S-STD

S-XS

312

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats


8.1.10 Weight Tables

Weight tables are required for the following thicknesses:

For components made from pipe material:

— If the thickness involved is covered by a schedule, tables are required for allcommercially available schedules to the full range of their nominal diameter.

— If the thickness involved is not covered by a schedule, tables are required in 1/16inch increments from 0.25 to 1.25 inches (inclusive), and from 22 inches to the fullrange of their nominal diameter.

For components made from plate material, tables are required in 1/16 inch incrementsfrom 0.25 to 1.25 inches and in 1 inch increments from 12 to 144 inches.

313


8.1.11 Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used to describe the table name formats in this document.

(G) Green(R) RedBrchTbl Branch TableCmdty Code Commodity CodeGCP Green Connect PointGS Geometric Industry Standard (from CL575)MC Model CodeOp Operator/actuator type (from CL550)Rat Pressure RatingRCP Red Connect PointSc/Th Schedule/ThicknessTerm End Preparation (from CL330)TNF Table Name FormatTS Table Suffix (from CL576 and CL577)Type Termination type (BLT, FEM, or MAL)WC Weight Code (from CL578)

Refer to Variables for Generic Tables and Variables for Specific Tables for a description ofthe variables used in table definitions. Generally, values appearing in all uppercase characters(such as BLT or STUD) indicate a hard-coded value.

314

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Table Requirements________________

8.2 Table Requirements

This section indicates which tables are required to place a particular type of component (suchas a valve or fitting). The table groups listed in this section are used to store data required forinteractive processing of piping and instrument components. The applicability of the varioustable groups is defined as a function of the termination types of the components as defined inthe Piping Job Specification (PJS).

Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a detailed description of therequirements for specific commodity items, instruments, and miscellaneous piping andinstrument items.

Typically, the tables in the table combinations are used to store:

The surface area and weight of water for the component.

The dimensional parameters for the component.

The empty weight of the component and/or data about valve operators.

8.2.1 Tables Required for Piping Components

Valves (6Q1C)

Termination Types Applicable TablesBolted(G) P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_AMale(G) P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_BFemale(G) P59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)

P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)Bolted(G)-Male(R) P25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_AFemale(G)-Male(R) P25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B

P59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)

Bolted(G)-Bolted(R) P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_ABolted(G)-Female(R) P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BFemale(G)-Female(R) P59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)Female(G)-Bolted(R) P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)Male(G)-Male(R) P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_A

P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BP59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)

Male(G)-Female(R) P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_AMale(G)-Bolted(R) P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B

P59 Cmdty Code (if operator code <=24)P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)

Operators P31A MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A (if operator code <=24)P31B MC_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B (if operator code <=24)P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A (if operator code >24 & <=40)P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B (if operator code >24 & <=40)

315


8.2.1.1 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C and 6Q3C)

Termination Types Applicable TablesMale(G) P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A

P11B MC_GS_Term(G)_BP51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC

Bolted(G) P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_AFemale(G) P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B

P52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WCBolted(G)-Male(R) P25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_AFemale(G)-Male(R) P25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B

P61 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WCBolted(G)-Bolted(R) P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_ABolted(G)-Female(R) P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BFemale(G)-Female(R) P62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WCFemale(G)-Bolted(R)Male(G)-Male(R) P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A

P21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_BP63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WCExcludes olet and stubbing type fittings

Male(G)-Bolted(R) P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_AMale(G)-Female(R) P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B

P64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WCExcludes olet and stubbing type fittings

Olet fittings P28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_AP28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_BP65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC

Stubbing fittings P29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_AOverflow and weight tables do not apply.

Fire and Safety Piping Components (6P4C and 6Q4C)

Termination Types Applicable TablesMale(G) P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_A

P11B MC_GS_Term(G)_BP51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC

Bolted(G) P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_AFemale(G) P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B

P52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WCBolted(G)-Male(R) P25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_AFemale(G)-Male(R) P25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_B

P61 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WCBolted(G)-Bolted(R) P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_ABolted(G)-Female(R) P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BFemale(G)-Female(R) P62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WCFemale(G)-Bolted(R)Male(G)-Male(R) P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_A

P21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_BP63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WC

Male(G)-Bolted(R) P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_AMale(G)-Female(R) P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_B

P64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WC

316

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C)________________

8.2.1.2 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C)

P80 Specialty Body DataP81 Operator/Actuator Data

317


8.2.2 Tables Required for Instrument Components

The following table sets are used for instrument component classes 7P1E (Control Valves andRegulators), 7P2C (Relief Devices), 7P3C (Other in-line Instruments), and 7Q4D (Off-LineInstruments).

I80 Inbody_Specific_AABBCC_MC_nInbody_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n

I81 Inoper_Specific_AABBCC_MC_nInoper_Typical_AABBCC_MC_n

318

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Generic Tables________________

8.3 Generic Tables

This section describes the neutral file formats used to define generic piping and instrumentdata. The following tables are required to store generic data which applies to both piping andinstrument components:

TNF Attributes Used to Form Table Name

G10 BLT_Term_Rat_TS

G12 STUD_Rat_TS

G12TSTUD_Term_Rat_TS

G20 MAL_Term_TS

G30 FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS

G50 MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC

These tables are stored in the physical data library.

Table format G14, COMPAT_Rat(low)_TS_Rat(high)_TS, which was usedwith the VAX Piping Design product is not used by the Workstation product.This table format may be included in the physical data library but it will not beaccessed by the product.

319


8.3.1 Variables for Generic Tables

The letters P through Z are used in the generic tables to represent the following genericvariables.

Variable End Type ExplanationP Bolted This is the outside diameter of a bolted end of the indicated

termination type, rating, and nominal diameter, as defined inthe table named "BLT_Term_Rat_TS".

Male This is the outside diameter of a male end of the indicatedtermination type and nominal diameter, as defined in thetable named "MAL_Term_TS".

Female The is the outside diameter of the female end of thecomponent of the indicated termination type, rating, andnominal diameter, as defined in the table named"FEM_Term_Rat_TS". For model graphics, it is desirablefor the value of this parameter to be larger than the value ofthe matching male termination end. However, componentssuch as 90 degree elbows and tees will not place if the valueis too large. Therefore, the following values have beendefined for this parameter:

For PVC and CPVC female ends, use the same as the valueof P for the corresponding male termination type.

For all other female ends, use 30% of the fitting OD at thefemale end plus 70% of the matching pipe OD.

Q Bolted Not applicable

Male The value of this variable is "0" for all male ends.

Female This is the depth of socket, as defined in the table named"FEM_Term_Rat_TS".

For socketwelded ends, this value is the nominal depth of thesocket less 1/16". The actual depth of socket less 1/16" isused to determine a component’s dimensional parameters.

For female threaded ends, this is the thread engagement asdefined:in Table 8-1 for components complying with ANSI-B16.12in Table 8-2 for all other components.

320

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Variables for Generic Tables________________ R Bolted This is the flange thickness, as defined in the table named

"BLT_Term_Rat_TS". This dimension represents thedistance from the outermost face of the flange to the backsurface of the flange on which the nut rests. It includes anyprojections of the flange, such as the raised face.

For lap-flanged ends, it includes the thickness of the pipe orstub end plus the thickness of the loose flange used. If theSource of Bolt Spec Data is set as a function of terminationtype, rating, and table suffix in the RDB, the entries for thelap type terminations in the BLT_Term* and STUD_Term*generic tables provide for the addition of wall thickness fromthe TDB.

This parameter is primarily used to calculate stud length.When dealing with specialty components (such as reliefvalves), you might have to develop many generic tables forprecise values. A practical alternative would be to create atable in which values for this parameter are large enough toinsure that short studs do not result.

Male Not applicable.

Female Not applicable.

S Bolted This is the seating depth, as defined in the table named"BLT_Term_Rat_TS". This dimension represents thedistance from the outermost surface of the bolted end to theseating surface of the gasket. It will only have a value forsmall groove, large groove, small female and large femaleflanged ends, and for mechanical joints. The value of thisparameter will be zero for all other bolted ends.



T Bolted This is half of the gasket gap thickness, as defined in the PJSfor the applicable piping materials class.



V Bolted This is the diameter of bolts required at a bolted connection,as defined in the table named "STUD_Rat_TS" as a functionof the nominal pipe diameter, rating, and table suffix of theapplicable bolted end.



321

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ X Bolted Not applicable.

Male This is the wall thickness of the applicable end of acomponent of the indicated nominal diameter, as defined inthe table named "MALWT_Term_Sc/Th_TS_WC".


Z Any No specific meaning is attached to this variable.

322

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Variables for Generic Tables________________ Table 8-1. Thread Engagement for Components per ANSI-B16.12

Thread Engagement, inchesNPD in ANSI-B16.12 PDS1.25 0.42 0.421.5 0.42 0.422 0.44 0.442.5 0.68 0.683 0.77 0.774 0.84 0.845 0.94 0.946 0.96 0.968 1.06 1.06

Table 8-2. Thread Engagement for All Other Components

Thread Engagement, inches, as Reported ByNPD in NAVCO ANSI-B1.20.1 Stockham Crane Average PDS0.125 0.3125 0.2726 0.25 0.25 0.2713 0.250.25 0.4375 0.3945 0.375 0.375 0.3955 0.3750.375 0.4375 0.4067 0.375 0.375 0.3986 0.3750.5 0.5625 0.5343 0.5 0.5 0.5242 0.50.75 0.5625 0.5533 0.5625 0.5625 0.5602 0.56251 0.6875 0.6609 0.6875 0.6875 0.6809 0.68751.25 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875 0.6875 0.6859 0.68751.5 0.6875 0.6809 0.6875 0.6875 0.6859 0.68752 0.75 0.6969 0.75 0.75 0.7367 0.752.5 1.0625 0.932 0.9375 0.9375 0.9674 0.93753 1.125 1.016 1 1 1.0353 13.5 1.1875 1.071 1.0625 1.107 1.06254 1.1875 1.094 1.125 1.1355 1.1255 1.3125 1.187 1.25 1.2483 1.256 1.375 1.208 1.3125 1.2985 1.31258 1.4375 1.313 1.4375 1.396 1.437510 1.625 1.46 1.625 1.57 1.562512 1.75 1.61 1.75 1.7033 1.75

323


8.3.2 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10)

This table enables you to define the outside diameter, flange thickness, seating depth, and boltcircle diameter for components with bolted ends.

The table name format for this table is:

For TNF=G10 BLT_Term_Rat_TS

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’BLT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=G10 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 4Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Diam P R S BCDWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’BLT_20_150_5’! Description= CL150 raised face flange dimensions! Source= MSS-SP-42 1/4 & 3/8", ANSI-B16.5-1981 1/2" - 24" & API 605 above 24"! TNF=G10 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=15-Oct-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 4Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Diam P R S BCD0.25 2.5 0.3438 0 1.68750.375 2.5 0.3438 0 1.68750.5 3.5 0.4375 0 2.3750.75 3.875 0.5 0 2.751 4.25 0.5625 0 3.1251.25 4.625 0.625 0 3.51.5 5 0.6875 0 3.8752 6 0.75 0 4.752.5 7 0.875 0 5.53 7.5 0.9375 0 63.5 8.5 0.9375 0 74 9 0.9375 0 7.55 10 0.9375 0 8.56 11 1 0 9.58 13.5 1.125 0 11.7510 16 1.1875 0 14.2512 19 1.25 0 1714 21 1.375 0 18.7516 23.5 1.4375 0 21.2518 25 1.5625 0 22.7520 27.5 1.6875 0 25

324

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10)________________ 24 32 1.875 0 29.526 30.9375 1.625 0 29.312528 32.9375 1.75 0 31.312530 34.9375 1.75 0 33.312532 37.0625 1.8125 0 35.437534 39.5625 1.9375 0 37.687536 41.625 2.0625 0 39.7538 44.25 2.125 0 42.12540 46.25 2.1875 0 44.12542 48.25 2.3125 0 46.12544 50.25 2.375 0 48.12546 52.8125 2.4375 0 50.562548 54.8125 2.5625 0 52.562550 56.8125 2.6875 0 54.562552 58.8125 2.75 0 56.562554 61 2.8125 0 58.7556 63 2.875 0 60.7558 65.9375 2.9375 0 63.437560 67.9375 3 0 65.4375END

325


8.3.3 Generic Table for Studs used in BoltedConnections (G12)

This table defines the number of bolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt extension for a givenNPD, for studs in bolted connections. If the Length Calculation toggle on the MaterialTakeoff Option form is set to Almost Precise in Project Administrator, the bolt specdata is set as a function of rating and table suffix.

The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension. The n applies to the value definedin the Piping Commodity Data for the bolt diameter being considered. For example, if themodifier value for the PCD is 0, the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance. Thiscapability enables the system to handle special nut allowances, such as when stud tensioningdevices are utilized.


For TNF=G12 STUD_Rat_TS

This table is accessed using values for rating and table suffix derived from the applicableflanged end.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=G12 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ

No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ

END

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_150_5’! Description= CL150 bolting! Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL! TNF=G12 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=03-Nov-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_50.25 4 0.375 0.5938 - - - - -0.375 4 0.375 0.5938 - - - - -0.5 4 0.5 0.6563 1 - - - -0.75 4 0.5 0.6563 0.875 - - - -1 4 0.5 0.6563 1 - - - -

326

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12)________________ 1.25 4 0.5 0.6563 0.875 - - - -1.5 4 0.5 0.6563 1 - - - -2 4 0.625 0.7813 0.8751 - - - -2.5 4 0.625 0.7813 1.125 - - - -3 4 0.625 0.7813 1 - - - -3.5 8 0.625 0.7813 1 - - - -4 8 0.625 0.7813 1 - - - -5 8 0.75 0.9063 1.25 - - - -6 8 0.75 0.9063 1.125 - - - -8 8 0.75 0.9063 1.125 - - - -10 12 0.875 1.0313 1.5 - - - -12 12 0.875 1.0313 1.375 - - - -14 12 1 1.1563 1.625 - - - -16 16 1 1.1563 1.5 - - - -18 16 1.125 1.2813 1.75 - - - -20 20 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -24 20 1.25 1.4688 2 - - - -26 36 0.75 0.9688 1.375 - - - -28 40 0.75 0.9688 1.375 - - - -30 44 0.75 0.9688 1.375 - - - -32 48 0.75 0.9688 1.5 - - - -34 40 0.875 1.0938 1.75 - - - -36 44 0.875 1.0938 1.75 - - - -38 40 1 1.2188 1.75 - - - -40 44 1 1.2188 2 - - - -42 48 1 1.2188 1.75 - - - -44 52 1 1.2188 1.875 - - - -46 40 1.125 1.3751 2 - - - -48 44 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -50 48 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -52 52 1.125 1.3438 2.125 - - - -54 56 1.125 1.3438 2 - - - -56 60 1.125 1.3438 2.125 - - - -58 48 1.25 1.4688 2.25 - - - -60 52 1.25 1.4688 2.125 - - - -END

327


8.3.4 Generic Table for Studs in BoltedConnections w/ Term Type (G12T)

This table defines the number of bolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt extension for a givenNPD, for studs in bolted connections. If the Length Calculation toggle on the MaterialTakeoff Option form is set to Precise in Project Administrator, the bolt spec data is setas a function of termination type, rating, and table suffix.

The W_n columns are used to classify the bolt extension. The n applies to the value definedin the Piping Materials Class for the bolt diameter being considered. For example, if themodifier value for the PMC is 0, the value in the W_0 column is used for nut allowance. Thiscapability enables the system to handle special nut allowances, such as when stud tensioningdevices are utilized.


STUD_Term_Rat_TS

This table is accessed using values for termination type, rating and table suffix derived fromthe applicable flanged end.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL! Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0.! TNF=G12T By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_5WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ

END

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’STUD_20_150_5’! Description= CL150 bolting! Source= PIPING RDB DATA MANUAL! Parameter W_2 equals 50% of applicable stud diameter plus W_0.! TNF=G12T By=GJH Ckd By=NP Rev=0 Date=04-Oct-1989No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, INT, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Diam U V W_0 W_1 W_2 W_3 W_4 W_50.5 4 0.5 0.625 1 - - - -0.75 4 0.5 0.6875 0.875 - - - -1 4 0.5 0.625 1 - - - -

328

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T)________________ 1.25 4 0.5 0.6875 0.875 - - - -1.5 4 0.5 0.625 1 - - - -2 4 0.625 0.8125 1.125 - - - -2.5 4 0.625 0.8125 1.125 - - - -3 4 0.625 0.75 1 - - - -3.5 8 0.625 0.75 1 - - - -4 8 0.625 0.75 1 - - - -5 8 0.75 0.875 1.25 1.25 - - -6 8 0.75 0.9375 1.125 1.3125 - - -8 8 0.75 0.9375 1.125 1.3125 - - -10 12 0.875 1 1.5 1.4375 - - -12 12 0.875 1.0625 1.375 1.5 - - -14 12 1 1.1875 1.625 1.6875 - - -16 16 1 1.125 1.5 1.625 - - -18 16 1.125 1.25 1.75 1.8125 - - -20 20 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -24 20 1.25 1.4375 2.125 2.0625 - - -26 36 0.75 1.0625 1.375 1.4375 - - -28 40 0.75 1.0625 1.375 1.4375 - - -30 44 0.75 1.0625 1.375 1.4375 - - -32 48 0.75 1 1.5 1.375 - - -34 40 0.875 1.125 1.75 1.5625 - - -36 44 0.875 1.125 1.75 1.5625 - - -38 40 1 1.3125 1.875 1.8125 - - -40 44 1 1.25 2 1.75 - - -42 48 1 1.25 1.75 1.75 - - -44 52 1 1.3125 1.875 1.8125 - - -46 40 1.125 1.5 2 2.0625 - - -48 44 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -50 48 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -52 52 1.125 1.4375 2.125 2 - - -54 56 1.125 1.375 2 1.9375 - - -56 60 1.125 1.4375 2.125 2 - - -58 48 1.25 1.5 2.25 2.125 - - -60 52 1.25 1.5625 2.125 2.1875 - - -END

329


8.3.5 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20)

This table enables you to define the surface area, water weight, outside diameter, and 1/2 pipeOD for components with male ends.


For TNF=G20 MAL_Term_TS

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’MAL_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’

! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=G20 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, SFF, IN, IN

! Unt Sur! Diam Area P P/2WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’MAL_300_5’! Description= Pipe outside diameters! Source= ANSI-B-36.10M, 36.19M, API-5L, 5LE, 5LP, 5LS & 5LU! TNF=G20 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=10-Sep-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, SFF, IN, IN

! Unt Sur! Diam Area P P/20.125 0.106 0.405 0.20250.25 0.141 0.54 0.270.375 0.177 0.675 0.33750.5 0.22 0.84 0.420.75 0.275 1.05 0.5251 0.344 1.315 0.65751.25 0.434 1.66 0.831.5 0.497 1.9 0.952 0.622 2.375 1.18752.5 0.753 2.875 1.43753 0.916 3.5 1.753.5 1.047 4 24 1.178 4.5 2.255 1.456 5.5625 2.78136 1.73 6.625 3.31258 2.26 8.625 4.312510 2.81 10.75 5.37512 3.34 12.75 6.37514 3.67 14 716 4.19 16 8

330

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Generic Table for Male Ends (G20)________________ 18 4.71 18 920 5.24 20 1022 5.76 22 1124 6.28 24 1226 6.81 26 1328 7.33 28 1430 7.85 30 1532 8.38 32 1634 8.9 34 1736 9.42 36 1838 9.95 38 1940 10.47 40 2042 10.99 42 2144 11.52 44 2246 12.04 46 2348 12.57 48 2452 13.61 52 2656 14.66 56 2860 15.71 60 3064 16.76 64 3268 17.80 68 3472 18.85 72 3676 19.90 76 3880 20.94 80 40END

331


8.3.6 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30)

This table enables you to define the outside diameter and depth of socket for female ends.


For TNF=G30 FEM_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’FEM_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=G30 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN

! Diam P QWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’FEM_420_150_5’! Description= CL150 socketwelded flange hub O.D. and socketwelded valve O.D.! Source= ANSI-B16.11 CL3000 for .125 to .375 dia’s, ANSI-B16.5 above .375 dia.! TNF=G30 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=29-May-1986No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN

! Diam P Q0.125 0.486 0.31250.25 0.6353 0.31250.375 0.7755 0.31250.5 0.9443 0.31250.75 1.185 0.3751 1.5018 0.43751.25 1.8558 0.51.5 2.0988 0.56252 2.5813 0.6252.5 3.0813 0.68753 3.725 0.75END

332

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50)________________

8.3.7 Generic Table for Weight and ThicknessData, Male Ends (G50)

This table enables you to define empty weight and wall thickness data for male ends.


For TNF=G50 MALWT_Term_Rat/Sc/Th_TS_WC

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’MALWT_WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=G50 By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, LBF, LBF, IN

! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt! Diam Empty Water XWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’MALWT_300_S$40_5_52’! Description= Schedule 40 wall thickness! Source= ANSI-B36.10M-1985! TNF=G50 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=10-Sep-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, LBF, LBF, IN

! GCP Unit Wt Unit Wt! Diam Empty Water X12 53.52 48.5 0.40614 63.44 58.63 0.43818 104.67 96.92 0.56220 123.11 120.45 0.59424 171.29 174.22 0.68832 230.08 319.2 0.68834 244.77 362.25 0.68836 282.35 405.09 0.75END

333


8.4 Piping Component Tables

This section describes the table formats used to define component data. The following tablesare required to store component-specific data required for interactive processing of pipingcomponents:

These tables are stored in the physical data library.

Use tables P11*-P20* for piping component data based only on green connect point data.

TNF Attributes Used to Form Table NameP11A MC_GS_Term(G)_AP11B MC_GS_Term(G)_BP15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_AP15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B

Use tables P21*-P30* for piping component data based on green and red connect point data.For more information, refer to Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data(P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A), page 342 and Piping Component Table Green andRed CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B), page 344 .

TNF Attributes Used to Form Table NameP21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_AP21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_BP25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_AP25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_BP26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_AP26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BP27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_AP27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BP28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_AP28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_BP29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A

Use tables P31*-P40* for dimensional data based on green connect point data of piping valveoperators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) areequal to or less than 24.

TNF Attributes Used to Form Table NameP31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_AP31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B

Use tables P51-P58 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green connectpoint data.

TNF Attributes Used to Form Table NameP51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WCP52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WC

334

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Tables________________ Use table P59 for empty weights of piping valves, including weight of operators, whoseoperator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are less than orequal to 24, regardless of whether only green connect point or both green and red connectpoint data applies to the valve.

P59 Cmdty Code

Use tables P60* for empty weights of piping valves, weights and centers of gravity of valveoperators, model codes of valve operators and for dimensional data of piping valve operatorswhose operator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) exceed 24and are less than or equal to 40, regardless of whether only green connect point or both greenand red connect point data applies to the valve.

P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_AP60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B

Use tables P61-P70 for non-valve piping component empty weights based on green and redconnect point data. Refer to Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP andRCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65), page 352for more information.

TNF Attributes Used to Form Table NameP61 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WCP62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WCP63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WCP64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WCP65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC

Use tables P80 and P81 for data about piping specialty components defined in the MaterialReference Database.Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components, page 354 for more information.

P80 Specialty Body DataP81 Operator/Actuator Data

335


8.4.1 Variables for Specific Tables

Letters A through O represent variables which are specific to a component.

Variable End Type ExplanationA Any For components with identical end terminations and

branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this is the distance from the origin of thecomponent to the outermost face of any of its ends.

For components with different end terminations or branchesthat are not normal to the main axis of the component, this isthe distance from the origin of the component to theoutermost face of the end in the vicinity of PCP1.

Bolted This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.


Female This value can be deduced from the expression E + Q usingthe values of E and Q from the appropriate tables.

B Any For components with identical end terminations andbranches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this parameter does not apply.




Female This value can be deduced from the expression F + Q usingthe values of F and Q from the appropriate tables.

C Any For components with identical end terminations andbranches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this parameter does not apply.



336

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Variables for Specific Tables________________


Female This value can be deduced from the expression G + Q usingvalues of G and Q from the appropriate tables.

D Any For components with identical end terminations andbranches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this parameter does not apply.



Male Not applicable.Female This value can be deduced from the expression H + Q using

values of H and Q from the appropriate tables.

E Any For components with identical end terminations andbranches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this is the distance from the origin of thecomponent to any of its PCPs.

For components with different end terminations or branchesthat are not normal to the main axis of the component, this isthe distance from the origin of the component to PCP1.

Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression A + Tusing the values of A and T from the appropriate tables.

Male This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.

Female This value is included in the appropriate dimension table.

F Any For components with identical end terminations andbranches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this parameter does not apply.


Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression B + Tusing the values of B and T from the appropriate tables.



337

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ G Any For components with identical end terminations and

branches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this parameter does not apply.


Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression C + Tusing values of C and T from the appropriate tables.



H Any For components with identical end terminations andbranches (if any) that are normal to the main axis of thecomponent, this parameter does not apply.


Bolted This parameter can be deduced from the expression D + Tusing the values of D and T from the appropriate tables.



I,J,K,L,M,N Any These values are used in dimension tables for specificcomponents as required by the component being defined.

O Any This is the overall length of the component considering theoutermost surface at each end of the component.

338

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A)________________

8.4.2 Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A,P15A)

This table enables you to define general parameters for components which require only greenconnect point data.

The table name formats for this table are:

For TNF=P11A MC_GS_Term(G)_AFor TNF=P15A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_A

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters! Diam Area Weight Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’GAT_40_20_150_A’! Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends! Source= ANSI-B16.10-1986! TNF=P15A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=1 Date=29-Oct-1987! SN=V1 Par 1=ANo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN

! GCP Surf Water Dimensional Parameters! Diam Area Weight Par 10.25 - - 20.375 - - 20.5 - - 2.1250.75 - - 2.31251 - - 2.51.25 - - 2.751.5 - - 3.252 - - 3.52.5 - - 3.753 - - 44 - - 4.55 - - 56 - - 5.258 - - 5.7510 - - 6.512 - - 714 - - 7.5

339

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 16 - - 818 - - 8.520 - - 924 - - 1026 - - 1128 - - 1230 - - 1236 - - 14END

340

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B)________________

8.4.3 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data(P11B, P15B)

This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table nameformats P11A and P15A apply.


For TNF=P11B MC_GS_Term(G)_BFor TNF=P15B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_B

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! GCP Dimensional Parameters! Diam Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7 Par 8WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

341


8.4.4 Piping Component Table Green and Red CPData (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A)

This table enables you to define parameters for components which require both green and redconnect point data.


TNF=P21A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_ATNF=P25A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_ATNF=P26A MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_ATNF=P27A MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_ATNF=P28A MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_ATNF=P29A MC_GS_BrchTbl_Angle_A

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ! Par 5=ZZNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 7Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’E90R_39_300_300_A’! Description= 90 deg long radius reducing elbow beveled ends! Source= ANSI-B16.9-1978! TNF=P21A By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-May-1986! SN=F84 Par 1=E Par 2=K Par 3=F Par 4=LNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, SF, LB, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Nom Diam Surf Weight Dimensional Parameters! GCP RCP Area Water Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 42 1 - - 3 0.53 3 0.532 1.25 - - 3 0.3575 3 0.35752 1.5 - - 3 0.2375 3 0.23752.5 1.25 - - 3.75 0.6075 3.75 0.60752.5 1.5 - - 3.75 0.4875 3.75 0.48752.5 2 - - 3.75 0.25 3.75 0.253 1.5 - - 4.5 0.8 4.5 0.83 2 - - 4.5 0.5625 4.5 0.56253 2.5 - - 4.5 0.3125 4.5 0.31253.5 2 - - 5.25 0.8125 5.25 0.81253.5 2.5 - - 5.25 0.5625 5.25 0.5625

342

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A,P25A,P26A,P27A,P28A,P29A)________________ 3.5 3 - - 5.25 0.25 5.25 0.254 2 - - 6 1.0625 6 1.06254 2.5 - - 6 0.8125 6 0.81254 3 - - 6 0.5 6 0.54 3.5 - - 6 0.25 6 0.255 2.5 - - 7.5 1.3438 7.5 1.34385 3 - - 7.5 1.0313 7.5 1.03135 3.5 - - 7.5 0.7813 7.5 0.78135 4 - - 7.5 0.5313 7.5 0.53136 3 - - 9 1.5625 9 1.56256 3.5 - - 9 1.3125 9 1.31256 4 - - 9 1.0625 9 1.06256 5 - - 9 0.5312 9 0.53128 4 - - 12 2.0625 12 2.06258 5 - - 12 1.5312 12 1.53128 6 - - 12 1 12 110 5 - - 15 2.5937 15 2.593710 6 - - 15 2.0625 15 2.062510 8 - - 15 1.0625 15 1.062512 6 - - 18 3.0625 18 3.062512 8 - - 18 2.0625 18 2.062512 10 - - 18 1 18 114 8 - - 21 2.6875 21 2.687514 10 - - 21 1.625 21 1.62514 12 - - 21 0.625 21 0.62516 10 - - 24 2.625 24 2.62516 12 - - 24 1.625 24 1.62516 14 - - 24 1 24 118 10 - - 27 3.625 27 3.62518 12 - - 27 2.625 27 2.62518 14 - - 27 2 27 218 16 - - 27 1 27 120 10 - - 30 4.625 30 4.62520 12 - - 30 3.625 30 3.62520 14 - - 30 3 30 320 16 - - 30 2 30 220 18 - - 30 1 30 124 12 - - 36 5.625 36 5.62524 14 - - 36 5 36 524 16 - - 36 4 36 424 18 - - 36 3 36 324 20 - - 36 2 36 224 22 - - 36 1 36 1END

343


8.4.5 Piping Component Table Green and Red CPOverflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B)

This table enables you to define overflow parameters for components to which table nameformats P21A, P25A, P26A, P27A and P28A apply.


For TNF=P21B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_BFor TNF=P25B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_BFor TNF=P26B MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BFor TNF=P27B MC_GS_Term(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_BFor TNF=P28B MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_B

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 7Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! Nom Diam Dimensional Parameters! GCP RCP Par 1 Par 2 Par 3 Par 4 Par 5 Par 6 Par 7WWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

344

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A)________________

8.4.6 Piping Component Table for Operators andActuators (P31A)

This table enables you to define parameters for valve operators of piping valves whoseoperator code list values (as defined in CL550 - Operator/Actuator Type) are equal to or lessthan 24.


For TNF=P31A MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_A

where Type can have the following possible values:

Preparation Type2-199 BLT

300-399 MAL400-599 FEM

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=P31Y By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN


Example

Table_Data_Definition ’GAT_BLT_150_3_A’! Description=Stem and handwheel operator! Source=PDS Document 2630-33-OP! TNF=P31A By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=26-Feb-1987! SN=OP3 Par 1=Y1 Par 2=Y2No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 2Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN

! GCP Dimensional Parameters! Diam Par 1 Par 20.25 8.375 3.750.375 8.375 3.750.5 8.375 3.750.75 9.25 4.1251 11.875 61.25 12.5 61.5 17.75 10

345

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 2 17.813 102.5 20.125 103 22.375 124 28.188 13.755 31.75 13.756 35.375 15.58 45 19.510 52.5 19.512 61.125 2014 70.5 2416 79.75 2818 89 3020 97.25 3022 105 3024 112.75 3626 116 3628 123.25 3630 140 3632 145 3634 150 3636 155.5 36END

346

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B)________________

8.4.7 Piping Component Table for Operators andActuators, Overflow Data (P31B)

This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators to which table name formatP31A applies.


For TNF=P31B MC_Type(G)_Rat(G)_Op_B

where Type can have the following possible values:

Preparation Type2-199 BLT

300-399 MAL400-599 FEM

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=P31B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZ Par 1=ZZ Par 2=ZZ Par 3=ZZ Par 4=ZZ! Par 5=ZZ Par 6=ZZ Par 7=ZZ Par 8=ZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN


347


8.4.8 Piping Component Table for Empty Weightbased on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59)

This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formatsP51, P52 and P59 apply.


For TNF=P51 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WCFor TNF=P52 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Sc/Th(G)_WCFor TNF=P59 Cmdty Code

With version 5.0, the Physical Data Library Manager will respect the use of a dash (-) in atable name. This allows you to include a dash in the commodity code for a piping commodityvalve, where the commodity code is used to form the name of the dimension table.

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, LB

! GCP Weight! Diam EmptyWWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZEND

Examples

Table_Data_Definition ’VAABAHCCAA’! Description= CL150 gate valve raised face flanged ends weight! Source= CRANE catalog for figure 47XU! TNF=P59 By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=0 Date=29-May-1987No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, LB

! GCP Weight! Diam Empty2 462.5 703 764 1105 1556 1758 31010 45512 65014 86016 1120

348

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59)________________ 18 140020 212524 312030 4250END

Table_Data_Definition ’E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52’! Description= 90 deg long radius elbow beveled ends! Source= Taylor Forge Cat. 722! TNF=P51 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=24-Apr-1986No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, LB

! GCP Weight! Diam Empty0.5 0.170.75 0.171 0.341.25 0.581.5 0.842 1.52.5 33 4.73.5 6.64 8.95 156 248 4710 8312 12314 15816 20718 26320 32322 39224 46826 55028 62530 73332 82534 -36 106138 -40 -42 144244 -46 -48 -END

349


8.4.9 Piping Component Table For Empty Weightof Valves (P60A)

This table enables you to define empty weights of piping valves, weights and centers ofgravity of valve operators, model codes of valves operators and dimensional data of pipingvalve operators whose operator code list values (as defined in CL550, Operator/ActuatorType) exceed 24 and are less than or equal to 40.


For TNF=P60A Cmdty Code_WOPD_A

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_A’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=P60A By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, LB, LB, IN, IN, IN, DEG, IN, IN

! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_A’! Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14",! 4X-N for 16, 18 & 20", & 6X-N for 24" valve.! Par "Y4" includes a 8" mounting adaptor.! Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators! TNF=P60A By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=1 Date=01-Dec-1987! SN=VARIESNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, LB, LB, INT, IN, IN, DEG, IN, IN

! GCP Weight Weight Oper Dimensional Parameters! Diam Vlv Emp Oper Code Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y514 860 75 331 57.625 2.375 0 61.1875 8.7516 1120 109 331 62 3.625 0 65.9688 10.62518 1400 126 331 69.8125 4.25 0 73.7188 10.62520 2125 150 331 80.375 5.5 0 84.2188 10.62524 3120 248 331 92.75 4.625 0 99.375 15.25END

350

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B)________________

8.4.10 Piping Component Table For Empty Weightof Valves, Overflow Data (P60B)

This table enables you to define overflow parameters for operators/actuators to which tablename format P60A applies.


For TNF=P60B Cmdty Code_WOPD_B

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW_WOPD_B’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=P60B By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ! SN=ZZZZZZNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! GCP Dimensional Parameters! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13WWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZWWWWW ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’VAABAHCCGR_WOPD_B’! Description=Crane 47 gate valve with gear operator 3X-N for 14",! 4X-N for 16, 18 & 20", & 6X-N for 24" valve.! Source=CRANE catalog for Converto-Gear valve operators! TNF=P60B By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=22-May-1987! SN=VARIESNo_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 7Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN, IN

! GCP Dimensional Parameters! Diam Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 Y10 Y11 Y1214 3.375 6.6875 12.375 20 0 - -16 3.625 7.2188 15.25 20 0 - -18 3.625 7.2188 15.25 24 0 - -20 3.625 7.2188 15.25 30 0 - -24 5.375 11.375 18.5 30 0 - -END

351


8.4.11 Piping Component Table for Empty Weightbased on GCP and RCP Data(P61,P62,P63,P64,P65)

This table enables you to define empty weights for components to which table name formatsP61, P62, P63, P64, and P65 apply:


For TNF=P61 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WCFor TNF=P62 MC_GS_Term(G)_Rat(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WCFor TNF=P63 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Sc/Th(R)_WCFor TNF=P64 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat(R)_WCFor TNF=P65 MC_GS_Term(G)_Sc/Th(G)_Term(R)_Rat/Sc/Th(R)_WC

Neutral File Format

Table_Data_Definition ’WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW’! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! Source= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! TNF=YYYY By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZNo_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, LB

! Nom Diam Weight! GCP RCP EmptyWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZWWWWW WWWWW ZZZZZZZEND

Example

Table_Data_Definition ’REDC_39_300_S$60_300_S$40_52’! Description= Concentric reducer beveled ends weight.! Source= TAYLOR FORGE Cat. 722, weights for schedule 60 fitting! TNF=P63 By=GJH Ckd By=JPF Rev=0 Date=15-Aug-1986No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, LB

! Nom Diam Weight! GCP RCP Empty14 12 9216 14 12516 12 12518 14 17318 12 17320 18 27820 14 27820 12 27822 20 -22 18 -22 14 -

352

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65)________________ 24 20 39724 18 397END

353


8.4.12 Piping Component Tables for SpecialtyComponents

Six dimension tables are used for each combination of piping specialty generic name(AABBCC code) and piping specialty model code. The AABBCC code is defined in the PDSSort Code attribute of the Piping Specialty Specification Data of the Material ReferenceDatabase.

The tables used to to define the physical data for piping specialty components have the sameformat as those used to define instrument components. The table names are of the format:

EQBODY_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A, _B, _C - Specialty Body Data

EQOPER_SPECIFIC_<PSC>_<MC>_A, _B, _C - Specialty Operator/Actuator Data

Refer to Instrument Component Tables, page 355 for more information on these tables.

354

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Instrument Component Tables________________

8.5 Instrument Component Tables

Six dimension tables are used for each combination of instrument name (pds_sort_code) andinstrument model code. Multiple tables are required since tables with one input are limited tonine outputs. The instrument pds_sort_code is defined in the Instrument ComponentSpecification Data of the Material Reference Database (Table 204 attribute 18). (For thedelivered examples, the pds_sort_code is the Instrument AABBCC code as defined in thePDS Component Data Reference Guide.)

Input to these tables is defined in the physical_data_id attribute of the Instrument ComponentSpecification Data (Table 204 attribute 17). The entries in the tables must agree with theentries in the Instrument Component Specification Data of the Material Reference Database.

Each table is limited to approximately 60,000 bytes or 750 lines.

When the tables are created in the Physical Data Library, you should define the values for thephysical units for length, surface area, and weight to match the seed data defined for theproject.

8.5.1 Instrument Body (I80 and P80)

Three tables define the instrument body physical and geometric data for each combination ofinstrument pds_sort_code and the model code in the Instrument Component SpecificationData of the Material Reference Database.

The default prefix for these table names is Inbody. You can specify a user-defined prefix upto 6 characters for the table names. If you use a user-defined prefix, you must revise theappropriate Piping Eden modules for the instruments.

The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical, the instrument pds_sort_code, the modelcode, and a letter indicating the table (A-C).

355


Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_A

The input field is the physical_data_id for the instrument.

The first four output fields are the surface area, the dry weight, the water weight, and thenumber of connect points for the instrument.

The remaining output fields are the dimensional parameters P2 through P6, as prescribed inthe PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide.

Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_B

The output fields are the dimensional parameters P7 through P15, as prescribed in the PDSPiping Component Data Reference Guide.

356

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Instrument Component Tables________________

Inbody_Specific_PSC_MC_C

The output fields are the dimensional parameters P16 through P24, as prescribed in the PDSPiping Component Data Reference Guide.

357


8.5.2 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81)

Three tables are required for the instrument operator/actuator geometric data for eachcombination of instrument pds_sort_code and model code in the Instrument ComponentSpecification Data of the Material Reference Database.

The default prefix for these table names is Inoper. You can specify a user-defined prefix, upto 6 characters, for the table names. If you specify a user-defined prefix, you must revise theappropriate Piping Eden modules for these instrument operators.

The prefix is followed by either Specific or Typical, the instrument pds_sort_code, the modelcode, and a letter indicating the table (A - C).

Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_A

The first two output fields for this table are the operator weight and the operator type. Theoperator type must be loaded in the modifier attribute of the Instrument ComponentSpecification Data of the Material Reference Database. The operator type is the number (suchas 411) representing the operator and not the symbol name (such as OP_411).

The remaining output fields are dimensional parameters Y2 through Y8, as prescribed in thePDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide. For some operators, the first threedimensional parameters, Y2 through Y4, define the center of gravity for the operator in termsof offsets from the instrument center.

358

8. Tab

le Fo

rmats

Instrument Operator (I81 and P81)________________

Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_B

The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y9 through Y17, as prescribed in the PDSPiping Component Data Reference Guide.

Inoper_Specific_PSC_MC_C

The output fields are the dimensional parameters Y18 through Y24, as prescribed in the PDSPiping Component Data Reference Guide.

359


360

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Material Description Data________________

9. Material Description Data

The PDS 3D modules use the Material Description Library and the material data in theMaterial Reference Database to provide material descriptions for commodity items andspecialty items. This data is accessed for

Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database.

Other miscellaneous reporting.

Interfaces to a material control system.

Stress analysis.

Isometric drawing extraction.

The alphanumeric commodity data is made up of four major parts:

Material Tables in the Material Reference Database - These database tables (211 and212) contain commodity definitions which enable you to further classify the commodityitems defined in the Piping Job Specification. This database information tends to becustomer-specific.

Short Material Description Library - This library contains the short bill-of-material(BOM) descriptions for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addendafor taps.

Long Material Description Library - This library contains the long bill-of-materialdescriptions for all piping commodity items. The long BOM description is only usedfor requisitions.

Specialty Material Description Library - This library contains the bill-of-materialdescriptions for engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports.

The material description data in these files is used for reporting and material control and is notrequired for the interactive placement of symbols in the model. This data is only accessedduring a batch (non-interactive) process.

Commodity Code

The system uses the commodity code as an index to access the descriptions in the materialdescription libraries. You can use the commodity code defined in the Piping CommoditySpecification Data table (Table 202 attribute 18) or a user-defined commodity code defined inthe Size-Dependent Material Data table (Table 211 attribute 7).

361


The source of the commodity code and other processing options for reporting are defined for amodel with the Material Takeoff Options form of the Project Data Manager.

The commodity code represents that set of parameters that completely describe a commodityitem, exclusive of nominal piping diameter and thickness. The character length for thecommodity code is determined from the character length of the commodity code in the SizeDependent Data table of the database, or from the character length of the commodity code inthe Piping Commodity Data table of the database, depending on which is being used to accessthe material descriptions.

The delivered commodity codes use a 10 character code to fully identify the item. The firstletter of the commodity code identifies the basic type of component, such as a valve or flange.The remaining characters provide a detailed description of the component. The first characterdesignations are:

362

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Material Description Data________________

B Flanged and Misc. Fittings Q Socket End FittingsD Fire and Safety Components R Tubing FittingsE Steam Specialties S Socketwelded FittingsF Flanges T Threaded FittingsG Flanged Specialties U Underground FittingsH Strainers V ValvesM Misc. Wetted Components W Welded FittingsN Misc. Non-Wetted Components X GasketsO Tubing and Hose Y BoltingP Pipe

Examples

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0_____________________________

P A D A A B C A A E

P - PipeAD - Pipe, Plain EndsAA - SeamlessBC - X-Strong (s-xs)AAE - ASTM A106 Gr. B

V A A B A H C C A A

V - ValveA - Gate ValveA - CL150B - Raised Face Flanged EndsA - Carbon SteelH - Trim 8CC - Crane 47AA - Blank

Refer to Appendix E of the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a completelisting of the delivered commodity codes.

You can use the delivered commodity codes or create your own naming scheme. Regardlessof the scheme used, all the codes must be unique and there must be an exact match betweenthe commodity code specified for an item in the Material Reference Database and commoditycodes used to define the material descriptions in the Material Descriptions Library.

363


Tap Commodity Codes

The delivered tap codes use a 10 character code to full identify the tap’s material descriptionaddendum. The basic format of the tap commodity code is

A BBB CCC DDD

where

A E if English.

BBB the nominal diameter value of the tap such as $50, $75, or 001. The use ofleading and trailing zeroes is specific to this table naming convention. ($represents a decimal point.)

CCC End preparation value as defined in code list set 330.

DDD user-defined value.

Example

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0_____________________________

E $ 5 0 4 2 1 0 6 4

E - English$50 - NPD = 0.5 inches421 - SWE - socketwelded end064 - unique number

Tri-Clover Commodity Code Logic

The Tri-Clover commodity codes are based on Tri-Clover part numbers, but have beenmodified so that they are less than 18 characters.

Example

Tri-Clover part number:

BS14AM-4"-316L-PL

BS14AM = Part Description4" = Size316L = Material GradePL = Surface Finish Description

364

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Material Description Data________________ Tri-Clover commodity code:

BS14AM316LPL

In the Tri-Clover commodity code, the dashes ("-") and size are removed so that thecommodity code is less than 18 characters. The commodity code description lists the full partnumber.

365


9.1 Material Data in the MaterialReference Database

The Material Reference Database contains two database tables which contain Material Data.

Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211)

The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that isdependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness. Itis used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports andrequisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometricdrawing extraction.

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212)

The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specificcommodity item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code andnominal piping diameter range. This data is used strictly for generating impliedmaterial for MTO reporting and material control. It is not used for welds, bolts, nuts, orgaskets, but is reserved for other types of implied material, such as caps or stubs, for aspecific commodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied components of acommodity item (such as cap screws).

Refer to Material Reference Database Structure, page 56, for information on the structure ofthese database tables. Also refer to the description of the Piping Job Specification Manager,page 145, for information on loading material data into these database tables via neutral files.

366

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Short Material Description Library________________

9.2 Short Material Description Library

This library contains the short bill of materials description for all piping commodity items andthe description addenda for taps. The short BOM description is used for MTO reporting andfor reporting from the Piping Job Specification. This parameter is required during the creationof the Piping Job Specification. Nominal piping diameter is not included in this description.

The short material descriptions are delivered in the files

\win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_shbom.l - object library

The short material descriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.

Neutral Files

You can use neutral files to insert data into the Short Material Description Library or replaceexisting data. The neutral files for the delivered material descriptions are contained in the textlibrary. You can use the in the following files:

The Short Material Description Library is created from two neutral files. (These can becreated with a text editor such as EMACS or vi.)

A neutral file containing the short material descriptions for commodity items. Theneutral file contains unique Commodity Codes followed by at least one space and adescription enclosed in single quotes. It also contains the chain wheel descriptions andimplied material descriptions associated with a commodity item.

The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customer’scommodity code. The character length for this code is determined from the characterlength of the commodity code in the Size Dependent Data table of the database, or fromthe character length of the commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data tableof the database, depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions.

For chain wheels the commodity code has the format CHAIN_xx, where xx representsthe chain wheel number (for example, CHAIN_12). The chain wheel number is definedin the component and instrument analysis entities of the TDB.

A neutral file containing the material description addenda for taps. This file containsthe tap code and the text for the tap description. The tap code identifies the uniqueidentification of a tap.

367

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The following conventions are used to identify different types of information in the materialdescriptions:

ˆ All information to the left of the carat (ˆ) is used in MTO reporting andisometric extraction, but is excluded from Spec reporting.

| | Information appearing in |Pipes| indicates information for Specdescriptions only. This information is excluded from the descriptionsfor MTO reporting and isometric extraction.

[ ] Information appearing in [brackets] indicates a label type from theLabel Description Library. The system uses the label format todetermine the information to be included in the material description forMTO reporting and isometric extraction. The label information isnever used in Spec reporting.

The following label types are provided in the product delivery:

Label No Data in Label Source of Data400 Comp cmdty code Component401 Piping sch/thk 1 Pipe402 Tag no Component403 Component sch/thk 1 Component406 Component sch/thk 1 b Component407 Component sch/thk 2 Component409 Component sch/thk 2 b Component412 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 Component414 Component sch/thk 1 x 2 b Component416 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 Component417 Component sch/thk 1 x 3 b Component421 Bonnet length Component422 Piping chain length Component423 Reinforcing weld size Component424 Instr chain length Component425 RPAD width x thick Component426 Comp NPD 1 Component427 Monitor elev length Component428 Hydrant cover Component429 Blank/spacer thk Component

Data Retrieval

The system uses the commodity code to retrieve the short material descriptions from theMaterial Description Library.

368

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data


Commodity Material Descriptions

! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS

! Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 14:16:58 1992

! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom.l

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description========================================

CHAIN_1003 ’Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400]’

CHAIN_1005 ’Chainwheel operator each with [422] of total chain length for [426] NPD valve with commodity code [400]’

CHAIN_1251 ’Chainwheel operator each with [424] of total chain length for valve with tag no [402]’

DAABAXAABE ’Monitor, CL150 FFFE, ˆstation type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet

w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21’

DAABAXAABF ’Monitor, CL150 FFFE, ˆstation type 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless steel

outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/fog nozzle,

Stang BB0309-21’

DACBAXABBC ’Monitor, CL150 FFFE, êlevated type, free standing, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT

stainless steel outlet, [427], w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports,

Stang BB2999-’

DACBAXABBD ’Monitor, CL300 FFFE, êlevated type, supported, 6" CL300 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless

steel outlet, [427], w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB3561’

DBAAAXBAAB ’Fire hydrant, CL125 FFFE, ˆ5" size, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle,

two 2.5" hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B’

DCBGDXEADA ’Hose rack, 300#, FTE, ˆw/valve, wall mount, rt hand w/100 ft hose & fog nozzle Powhatan 30-333’

DDAXCJDAAA ’Spray sprinkler, MTE, filled cone w/rupture disc, 304, Grinnell, Mulsifyre Projector S-1’

FAAAAAWAAA ’Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAAAAWWAA ’Flange, CL150, FFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, cement lined, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABADIIA ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAAABADIIF ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAAABADNPF ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAAABAOAAA ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAAABAOABB ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAAABAOFFH ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAAABAWAAA ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABAWABB ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABAWFFH ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABAWFFL ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABAWGFD ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSME-SA182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABAWIIA ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABAWIIF ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABAWNPF ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAABBDAAA ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore’

FAAADAOAAA ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore’

FAAADAOFFC ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore’

FAAADAWAAA ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAADAWFFC ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|’

FAAADBDFFC ’Flange, CL150, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-XXS bore’

FAABBADIIA ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAABBADIIB ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAABBADIIF ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAABBAOAAA ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAABBAOABB ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAABBAOFFC ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAABBAOFFH ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAABBAWAAA ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWABB ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A350-LF2, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWFFC ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWFFH ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWFFL ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWIIA ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWIIB ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304L, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWIIF ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBAWNPF ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-B166-600, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABBBDAAA ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-XXS bore’

FAABDADIIJ ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-80S bore’

FAABDAOAAA ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore’

FAABDAOFFC ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, S-160 bore’

FAABDAWAAA ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABDAWFFC ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABDAWFFH ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|’

FAABDAWIIJ ’Flange, CL300, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F321, ANSI-B16.5, WN, 125 Ra finish, [409]|bore to match|’

FAADBADIIA ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAADBADIIF ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F316, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-80S bore’

FAADBAOAAA ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

369


FAADBAOABE ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, S-160 bore’

FAADBAWAAA ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAADBAWABE ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSME-SA105, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAADBAWFFC ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F11, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAADBAWFFH ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F5, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAADBAWFFL ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F9, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

FAADBAWIIA ’Flange, CL600, RFFE/BE, ÂSTM-A182-F304, ANSI-B16.5, WN, [409]|bore to match|’

Tap Material Descriptions

! DEFINE SHORT DESCRIPTIONS

! Date/Time: Thu Apr 23 12:09:23 1992

! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_shbom.l

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description================================

E$12591XXX ’0.125" diam hole’



E$50021018 ’0.5" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap’

E$50021028 ’0.5" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap’

E$50021036 ’0.5" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap’

E$50401093 ’0.5" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap’

E$50421064 ’0.5" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap’

E$50421072 ’0.5" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap’

E$50421076 ’0.5" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap’

E$50441056 ’0.5" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap’

E$50441064 ’0.5" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap’

E$50441072 ’0.5" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap’


E$75021018 ’0.75" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap’

E$75021028 ’0.75" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap’

E$75021036 ’0.75" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap’

E$75401093 ’0.75" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap’

E$75421064 ’0.75" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap’

E$75421072 ’0.75" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap’

E$75421076 ’0.75" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap’

E$75441056 ’0.75" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap’

E$75441064 ’0.75" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap’

E$75441072 ’0.75" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap’


E001021018 ’1" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap’

E001021028 ’1" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap’

E001021036 ’1" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap’

E001401093 ’1" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap’

E001421064 ’1" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap’

E001421072 ’1" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap’

E001421076 ’1" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap’

E001441056 ’1" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap’

E001441064 ’1" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap’

E001441072 ’1" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap’

E001591XXX ’1" diam hole’

E002021018 ’2" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap’

E002021028 ’2" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap’

E002021036 ’2" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap’

E002401093 ’2" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap’

E002421064 ’2" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap’

E002421072 ’2" NPD, CL6000 SWE tap’

E002421076 ’2" NPD, CL9000 SWE tap’

E002441056 ’2" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap’

E002441064 ’2" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap’

E002441072 ’2" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap’


E003021018 ’3" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap’

E003021028 ’3" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap’

E003021036 ’3" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap’

E003401093 ’3" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap’

E003421064 ’3" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap’

370

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data


E003441056 ’3" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap’

E003441064 ’3" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap’

E003441072 ’3" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap’


E004021018 ’4" NPD, CL150 RFFE tap’

E004021028 ’4" NPD, CL300 RFFE tap’

E004021036 ’4" NPD, CL600 RFFE tap’

E004401093 ’4" NPD, Sch 80 SE tap’

E004421064 ’4" NPD, CL3000 SWE tap’

E004441056 ’4" NPD, CL2000 FTE tap’

E004441064 ’4" NPD, CL3000 FTE tap’

E004441072 ’4" NPD, CL6000 FTE tap’


371


9.3 Long Material Description Library

This library contains the long bill of materials description for all piping commodity items.The long bill of materials description is only used for requisitions. It is usually a very longdescription such as a paragraph. Nominal piping diameter is not included in the description.

This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control.

The long material descriptions are delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_lgbom.l.

The long material descriptions can be up to 500 characters in length.

Neutral Files

The Long Material Description Library is created through a neutral file which contains thelong material descriptions for commodity items. The neutral file contains unique commoditycodes followed by at least one space and a description enclosed in single quotes.

You can use neutral files to insert data into the Long Material Description Library or replaceexisting data.

The commodity code identifies the Piping Commodity Library code or customer’s commoditycode. The character length for this code is determined from the character length of thecommodity code in the Size Dependent Data database table, or from the character length ofthe commodity library code in the Piping Commodity Data table of the PJS database,depending on which is being used to access the material descriptions.

The long description can be up to 500 characters. Because this description may include labelnumbers which are translated to text strings, the reported (compiled) length of the descriptioncan be up to 600 characters.

Prior to the 5.0 release there was a restriction that no more than 255 characters could bespecified per line in the neutral file. This required that long descriptions be continued onmultiple lines. With the 5.0 release, a neutral file for long material descriptions may containup to 600 characters per line.

Data Retrieval

The system uses the Piping Commodity Library code or commodity code to access the text forthe long description in the Long Material Description Library.

372

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Long Material Description Library________________

Listing for Long Material Descriptions

! DEFINE LONG DESCRIPTIONS

! Date/Time: Fri Apr 24 10:48:13 1992

! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_lgbom.l

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description========================================

DAABAXAABE ’Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, station type, 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless

steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB0309-21

or approved equal’

DAABAXAABF ’Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, station type 4" CL150 in-let by 2.5" NHT stainless

steel outlet w/stainless steel stem lock knobs with 0.75" coupling in base, w/fog nozzle, Stang BB0309-21

or approved equal’

DACBAXABBC ’Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL150 flat face flange end, elevated type, free standing, 4" CL150 in-let by

2.5" NHT stainless steel outlet, w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle and two reaction supports,

Stang BB2999-[427] high or approved equal’

DACBAXABBD ’Monitor, 750 GPM at 100 psig, CL300 flat face flange end, elevated type, supported, 6" CL300 in-let by 2.5"

NHT stainless steel outlet, w/drain coupling, w/shapertip nozzle, Stang BB3561-[427] high or approved equal’

DBAAAXBAAB ’Fire hydrant, CL125 flat face flange end, 5" size, regular rating, ductile iron barrel, bronze trim,

bituminous paint below grade, red epoxy paint above grade, counterclockwise open, 4.5" steamer nozzle, two 2.5"

hose nozzles equipped w/caps and chains, [428], American Darling B-50-B or approved equal’

DCBGDXEADA ’Hose rack w/bronze angle valve, 300#, female threaded end, wall mount, right hand w/100 ft synthetic single

jacketed hose, rack nipple & fog nozzle, Powhatan 30-333 or approved equal’

DDAXCJDAAA ’Spray sprinkler, male threaded end, filled cone w/rupture disc, .313" orifice, Type 304 stainless steel,

Grinnell Fire Protection, Mulsifyre Projector S-1 50-12 or approved equal’

FAAAAAWAAA ’Flange, weld neck, flat face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409]’

FAAAAAWWAA ’Flange, weld neck, flat face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, cement lined, [409]’

FAAABADIIA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, Sch 80S bore’

FAAABADIIF ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F316, Sch 80S bore’

FAAABADNPF ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-B166 Gr.600 UNS N06600, hot finish, Sch 80S bore’

FAAABAOAAA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, Sch 160 bore’

FAAABAOABB ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A350 Gr.LF2, Sch 160 bore’

FAAABAOFFH ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F5, Sch 160 bore’

FAAABAWAAA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409]’

FAAABAWABB ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A350 Gr.LF2, [409]’

FAAABAWFFH ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F5, [409]’

FAAABAWFFL ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F9, [409]’

FAAABAWGFD ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASME-SA182 Gr.F11, [409]’

FAAABAWIIA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, [409]’

FAAABAWIIF ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F316, [409]’

FAAABAWNPF ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-B166 Gr.600 UNS N06600, hot finish, [409]’

FAAABBDAAA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, XX-strong bore’

FAAADAOAAA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, Sch 160 bore’

FAAADAOFFC ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, Sch 160 bore’

FAAADAWAAA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A105, [409]’

FAAADAWFFC ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, [409]’

FAAADBDFFC ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, 125 Ra finish, ANSI-B16.5 CL150, ASTM-A182 Gr.F11, XX-strong bore’

FAABBADIIA ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL300, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304, Sch 80S bore’

FAABBADIIB ’Flange, weld neck, raised face flanged end, ANSI-B16.5 CL300, ASTM-A182 Gr.F304L, Sch 80S bore’

373


9.4 Specialty Material Description Library

This Library contains the material descriptions for any engineered items or in-line instrumentswhich are reported by MTO or material control. These material descriptions are job specificand are accessed by the specialty item’s tag number.

This data is used strictly for MTO reporting and material control. The specialty materialdescriptions can be up to 240 characters in length.

Neutral Files

Three neutral files are used to insert data into or replace data for the specialty materialdescriptions.

Material descriptions for engineered items

(engineered item number = tag).

Material descriptions for instruments.

(instrument tag number = tag).

Material descriptions for pipe supports.

(commodity code = tag).

These files contain the specialty tag number and the text for the material description. Thespecialty tag number is appended by a specialty type which is used to distinguish betweenengineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports.

The descriptions in Specialty Material Description Library tend to be customer-specific. Thefollowing is a listing of sample neutral files for the specialty data.

! DEFINE SPECIALTY DESCRIPTIONS

! Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:24 1992

! Processed Library c:\newpipe\refdata\us_spbom.l

!Cmdty Code ====================================Description==============================

38-VI-9 ’RELIEF CONTROL VALVE.’

INSTR ’Instrument’

PSPECIALTY ’Piping specialty component’

PSUPPORT ’[970]’


! Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:39 1992



SPECIAL_ENGR ’SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.’

SPECIAL_ENGR 8 ’SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.’

SPECIAL_ENGR @O ’SPECIAL ANGLE OUTLET.’

374

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Specialty Material Description Library________________


! Date/Time: Thu Apr 30 09:02:56 1992



SUPP1 ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1.’

SUPP1 8 ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1.’

SUPP1 @O ’PIPE SUPPORT NUMBER 1.’







Data Retrieval

The system uses the specialty tag number and specialty type to access the text for the materialdescriptions in the Specialty Material Description Library.

375


9.5 Material Description Library Manager

The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create and modify alphanumericcommodity data. You can initialize libraries, create material description data, append newdata to existing material description data, revise (delete and replace) existing data, and deleteexisting data.

You can use the copy and paste commands to copy existing library data from another projectand make the necessary revisions using the Material Description Library Manager.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Material Description Library Manager from the Reference Data Managerform.

The system displays the Material Description Library Manager form.

2. Select the option for the library to be modified.

Short Material Description Library

Long Material Description Library

Specialty Material Description Library

376

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Material Description Library Manager________________

3. The data manipulation options for each of the libraries is similar. You can perform thefollowing activities for each of the libraries.

Create Library — Creates a new (empty) Short Material Description Library, LongMaterial Description Library, or Specialty Material Description Library.

Unapprove ==> Approve — Copies data from the unapproved library to theapproved library.

Load/Revise Interactive — Adds the contents of the neutral files to the informationcurrently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in thelibrary.

Load/Revise Batch — Adds the contents of the neutral files to the informationcurrently in an existing Material Description Library or revises an existing table in thelibrary.

Replace Interactive — Deletes all entries in the respective Material DescriptionLibrary file and then loads new entries from a neutral file.

Replace Batch — Deletes all entries in the respective Material Description Libraryfile and then loads new entries from a neutral file.

Report — Used to create a report file or a neutral file of the contents of the materialdescription library.

377



This option is used to create a new Material Description Library. This option is disabled if thelibrary already exists.

1. Select Create Library from the Material Description Library Manager form.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Library names as defined in theRDB Management Data.

2. The system prompts Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library

Select Accept to create the specified library files.


This option is used to copy the data in the unapproved material description library to theapproved library.


Select Accept to copy the library file to the approved library.

If the approved and unapproved library names are the same, the system displays an errormessage.

378

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Load/Revise Interactive________________

9.5.3 Load/Revise Interactive

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material DescriptionLibrary. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral fileformats used in defining the delivered material data.

This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library orrevises an existing table in the library.

The neutral files for the delivered RDB data are contained in the delivered materialdescription libraries. Refer to the Report option for information on extracting the neutralfiles.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Load/Revise option.

2. Select File Type

Select the type of material data to be loaded into the specified library from the displaylist and select Accept.


Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.


Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file.

The system begins processing the load/revise request.

379


9.5.4 Load/Revise Batch

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material DescriptionLibrary via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for alisting of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data.

This option adds the contents of the neutral files to the information currently in the library orrevises an existing table in the library.


Operating Sequence

1. Select the Load/Revise option.

2. Select File Type



Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processedand select Accept.


Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time.

For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.

5. Select Accept to begin processing.


380

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Replace Interactive________________

9.5.5 Replace Interactive

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material DescriptionLibrary. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for a listing of the neutral fileformats used in defining the delivered material data.

This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from theneutral file.


Operating Sequence

1. Select the Replace Interactive option from the Material Description Library form.

2. Select File Type



Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processed.


Select Accept to begin processing the neutral file.

381


9.5.6 Replace Batch

This option enables you to load entries from a neutral file into the Material DescriptionLibrary via batch processing. Refer to the library descriptions earlier in this section for alisting of the neutral file formats used in defining the delivered material data.

This option deletes all entries in the respective library file and then loads new entries from theneutral file.


Operating Sequence

1. Select the Replace Batch option from the Material Description Library form.

2. Select File Type



Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be processedand select Accept.


Set the toggle to Submit Batch Immediately or Delayed Batch Submit Time.

For delayed submission, set the time to process the neutral file.

5. Select Accept to begin processing.


382

9. Material

Descrip

tion

Data

Report Option________________

9.5.7 Report Option

The Report option enables you to create neutral files or report files using the information inthe Material Description Library. Refer to the description of the Short Material DescriptionLibrary, Long Material Description Library, and Specialty Material Description Library formore information on the types of neutral files.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Report option from one of the library forms.

2. Select File Type

Select the type of material data to be extracted from the specified library from thedisplay list and select Accept.


Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name andFile Path information.

4. Accept or Toggle to Create Report

Select Accept to create the specified neutral file.

5. Set the toggle to Unapproved Library or Approved Library to define the source ofinformation to be reported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved andthe unapproved library are being used.

6. Set the toggle to Create Neutral File to create a neutral file which can be revised andreloaded into the library.

— OR —

Set the toggle to Create Report to create a report file of the information in the library.The report output is the same as the neutral file except that the system aligns subsequentlines of the material description left-justified to the beginning of the materialdescription rather than the commodity code.

383

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ For the report selection, the system displays the following options.

7. Select the reporting option.

Print / Delete — submit the generated report output file to the specified printqueue and delete the output file.

Print / Save — submit the generated report output file to the specified printqueue and save the output file.

Save — save the output file and suppress printing.

For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based on informationin the project Queue Description Library. Refer to the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide, for more information on the Queue Description Library and setting up printqueues.

Select the queue for the required output device.

8. Select Accept to begin processing the request.

384

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Table Checker________________

10. Table Checker

The Table Checker enables you to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Edenmodules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project.

This process accesses the Eden code for each commodity item in the piping material class andchecks that the table names created in the physical dimension modules exist in the projectPhysical Data Library. This routine checks for the existence of the tables and checks thecontents of the tables.

For Table Checker to function, there MUST be at least one piping model filecreated in the project, and it must have a piping materials class (spec) definedin the Active Segment Parameters.

The Type 63 settings of the model with the highest alphanumeric name areused as defaults for the Table Checker reports. If weight tables are set to ’yes’for this model, then Table Checker will search for and report on found andmissing weight tables. If MTO Bolt Calculation is set to ’almost precise,’Table Checker will search for the ’almost precise’ tables (table naming format= G12). If set to ’precise,’ Table Checker will search for ’precise’ tables (tablenaming format = G12T).

When the spec contains PIPING/TUBE and PIPE/TUBING, Table Checker will report asper Type 63 data settings.

If Component Placement is set to PIPING for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBE forTube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches forPDPIPING and PDTUBE in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any other PIPEand TUBING values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checkerassumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches forSPmodel_Code in the Graphic Commodity Library.

If Component Placement is set to PIPE for Pipe Commodity Name and TUBING forTube Commodity Name, Table Checker uses these commodity names and searches forPDPIPE and PDTUBING in the Graphic Commodity Library. If there are any otherPIPING and TUBE values found in the spec that do not match with Type 63, Table Checkerassumes that this is a regular commodity item. It uses the model_code and searches forSPmodel_code in the Graphic Commodity Library.

In such cases, if the model_code of the item is the same as the commodity_name thatmatches with Type 63 data, the Table Checker may report the same value under both EdenFound and Eden Not Found. In other words, Table Checker reports thecommodity_name under Eden Found and the model_code under Eden NotFound.

385


Features

The Table Checker provides the following features.

Reports on one piping material class selected from the available entries in theSpecification/Material Database.

Reports on all valid sizes in the size range for each piping commodity using theNominal Piping Diameter table for that piping materials class.

Reports dimensional tables used during the placement of each piping commodity in thepiping materials class. This includes the table names, the types of tables, the existenceof those tables (found or not found), and the output values from those tables.

Reports Piping Eden modules used during the placement of each piping commodity inthe piping materials class. This includes the Piping Eden module names and theexistence of those modules (found or not found).

Reports dimensional tables used for all piping commodities in the entire report (thepiping materials class). This includes the table names, the revision dates for thosetables, and the source Dimension Table Library.

Reports bolt tables for each piping commodity with bolted ends.

Reports Piping Eden modules used for all piping commodities in the entire report (thepiping materials class). This includes the Piping Eden module names and the existenceof those modules (found or not found).

Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for anypiping commodities defined in the Material Reference Database. The commodity codeas defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table (PDtable_202) or thePiping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table (PDtable_211) is used toverify the material description.

Verifies that a material description exists in the Material Description Library for anyimplied component defined in the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data Table(PDtable_212) of the Material Reference Database.

Verifies that a material description exists in the Specialty Material Description Libraryfor any piping specialty or instrument defined in the Material Reference Database.

Provides a detailed error report of any tables or table entries that were found missingduring the processing of the piping materials class.

For tables containing schedule thickness calculations as part of the name, thecalculations are replaced with preferred thickness unless no preferred thicknessis found for that size or PMC thickness table.

If any errors are encountered during execution, the system appends the errors to the end of thereport output. In the case of severe errors, it creates a file named RPT_ERR.LOG.

386

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Table Checker________________

Commodity items with option codes greater than 5000 (spec impliedcomponents) are not checked.

Format Files

The Table Checker uses report format files to define the report output. It uses the samereporting indices as any other report from the Piping Job Specification data (the C indices).Refer to Format Files in the Report Manager Reference Guide for more information on theseindices.

The following example report formats for the Table Checker are included in the PD_DATAsample directory (\win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format/). Refer to the Report ManagerReference Guide for more information on report type.

tbl_chk_1.fmt

This report format reports on virtually all data generated by the Table Checker. It is acombination of the following sample report formats: tbl_chk_2.fmt, tbl_chk_3.fmt, andtbl_chk_4.fmt.

It reports the piping commodities in the selected piping materials class with thedimension tables and Piping Eden modules used, including a list of all entries read inthe dimension tables. It also lists all dimension tables and Piping Eden modulesrequired for those piping commodities, but not available in the Reference Database.

tbl_chk_2.fmt

This report format reports the dimension tables and Piping Eden modules used by eachpiping commodity in the applicable piping materials class.

tbl_chk_3.fmt

This report lists all entries read in dimension tables for the applicable piping materialsclass.

tbl_chk_4.fmt

This report format reports a total list of dimension tables and Piping Eden modules usedfor the applicable piping materials class. It also lists all dimension tables and PipingEden modules required for those piping commodities, but not available in the ReferenceDatabase.

tbl_chk_5.fmt

This report verifies the reference data for any piping specialties defined in theReference Database (pdtable_203).

tbl_chk_6.fmt

387

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ This report verifies the reference data for any instruments defined in the ReferenceDatabase (pdtable_204).

Table format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination file is created withthe No Piping Material Class button selected.

388

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Table Checker Form________________

10.1 Table Checker Form

The Report Manager form enables you to generate reports from the project, design, andreference database files with the report definition data. The report record and the locationrecords for each discrimination data file and format file are stored in the project controldatabase. These numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.

Options

Report Format — Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create,revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For moreinformation, see Report Format Form, page 392.

Report Discrimination Data — Displays the Discrimination Data form, which youcan use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as wellas the file itself. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form, page 398.

Report — Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, andapprove report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page406.

Report Management Data — Displays the Report Management Defaults form,which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the defaultnodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used forsetup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.

389


10.1.1 Using the Report Commands

Understanding Report Files and Records

The Table Checker uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database records thatrepresent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of the files andrecords in the reporting process.

Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outsideof the Table Checker. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the reportand how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Without theformat file(s), Table Checker reports cannot be processed. A set of basic format files isdelivered for each type of reporting.

Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file sothat it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the ProjectControl Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, theformat record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data thatis used for report processing but is not an actual file.

Discrimination Data File and Record

The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It isan ASCII file that is created interactively using the Table Checker.

The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name andlocate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for eachdiscrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same waythat the format record is used to access a format file.

Report Output and Record

The Table Checker creates a report using the specified format, discrimination, and searchcriteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node.

The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate areport, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that isused for report processing but is not an actual file.)

390

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Using the Report Commands________________

Group Workflow

There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use theReport Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the reportdefinition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and pathon each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default,simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification.

The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination datarecord, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report DiscriminationData options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file,and their corresponding records have been established.

Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.

391


10.1.2 Report Format Form

When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form, the ReportFormat form is displayed.

This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the formatfile in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy arecord and its corresponding ASCII format files.

The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will bedisplayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the file’slocation has been entered into the project control database.

Options

Create — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add anew record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, seeFormat Creation/Revision Form, page 394.

Copy — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of anexisting format file from the project control database along with the correspondingASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page394.

Revise — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of anexisting format file in the project control database. For more information, see FormatCreation/Revision Form, page 394.

392

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Report Format Form________________ Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format filefrom the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reportingcannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 396.

393


10.1.2.1 Format Creation/Revision Form

When you choose Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the FormatCreation/Revision form is displayed.

This form creates or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines thelocation of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report.Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.

Field Descriptions

Number — A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in theproject control database used to identify the record of the format file.

Description — A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.

File Specification — The file name of the format file to reference.

Path — The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.

Node — The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This fieldretains the active setting.

394

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Format Creation/Revision Form________________

Before Using this Form

You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with thePD_Data product in the ˜\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for MTO reporting isnamed piping_#.fmt.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.

A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record,go to Step 3.


From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.

Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.

3. Specify Report Format Data

Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in eachfield. Then click Accept.

The project control database is updated.

395


10.1.2.2 Format Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



396

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Format Deletion Form________________



397


10.1.3 Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, theDiscrimination Data form is displayed.

This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specifieddirectory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, ordeleted as needed.

A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in areport. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project controldatabase record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to beassociated with a specific report.

Options

Create — Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a newdiscrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created.For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form, page 400.

Copy — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existingdata file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For moreinformation, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page 402.

Revise — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifiesdiscrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discriminationdata file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the project

398

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Discrimination Data Form________________ control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form, page402.

Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as wellas its associated record in the project control database. For more information, seeDiscrimination Data Deletion Form, page 404.

399


10.1.3.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form

When you select Create from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination DataCreation form is displayed.

This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. It also creates acorresponding record in the project control database. In addition, you can use this form tospecify segment and component search criteria.

If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify searchcriteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified usingthe Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.

Fields and Options

Number — The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of thediscrimination data record in the project control database.

Description — The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record inthe project control database.

File Specification — The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.

File Path — The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains theactive settings.

400

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Discrimination Data Creation Form________________ File Node — The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file islocated. This field retains the active settings.

Piping Materials Class — Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the pipingmaterials class.


Select Piping Materials Class — Sets the piping materials class(es) in theSpecification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked.

No Piping Materials Class — When selected, indicates to the system that either thepiping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker.

Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data iscreated with the No Piping Materials Class button selected.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Create

The Discrimination Data Creation form displays.

2. Specify Discrimination Data

In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, andnode.

3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then selectAccept.

After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,be sure to select the final Accept. Because you must accept many formswhile specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Eventhough you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, thediscrimination data file is not actually created until you select Accept on theReport Discrimination Data form.

401


10.1.3.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the DiscriminationData Revision form is displayed.

This form revises an existing discrimination data file. It also copies an existing discriminationdata file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. Thecorresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.In addition, options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteriadata.

If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify searchcriteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified usingthe Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.

Fields and Options

Number — The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of thediscrimination data record in the project control database.

Description — The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record inthe project control database.

File Specification — The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.

File Path — The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains theactive settings.

File Node — The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file islocated. This field retains the active settings.

Piping Materials Class — Select one or more piping materials classes from this list ofloaded classes.

402

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Discrimination Data Revision Form________________ Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved orunapproved.

Select Piping Materials Class — Sets the piping materials class(es) in theSpecification/Material Reference Database which defines the tables to be checked.

No Piping Materials Class — When selected, indicates to the system that either thepiping specialties or instruments will be verified by Table Checker.

Either format 5 or 6 must be used when the discrimination data iscreated with the No Piping Materials Class button selected.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Copy or Revise.

The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed.

2. Specify Discrimination Data

In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, andnode.

3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then selectAccept.

After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,be sure to select the final Accept. Because you must accept many formswhile specifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Eventhough you may have accepted many of the specifications, however, thediscrimination data file is not actually updated until you select Accept on theReport Discrimination Data form.

403


10.1.3.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



404

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Discrimination Data Deletion Form________________



405


10.1.4 Report Form

When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.

This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holdsspecifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description,and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate areport.

The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is includedin the format file.

At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the followinginformation:

Report Output — The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, andreport node, path, and file name.

Format — The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.

Discrimination Data — The report discrimination data number, description, and filelocation (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data isalso included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), searchcriteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.

Search Criteria — The report search criteria number, description, and file location(node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list ofmodel numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable),and sorting sequence.

406

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Report Form________________

Options

Create — Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record andgenerates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 408.

Revise — Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from anexisting or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page411.

Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and thecorresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 414.

Approve — Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report.For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 416.

Multi-Create — Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiplereports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page418.

407


10.1.4.1 Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.

Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records arestored in the project control database, you can use them over and over again as needed.

Fields and Options


The Table Checker Report Number must not contain spaces. If thereare spaces in the number, the report will not be submitted to the batchqueue.



Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains theactive settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on theReport Management Dataform. For more information, see Report ManagementDefaults Form, page 420.

408

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Report Creation Form________________ Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will belocated. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if youhave specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information,see Report Management Defaults Form, page 420.

Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the activereport. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Selectthe appropriate format file, and click Accept.












Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Specifies when the report will beprocessed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields displayfor you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

409


Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Create.

The Report Creation form is displayed.

2. Specify Report Data

Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file,discrimination data file, and search criteria data file.




410

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Revise Report Form________________

10.1.4.2 Revise Report Form

When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.

This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project controldatabase. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record withoutgenerating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report outputfile without updating the report record.

Fields and Options




Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains theactive settings.

Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will belocated. This field retains the active settings.

411

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the activereport. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Selectthe appropriate format file, and click Accept.













Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data — Specifies revision of the report dataonly (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (ReviseReport and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the reportoutput file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and clickAccept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report andData without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report

412

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Revise Report Form________________ file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to ReviseData Only, and click Accept.

If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title,this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and thereport output file is generated.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Revise.

The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.

2. Select Report

From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.

The fields update to display the selected report file specifications.

3. Revise Report Information

Update the report record information as needed.




413


10.1.4.3 Report Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



414

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Report Deletion Form________________



415


10.1.4.4 Report Approval Form

When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.

Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attributeis set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way foryou to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a reportis revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.

Options

Number — The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record.

Description — The 40-character description of the report record.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Approve.

The Report Approval form is displayed.

416

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Report Approval Form________________

2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.

The Approval form is displayed.

For more information, see the Approve Report section of the PD_Report User’sGuide.

417


10.1.4.5 Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form isdisplayed.

Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.

Fields and Options

Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the reportfile in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file shortname.

Description — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.





418

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Report Multiple Submit Form________________

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.

The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.

2. Select Reports for Submission

From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected;select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.


4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) orlater (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the dateand time that the report is to be submitted.

5. Click Accept to submit the reports.

419


10.1.5 Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the ReportManagement Defaults form is displayed.

This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of thereport definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.

Fields

Report Path — Specifies the default path of the report output files.

It is recommended that you not send output reports to your system’stemporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory.

Report Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report outputfiles are located.

Report Format Path — Specifies the default path of the format files.

Report Format Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on whichformat files are located.

Report Discrimination Data Path — Specifies the default path of the discriminationdata files.

420

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Report Management Defaults Form________________ Report Discrimination Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the systemon which discrimination data files are located.

Report Search Criteria Data Path — Specifies the default path of the report searchcriteria data files.

Report Search Criteria Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the systemon which report search criteria data files are located.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.

The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.

2. Accept or Exit

In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report outputfiles, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then clickAccept.

421


10.2 Sample Table Checker Output

The following is a listing of selected pages from the table checker output for Piping Materials Class 1C0031.

21-Apr-92 Page: 1

SIZE-INDEPENDENT SPEC DATA

__________________________

Description: Gate valve, CL800, SWE, BB, OS&Y,

ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 800

Piping Class: 1C0031

Size Range: 1st 3/4IN 1-1/2IN

2nd - -

Option:

End Preparation(s): SWE (421)

Rating(s): CL800

End geometry standard(s): Default (5)

Body geometry standard: Smith 1 (4625)

Maximum allowable temperature: -9999

Material Grade: A105 (150)

Modifier: 3

Fabrication category: CSFF (7)

Note 1: -

Note 2: -

PDS Reference data

AABBCC: 6Q1C01

Commodity Code: VAUSAHGAAA

Weight Code: 490 pcf (52)

EDEN Modules Tables

______

GATR FEM_420_800_5

V1_AMS GATR_4625_420_800_A

VALVE_2_AMS VAUSAHGAAA

V1 GATR_FEM_800_3_A

OP_3

OPERATOR_3

OP3

422

10. Tab

le C

hecker

Sample Table Checker Output________________

21-Apr-92 Page: 2


__________________________

Description: Gate valve, CL800, SWE, BB, OS&Y, full

port, ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 888



2nd - -

Option: Full port (24)

End Preparation(s): SWE (421)

Rating(s): CL800


Body geometry standard: Smith 1 (4625)



Modifier: 3


Note 1: -

Note 2: -

PDS Reference data

AABBCC: 6Q1C01

Commodity Code: VAUSAHGCAA


EDEN Modules Tables

______

GATF FEM_420_800_5

V1_AMS GATF_4625_420_800_A

VALVE_2_AMS VAUSAHGCAA

V1 GATF_FEM_800_3_A

OP_3

OPERATOR_3

OP3

423


21-Apr-92 Page: 3


__________________________

Description: Gate valve, CL150, RFFE, BB, OS&Y,

ASTM-A105, trim 8, Smith 815



2nd - -

Option: RFFE (221)

End Preparation(s): RFFE (21)

Rating(s): CL150


Body geometry standard: ANSI-B16.10 (40)



Modifier: 3


Note 1: Use at flanged equipment connections.

Note 2: -

PDS Reference data

AABBCC: 6Q1C01

Commodity Code: VAABAHGGAA


EDEN Modules Tables

______

GAT BLT_20_150_5

V1_AMS GAT_40_20_150_A

VALVE_2_AMS VAABAHGGAA

V1 GAT_BLT_150_3_A

OP_3 STUD_20_150_5

OPERATOR_3

OP3

424

10. Tab

le C

hecker


21-Apr-92 Page: 133

SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA

________________________


AABBCC: 6Q1C01

1st Size 2nd Size Physical Data

Weight Generic Specific Sub-Component

________ ________ _______ ________ _____________

3/4IN 3/4IN

4.5Lb 1.1715In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.125In 11In, 4In

1IN 1IN

6.25Lb 1.4538In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.375In 13In, 5.5In

1-1/2IN 1-1/2IN

12Lb 2.0575In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.5625In 16.125In, 5.75In

21-Apr-92 Page: 134

SIZE-DEPENDENT SPEC DATA

________________________


AABBCC: 6Q1C01

1st Size 2nd Size Physical Data

Weight Generic Specific Sub-Component

________ ________ _______ ________ _____________

3/4IN 3/4IN

6.25Lb 1.1715In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.125In 11In, 4In

1IN 1IN

9.75Lb 1.4538In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.375In 13In, 5.5In

1-1/2IN 1-1/2IN

21.75Lb 2.0575In, 0.4375In Undefined, Undefined, 1.5625In 16.125In, 5.75In

425


21-Apr-92 Page: 376

TABLES NOT FOUND

________________

Tables Not Found Table Library

________________ _____________

REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library

REDE_39_300_S$10_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library

STUD_120_150_5

STUD_120_150_80

STUD_120_300_5

STUD_160_150_5

STUD_160_150_80

426

10. Tab

le C

hecker


21-Apr-92 Page: 377

TABLES FOUND

____________

Tables Found Table Library Table Revision Date

____________ _____________ ___________________

BALR_3028_420_600_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:46:45 1991

BALR_FEM_600_9_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:16:28 1991

BALSP_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:23 1991

BALSP_BLT_150_9_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:16:28 1991

BFYHP_4200_160_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:08:15 1991

BFYHP_BLT_150_17_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:16:33 1991

BLPAD_1026_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:00 1991

BLPAD_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:01 1991

BLPAD_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:48 1991

BLPAD_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:51 1991

BLSPA_1026_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:01 1991

BLSPA_1026_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:02 1991

BLSPA_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:49 1991

BLSPA_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:52 1991

BLSPC_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:50 1991

BLSPC_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:53 1991

BLSPC_146_120_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:56 1991

BLSPC_146_120_300_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:59 1991

BLSPO_146_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:51 1991

BLSPO_146_120_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:54 1991

BLSPO_146_120_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:28:57 1991

BLSPO_146_120_300_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:29:00 1991

BLT_120_150_5 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:17:06 1991






427







CAPBV_5150_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:10:17 1991

CAPBV_5150_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:10:51 1991

CAPBV_5150_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:03 1991

CAPBV_5150_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:07 1991

CAPOT_5375_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:19 1991

CAPOT_5375_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:22 1991

CKLR_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:40 1991

CKS_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:26 1991

CKWF_40_120_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:12 1991

CPL_41_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:46 1991

CPL_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:49 1991

E45LR_39_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:52:46 1991

E45LR_39_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:54:04 1991

E45LR_39_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:59:04 1991

E45LR_39_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:00:12 1991

E45_41_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:46 1991

E45_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:50 1991

E90LR_39_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:52:47 1991

E90LR_39_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:54:04 1991

E90LR_39_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:59:30 1991

E90LR_39_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:00:12 1991

E90SR_58_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:49 1991

E90SR_58_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:58 1991

E90_41_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:47 1991

E90_41_420_3000_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:51 1991

428

10. Tab

le C

hecker


EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:37 1991

EOLLR_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:42 1991

429


21-Apr-92 Page: 378

TABLES FOUND

____________

Tables Found Table Library Table Revision Date

____________ _____________ ___________________

FBLD_254_20_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:44:58 1991

FBLD_35_20_150_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:28 1991

FEM_420_150_5 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:20:07 1991






FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:31:30 1991

FOLHC_1575_300_NREQD_420_3000_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:31:44 1991

FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_300_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:12:47 1991

FOWNAW_66_20_300_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:12:51 1991

FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:14 1991

FRSW_6_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:15 1991

FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:18 1991

FRSW_6_20_300_420_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:14:19 1991

FSW_35_20_150_420_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:17 1991

FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:17 1991

FSW_35_20_150_420_150_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:20 1991

FSW_35_20_300_420_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:48:41 1991

FSW_35_20_300_420_300_S$XS_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:49:04 1991

FWN_165_20_150_300_150_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:43:17 1991

FWN_165_20_150_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:43:18 1991






430

10. Tab

le C

hecker





GATF_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:40 1991

GATF_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:14 1991

GATR_4625_420_800_440_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:39 1991

GATR_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:41 1991

GATR_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:18 1991

GAT_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:27 1991

GAT_40_20_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:46 1991

GAT_BLT_150_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:30 1991

GAT_BLT_300_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:32 1991

GLOR_4625_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:09:41 1991

GLOR_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:42 1991

GLO_40_20_150_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:01:28 1991

GLO_BLT_150_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:21:52 1991

LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:39 1991

LOL_1575_300_S$STD_300_S$160_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:39:44 1991

MALWT_300_S$10_5_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:22:48 1991

MALWT_300_S$STD_5_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:23:07 1991

MALWT_300_S$XS_5_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:23:10 1991

MAL_300_5 Physical Data Library Thu Mar 21 15:55:49 1991

NEE_5375_420_800_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:11:31 1991

NEE_FEM_800_3_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:23:25 1991

NIP_100_300_S$160_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:27:27 1991

PLUG_41_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:29 1991

PLUG_41_300_NREQD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 10:06:37 1991

REDC_39_300_300_A Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:52:38 1991

REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:53:51 1991

REDC_39_300_S$10_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:54:02 1991

431


REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$10_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:58:40 1991

REDC_39_300_S$STD_300_S$STD_52 Physical Data Library Thu Jan 3 09:58:52 1991

432

10. Tab

le C

hecker


21-Apr-92 Page: 381

EDEN ACCESSED

_____________

EDEN Not Found EDEN Found

______________ __________

BALR

BALSP

BFYHP

BLPAD

BLSPA

BLSPC

BLSPO

CAPBV

CAPOT

CKLR

CKS

CKWF

CPL

E45

E45LR

E45TLR

E90

E90LR

E90SR

E90TLR

EOLLR

F10_1

F10_2

F122_1

F122_1_AMS

F13

F13_AMS

F173

F173_AMS

F177

F177_AMS

F178

F178_AMS

F179

F17D

F17D_AMS

F180

F180_AMS

F182

F182_AMS

F188

F188_AMS

F19

F19_AMS

F1A

F1A_AMS

F25

F25_AMS

F27

F27_AMS

F28

F39

F39_AMS

F47

F47T_AMS

F47_AMS

F6

433


F6_AMS

F8

F8_AMS

434

10. Tab

le C

hecker


21-Apr-92 Page: 382

EDEN ACCESSED

_____________

EDEN Not Found EDEN Found

______________ __________

FBLD

FITTING_1_AMS

FITTING_2_AMS

FITTING_3_AMS

FLANGE_AMS

FOLHC

FOWNAW

FRSW

FSW

FWN

GAT

GATF

GATR

GLO

GLOR

LOL

NEE

NIP

OLET_1_AMS

OP3

OP9

OPERATOR_3

OPERATOR_33

OPERATOR_9

OP_17

OP_3

OP_33

OP_331

OP_332

OP_9

PIPING

PLUG

REDC

REDE

RPAD

RWELD

SOL

SWGC

SWGE

T

TRB

UN

V1

V11

V1_AMS

V26

V38

V6

VALVE_2_AMS

WOL

435


.*****. REPORT ERROR LOG CREATION TIME: Tuesday 04/21/92 15:35

1 - ERROR - EDEN error (-3) for pmc ’1C0031’ item ’6Q1C26’ with 1st size ’32IN’ and 2nd size ’32IN’

Error in module ’ MGOP_32768’

2 - ERROR - EDEN error (-3) for pmc ’1C0031’ item ’6Q1C26’ with 1st size ’34IN’ and 2nd size ’34IN’

Error in module ’ MGOP_32768’

Error Codes

The following error codes are used in the reported error messages.

-3 Eden Module Not Found

-4 Entry Not Found in Table

-7 Table Not Found

436

11. TD

F L

ibrary

Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager________________

11. Pipe Support TutorialDefinition Manager

The Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager provides access to the Tutorial Definition Files(TDFs) used in placing pipe supports in the model. The TDFs define the pipe support’smodeling requirements.

For more information on TDFs, refer to the Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide.

437


11.1 Support Tutorial Definition Manager

The Support Tutorial Definition Manager is used to create a new Tutorial DefinitionLibrary or to create, modify, or delete data in the library. You can also create reports of thedata in the library. Select the Support Tutorial Definition Manager from the ReferenceData Manager form.


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Pipe SupportTutorial Definition Library files in the Reference Database Management Data.


Options

Create Library — Used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library.

Compress Library — Used to compress the Tutorial Definition Library.

Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Tutorial DefinitionLibrary to the approved library.

Create Data — Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the TutorialDefinition Library. You can create a single tutorial definition file or specify a list oftutorial definition files to be created.

438

11. TD

F L

ibrary

Support Tutorial Definition Manager________________ Revise Data — Used to select a tutorial definition file from the library for editing andcompile the revised tutorial definition file.

Delete Data — Used to delete a specified tutorial definition file from the library.

Report Data — Used to create a report file of the library contents.

List Data — Used to list the files contained in the library.

Extract Data — Used to extract a tutorial definition file from the library for editing orprinting.

Full List/Sub-string — Use this toggle to determine the data to be listed. Full Listreturns all the definition in the Tutorial Definition Library. Sub-string limits the list tothose files that contain the substring you enter in the corresponding box.

Node Name — Key in the node name of the location of the table definition files forpipe supports.

File Path — Key in the path to the location where you store table definition files forpipe supports.

439



This option is used to create a new Tutorial Definition Library.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Tutorial Definition Library names asdefined in the RDB Management Data.



11.1.2 Compress

This option is used to compress the Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library. Any tableswhich have been deleted from the library will be removed.


This option copies the unapproved Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Library to the approvedlibrary.



440

11. TD

F L

ibrary

Create Data________________

11.1.4 Create Data

This option enables you to create a new tutorial definition file. You can process a single fileor specify a list of files to be created.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create Data option.



Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the activelibrary.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the tutorial definition files asspecified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form.



Accept the file to begin processing.

If a fatal error occurs while loading files, the Tutorial Definition File Library is leftunchanged.

441


11.1.5 Revise Data

This option enables you to replace an existing tutorial definition file. This option enables youto select a tutorial definition file from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file andput it back in the library.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.


Select the tutorial definition files to be revised and select Accept.

The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor toenable you to modify the file.

442

11. TD

F L

ibrary

Revise Data________________

3. Make any changes to the displayed file.

When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it backinto the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file is not recompiled.)

443


11.1.6 Report Data

This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Tutorial Definition Library.This report lists all the tutorial definition files in the Tutorial Definition Library.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Report Data option from the Library/Data Management form.


3. Select the report option: Save, Print/Delete or Print/Save.

For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options, select the print queue from the list ofdisplayed queues.

4. Select Accept to create the report.

For the Save or Print/Save options, the system generates a report named ppsm_tdf inthe default directory based on the contents of the Pipe Support Tutorial DefinitionLibrary.

444

11. TD

F L

ibrary

List Data________________

11.1.7 List Data

This option displays all the tutorial definition files for the Tutorial Definition Library.

Operating Sequence





445


11.1.8 Delete Data

This option enables you to delete a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library.

Operating Sequence



2. Select Table for Deletion

Select the tutorial definition file to be deleted from the list of files. You can use thescroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3. Accept or Select Other Table(s)

Accept the selected tutorial definition file.

The system deletes the tutorial definition file from the Tutorial Definition Library.

446

11. TD

F L

ibrary

Extract Data________________

11.1.9 Extract Data

This option enables you to extract a tutorial definition file from the Tutorial DefinitionLibrary for editing or printing.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Extract Data from the Library/Data Management form.

2. Select Table for Extraction

Select the tutorial definition file from the list of files and select Accept. You can usethe scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

— OR —

Select the Extract All button to extract all the available files.

The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory definedin the Default Project Control Data. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

447


448

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary

Standard Note Library________________

12. Standard Note Library

The Standard Note Library contains the code list text for code-listed attributes, includingstandard notes. It enables you to define standard text required to support the piping designeffort.

The standard code list text is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\std_note.l. Theaccompanying source listing for this file is contained in the file std_note.l.t. You can add,delete, or revise code list sets in the library to reflect your own practices, terminology, andlanguage. Entries in these files are in the form Standard Note Type xxxx where xxxx is thenumber of the code list set.

Refer to Appendix B for a listing of the delivered Standard Note Library.

Neutral File Description

A neutral file is an ASCII text file which contains standard notes or code lists to be placed inthe Standard Note Library. An entry is a single input/output record. One entry (or word) isretrieved each time a neutral file is read. The entries in a neutral file must be separated by atleast one space. If an embedded blank is contained within an entry, the entire entry must beenclosed in single quotes (’).

2 = ’Hydrogen Gas’

Entries enclosed in single quotes can take up more than one line. When an entry continuesonto a new line, a blank character is automatically appended to the end of the previous line.

Neutral File Format

N499

; Piping Notes

1 = ’ ’

;

; Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class, 2-199

WWW = ’ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ

ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ

ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ’







;

; Notes Applicable to a Piping Component, 200-499










;

449

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ ; Notes Applicable to a Piping Specialty, 500-699




;

; Notes Applicable to an Instrument Specialty, 700-899




General Rules

EACH standard note type or code list type should be contained in a separate neutral file.

Neutral files should have the following basic format:

C100; This is a comment line !!!!!!; This file contains a code list for type 100.

1 = ’Inert Gas’2 = ’Natural Gas’5 = ’Oxygen Gas’6 = ’Standard note or code list descriptions can extend

beyond one line of text up to a maximum of 80 characters’12 = ’Purge Gas’14 = ’Waste Gas’

The first entry in each neutral file should be the note/code TYPE (C100 in the aboveexample). The first letter must be either: C for a codelist set or N for a standard note

This character is followed by a number which identifies the specific codelist set orstandard note. This number must be a valid short integer.

Additionally, this entry should also include the text used for extracting informationfrom the Standard Note Library. This text may contain up to 80 characters.

The following numbering conventions are used for standard note type 499:

- Piping Job Specification: note numbers 1 through 199.- Piping Commodity Item: note numbers 200 through 599.- Specialty Item: note numbers 600 through 799.- Instrument Item: note numbers 800 through 999.

The first entry can contain additional characters following the TYPE, but they are allignored.

You can include the keyword PID_RDB in the neutral file on the line following thestandard note type to load the standard note into both the Piping Reference Databaseand the P&ID Reference Database simultaneously. (Optional)

Each note/code entry is comprised of three parts (triplet) which must appear in thefollowing sequence.

<Note/Code number> <equal sign> <Note/code description>2 = ’Sulfuric Acid’

450

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary

Standard Note Library________________ - The description text must be enclosed in single quotes.- The description text can extend for more than one line.- Code list description text can contain up to 80 characters.- Standard note description text can contain up to 400 characters.- The Note/code description text can be on a line by itself.- The equal sign must have a blank character on either side of it.- The equal sign can be on a separate line by itself.- The note/code number must be a valid I*2 integer.- The note/code number must begin a new line; it cannot be on the same line

with any part of another triplet.- The note/code number can be on a line by itself.

The only valid edit you can make to code list 1056 (temperature units) and code list1064 (pressure units) is to modify the displayed text string. Modifications to this fieldaffect only the display of the text; the actual units (i.e. degrees) cannot be modified.You cannot add any entries to code lists 1056 and 1064.

Comments are indicated with a semicolon (;) or exclamation point (!). Any informationon a line to the right of either of these characters is considered a comment and isignored. These comment lines can only occur following a description; they cannotbreak up a triplet.

Valid Comments

1 = ’Caustic’; Comment line.

2 = ’Sulfur’ ! Another Comment line.! Another Comment line.

3 = ’Hydrogen Sulfide’ ; Another Comment line.

Invalid Comments

1 =; Invalid Comment line.

’Caustic’2 = ! Invalid Comment line. ’Sulfur’

Any text enclosed in < angle brackets > is considered a comment and is ignored. Thesecomments can appear anywhere in the neutral file except within a description.

Blank lines can occur anywhere in a neutral files for readability. These lines areignored.

Each entry can begin at any point along an input line but must be separated fromadjacent entries by one or more spaces.

Note/code numbers need not be in sequential order.

451


Defining Text for Standard Note Types

You can specify the text for the various standard note types by loading the standard note titlesas standard note type 999. The specified title will display in a list of standard note types or alist of the selections for a specific standard note type.

452

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary

Standard Note Library Manager________________

12.1 Standard Note Library Manager

The Standard Note Library Manager is used to create a newStandard Note Library or to create, modify, or delete data in the library. You can also createreports of the data in the library. Select the Standard Note Library Manager from theReference Data Manager form.


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Standard NoteLibrary files in the Reference Database Management Data.


Options

Create Library — Used to create a new Standard Note Library.

Compress Library — Used to compress the Standard Note Library.

Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Standard Note Libraryto the approved library.

Create — Used to compile source files and add the resulting code to the StandardNote Library. You can create a single standard note set or specify a list of standardnotes to be created.

453

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Revise — Used to select a standard note set from the library for editing and compilethe revised standard note definition.

Report — Used to create a report file of the library contents.

List — Used to list the files contained in the library.

Delete — Used to delete a specified standard note set from the library.

Extract — Used to extract a standard note set from the library for editing or printing.

Load Database — Used to load the contents of the Standard Note Library into theapplicable schemas of the project’s relational database to support DBAccess reportingof PDS data.

454

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary



This option is used to create a new Standard Note Library. It automatically creates the objectlibrary (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Standard Note Library names as defined inthe RDB Management Data.



12.1.2 Compress

This option is used to compress the Standard Note Library. Any tables which have beendeleted from the library will be removed.


This option copies the unapproved Standard Note Library to the approved library.



455


12.1.4 Create Standard Note Type

This option enables you to create a new standard note set by inserting the data in a neutral fileinto the Standard Note Library. The neutral file enables you to define piping notes required tosupport the piping design effort. You can define code list sets, or standard notes applicable to:a piping materials class, a piping commodity, a specialty item, or an instrument. You canprocess a single file or specify a list of files to be created.


To add more than one standard note type to the library, create a list file which identifies thenames of the standard note source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry(source file name) per line.

You can define the default path for standard note neutral files using the Default ProjectControl Data option. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

Operating Sequence




Key in the name of the source file or list file to be compiled and added to the activelibrary.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the standard note neutral filesas specified in the Default Project Control Data at the bottom of the form.




If a fatal error occurs while loading neutral files, the Standard Note Library is left unchanged.

456

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary

Revise Standard Note Type________________

12.1.5 Revise Standard Note Type

This option enables you to replace an existing standard note type. This option enables you toselect a standard note type from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and put itback in the library.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the standard note types in the Standard Note Library.

2. Select Module Name

Select the standard note types to be revised and select Accept.

457





458

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary

Report Standard Note Library Contents________________

12.1.6 Report Standard Note Library Contents

This option enables you to create a report on the contents of the Standard Note Library. Thisreport list all the standard note types in the Standard Note Library. Refer to Appendix B for alisting of the report file for the delivered Standard Note Library.

Operating Sequence



3. Select the report option: Save, Print/Delete or Print/Save.

For the Print/Delete or Print/Save options, select the print queue from the list ofdisplayed queues.

4. Select Accept to create the report.

For the Save or Print/Save options, the system generates a report named stnotelib.rptin the default directory based on the contents of the Standard Note Library.

459


12.1.7 List Standard Note Data

This option displays all the standard note types for the Standard Note Library.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library.



460

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary

Delete Standard Note Data________________

12.1.8 Delete Standard Note Data

This option enables you to delete a Standard note type from the Standard Note Library.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the Standard note types in the Standard Note Library.

2. Select Note Type

Select the Standard note type to be deleted from the list of note types. You can use thescroll bar to scroll through the available files.

3. Accept or Select Other Note Type

Accept the selected standard note type.

The system deletes the standard note type from the Standard Note Library.

461


12.1.9 Extract Standard Note Type

This option enables you to extract a neutral file from the Standard Note Library for editing orprinting.

Operating Sequence


2. Select Note Type

Select the standard note type from the list of files and select Accept. You can use thescroll bar to scroll through the available files.

The system pulls the file out of the library and places it in the default directory definedin the Default Project Control Data. See Default Project Control Data, page 53.

462

12. Stan

dard

N

ote L

ibrary

Load Database________________

12.1.10 Load Database

This option loads the contents of the Standard Note Library into the applicable schemas of theproject’s relational database to support DBAccess reporting of PDS data.


You must create the necessary database structure for DBAcess reporting through the ProjectAdministrator. Refer to the description of the Project Setup Manager in the ProjectAdministrator (PD_Project) Users Guide for more information.

You must specify the maximum length of the text for each standard note type in the StandardNote Library in an ASCII file namedstnote_max_len. This maximum length is used to loadthe standard note data in the relational database. This is the same file used in the ProjectAdministrator to modify the database structure to support DBAccess. It must reside in theproject directory.

Entries in this file consist of one line for each standard note type with the following format.

!note type max length short?35 15 *36 10

The note type and the maximum length are separated by one or more spaces or tabs. Anasterisk (*) following the maximum length indicates that the short version of the standard notedata be loaded into the relational database. The default is that the long version be loaded.Comments can be placed anywhere in the file and must be preceded by an exclamation point(!).

You can determine which standard note data is loaded or not loaded into the relationaldatabase. If the maximum length for a standard note type is defined as zero (0) or thestandard note type is not included in stnote_max_len, the data for that standard note type willnot be loaded.

A default note length file is delivered with the PD_Shell product in the file\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\stnote_max_len. These maximum lengths were determined on thebasis of the long option of standard note data reporting. To minimize relational database size,you should exercise discretion in specifying the maximum length. The maximum length forany standard note type is restricted to 240 characters by RIS.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Load Database from the Data Management form.

2. Select Submit to Batch Immediately to begin processing as soon as you exit the form.

— OR —

Select Delayed Submit to Batch to specify a day and time to process the request.

463


3. Accept the specified time.


464

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Label Description Library________________

13. Label Description Library

The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following basic types of labels.(The numbers in parentheses indicate the range of label numbers for each group of labeltypes.) Refer to Label Types, page 466 for more information.

Drawing View Specific Labels (1-129, 2500-2599)

- System Reserved Labels (1-29)- User Defined Piping/Equipment Labels (30-49)- User Defined Structural Labels (70-89)- User Defined Miscellaneous Labels (90-109)- User Defined Electrical Raceway Labels (110-129)- User Defined PLANTGEN Labels (2500-2599)

Drawing View Identification Labels (50-69)

User Input Labels (200-219)

Displayable Attribute Labels (300-399)

Commodity Code Labels (400-899)

- U.S. practice (400-449)- European - DIN (450-499)- European - British Standard (500-549)- European A - Finnish, French, etc. (550-599)- European B - (750-799)- International - JIS (600-649)- International - Australian (650-699)- International A (800-849)- International B (850-899)- Company practice (700-749)

Isometric Drawing Labels (900-999)

Report Labels (1150-2149)

Clash Management Labels (2200- 2399)

These labels are intelligent graphics which represent information from the non-graphical data(databases, user data, etc.). You can update existing drawing view specific labels (1-49, 70-130) to reflect the latest data in the database.

The default label description library is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\labels.l.All changes to the library are performed interactively using the Label Description LibraryManager.

465


13.1 Label Types

13.1.1 Displayable Attribute Labels

Each type of displayable attribute label has a description in the Label Description Library.This description identifies the label characteristics such as level, color code, style, and font,and the attribute data associated with the label.

A displayable attribute label consists of the text and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator,and some label enclosure graphics. There are four sub-types of Displayable Attribute Labels:

Drawing View Specific Label

displayable attribute labels for named model items which are placed in a drawing.

Drawing View Identification Label

labels with attribute linkages to the Drawing View Data (table 122) that reportinformation about the drawing view such as drawing view name and view scale

Drawing View Specific Labels are further divided into subcategories for Piping, Structural,HVAC, and Raceway. Drawing View Specific Labels for Piping and View IndependentLabels are divided into sub-ranges for system-defined labels and user labels.

PDS delivers Design Review Labels (317-330). These labels are the only onesprocessed by PDS Design Review. You can create new Design Review labels,but the system will not access them.

13.1.2 Alphanumeric Labels

Alphanumeric labels are non-intelligent user-defined labels. Each type of alphanumeric labelhas a description in the Label Description Library. This description identifies the labelcharacteristics such as level, color code, style, and font. An alphanumeric label consists of thetext and optionally, a leader line, a line terminator, and some label enclosure graphics.

13.1.3 Displayable Attribute Message

Each type of displayable attribute message has a description in the Label Description Library.Unlike the other label types, the description of a displayable attribute message only containsthe attribute data. Therefore, you cannot define label description data such as color, weight,style, and text size for a displayable attribute message.

A displayable attribute message has all or part of its text derived from the alphanumeric datathat is linked to a specified named item in the model.

466

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Label Types________________ A displayable attribute message is displayed temporarily at the terminal either as anidentification message or as a reporting message. Some of these messages are displayed inthe terminal’s refresh message fields. Other messages are displayed temporarily in the model.The system does not place any graphics in the model for this type of label. The text size ofthese labels is always the same regardless of the screen view scale.

A displayable attribute message can also be used to create a value for another attribute, forexample, the Line Number Label attribute.

Displayable attribute messages also define the hard-coded values for Design Review labels.

13.1.4 Commodity Code Attribute Message

Commodity code attribute messages are the same as displayable attribute messages, exceptthey are used for bill of materials reporting. All or part of the messages text is derived fromthe alphanumeric data in the database. A material description attribute message only containsattribute data; you cannot define label description data such as color, weight, style, and textsize.

There are 10 categories of Material Description Attribute Messages

U.S. practice

DIN practice

British Standard

European practice A

European practice B

International practice - JIS

International practice - Australian

International practice A

International practice B

Company practice

13.1.5 Isometric Drawing Labels

The isometric drawing labels are similar to the commodity code attribute messages and areused by the isometric extraction software.

467


13.1.6 Report Labels

A range of report labels (1150-2149) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use informatting fields in a report. This is accomplished by using the special report indices for theLabel Description Library. (Refer to the Report Manager Reference Guide for information onthe report indices.)

When report labels are used, you cannot sort on an individual attribute used toform the report label. However, you can sort on the complete report label.

13.1.7 Clash Management Labels

A range of labels (2200-2299) is reserved in the Label Description Library for use by theEnvelope Builder in creating the primary description and the secondary description for clashmanagement.

The label to be used is determined on the basis of the model’s discipline and the type ofcomponent. The following label numbers are reserved in the Label Description Library foruse in clash management.

Envelope builders for disciplines other than piping and equipment do notimplement the labels reserved below.

2200 Piping - primary description for piping specialty - 2 cp’s2201 Piping - primary description for piping specialty - 3 cp’s2202 Piping - primary description for piping commodity - 2 cp’s2203 Piping - primary description for piping commodity - 3 cp’s2204 Piping - primary description for piping/tubing2205 Piping - primary description for instrument component - 2 cp’s2206 Piping - primary description for instrument component - 3 cp’s2207 Piping - primary description for pipe support2208 Piping - secondary description for piping segment2220 Equipment - primary description for equipment2221 Equipment - primary description for nozzle2222 Equipment - secondary description for equipment2223 Equipment - secondary description for nozzle2240 PLANTGEN - pipe2241 PLANTGEN - piping component2242 PLANTGEN - equipment/miscellaneous2243 PLANTGEN - nozzle2244 PLANTGEN - structural/civil2245 PLANTGEN - HVAC2246 PLANTGEN - raceway2247 PLANTGEN - pipe support2260 Raceway - Straight Primary Label2262 Raceway - Straight Secondary Label2261 Raceway - Fitting Primary Label2263 Raceway - Fitting Secondary Label

468

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Label Types________________

2264 Raceway - Panel Primary Label2265 Raceway - Panel Secondary Label2266 Raceway - Ductbank Primary Label2267 Raceway - Ductbank Secondary Label2280 HVAC - Primary Label for Connector2281 HVAC - Secondary Label for Connector2282 HVAC - Primary Label for Fitting2283 HVAC - Secondary Label for Fitting2284 HVAC - Primary Label for Duct2285 HVAC - Secondary Label for Duct2286 HVAC - Primary Label for Diffuser2287 HVAC - Secondary Label for Diffuser2288 HVAC - Primary Label for Grille2289 HVAC - Secondary Label for Grille2290 HVAC - Primary Label for Register2291 HVAC - Secondary Label for Register2292 HVAC - Primary Label for Humidifier2293 HVAC - Secondary Label for Humidifier2294 HVAC - Primary Label for Filter2295 HVAC - Secondary Label for Filter2296 HVAC - Primary Label for Damper2297 HVAC - Secondary Label for Damper2298 HVAC - Primary Label for Coil2299 HVAC - Secondary Label for Coil2300 HVAC - Primary Label for Terminal Device2301 HVAC - Secondary Label for Terminal Device2302 HVAC - Primary Label for Equipment2303 HVAC - Secondary Label for Equipment2304 HVAC - Primary Label for Hood2305 HVAC - Secondary Label for Hood

The 2 CP clash management labels are used when the number of connect points, excludingtaps, is less than or equal to two. The 3 CP clash management labels are used when thenumber of connect points, excluding taps, is greater than or equal to three.

The primary description is limited to 20 characters and the secondary description is limited to40 characters.

469


470

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Label Description Library Manager________________

13.2 Label Description Library Manager

The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for alabel (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (whatinformation comprises the label). You can create a new (empty) label description library orcreate, revise, or delete label descriptions in an existing library.

Options

Create Library — Used to create a new Label Description Library.

Compress Library — Used to compress the Label Description library.

Unapproved ==> Approved — Used to copy the unapproved Label Descriptionlibrary to the approved library.

Create Label Data — Used to create a new label description and insert it in the LabelDescription Library.

Revise Label Data — Used to select a label from the library, edit the file, and put therevised file back into the library.

Delete Label Data — Used to remove a label description from the library.

Report Label Data — Used to create a report of the library contents.

471



This option is used to create a new Label Description Library. This option will be deactivatedif the specified library already exists.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Label Description Library names asdefined in the RDB Management Data.


Select Accept to create the specified library file. If you specify an existing library file, thesystem displays an error indicating the library already exists.

13.2.2 Compress Library

This option is used to compress the Label Description library. Any labels which have beendeleted from the library will be removed.


This option copies the unapproved Label Description library to the approved library.



472

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Create Label Data________________

13.2.4 Create Label Data

This option enables you to add a label description of a specified type to the Label descriptionLibrary.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Create Label Data from the data management form.

The system displays a form listing the types of labels which can be created.

2. Select Option

Select the type of label to be created. See Label Types for a description of all the labeltypes and subtypes.

The system adds a label number in the range for the selected label type, and activatesone of the following screens to enable you to define the description data and/orattribute data for the label to be created.

For Drawing View Specific Labels and Drawing View Identification Labelsyou can define both graphic data and attribute data.

For User Input Labels you can define graphic data only. Refer to Create LabelGraphic Data, page 475 for more information.

For Isometric Drawing Labels, Displayable Attribute Labels, CommodityCode Labels, Report Labels or Clash Management you can define attributedata only. Refer to Create Label Attribute Data, page 478 for more information.

473


Label Subtypes

Depending on the Option selected, the system may activate one of the following screens tofurther classify the type of label to be created.

Drawing View Specific Labels

Commodity Code Labels

474

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Create Label Graphic Data________________

13.2.4.1 Create Label Graphic Data

This form enables you to define the graphic parameters for the selected label type.

Options

Create Label Attribute Data — Enables you to specify the attributes which make upthe label and the format of the label.

Refer to Create Label Attribute Data, page 478 for more information.

Mass Annotation Options — Enables you so set up the Mass Annotation options foruse with PD_Draw.

Refer to Mass Annotation Options, page 484 for more information.

Field Descriptions

Label Type — Number of the label being created. (This field is filled in automaticallyby the system.)

Label Description — Short description for the label (up to 20 characters).

Graphics Color — Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the labelenclosure, leader line, and line terminator.

Graphics Weight — Line weight (0-31) for the label enclosure, leader line, and lineterminator.

475

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Graphics Style — Line Style (0-7) for the label enclosure, leader line, and lineterminator.

Alternate Style — Alternate (centerline) line style (0-7) for name label leader lines.The default is the same as the Graphics Style.

Text Color — Activates the Select Color form used to set the color for the label text.

Text Weight — Line weight (0-31) for the label text.

Character Size — Activates the Define Active Character Size form used to set thecharacter plot size (text height and text width). You can select one of the defaultsettings (A - J) or key in a size. The default settings are defined in the drawing’s type63 data. Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide for information on setting the default sizes.

Maximum Length — Maximum line length (1-80) for the text. This setting is alsoused to determine the label enclosure size.

Line Spacing — Line spacing between label text represented as a fraction of text height(0. - 10.). Also used to determine label enclosure size.

Maximum Lines — Maximum number of lines in the label text (1-30). Also used todetermine label enclosure size.

Text Font — Font (0-255) for the label text.

Enclosure Option — Displays a set of options at the bottom of the form for setting thetype of label enclosure. The default is No Label Enclosure.

The User Defined Enclosure Option places as a cell, with no LeaderLine. When this option is chosen, the Leader Line Option toggle is nolonger available.

Diameter — (Used with Label Enclosure Options 2 and 3) Diameter of the circleenclosure graphic.

Cell Name — (Used with Label Enclosure Option 8) Name of the Label Enclosurecell.

Leader Line Option — Toggle to define whether to use a Leader Line for the label.

Terminator Char. — Character that represents the line terminator symbol in theattached Font Library.

Terminator Font — Font (0-255) for the line terminator.

476

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Create Label Graphic Data________________ Underline Spacing — Underline spacing below text represented as a fraction of textheight (0. - 10.). If this value is 0, no underlining is performed.

Label Category — The form displays the name label category and the user-defineddrawing annotation categories. You can select one of the 20 user-defined drawingannotation categories or use the default category. The default category is that of thename label category. The text for the drawing annotation categories is extracted fromthe drawing category descriptions (drwcats.txt) in the project directory.

All of these parameters do not apply to each label type; the system skips over any nonrequiredparameters.

Once you have defined all the applicable parameters, select Attribute Label Data to specifythe attributes which make up the label and the format of the label (or select Accept forgraphics only labels). If your project will be using the Mass Annotation command inPD_Draw to simplify label placement, select the Mass Annotation Options command on toset up the Mass Annotation options. Refer to Mass Annotation Options, page 484 for moredetails.

477


13.2.4.2 Create Label Attribute Data

This form enables you to specify the attributes which make up the label and the format of thelabel. The Line and Item fields are used to define the attributes that make up the label and theorder of the attributes within the label.

Set the option at the upper left of the form

Insert Data used to add a line or item to the label description.

Delete Data used to delete a selected line or item from the label description.

Edit Data used to revise a selected line or item in the label description.

Insert Data

1. Set the option to Insert Data.

2. Set the toggle to Insert after or Insert before.

3. Select Line or Item to Insert Data

Select a line field to create a new line (before or after) the selected line.

— OR —

Select an item field to create a new item in the current line (before or after) the selecteditem.

478

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Create Label Attribute Data________________ The system activates a form that displays the Attribute Data Types. The followingforms illustrates the displays for a drawing view specific label. (The second formappears when Other Data is selected.)

4. Select Option

Select the attribute data type for the label.

You can select Other Data to select the attribute data type for Raceway data.

479

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The system displays the attributes for the selected data type.

5. Enter Data

Select the attribute to be reported from the form. The system sets the Format Dataautomatically. You can modify the total length and the number of decimal places (ifapplicable).

For labels that include an angle value (such as the bend angle of a piping component),select the Angle format to display the value in angle units (such as degrees andminutes). The angle units are determined by the angular format defined through theProject Data Manager.

For labels that include a distance attribute (such as the face-to-face dimension of apiping component), you can select Fraction to format decimal attributes as a coordinatereadout. This option is restricted to those decimal attributes that represent dimensions.

— OR —

For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify textto be entered by the user at label creation.

— OR —

Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label.

— OR —

Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing betweenattributes.

480

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Create Label Attribute Data________________

6. Repeat the previous step to add additional attribute text information. This allows you tocombine attribute values and pre-formatted text.

You can only define one user-defined keyin in a specific label.

7. Select one of the Optional Data options to specify a modifier to the active format.Master Units = MicroStation master units, Sub Units = MicroStation sub units.

8. Accept the specified attribute data.

Delete Data

1. Set the option to Delete Data.

2. Select the line or item to be deleted.

3. Select Accept to delete the highlighted line or item. When you select a line, the systemdeletes all the associated items.

Edit Data

1. Set the option to Edit Data.

2. Select Item to Edit

Select the item to be revised.

The system displays the attributes definition form for the selected item. The activesetting is highlighted or shown in the display fields.

3. Select an attribute from the form to change the type of data.

— OR —

Select the Format Data option. You can modify the total length and the number ofdecimal places (if applicable).

— OR —

For drawing view specific labels, you can select User Keyin Attribute to specify textto be entered by the user at label creation.

— OR —

Select Text Only and key in the text for a literal expression to be inserted in the label.

— OR —

Select Spacing Only and key in the number of spaces to define spacing betweenattributes.

481


4. Repeat the previous steps to edit additional items.

— THEN —

Accept the edits.

Examples

**************** Label Type = 310 ****************

Label Name = Line Number Label

[1][2][3]-[5]-[7]-[9]

Piping Segment Data

[1] fluid_code - Character (3)[2] unit_code - Character (2)[3] line_sequence_no - Character (16)4 - ’-’[5] nominal_piping_dia - Character (7)6 - ’-’[7] piping_mater_class - Character (6)8 - ’-’[9] insulation_purpose - Character (3)

**************** Label Type = 317 ****************

Label Name = Dgn review segment

Line no: [2]Construction status: [4]Nor oper press: [6][7]Nor oper temp: [9][10]Steam out temp: [12][13]Heat tracing: [15]Insulation: [17]Cleaning: [19]

Piping Segment Data

1 - ’Line no: ’[2] line_number_label - Character (30)3 - ’Construction status: ’[4] construction_stat - Character (15)5 - ’Nor oper press: ’[6] nor_oper_pres - Real (8.2)[7] nor_op_pres_units - Character (10)8 - ’Nor oper temp: ’[9] nor_oper_temp - Real (5.0)[10] nor_op_temp_units - Character (5)11 - ’Steam out temp: ’[12] steam_outlet_temp - Real (5.0)[13] nor_op_temp_units - Character (5)14 - ’Heat tracing: ’[15] heat_tracing_media - Character (5)16 - ’Insulation: ’[17] insulation_thick - Real (5.2) with sub units (ex. ",IN,MM,etc.)

482

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Create Label Attribute Data________________ 18 - ’Cleaning: ’[19] cleaning_reqmts - Character (10)

483


13.2.4.3 Mass Annotation Options

Selecting the Mass Annotation Options command activates the Mass Annotation Optionsform.

This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotationcommand in PD_Draw:

Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled?

Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled?

Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled?

Steps

1. Place a data point on the desired selection under each question.

2. Accept the selections and return to the Create Label Graphic Data form.

484

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Revise Label Data________________

13.2.5 Revise Label Data

This option enables you to revise the graphic data or attribute data for an existing labeldescription.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Revise from the Data Management form.

The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label tobe modified.

2. Select Option

Select the type of label to be revised. See Label Types for a description of all the labeltypes and subtypes.

The system displays the existing label for the selected label type.

3. Select Label Type

Select the specific label description to be revised.

Depending on the label type selected, the system displays the graphic data form or theattribute data form.

For example, if you select label type 011, the system displays the following form.

485


4. Select the parameter to be modified and key in the new value for that parameter.

5. You can select Attribute Label Data to activate the attribute data form.

6. Set the option to Insert Data, Delete Data, or Edit Data. The default is Edit Data.Refer to Create Label Attribute Data for information on these options.

7. When finished, select Accept to save the changes and return to the Revise LabelDescription form.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit without saving the changes.

486

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Delete Label Data________________

13.2.6 Delete Label Data

This option enables you to delete an existing label description.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Delete Label Data from the Data Management form.

The system activates the following form which enables you to select the type of label tobe deleted.

2. Select Option

Select the type of label to be deleted. See Label Types for a description of all the labeltypes and subtypes.

The system displays the existing labels for the selected label type.

3. Select Label Type

Select the specific label description to be deleted.

4. Accept to Delete Label Type xxx

Select Accept to delete the selected label type.

The system deletes the description and refreshes the selection screen to enable you todelete another label type.

487


5. Select Cancel to return to the Data Management form.

488

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Report Label Data________________

13.2.7 Report Label Data

This option creates a listing of the label types defined in the Label Description Library.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Report Label Data from the Data Management menu.

2. Set the toggle to Unapproved or Approved to define the source of information to bereported. This toggle is only displayed when both the approved and the unapprovedlibrary are being used.

3. Select the reporting option.

Print/Delete — submits the generated report output file to the specified printqueue and deletes the output file.

Print/Save — submits the generated report output file to the specified printqueue and saves the output file.

Save — saves the output file without printing.

For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based on informationin the Project Queue Description Library.

4. Select Accept to submit the report for processing.

Report Completed

489

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ For either of the Save options, the system creates a file named LABEL.RPT in thedefault directory. Portions of the listing for the delivered labels are provided below.

A RIS error may be displayed if an Electrical Raceway Database has notbeen created as part of the PDS database. The error will only bereported the first time the report is run each PDS session.

**************** Label Type = 1 ****************

Label Name = Line Number LabelGraphics Color = 4Graphics Weight = 1Graphics Style = 0Text Color = 4Text Weight = 1Label Category = 0Char Size = 0Max Length = 40Text Space = 0.400000Number Line = 1Text Font = 0Enclosure Option = 9Cell Enclosure Name =Leader Line = 1Line Terminator Char = >Text Font = 125Under Line = 0.000000

[1]

Piping Segment Data

[1] line_number_label - Character (40)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 2 ****************

Label Name = Piping Component NoGraphics Color = 4Graphics Weight = 1Graphics Style = 0Text Color = 4Text Weight = 1Label Category = 0Char Size = 0Max Length = 20Text Space = 0.300000Number Line = 1Text Font = 0Enclosure Option = 9Cell Enclosure Name =Leader Line = 1Line Terminator Char = >Text Font = 125Under Line = 0.000000

[1]

Piping Component Data

490

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Report Label Data________________ [1] piping_comp_no - Character (20)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 200 ****************

Label Name = No Label EnclosureText Color = 4Text Weight = 1Label Category = 0Char Size = 0Max Length = 10Text Space = 0.250000Number Line = 2Text Font = 0Under Line = 0.000000

**************** Label Type = 201 ****************

Label Name = Rectangle EnclosureText Color = 4Text Weight = 1Label Category = 0Char Size = 0Max Length = 10Text Space = 0.250000Number Line = 2Text Font = 0Under Line = 0.000000

Attribute Data

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 300 ****************

Label Name = Piping Component ID

[1] / [3] Connect Point


[1] commodity_name - Character (6)2 - ’ / ’[3] model_code - Character (6)4 - 5 space(s)5 - ’Connect Point ’

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 301 ****************

Label Name = Piping Comp Center

[1] / [3] Component Center


[1] commodity_name - Character (6)2 - ’ / ’[3] model_code - Character (6)4 - 5 space(s)

491

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 5 - ’Component Center’

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 353 ****************

Label Name = Dgn Rvw Weld LabelWeld Number: [2] - [4]Weld Type: [6]Piping NPD/OD: [8] - [10]PMC: [12]

Weld Attributes

1 - ’Weld Number: ’[2] weld_id - Character (16)3 - ’ - ’[4] weld_no_A - Character (8)5 - ’Weld Type: ’[6] weld_type_A - Character (20)7 - ’Piping NPD/OD: ’[8] nom_pipe_diam_A - Character (20)9 - ’ - ’[10] outside_diam_A - Real (15.4)11 - ’PMC: ’[12] piping_mater_class - Character (16)***************************************

**************** Label Type = 400 ****************

Label Name = Comp cmdty code

[1]


[1] commodity_code - Character (16)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 401 ****************

Label Name = Pipe sch/thk 1

[1]

Piping/Tubing Data

[1] schedule_thickness - Character (8)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 404 ****************

Label Name = 1/2CP COMP GCP

[1]


[1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM

492

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Report Label Data________________ ***************************************

**************** Label Type = 405 ****************

Label Name = 2CP RED COMP GCP X RCP

[1] X [3]


[1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM2 ’X’[3] CP_2_NOM_PIPE_DIAM

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 408 ****************

Label Name = 3CP RED COMP GCP x RCP[1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM2 ’X’[3] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 410 ****************

Label Name = 3CP COMP RCP[1] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 950 ****************

Label Name = MAL nozzle descr

[1] [3]

Nozzle Data

[1] nominal_piping_dia - Character (9)2 - 1 space(s)[3] preparation - Character (8)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 951 ****************

Label Name = Iso continuation

[1][2]-[4][5]

Piping Segment Data

[1] unit_code - Character (3)[2] line_sequence_no - Character (16)3 - ’-’[4] fluid_code - Character (5)[5] design_area_number - Character (12)

***************************************

493

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ **************** Label Type = 1150 ****************

Label Name = Line ID

[1][2]-[4]

Piping Segment Data

[1] unit_code - Character (3)[2] line_sequence_no - Character (16)3 - ’-’[4] fluid_code - Character (5)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 1151 ****************

Label Name = Iso no

[1][2]-[4][5]

Piping Segment Data

[1] unit_code - Character (3)[2] line_sequence_no - Character (16)3 - ’-’[4] fluid_code - Character (5)[5] design_area_number - Character (12)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 2200 ****************

Label Name = Specialty 2cp (1st)

[1]


[1] piping_comp_no - Character (20)

***************************************

**************** Label Type = 2201 ****************

Label Name = Specialty 3cp (1st)

[1]


[1] piping_comp_no - Character (20)

***************************************

494

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Label Library Merger________________

13.3 Label Library Merger

The Label Library Merger utility allows PDS users to copy labels from one or twolabel description libraries into another library and to modify the destination library asnecessary. You can only add and remove labels with this command. To edit anexisting label or create a new label definition, use the Label Description LibraryManager command.

Features

Copy labels from one library to another.

Delete an existing label from the destination library.

Rename an existing label in the destination library.

Compress the destination library.

Validate the destination library.

13.3.1 Label Library Merger Interface

This section contains descriptions of the Label Library Merger interface, includinginformation on all dialog boxes and commands. The Label Library Mergercommands are available from the toolbar and from menus.

495


The Label Library Merger dialog box contains three label description libraryviews. The two views on the left display the contents of the source libraries, and theview on the right displays the contents of the destination library. Each library viewis divided into two columns, Number and Description, which display theappropriate data for each label. You can click a heading in any library view to sortthe labels by that heading.

The bottom pane of the Label Library Merger dialog box is the message window,which displays errors and other informational messages during the library mergeworkflow.

496

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

File Menu________________

13.3.1.1 File Menu

The commands on the File menu allow you to open libraries, display information inthe Message Window, and exit the Label Library Merger.

13.3.1.1.1 Open Source Label Library 1

This command opens a label description library from which to copy labels. You cankey in or browse to the location of a source library. The system displays the labelnumber and description in the Library 1 View.

13.3.1.1.2 Open Source Label Library 2

This command opens a second label description library from which to copy labels.Using a second source library is optional, and not required for the use of thiscommand. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 2View.

13.3.1.1.3 Open Destination Library

This command opens a new or existing destination library, where labels from thesource libraries are copied. The system displays the copied label numbers anddescriptions in the Destination Library View.

To create a new destination library, browse to the appropriate folder in the OpenDestination Library dialog box, type a new library name in the File name text box,and click Open. The system will then create the new label description library in thespecified location.

13.3.1.1.4 Information

This command displays information in the Message Window regarding the sourceand destination libraries.

Example

MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\labels.l Opened as Source Label Library 1MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\company_labels.l Opened as Source Label LiMESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\all_labels.l Opened as Destination Label L

497


13.3.1.1.5 Exit

This command closes the Label Library Merger utility.

498

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Edit Menu________________

13.3.1.2 Edit Menu

The commands on the Edit menu allow you to modify your selections in the variousviews on the Label Library Merger dialog box, modify and delete the labelinformation in the destination library, and check the destination library for errors.

13.3.1.2.1 Select All

This command selects all the labels in the active view.

13.3.1.2.2 Unselect All

This command resets selections so that no labels in the active view are selected.

13.3.1.2.3 Invert Selection

This command switches the selection status of the labels in the active view, so thatlabels that are currently selected become unselected, and labels that are currently notselected become selected.

13.3.1.2.4 Edit Label Number

This command allows users to modify the label number of the selected label in theDestination Library View.

13.3.1.2.5 Edit Label Description

This command allows users to modify the label description of the selected label inthe Destination Library View.

13.3.1.2.6 Delete

This command removes the selected labels from the destination library.

13.3.1.2.7 Validate

This command checks the labels in the destination library for valid label numbers,and reports any invalid label numbers in the Message Window.

499


13.3.1.2.8 Compress Destination Library

This command removes the deleted labels from the destination library.

13.3.1.2.9 Copy to Destination

This command copies the selected labels from the source libraries to the destinationlibrary. The system uses the following criteria to determine label numbers:

If there is no label in the destination library with the same label number as thelabel being copied, the label is copied with its original label number.

If there is a label in the destination library with the same label number as thelabel being copied, the label is copied with a new label number, which isassigned using the following criteria:

— If there is an unassigned label number in the copied label’s category in thedestination library, the system assigns the next available label number inthat category.

— If there is no unassigned label number in the copied label’s category in thedestination library, the system adds 5000 to the label number and copiesthe label. For example, label number 23 in the source library is copied tolabel 5023 in the destination library.

Label numbers above 5000 generate errors in PDS. TheValidate command reports any such label numbers in theMessage Window.

Refer to Label Description Library, page 465 for more information onlabel categories.

13.3.1.2.10 Clear Error Messages

This command refreshes the Message Window.

500

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Help Menu________________

13.3.1.3 Help Menu

The commands in the Help menu display online Help and other information aboutthe Label Library Merger utility.

13.3.1.3.1 Contents

This command displays the Label Library Merger online Help file.

13.3.1.3.2 About Library Merger

This command displays the About dialog box with information about the LabelLibrary Merger utility, including the version number and copyright date.

501


13.3.2 Workflow

This section describes the general workflow for the Label Library Merger utility.

1. Click Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PDS Label Library Merger to startthe Label Library Merger utility.

The Label Library Merger interface displays.

2. Click File > Open Source Label Library 1.

3. Browse to the location of the first label description library, select the library,and click Open.

The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 1 View.

4. Repeat the previous two steps for the second label description library.

The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 2 View.

5. Click File > Open Destination Library. You can either open an existinglibrary for update or create a new library.

The system displays the contents of the destination library in the DestinationLibrary View.

502

13. Lab

el D

escriptio

n L

ib.

Workflow________________

6. Select labels in the existing label description libraries to copy to the destinationlibrary. Use CTRL+click to select multiple labels, or SHIFT+click to select arange of labels. Use the selection commands on the Edit menu to select alllabels, unselect all labels, or invert your selections.

7. Click Edit > Copy to Destination to copy the selected labels to the destinationlibrary.

The system displays the copied labels in the Destination Library View.

8. Click Edit > Edit Label Number or Edit > Edit Label Description tomodify labels in the destination library as necessary.

9. Click Edit > Validate to check the destination library for errors.

The system displays any warnings in the Message View.

10. Click Edit > Compress Destination Library to compress the destinationlibrary.

The system displays any warnings in the Message View.

11. When you are finished modifying the destination library, click File > Exit toexit the Label Library Merger utility.

503


504

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Piping Assembly Library________________

14. Piping Assembly Library

The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary toplace a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. This function ismost useful for a commonly placed group of components.

The PAL definition is compiled and stored in Piping Assembly Language object library andits text stored in the text library.

A Piping Assembly Library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies (macros) isincluded in the product delivery.

\win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\assembly.l

The PAL definition must be processed and stored in the Piping Assembly Library.

505


14.1 Piping Assembly Language

The Piping Assembly Language provides a set of functions to define the placement operation.You can create a PAL definition outside the PDS environment using a text editor.

14.1.1 PAL Keywords

The following list outlines all the keywords that can be used to create a PAL definition.Keywords followed by a number in (parentheses) such as

NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223)

are used to create form gadgets for defining and placing piping assemblies. The numberrepresents the application command number for the keyword. The key entry field number isthis number minus 3000. (Therefore, the key entry field number for NPD_A is 221.)

Formbuilder Guidelines

You can customize forms for the purpose of inputting data in the creation of a pipingassembly, such as a control station. You can use the gadget numbers for the correspondinginput fields.

You must adhere to the following conventions when customizing form input fields for theapplicable piping assembly. If not documented, any other gadgets on the form should remainconsistent with those delivered by Intergraph.

All input fields should be sequenced and must have the following characteristics. The EditField Options setting in the Form Builder should be Change Mode.

The characteristics form in the Form Builder should have the following settings.

Notify Upon Completion - off (NOT the default)Notify at Initial Selection - off

The forms delivered by Intergraph can be used as examples for customization. The followinglist the form builder data for the standard form gadgets.

506

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Piping Assembly Language________________

Help

key: 456gadget number: 995button: automatic

Form Size

key: 403gadget number: 997button: automatic

Exit

key: 4001gadget number: 998button: manual

Accept

key: 4002gadget number: 999button: manual

Message Area A - for messages

gadget number: 251characters: 40lines deep: 3edit mode: review onlyfont size: 12

Message Area B - for active segment data display


Material description display


507


Description

#

This keyword is used to specify a description for the piping assembly from within theassembly language file. Place a # in the first column of any line followed by a description ofas many as 100 characters.

Examples:# Control Station

Commands

COMMAND

This keyword is used with other keywords to initiate a defined action.

Examples:COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATACOMMAND = UPDATE_APPCOMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE

CONNECT

This keyword defines the active point for the next component placed in the PAL definition.The specified reference point must be defined before using this option.

Example: CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A

PLACE

This keyword defines the type of item to be placed. Refer to the PLACE CommandComponent keywords for a list of component/instrument types.

Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 ,

BY

This keyword is used with the PLACE keyword to set the placement mode to be used inplacing the specified component. Refer to the Connect Point keywords for a list of viableplacement modes.

Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1

STEM

This keyword is used with an orientation keyword to define the direction of the secondaryaxis. It can be used at the end of a PLACE statement.

508

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Piping Assembly Language________________ Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 , STEM = UP

PLACE Command Components

FITTING, VALVE, FLANGE, BRANCH, PIPE, SPECIALTY, INSTRUMENT,OPTIONAL, TAP

These keywords are used with the PLACE keyword to define the type of item to be placed.

Example:

PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1PLACE BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_APLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01, BY CP2

RDB_INSTRUMENT, RDB_SPECIALTY

These keywords are used to place instruments and specialty items that have been defined inthe PJS using the tag number.

Example: PLACE RDB_INSTRUMENT, INSVLV1, BY CP1

Connect Point

CENTER, CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4, CP5ACTIVE_PPFACE_OF_FLANGE_CP1, FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP2,FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP3

These keywords identify the connect point for an operation. They can be used with the BYkeyword to indicate the means of placement.

Example: PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C38, BY CP1

INLET_ELEVATION

This keyword set the starting elevation or point of connection.

Example:REF_PNT_A = ACTIVE_PPCOORDINATE_1 = INLET_ELEVATION

509


Orientation

ACTIVEEAST, NORTH, UPWEST, SOUTH, DOWN

These keywords identify the orientation direction.

Example: PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C01, BY CP1, STEM = UP

No Material TakeOff

NO_MTO=1

This keyword can be used immediately before a PLACE statement to specify that thecomponent is not reportable. The system automatically resets MTO processing afterplacement.

Assembly End Keywords

ASSEMBLY_END_A, ASSEMBLY_END_B

These keywords define an assembly end point as a specified coordinate value. An assemblyend definition is used to define the endpoints of an assembly. This is required when theassembly is being placed into a pipe so that the pipe is broken properly and the assemblyinserted (as in the case of a valve assembly: flange - valve - flange).

Example: ASSEMBLY_END_A = REF_PNT_A

Reference Point Keywords

REF_PNT_A, REF_PNT_B, ... REF_PNT_TACTIVE_PP, NOZZLE

These keywords set reference points at specified coordinate values. You can define up to 20points on the assembly for future reference in the PAL definition.

Example: REF_PNT_A = CP_1

Once a reference point is defined, it can be used by a following statement in the PALdefinition to indicate a coordinate location (for example, CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A).

510

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.


Generic End Types

NULL_GEN_TYPE, BOLTED, FEMALE, MALE

These keywords specify the generic termination type for use in conditional testing.

Number of Connect Points

NUMBER_CPS

This keyword contains the number of connect points of the component just placed. It can beused in branch placement to determine whether to use CP2 or CP3 as a reference point.

Example:

IF (NUMBER_CPS .EQ. 2.0) THENREF_PNT_A = CP2

ELSEREF_PNT_A = CP3

ENDIF

Commodity Item Name

ITEM_NAME

This keyword defines an item name to be used for placement.

Example: ITEM_NAME = xxxxxxx

COMPONENT_TAG (3246)

This keyword defines the tag for the component to be placed. You can prompt for the tag oruse the tutorial interface using the designated field and command numbers.

Example: COMPONENT_TAG = USER_INPUT

UORs per Model Subunit

UORS_PER_SUBUNIT

This keyword defines the number of UORs per Subunit defined in the model. It can be usedto calculate tap location.

511


Local Coordinates and Orientation

APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z

These keywords define the active placement point which can be used in the connect tosegment and point in space routines. These keywords are initially set to the active placementpoint of the assembly at the start of the assembly placement.

COORDINATE_1 (3191) ... COORDINATE_12 (3203)DIMENSION_1 - DIMENSION_20

These keywords are used to receive user input from the tutorial to define the active placementpoint. The Coordinate keywords identify actual points and the Dimension keywords identifydistances and offsets. The Coordinate keywords are only used for elevation values, notEasting or Northing values.

Example: APP_Z = COORDINATE_1COORDINATE_2 = INLET_ELEVATION

LOCAL_X, LOCAL_Y, LOCAL_Z

These keywords are defined as the active primary, secondary and normal axis at the time theassembly is placed. They are automatically set internally at the start of placement and cannotbe modified.

Dimension Definition

DIMENSION_1 (3141), DIMENSION_2 (3142), ... DIMENSION_20 (3160)

The Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets.

Move Specified Distance

MOVE_DISTANCE

This keyword moves a specified distance in the direction of the active primary. It is useful inplacing a variable length pipe by moving out a specified distanced and calling place pipe.

Example:MOVE_DISTANCE = DIMENSION_1PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_A

512

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.


Load Spec Data

LOAD_SPEC_DATA

This keyword reads the spec record for the commodity item and assigns values for thefollowing keywords:

TERM_TYPE_1, TERM_TYPE_2, ... TERM_TYPE_5PR_RATING_1, PR_RATING_2, ... PR_RATING_5GEN_TYPE_1, GEN_TYPE_2, ... GEN_TYPE_5

Example:

LOAD_SPEC_DATA = ’6Q1C80’IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN

OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2

ENDIF

Setting First and Second Size

FIRST_SIZE, SECOND_SIZE, NPD_STEP_UP, NPD_STEP_DOWN

These keywords set the active first size or second size placement parameter a step down/up inthe NPD piping material class table. (The system uses the next entry in the NPD table fromthe active size as the first/second size for a step up or next higher size and uses the previousentry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step down or lowersize). This particular statement in PAL is used as the active size (first or second) in theplacement of all the following components, until the active size is redefined. If you do notinclude a line size in the PAL definition, the active size at the time of placement of the pipingassembly will be used.

Example: FIRST_SIZE = NPD_STEP_DOWN

Coordinates of Component Just Placed

COMPONENT_CENTER, CP_1_LOCATION, CP_2_LOCATIONCOMPONENT_CENTER_X, _Y, _ZCP_1_LOCATION_X, _Y, _ZCP_2_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z

These keywords define coordinate values for the component just placed.

Example: TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y + DELTA_DISTANCE *UORS_PER_SUBUNIT

513


Outside Diameter

PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2

These keywords contain the pipe outside diameter at each connect point for the componentjust placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location.

Example: DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 - PIPE_OD_CP2 ) / 4.0

FLANGE_OD_CP1, FLANGE_OD_CP2

These keywords contain the flange outside diameter at each connect point for the componentjust placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location.

Tutorial Display and Acquisition

DISPLAY_TUTORIAL, DISPLAY, DISPLAY_NUMERIC

DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = ’PALCST’

PROMPT_MESSAGE = ’Keyin coordinates and valve data’

DISPLAY = prompt_messageused to display any ascii keyword.

DISPLAY_NUMERIC = npd_aused to display any numeric keyword.

COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATAused to get data from the user at placement via a tutorial.

GET_ASCII, GET_DECIMAL, GET_INTEGERThese keywords get data of a specified type from a user keyin.

Prompt for ASCII Input

USER_INPUT

Updating Active Place Point

Example: COMMAND = UPDATE_APP

The variables APP_X, APP_Y, and APP_Z are assigned the X, Y, and Z values of thecurrent active placement point. This command is useful for variable distance changes inassemblies, and you need to know the new coordinates.

514

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.


Point in Space

Example: COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE

The values of the keywords APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z are used to define the activeplacement point that is not connected to piping or a piping segment. These keywords need tobe set before POINT_IN_SPACE is called.

Connect to Piping Segment

Example: CONNECT TO APP

The command syntax is the same as for connecting to a reference point except that thekeywords APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z are used as the coordinates. These points are assumedto lie on a piping segment whereas a reference point identifies a connect point. The keywordsshould be set before this command is called.

Orientation of Primary and Secondary

ORIENTATION, PROMPT, ORIENT_SECONDARY, ORIENT_PRIMARY, INVERT

ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_X

This statement orients the primary axis to be the same as the primary at the beginning of theassembly placement.

ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_Y

This statement orients the secondary to be the same as the secondary at placement.

ORIENT_SECONDARY = INVERT

This statement allows the secondary to be inverted from its current position. You can also useINVERT for the primary axis.

Placement of BRANCH using Table Lookup

90_DEG, 45_DEG, VARIABLE

Example: PLACE BRANCH, 90_DEG , BY CENTER

This statement performs a table lookup on the 90 degree branch table to determine the branchcomponent type given the current first and second size. If the branch is on a piping segmentor in free space, then Placement BY CENTER should be used. If you are placing fitting tofitting, you should specify connect point placement (BY CP1).

515


Placement of OPTION flange

OPTION_RATING, OPTION_END_PREP

Example:IF ( END_PREP_A .GE. 2.0 .and. END_PREP_A .LE. 199) THEN

OPTION_RATING = RATING_AOPTION_END_PREP = END_PREP_APLACE OPTIONAL, 6Q2C01 , BY CP2

ENDIF

The keywords OPTION_RATING and OPTION_END_PREP values are used to determinewhich option to use for the specified flange.

OPTION_TBL_SUFFIXTBL_SUFFIX_GREEN, TBL_SUFFIX_REDEND_PREP_1, END_PREP_2, ... END_PREP_5TBL_SUFFIX_A (301), TBL_SUFFIX_B (302), ... TBL_SUFFIX_E (305)

These keywords provide the ability to select the correct optional flange, when the flange isbeing placed by its welded end.

Placement of Optional Components

OPTION_CODE

Examples:OPTION_CODE = PROMPTOPTION_CODE = 790

This keyword sets the option code for the next component placed. If the PROMPT keywordis used, the system activates the Option Code Selection tutorial at placement to enable the userto select the option code. Otherwise the option code is hard-coded.

Placement of Variable length pipe

Example: PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_E

Logical Marks

CHECK_MARK

CHECK_MARK_1 (3161), CHECK_MARK_2 (3163), ... CHECK_MARK_20(3180)

516

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Piping Assembly Language________________ The check marks are logical keywords that can be accessed through the tutorial. They can beused for testing for placement of components, etc. Initially they are all set to true.

Changing Piping Materials Class within anAssembly

ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS (3205)

MATERIALS_CLASS_A (3206), MATERIALS_CLASS_B (3207),MATERIALS_CLASS_C (3208)

MATERIALS_CLASS_D (3264), MATERIALS_CLASS_E (3265), ...MATERIALS_CLASS_J (3270)

Example:MATERIALS_CLASS_B = USER_INPUTACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS = MATERIALS_CLASS_B

The values for materials class can be:

- obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields- defined by prompt (USER_INPUT)- hard-coded in the PAL definition.

The values for MATERIALS_CLASS_A, through _J are stored locally until a statementwith ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS is executed. At that time, the Materials Class in theactive data is updated to the assigned value. This enables you to obtain up to three differentclasses from the tutorial at the start which can be used as needed in the definition.

Component Attributes

NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223)NPD_D (3284), NPD_E (3285), ... NPD_J (3290)

These keywords store nominal piping diameter values.

END_PREP_A (3231), END_PREP_B (3232)

These keywords store end preparation values.

RATING_A (3236), RATING_B (3237)

These keywords store pressure rating values.

SCHEDULE_A (3241), SCHEDULE_B (3242)

These keywords store schedule/thickness values.

517


Setting Bend Angle

ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE (3211)

BEND_ANGLE_A (3212), BEND_ANGLE_B (3213), ... BEND_ANGLE_E(3216)

Example:BEND_ANGLE_A = PROMPTACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE = BEND_ANGLE_B

The values for bend angle can be

- obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields- defined by prompt- hard-coded in the PAL definition

The active bend angle in the model is not set until a statement with ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLEis executed. At that time, the active bend angle is assigned the appropriate value and the nextcomponent placed uses that value. The active bend angle is set to 0 after placement.

Component Group

COMPONENT_GROUP, ON, OFF

Example: COMPONENT_GROUP = ON

This statement causes the system to search for the next available component group number.This number is assigned to the component group number attribute of each subsequentcomponent placed until the statement COMPONENT_GROUP = OFF is executed or theassembly is completed.

Local Variables

You can use local variables to store values for use in defining a piping assembly. You can useany alphanumeric string as long as it is not reserved as a keyword.

Test Attribute Values

T12C# - Piping Segment DataT34C# - Piping Component DataT50C# - Pipe DataT67C# - Instrument Component Data

You can use these keywords to test specific values of the active segment data or activecomponent data, where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable databasetable. The active component data is represented by the last component placed or thecomponent to which the user is connected.

518

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.


Pre-Define Attribute Values

T34C# - Piping Component DataT50C# - Pipe DataT67C# - Instrument Component Data

You can use these keywords to pre-define specific values for the component to be placed,where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table. Thisfunctionality is similar to the Pre-Define Component Data option of the Place Componentcommand.

If you pre-define a value for fabrication category, the component will bedesignated as having the fabrication category defined by user versus by systemsuch that reconstructing the component will not override the user value withthe value in the Reference Database.

Having the ability to pre-define the fabrication category within a control station pipingassembly will enable you to automatically override the RDB specification of the fabricationcategory of a single field component, such as a small diameter control valve, in what wouldotherwise be a shop spool.

519


14.1.2 Placing Taps in Assemblies

The syntax for placing taps in assemblies is outlined below:

PLACE TAP , 2.0 , 1where 2.0 is the tap NPD and 1 is the option code.

PLACE TAP BY CPnCPn designates the connect point from which to obtain the tap data.

The following PAL definitions should be used to specify the tap location before making thePLACE TAP request.

TAP_LOCATION = COMPONENT_CENTERCP_1_LOCATIONCP_2_LOCATIONCOMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP1COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP2

— OR —

TAP_LOCATION_X = COMPONENT_CENTER_X +- delta_distanceCP_1_LOCATION_X +- delta_distanceCP_2_LOCATION_X +- delta_distance

TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y +- delta_distanceCP_1_LOCATION_Y +- delta_distanceCP_2_LOCATION_Y +- delta_distance

TAP_LOCATION_Z = COMPONENT_CENTER_Z +- delta_distanceCP_1_LOCATION_Z +- delta_distanceCP_2_LOCATION_Z +- delta_distance

The keywords PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2, FLANGE_OD_CP1, andFLANGE_OD_CP2 can be used to calculate the delta distance. These values are based on thecomponent just placed in the assembly.

For TAP_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z, the X, Y, and Z represent a localcoordinate system that is analogous to the orientation at Connect point 1 of thecomponent flipped to point towards the inside of the component.

The tap orientation should also be set before making the PLACE TAP request using the PALorientation commands. The active orientation at time of placement (tap) is used.

520

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Sample Piping Assembly Files________________

14.1.3 Sample Piping Assembly Files

This section presents sample PAL files from the delivered Piping Assembly Library. It liststhe files and shows the resulting graphics created by the file. Refer to the Piping DesignGraphics Reference Guide for more information on placing piping assemblies with the PlaceComponent command.

DRAIN

# Drain assemblyPAL ’DRAIN’!! This assembly will place a drain. The user needs to place a 1"! sockolet at the point the drain is desired.!

PLACE FITTING, 6Q3C88 , BY CP1!! The data from the component spec is read into the keywords.! TERM_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the numeric value for end preparation (eg. 21)! PR_RATING_1 TO 5 gets the pressure rating! GEN_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the textual value for end preparation (eg. MALE)!

LOAD_SPEC_DATA = ’6Q1C76’!! This ’IF’ statement determines if an optional flange is needed before! the gate valve is placed.!

IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THENOPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2

ENDIF!! Places a gate valve. Notice in the spec that this type of gate valve! is different than a 6Q2C01.!

PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C76 , BY CP1IF ( GEN_TYPE_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN

OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_2OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_2PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1

ENDIF!! This command allows the user to pick which component to place. If the! option command is not used the s/w will choose option 1. In this instance,! without the OPTION_CODE command will cause an error because there are no! option 1 attributes available for 6Q2C16. Another possiblilty would be to! use OPTION_CODE = PROMPT. The user will be prompted for which component is! desired.!

OPTION_CODE = 163PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C16 , BY CP1

END

521


Graphics Placed by Drain Assembly

Pump Discharge Assembly

# Pump DischargePAL ’PDISC1’!! Pump Discharge!!

DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = ’PAS010’

NPD_A = FIRST_SIZEDISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_ANPD_B = SECOND_SIZEDISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_BPROMPT_MESSAGE = ’Enter Reducer First Size ’DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGECOMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA

PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1

FIRST_SIZE = NPD_A

DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 * 0.5 - PIPE_OD_CP2 * 0.5) / 2.0

PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C23 , BY CP2

TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y - DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNITORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_YORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_XPLACE TAP BY CP1REF_PNT_A = CP1REF_PNT_B = CP3CONNECT TO REF_PNT_B

NPD_C = SECOND_SIZEDISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_CPROMPT_MESSAGE = ’Enter Branch Size ’DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGECOMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA

SECOND_SIZE = NPD_CPLACE BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1

OPTION_CODE = PROMPTPLACE FITTING , 6Q3C88 , BY CP1

522

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Sample Piping Assembly Files________________

ORIENTATION = PROMPTPLACE VALVE , 6Q1C80 , BY CP1

CONNECT TO REF_PNT_APLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2

PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C38 , BY CP1

ORIENTATION = PROMPTPLACE VALVE , 6Q1C01 , BY CP1

PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1END

Graphics Placed by Pump Discharge Assembly

523


524

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Piping Assembly Library Manager________________

14.2 Piping Assembly Library Manager

The Piping Assembly Library Manager enables you to create a new (empty) pipingassembly library or create, revise, and delete piping assembly definitions in an existinglibrary. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parametersnecessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. Thisfunction is most useful for a commonly placed group of components.

Refer to Piping Assembly Library, page 505, for more information on this library and refer toPiping Assembly Language, page 506, for more information on the PAL files.


Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Assembly Libraryfiles in the Reference Database Management Data.


14.2.1 Options

Create Library — used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. See page 527.

Compress — used to compress the Piping Assembly library. See page 527.

Unapproved ==> Approved — used to copy the unapproved Piping Assemblylibrary to the approved library. See page 527.

525

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Create/Interactive Data — used to compile Piping Assembly Language source filesand insert them in the Piping Assembly Library. See page 528.

Create/Batch Data — used to compile Piping Assembly Language Source files viabatch processing. See page 529.

Revise Data — used to select an PAL module from the library, edit the file, and putthe revised file back into the library. See page 530.

Delete Data — used to remove an PAL module from the library. See page 532.

Report Data — used to create a report of the library contents. See page 533.

List Data — used to display the Eden modules in the library. See page 534.

Extract Data — used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing orprinting. See page 535.

Full List / Sub-string — You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determinethe assembly data tables to be listed.

Full List lists all the assembly definitions in the Assembly Library.

Sub-string limits the list to those files which contain a specified substring.

526

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.



This option is used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. It automatically creates theobject library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created.

The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Assembly Library names as definedin the RDB Management Data.



14.2.3 Compress

This option is used to compress the Piping Assembly library. Any tables which have beendeleted from the library will be removed.


This option copies the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library.



527


14.2.5 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data

This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specifiedfiles into the Piping Assembly library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files tobe created. Refer to the description of the Piping Assembly Library for more information onPiping Assembly Language modules.


To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies thenames of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source filename) per line.

Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the locationof the assembly source files.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create/Interactive option.



Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the activelibrary.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files atthe bottom of the form.

You can use the default options or override the values for this operation.



528

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Create/Batch Assembly Data________________

14.2.6 Create/Batch Assembly Data

This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specifiedfiles into the Piping Assembly library. The specified files are submitted to the batch queuePDreference for processing.


To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies thenames of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source filename) per line.

Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the locationof the assembly source files.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Create/Batch option.



Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the activelibrary and select Accept.

4. The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files atthe bottom of the form.

You can use the default values or override the values for this operation.


Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit.

For Delayed Submit set the time and day to process the files.

6. Accept the file to begin processing.


529


14.2.7 Revise Piping Assembly Data

This option enables you to select a PAL module from the library, edit the file, and thencompile the file and put it back in the library.


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.

2. Select Assembly for Revision

Select the PAL modules to be revised and select Accept.

530

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Revise Piping Assembly Data________________




If an error occurs in revising a piping assembly, the system invoke the editorautomatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem.

4. You can select other files to edit or select exit to return to the data management form.

531


14.2.8 Delete Piping Assembly Data

This option enables you to delete a PAL module or set of PAL modules from the PipingAssembly Library.



Operating Sequence



2. Select Module for Deletion

Select the modules to be deleted from the list of modules. You can use the scroll bar toscroll through the available files.


Accept the modules and begin processing.

The system deletes the modules from the Piping Assembly Library.

532

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Report Assembly Data________________

14.2.9 Report Assembly Data

This option enables you to create a list file of all the PAL modules in the Piping AssemblyLibrary.

Operating Sequence


2. Revise Report Parameters

Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created.

3. Select Print or Print/Save.

Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section onPlot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information onsetting up multiple print queues.

If you select the Print/Save option, the system will create a file named assemblies inthe default source file location.

4. Accept to Form Report


533


14.2.10 List Assembly Data

This option displays all the PAL modules for the Piping Assembly Library.


Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence


The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.



534

14. Pip

ing

A

ssemb

ly Lib

.

Extract Assembly Data________________

14.2.11 Extract Assembly Data

This option enables you to extract an PAL module out of the Piping Assembly Library forediting or printing.



Define the node name and path for the location of the PAL files in the Default ProjectControl Data or using the fields at the bottom of the Assembly Data Management form.

Operating Sequence


2. Select Assembly for Extraction

Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar toscroll through the available files.

The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directoryspecified in the Project Control Data. The system also writes the names of theextracted files to a file named PD_pal_list.


535


536

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Reference Database Revision Manager________________

15. Reference Database RevisionManager

This command creates a set of reports used to coordinate revisions in the Reference Databaseand the implied changes which are required in the model. Each of the four reports listed iscreated in the directory for the applicable model.

Creation of any of these reports also generates a summary report. The summary report iscreated and named according to user-specified information provided on the ReferenceDatabase Revision Manager form. Selecting the option to print the summary report willalso force the printing of the individual report that initiated the creation of the summaryreport.

Options

Reference Data Conflict Report— Creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing)in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict withthe appropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data ofthe Material Reference Database. The RDB Conflict Report file has an extension of.rpt and is created in the model directory as <model_number>.rpt .

Refer to the section entitled Hierarchy of Reported Discrepanciesfound at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the order ofsignificance of reported problems.

537

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You should run this report when segment data or RDB data (such as in the Piping JobSpecification Database, the Piping Job Spec Tables, and the Physical DimensionTables) have been changed and you wish to determine which components need to bereconstructed or updated from the RDB.

Table Change Report — Creates a report of all piping or instrument components(including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to aspecific table for a specific input or set of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result ofrevisions to dimension tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions toweight tables are reported. The Table Change Report file has an extension of .tcr and iscreated in the model directory as <model_number>.tcr .

If your project was created with PDS version 6.0, use the Reference DataConflict Report instead.

Reference Data Impact Report — Creates a report, based on user-defined searchcriteria, of the effects of modifying individual component attributes in the currentapproved RDB. The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created inthe model directory as <model_number>.imp .

Proposed RDB Changes Report — Creates a single report assessing the effect ofmultiple changes in the unapproved Material Reference Database. The Proposed RDBChanges Report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the model directory as<model_number>.pcs . This report does not update the model.

Print/Delete — This option deletes the summary report after it is printed. Selectingthis option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate printqueue.

Print/Save — This option does not delete the summary report after it is printed.Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select theappropriate print queue.

Save — Saves the report in the model directory, and saves the summary report in theuser-specified directory. This option does not print the summary report.

Field Descriptions

Report Node — Specifies the node on which the summary report will be created.

Report Path — Specifies the directory in which the summary report will be created.

Report Name — Specifies the name that will be used for the summary report file.

538

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Reference Database Revision Manager________________

Summary of Report Parameters andDiscrepancy Hierarchy

The following chart summarizes some of the parameters used in the processing and creationof the reports available form this command:

Discrepancies are reported according to the significance of the problem they represent. In allcases, the most severe problem will be the problem that is reported. The hierarchy of theproblems reported is as follows:

1. Item not found in the spec.

2. Dimension tables have changed.

3. Discrepancy between component connect point NPD and segment NPD.

4. Discrepancy between model and RDB for any of the following attributes:

end preparation - greenpressure rating - greenschedule/thickness - greentable suffix - greenend preparation - redpressure rating - redschedule/thickness - redtable suffix - red

commodity codemodel codemodifiergeometric industry standardweight codefabrication categorymaterials grade

5. Weight tables have changed.

539


15.1 Reference Data Conflict Report

This option creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing)in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with theappropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data of theMaterial Reference Database. The output file for this report has an extension of .rpt.

This command is used to coordinate between revisions in the Reference Database and theimplied changes which are required in the model. It also reports piping and instrumentcomponents that require reconstruction or recalculations as a result of piping segment datachanges in the model.

The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which hasgeometric type specification data revised.

The Update from Reference Database command is required for any component whichhas non-geometric specification data (such as commodity code or weight table)revision.

The Re-Compute Thickness command is required for any component which has beenreported as requiring calculations as a result of changes in the material tables orthickness tables.

You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command toreview any component in the model requiring reconstruction or an update of the specificationdata as a result of changes to the Material Reference Database. This command allows you toreview any component in the model requiring reconstruction or replacement as a result ofRDB changes or deletions from the Material Reference Database. In support of this reviewcapability, an indexed file, the RDB Revision Management Component List, is created in thesame directory as the model with the name <model_number>.rdb. Refer to the Piping DesignGraphics Reference Guide for more information on this command.

Any component, previously reported as having required reconstructing or updating, which hasbeen deleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDBRevision Management Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision ManagementComponent List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process.

The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDBsolely on the basis of the requirement to reconstruct flag being set for the piping segmentassociated with that component. The Reference Data Conflict Report will clear therequirement to reconstruct (or recalculate) flag if it determines there are no discrepancies forthe component associated with that piping segment.

The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDBas the result of changing any attributes of an Implied Item.

540

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Reference Data Conflict Report________________


You should not access any piping model for an interactive design session while a ReferenceDatabase Revision Management report is being created.

Processing

Piping Commodities

The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading pipingcommodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same datathat is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity.

piping materials classcommodity namefirst size

second sizeoption codemaximum temperature

The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from thecomponent itself.

If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch tablefrom the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the PipingMaterials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for thebranch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction.

The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the ReferenceDatabase for piping commodities. That data which may impact the geometry and/or thesymbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.

* end preparation - green* pressure rating - green* schedule/thickness - green* table suffix - green* end preparation - red* pressure rating - red* schedule/thickness - red* table suffix - red

* commodity code* model code* modifier* geometric industry standardweight codefabrication categorymaterials grade

Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included inthe report.

541

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with thegasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in theReference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If aGasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separationvalue for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.

When a component is placed next to an integral gasket, the gasket thickness isset to zero in the model. As a result, the Reference Data Conflict Report mayreport a gasket thickness error for such components. The report compares thecomponent gasket thickness in the model (0) with the component gasketthickness defined in the reference data, which may be different from 0, withoutconsidering the mating component data. Such errors should be ignored.

The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of thesegment.

The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to thecorresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider thefollowing issues at a minimum:

the application of the schedule/override in the model.

changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data withinthe Material Reference Database.

changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the MaterialReference Database.

changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Datawithin the Material Reference Database.

changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table.

Refer to the section entitled Summary of Report Parameters and DiscrepancyHierarchy found at the beginning of this chapeter for information on the orderof significance of reported problems.

The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placedin the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.

Piping Specialties and Instruments

The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading pipingspecialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. Thecomponent number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or aninstrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_nois used for piping specialties.

542

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Reference Data Conflict Report________________ The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the ReferenceDatabase for piping specialties and instruments. That data which may impact the geometryand/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.


* physical data id* model code* modifier* geometric industry standardweight codefabrication categorymaterials grade

The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty orinstrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If avalue is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is comparedwith that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determinea gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.

The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connectpoints for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect pointproperties.

The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connectpoints, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties.







The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placedin the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.

543


Operating Sequence

1. Select the Reference Data Conflict Report option.

The system activates the Reference Data Conflict form.

2. Select the extent of the project to be processed.

Project — process all piping models for the entire project.

Piping Design Area — process the selected piping design areas.

Models — process the selected models within a selected design area.

3. You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for thesummary report output or use the default location and name.

The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report ManagementData of the Report Manager.

4. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, orSave. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list.

5. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit

Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day andtime to process the request.

6. Select Accept to submit the request for processing.

544

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Reference Data Conflict Report________________ The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch logfile periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. TheReference Data Conflict report file has an extension of .rpt and is created in the modeldirectory as <model_number>.rpt . If the summary report is printed as a result ofcreating this report, this report will also be printed.

545


15.2 Table Change Report

This option creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in anymodel within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input orset of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension tables and changesin weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported. The output file for thisreport has an extension of .tcr.

This report should be used only in the following situation:

The RBD was revised and you did not reconstruct the affected components. Then youupgraded the project to PDS version 6.0, at which time all components were updatedto have the new last_placed_date attribute set to the date the upgrade occurred.

You will need to know the date the RDB was modified in order to find whichcomponents require reconstruction as a result of the RDB change. This report mayreturn false discrepancies because it will include those items that were placed after theRDB was changed.

In short, we recommend using this report only when the RDB is changed prior toupgrading to PDS version 6.0, and affected components have not been reconstructedto reflect the RDB change.

The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has adimension table revised and the Update from Reference Database command is required forany component which has a weight table revised.

Processing

The system performs a virtual component placement for each component in a piping model(in a manner similar to that used by the Table Checker) to determine if that component hashad any of its geometric or weight data derived from the specified tables. The systemsearches all piping and instrument components in all piping models within the project for theuse of such tables and creates a report.

In searching the model for components that have dimensional and weight data derived fromthe list of revised tables, the first size and second size are determined from the component’sdata - not the piping segment data. This is due to the fact that reconstruction of thecomponent will be required, if the nominal piping diameter of any segment associated withthe component differs from the corresponding connect point size.

The contents of this report include the following data, which is sorted by the piping modelnumber and the line id within each piping model.

piping model numberline idcomponent number (if applicable)commodity name (if applicable)model codedimension or weight tables

546

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Table Change Report________________ The title page for the report will include the sub-title, Table Change Report.

Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification dataand the geometry data have been defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database).

You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command toreview any component in the model requiring reconstruction or updating as a result of thecomponent’s geometric or weight data being changed by a table revision. In support of thisreview capability, the system creates an indexed file, the RDB Revision ManagementComponent List, in the same directory as the model with the name <model_number>.rdb.Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on the ReviewReference Data Revision Report command.

Any component, previously reported as needing reconstructing or updating, which has beendeleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB RevisionManagement Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision Management Component Listwill be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process.

Piping and instrument components in any model which do not have a corresponding record inthe applicable table of the Piping Design Database are ignored and excluded from the report.These components, if any, are reported through the Database Verification command of theProject Administrator.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Table Change Report option.

The system displays a list of Physical Data Libraries.

547


2. Select Table Library

Select the Physical Data Library to process, such as U.S. Practice, DIN, or CompanyPractice and select Accept.

3. Enter Date for Search ( dd-mmm-yy )

Key in a date (such as 10-Aug-95) in the Revision Date field to list all the tables thathave been revised since the specified date.

4. Accept, Re-enter Date or Choose Extent

Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-String. For Sub-String, key in a string to limit thetables to be listed.

— THEN —

Select Accept to begin processing.

The system displays a list of all dimension and weight tables (or those which match aspecified substring).

548

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Table Change Report________________

5. Select Tables or Exit

Select the dimension tables to be considered in the creation of the revision managementreport.

— OR —

You can select Process All to process all the listed tables (those which meet thespecified revision date and substring).

— THEN —

Select Accept to process the selected tables.

For each of the selected tables, the system displays the table data in the Table DataDisplay form.

6. Select Table Entry

For each table, you can specify which entries (up to a total of 200 entries) in the tablehave been revised.

Although the performance of the Reference Data Manager in creating the report will notbe impacted by the number of dimension table entries that are to be considered forrevision management, the list of components in the model will be impacted. Forexample, if you inadvertently identify entries which had not actually changed, you maycreate significant, unnecessary work.

549



Project — process all piping models in the entire project.



8. The summary report path and report node are determined by the settings defined withthe Report Manager.

You can change the location or name for the summary report output or use the defaults.

9. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, orSave.



11. Select Accept to begin processing the request.

The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch logfile periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. Thetable change report file has an extension of .tcr and is created in the model directory as<model_number>.tcr . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating thisreport, this report will also be printed.

550

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Reference Data Impact Report________________

15.3 Reference Data Impact Report

Selecting the Reference Data Impact Report command activates the Search Criteria form.

This report is based on user-defined search criteria of attributes such as piping materials class,commodity code, commodity name, option code, maximum temperature, nominal diameter,end preparation, schedule thickness, table suffix, etc. The purpose of this report is to findwhich components (constrained by your search criteria) will be impacted by a change in theattributes as they exist in the current approved RDB. The RDB Impact Report search criteriaare valid for Piping Material Class Data (pdtable_201) and Piping Component SpecificationData (pdtable_202).

The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as<model_number>.imp . This report does not include a graphical review capability.

15.3.1 Examples

Example 1

As an example, assume that you want to know the impact of changing the vendor for aspecific type of valve. You could define the search criteria to find all instances of valves withthat specific geometric industry standard that would need to be reconstructed if the vendorwere changed.

551


Example 2

As a second example, assume that you are working with a project that uses spec A and spec B.Both of these specs contain the value X, for the vendor of gate valves. A model has beencreated that uses both spec A and B, and valves have been placed from both of these specs.

Also, assume that spec B has been modified since the valves have been placed so that thevendor in spec B now has a value of Y (instead of X), and the model has not been updated toreflect this spec change.

If the Reference Data Impact Report was run now to determine the impact of changing thevendor X, the system would scan the RDB for all occurrences of vendor X (which, at thistime, would be only those placed from spec A), check the portions of the design you specifiedfor occurrences of vendor X, then report the matching occurrences back to you.

The resulting report would not list those valves from vendor X that were placed from spec B,because the occurrences of those valves in the model did not match the occurrences in theRDB (due to the model not being updated after the spec change).

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Reference Data Impact Report command from the Reference DataRevision Manager form.

The system activates the Search Criteria form, which prompts you to select theattribute to be restricted.

2. Select Attribute

Select the attribute to be restricted.

After selecting attribute from the attribute display list, the system displays the selectedattribute in a separate field and displays a list of operators.

3. Select Operator

Select an operator to define the search criteria.

The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value.

4. Enter Attribute Value

Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywherewithin the attribute value (do not use wild cards).

552

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Reference Data Impact Report________________ If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the Standard NoteLibrary.

5. Select the value and select Accept.

The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria in the SearchCriteria display field.

6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator

Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternativecondition.

— OR —

Accept the defined search criteria and activate the Reference Database RevisionManager form.

7. Revise the search criteria, if necessary, using the Revise Search Criteria option.

— OR —

Select the extent of the project to be processed.

Project — Process all piping models for the entire project.

553

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Piping Design Area — Process the selected piping design areas.

Models — Process the selected models within a selected design area.


The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report ManagementData of the Report Manager.





The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch logfile periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. Thereference data impact report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the modeldirectory as <model_number>.imp . If the summary report is printed as a result ofcreating this report, this report will also be printed.

554

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Proposed RDB Changes Report________________

15.4 Proposed RDB Changes Report

This command creates a report assessing the impact of multiple changes in the unapprovedRDB. Selecting this command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form activatesthe Proposed RDB Changes Report form.

You must make changes to the unapproved Material Reference Database in order toassess the effect of these changes. You are responsible for restoring the unapprovedMaterial Reference Database to its original state if you decide not to pursue thesechanges.


Processing

Piping Commodities

The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading pipingcommodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same datathat is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity.

piping materials classcommodity namefirst size

second sizeoption codemaximum temperature

555

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from thecomponent itself.

If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch tablefrom the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the PipingMaterials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for thebranch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction.

The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the ReferenceDatabase for piping commodities. That data which may impact the geometry and/or thesymbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.


* commodity code* model code* modifier* geometric industry standardweight codefabrication categorymaterials grade

Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included inthe report.

The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with thegasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in theReference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If aGasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separationvalue for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.

The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping commoditywhich has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data (either the specification datafrom the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point.

The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of thesegment.






556

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Proposed RDB Changes Report________________ changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table.


Piping Specialties and Instruments

The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading pipingspecialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. Thecomponent number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or aninstrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_nois used for piping specialties.

The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the ReferenceDatabase for piping specialties and instruments. That data which may impact the geometryand/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk.


* physical data id* model code* modifier* geometric industry standardweight codefabrication categorymaterials grade

The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty orinstrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If avalue is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is comparedwith that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determinea gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.

The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping specialty orinstrument which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data, i.e. either thespecification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from anotherconnect point. Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when thespecification data and the geometry data is defined by the user (not defined in the ReferenceDatabase).

The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connectpoints for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect pointproperties.

The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connectpoints, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties.


557

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ the application of the schedule/override in the model.





Operating Sequence

1. Select the Proposed RDB Changes Report option.

The system activates the Proposed RDB Changes form.


Project — process all piping models for the entire project.




558

15. Revisio

n

Man

ager

Proposed RDB Changes Report________________ The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report ManagementData of the Report Manager.





The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch logfile periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. Theproposed RDB changes report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the modeldirectory as <model_number>.pcs . If the summary report is printed as a result ofcreating this report, this report will also be printed.

559


560

16. Verify R

DB

L

ibrary

Verify RDB Library________________

16. Verify RDB Library

For releases prior to the 4.2 PDS release, a problem existed in the Reference Data Manager,such that the binary tree structure in a reference data library (such as the Graphic CommodityLibrary) could be corrupted without the user immediately detecting any problems with thatlibrary. Although the software problem was corrected in the 4.2 PDS release, the dataproblem that resulted may have persisted beyond that release, particularly if the library has notbeen compressed.

As a final step within the project upgrade process, the system verifies the integrity of thebinary tree structure within each of the reference data libraries. If an error is detected, aspecific warning message will be reported, both interactively and in the upgrade log. In thisevent, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library.

The Verify RDB Library utility has been provided to allow the capability to verify theintegrity of the binary tree structure on demand.

The Verify RDB Library icon is located in the PD_Shell program group on systems uponwhich the PD_Data software has been loaded locally; double-click on this icon to activate thecommand.

Steps

1. Execute the command by double-clicking on the Verify RDB Library icon in thePD_Shell program group.

The system activates the Reference Database Library Verification Utility form, andprompts you to select the appropriate project number from the list.

561


2. Select the desired project number, then select the Verify Reference Database Librarycommand.

The system begins the verification process and displays the Verifying RDB LibraryFiles message. When processing is complete, the system returns a message similar tothe one shown below:

562

16. Verify R

DB

L

ibrary

Verify RDB Library________________ A typical output file has been excerpted below. No errors were found in this example.

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.lheader number keys = 234tree number keys = 234

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.theader number keys = 234tree number keys = 234

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.rheader number keys = 234tree number keys = 234

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618shbom.lheader number keys = 2877tree number keys = 2877

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618lgbom.lheader number keys = 2629tree number keys = 2629

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618spbom.lEmpty file, no keys.

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.lheader number keys = 4162tree number keys = 4162

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.l.theader number keys = 65tree number keys = 65Counting implied keys for code31Counting implied keys for code35Counting implied keys for code36Counting implied keys for code37Counting implied keys for code50Counting implied keys for code69Counting implied keys for code125...Counting implied keys for code2000

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618label.lheader number keys = 217tree number keys = 217

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.lheader number keys = 110tree number keys = 110

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l.theader number keys = 110tree number keys = 110

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.lheader number keys = 1509tree number keys = 1509

563

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l.theader number keys = 1509tree number keys = 1509

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.lheader number keys = 4820tree number keys = 4820

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.theader number keys = 4820tree number keys = 4820

Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.rheader number keys = 4820tree number keys = 4820

Total files with errors : 0

564

A. E

rror

Messag

es

Appendix A: Reference Data Manager Error Messages________________

Appendix A Reference DataManager ErrorMessages

The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in thewin32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.

pdsmc.msg — command field messages

pdsme.msg — error and warning messages

pdsmp.msg — prompts and messages

pdsms.msg — status messages.

565


566

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: Codelists________________

Appendix B Codelists

This section details the codelists used in PDS.

The data contained within this appendix is for informational purposesonly and may not exactly match the codelists delivered with theproduct.

Subject Description PageCL31 Object Types for Orthographic Drawings 572CL35 Approval Status 573CL36 Structural Approval Status 573CL37 HVAC Approval Status 573CL50 Hold Status 574CL69 Equipment Divisions/Form Code 574

CL125 Fluid Code/Connector Type 574CL130 Construction Status 578CL145 Materials Grade 578CL148 Piping Materials Class Description 603CL160 Responsibility 611CL180 Fabrication Category 611CL190 Coating Requirements 611

CL200 Heat Tracing Requirements 612CL210 Heat Tracing Media 612CL220 Insulation Purpose 613CL230 Cleaning Requirements 613

CL330 CP Type/Termination/Preparation 613CL332 Schedule/Thickness Override 616CL340 Safety Classification 618CL360 Stress Analysis Requirements 618CL365 Reporting Requirements 618CL366 Requirement to Reconstruct 618CL380 Piping Component Type 618CL390 Action 625

CL400 Option 625CL420 Piping Component Type/Source 631CL425 Piping/Tubing Type 632CL430 Instrument Component Type/Source 632CL499 Piping Notes 632

CL530 Accessory/Item Type 634CL550 Operator/Actuator Type 634CL570 Design Standard 635CL572 Wall Thickness Equation 636CL575 Geometry Standard 636

567

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ CL576 Table Suffix/End Standard - Green 647CL577 Table Suffix/End Standard - Red 650CL578 Weight Code 654

CL990 Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms 656CL999 Standard Note Title 656

CL1010 Area Units 657CL1028 Mass Units 658CL1056 Temperature Units 658CL1064 Pressure Units 658CL1074 Density Units 659

CL1100 Weld Type 659CL1162 Force Units 659

CL1201 Drawing Scale 659CL1202 Drawing Size 660CL1203 Interference Manager Approval Status 660CL1204 Interference Clash Type 660CL1205 Interference Manager Action 660CL1207 Interference Manager Approval Method 661CL1208 Clash Checking Option 661CL1209 Clash Checking Volume Filter Option 661

CL1310 Report Source 661CL1312 Report Type 661CL1410 Design Review Type 662CL1605 Model Status 662CL1610 Force Units for FrameWorks Plus 662CL1620 Drawing View Direction 662CL1630 Drawing View Composition Status 662CL1710 Document Source 662CL1720 Document Type 663CL1900 Isometric Drawing Type 665CL2000 PD_Draw Document Type 666

568

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________

B.1 General Comments

Codelist sets in this document define the values for all codelisted attributes used inthe PDS Piping Task which are specific to US plant design practices.

You can add, delete or revise codelist sets to reflect your own practices, terminologyand language. A task user, however, cannot revise a codelist set from a worksession. Revisions to a codelist set, can only be made in the General RDB orStandard Note Library.

In listings that follow, the maximum number of entries that may be expected for aspecific codelist set is shown in parenthesis following the name of the codelist set.

For PDS users that wish to modify codelist files delivered with the PDS software toreflect their own practices, two approaches are possible:

Make the modifications within the range of codelist numbers defined in thecodelist library delivered with the PDS software. This has the advantage ofresulting in the best organized set of codelisted definitions. The disadvantageis that numbers added by the User may conflict with numbers added in futureversions of software.

Increase the maximum number of entries allowed for the codelist set and makeadditions to it in the range of extended numbers. This will minimize possibleconflicts assigned numbers but will require compiling of the codelists and ofthe associated databases.

Values enclosed in brackets [ ] in pages that follow represent descriptive information.The values stored in the codelist sets will exclude this bracketed information fromthe codelist descriptions.

The net length of a codelist entry cannot exceed 50 characters. Other considerationsmay, however, require that a shorter description be made. For example:

For the P&ID Task, the total compressed length of a label part can not exceed36 characters.

The formats of specification type reports for the Instrument Task require thatapplicable codelist descriptions do not exceed 25 characters.

B.2 Comments Specific to Units ofMeasure Codelist Sets

The PDS system of units is derived from the 1980 Edition of API-2564, Manual ofPetroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 15 "Guidelines for the Use of theInternational System of Units (SI) in the Petroleum and Allied Industries".

569

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The tables in this document include the following information.

Codelist set This is the number of the codelist set that identifies a specific quantity.For example, codelist set 1028 includes the units of measure that apply tothe quantity "mass".

Codelist no This is the number that defines a specific unit of measure within acodelist set. For example, codelist number 1 in codelist set 1028 refers tothe "lb" units of measure.

Unit type This code is not explicitly shown in the tables. The unit type equals thenumber of the codelist set minus 1000. For example, reference to unittype 28 refers to "mass".

Quantity name Entries in this column define the quantity whose units of measure arebeing defined.

Unit name: Several unit names are provided for a given codelist set. Any of thesenames can be used to define the quantity.

Conversion todestination unit:

Two sets of columns define the conversion of variables expressed in theunits shown under the column "Unit Name" to the unit shown under thecolumn "Destination Unit". The following explanations apply:

The column captioned Destination Unit defines the unit to which the unitincluded under the column Unit Name will be converted using the value shownunder the column Factor.

The column captioned Factor provides the actual conversion factor to be usedfor the conversion. For example, in codelist set 1028, to convert a massmeasurement in "lb" to "kg", multiply the value in the former units by theconversion factor, 4.535 924 E-01. In some cases, such as temperature,summation may also be required to effect the desired conversion. Allconversion factors are taken or derived from API Publication 2564. Groups ofthree digits are separated by spaces with no commas. For example,

3.048 000 E-01 = 3.048 000 x 10ˆ-1 = 0.3048000.

Similarly,

9.290 304 E+02 = 9.290 304 x 10ˆ2 = 929.0304.

An asterisk (*) indicates that all following digits are zeros. If a conversion factorhappens to end in several zeros but does not have an asterisk, any subsequent digitswould not necessarily be zeros. Most of the conversion factors are shown to six orseven significant figures. Those shown to fewer than six significant figures arelimited by the precision of the known or determinable value of a physical property,such as the density of distilled water at a reference temperature.

570

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ Conversion tofirst unit in CL:

Two sets of columns define the conversion of the units shown under thecolumn Unit Name to the first unit shown in that column. Theconversion is done per the equation:

y= A + Bx

where,

x applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the columncaptioned Unit Name.

y applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the first line ofthe column captioned Unit Name.

A is the factor in the column captioned Factor A.

B is the factor in the column captioned Factor B.

The distinction between upper case and lower case symbols is very important. Forexample:

K= kelvink= kilo= 10ˆ3M= mega= 10ˆ6m= milli= 10ˆ-3 (when m is used as a prefix)m= metre (when m is used alone)N= newtonn= nano= 10ˆ-9

In editing any of the codelist sets for units, do not change the meaning of existingcodelist values.

In all codelist sets for units, a blank space is provided as the first character in the unitname. The blank space is used to silence the units in the formation of labels.

Nomenclature:

Symbol Name Quantitybar bar pressuredegC degree Celsius temperatureg gram masskg kilogram massm metre lengthmin minute timePa pascal pressuret metric ton mass

571


CL31, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40)

C31 DF=’WRK_DD_CODLST:CODE0031.ENT’ MAX=9990031, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40)

Equipment Category Object Types (100-149)The Range of 100-149 for the equipment category isdivided into two parts:101-110 These entries are reserved by INTERGRAPHand may not be changed by the user.111-149 Codelist entries in this range may be created,revised, and/or deleted by the user.If modified the user must also revise thecontents of the file eqp_object.dwg andlabels.xxx (where xxx is the drawing typenumber defined in CL2000 ) in the projectdirectory.

101 = ’Equipment Group’110 = ’Equipment Nozzle’120 = ’Equipment Platform’124 = ’Equipment Handrail’128 = ’Equipment Penetration’130 = ’Equipment Stair’135 = ’Equipment Ladder’140 = ’Equipment Davit’

Piping Category Object Types (200-249)

205 = ’Piping Segment’207 = ’Pipe’210 = ’Piping Component’215 = ’Piping Specialty’220 = ’Piping Support’

Instrument Category Object Types (250-279)

250 = ’Control Valves and Regulators’252 = ’Relief Devices’255 = ’Other In-Line Instruments’260 = ’Off-Line Instruments’

HVAC Category Object Types (359-399)

359 = ’HVAC Coil Data’360 = ’HVAC Connector Data’361 = ’HVAC Damper Data’362 = ’HVAC Diffuser Data’363 = ’HVAC Duct Data’364 = ’HVAC DEquipment Data’365 = ’HVAC Filter Data’366 = ’HVAC Fitting Data’367 = ’HVAC Grille Data’368 = ’HVAC Hood Data’369 = ’HVAC Humidifier Data’370 = ’HVAC Register Data’371 = ’HVAC Terminal Devices’

572

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ EERWAY Category Object Types (300-306)

300 = ’EERWAY Connect Point’301 = ’EERWAY OneLine’302 = ’EERWAY Straight’303 = ’EERWAY Fitting’304 = ’EERWAY Space Envelope’305 = ’EERWAY To_Equipment’306 = ’EERWAY To_Support’307 = ’EERWAY Eqp Panel’308 = ’EERWAY Duct Bank’

CL35, Approval Status (10)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values. Some data displays require that onlyvalues to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports requirethat only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.The following are the requirements in use of the "approval status."

2 reserved for ’approved’3 reserved for ’not approved’11-20 reserved for ’approved’21-30 reserved for ’not approved’

1 = [Blank]2 = ’A =Approved’3 = ’NA=Not approved’

CL36, Structural Approval Status (15)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values. Some data displays require that onlyvalues to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports requirethat only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.

0= ’New’1 = ’Existing’2 = ’Future’3 = ’User 1’4 = ’User 2’

CL37, HVAC Approval Status (10)


1 = ’New’2 = ’Existing’3 = ’Dismantle’4 = ’Future’

573


CL50, Hold Status (10)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values. Some data displays require that onlyvalues to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports requirethat only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labelsalways require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.

1 = ’NH=Not held’2 = ’H =Hold’

CL69, Equipment Divisions/Form Code (99)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof codelist value "All". Some data displays require that onlyvalues to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other data displaysrequire that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.

1 = ’A= All’2 = ’B= Vessels’3 = ’C= Heat transfer’4 = ’D= Mechanical’5 = ’E= Civil/Structural’6 = ’F= Piping’7 = ’H= Electrical’8 = ’I= Other’

CL125, Fluid Code/Connector Type (999)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values 950-999.

1 = [Blank]

11 = ’A’ [Air]14 = ’AC’ [Combustion air]17 = ’AE’ [Aeration air]20 = ’AI’ [Instrument air]23 = ’AO’ [Operational air]26 = ’AP’ [Plant air]29 = ’APU’ [Purge air]32 = ’AR’ [Regeneration air]35 = ’AS’ [Starting air]40 = ’AZ’ [Other air]

71 = ’C’ [Refrigerant]75 = ’CA’ [Ammonia refrigerant]79 = ’CE’ [Ethylene refrigerant]83 = ’CF’ [Freon refrigerant]87 = ’CLP’ [LP refrigerant]91 = ’CPR’ [Propylene refrigerant]100 = ’CZ’ [Other refrigerant]

101 = ’D’ [Sewer]103 = ’DC’ [Caustic sewer]105 = ’DCH’ [Chemical sewer]107 = ’DGR’ [Drain to grade]

574

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 109 = ’DOW’ [Oily water sewer]111 = ’DP’ [Process sewer]113 = ’DPH’ [Heated process sewer]115 = ’DS’ [Sanitary sewer]117 = ’DSP’ [Press sanitary sewer]119 = ’DST’ [Storm sewer]121 = ’DW’ [Clean water sewer]123 = ’DWS’ [Sour water sewer]125 = ’DX’ [Acid sewer]127 = [Blank] [Storm, oily water or sanitary sewer]128 = [Blank] [Storm or oily water sewer]130 = ’DZ’ [Other sewer]

161 = ’F’ [Foam]

191 = ’G’ [Gas]194 = ’GCD’ [Carbon dioxide gas]197 = ’GCL’ [Chlorine gas]198 = ’GCN’ [Chlorination gas]200 = ’GF’ [Fuel gas]203 = ’GG’ [Flue gas]206 = ’GH’ [Hydrogen gas]209 = ’GHS’ [Hydrogen sulphide gas]212 = ’GI’ [Inert gas]215 = ’GLP’ [LP gas]218 = ’GM’ [Make-up gas]221 = ’GN’ [Natural gas]224 = ’GNI’ [Nitrogen gas]227 = ’GOX’ [Oxygen gas]230 = ’GP’ [Purge gas]233 = ’GR’ [Reformed gas]236 = ’GS’ [Synthesis gas]239 = ’GSO’ [Sour gas]242 = ’GSW’ [Sweet gas]245 = ’GW’ [Waste gas250 = ’GZ’ [Other gas]

341 = ’K’ [Solvent]346 = ’KG’ [Glycol]351 = ’KF’ [Furfural]356 = ’KD’ [Dewaxing]370 = ’KZ’ [Other solvent]

401 = ’M’ [Chemical]402 = [Blank] [Chemical injection]405 = ’MAA’ [Anhydrous ammonia]409 = ’MAC’ [Aluminum chloride]413 = ’MAW’ [Aqueous ammonia]417 = ’MC5’ [0-50% caustic solution]421 = ’MCL’ [Dry chlorine]425 = ’MEO’ [Ethylene oxide]429 = ’MHC’ [Hydrogen chloride]433 = ’MIA’ [Inhibitor A]434 = ’MIB’ [Inhibitor B]440 = ’MLA’ [Lube oil additives]444 = ’MMA’ [Methyl alcohol]448 = ’MS’ [Sulfur]452 = ’MSL’ [Liquid sulfur]460 = ’MZ’ [Other chemical]

575

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 491 = ’O’ [Oil]493 = ’OD’ [Diesel fuel oil]495 = ’ODS’ [Dry slop oil]497 = ’OF’ [Flushing oil]499 = ’OFR’ [Fuel oil return]500 = ’OFS’ [Fuel oil supply]503 = ’OH’ [Hydraulic oil]505 = ’OL’ [Lube]507 = ’OLS’ [Lube and seal oil]509 = ’OS’ [Seal oil]511 = ’OSO’ [Sour oil]513 = ’OSW’ [Sweet oil]515 = ’OWS’ [Wet slop oil]520 = ’OZ’ [Other oil]

521 = ’P’ [Process]522 = [Blank] [Special process]524 = ’PA’ [Process w/ rich/lean amine]527 = ’PAS’ [Process w/ severe amine]530 = ’PB’ [Process w/ benzene]533 = ’PH’ [Process w/ H2]536 = ’PHH’ [Process w/ H2 & H2S]539 = ’PHW’ [Process w/ aqueous H2S]542 = ’PL’ [Low temperature process]545 = ’PS’ [Process w/ S]550 = ’PZ’ [Other process]

581 = ’RA’ [Relief to atmosphere]591 = ’RF’ [Relief to flare]610 = ’RZ’ [Other relief]

611 = ’S’ [Steam]613 = [Blank] [Boiler feed water or steam]615 = [Blank] [Boiler feed water, steam or condensate]617 = [Blank] [Steam or condensate]621 = ’SE’ [Extr press CL1500 steam]623 = ’SH’ [High press CL900 steam]625 = ’SL’ [Low press CL150 steam]627 = ’SM’ [Med press CL600 steam]629 = ’SN’ [Nor press CL300 steam]631 = ’SS’ [Superheated steam]633 = ’SV’ [Vacuum steam]635 = ’SX’ [Exhaust CL125 steam]640 = ’SZ’ [Other steam]

641 = ’SC’ [Steam condensate]643 = ’SCA’ [Atmospheric CL125 steam condensate]645 = ’SCE’ [Extr press CL1500 steam condensate]647 = ’SCH’ [High press CL900 steam condensate]649 = ’SCL’ [Low press CL150 steam condensate]651 = ’SCM’ [Med press CL600 steam condensate]653 = ’SCN’ [Nor press CL300 steam condensate]655 = ’SCV’ [Vacuum steam condensate]660 = ’SCZ’ [Other steam condensate]

721 = ’V’ [Vent]731 = ’VA’ [Vent to atmosphere]741 = ’VF’ [Vent to flare]750 = ’VZ’ [Other vent]

576

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 751 = ’W’ [Water]753 = ’WB’ [Boiler feed water]755 = ’WBA’ [Ballast water]757 = ’WBB’ [Water boiler blowdown]759 = ’WC’ [Cooling water]761 = [Blank] [Cooling or utility water]763 = ’WCH’ [Chlorinated water]764 = ’WCL’ [Chlorine in water]765 = ’WCF’ [Clarified water]767 = ’WCR’ [Cooling water return]768 = ’WCS’ [Cooling water supply]771 = ’WPT’ [Potable water]772 = [Blank] [Potable water or instrument air]773 = ’WDM’ [Demineralized water]775 = ’WFA’ [Aboveground fire water]777 = ’WFI’ [Filtered water]779 = ’WFU’ [Underground fire water]781 = ’WG’ [Glycol water]783 = ’WGL’ [Gland water]785 = ’WGR’ [Glycol water return]786 = ’WGS’ [Glycol water supply]789 = ’WH’ [Hot water]791 = ’WHR’ [Hot water return]792 = ’WHS’ [Hot water supply]795 = ’WI’ [Chilled water]797 = ’WIR’ [Chilled water return]798 = ’WIS’ [Chilled water supply]801 = ’WK’ [Treated water]803 = ’WN’ [Brine water]805 = ’WP’ [Process water]807 = ’WR’ [Raw water]809 = ’WS’ [Sea water]811 = ’WSR’ [Sea water return]812 = ’WSS’ [Sea water supply]815 = ’WT’ [Test water]817 = ’WU’ [Utility water]819 = ’WW’ [Waste water]830 = ’WZ’ [Other water]

831 = ’X’ [Acid]835 = ’XH’ [Hydrofluoric acid]839 = ’XN’ [Nitric acid]843 = ’XSD’ [Dilute sulfuric acid]847 = ’XS3’ [30% sulfuric acid]851 = ’XS8’ [75-80% sulfuric acid]853 = ’XS9’ [93-97% sulfuric acid]860 = ’XZ’ [Other acid]

861 = ’Y’ [Catalyst]865 = ’YA’ [Catalyst addition]869 = ’YG’ [General catalyst]873 = ’YH’ [Catalyst w/ H2]877 = ’YL’ [Catalyst lift lines]881 = ’YW’ [Catalyst withdrawal lines]890 = ’YZ’ [Other catalyst]

950 = ’ODPC’ [Off-dwg piping connectors]951 = ’OUPC’ [Off-unit piping connectors]953 = ’UODPC’ [Utility off-dwg piping connectors]955 = ’ODIC’ [Off-dwg instr connectors]956 = ’OUIC’ [Off-unit instr connectors]960 = ’OVPC’ [Off-vol piping connectors]961 = ’OSPC’ [Off-site piping connectors]

577

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 999 = ’TERM’ [Terminator piping connector]

CL130, Construction Status (15)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values 2, 3 and 8. In addition, codelistvalues 4-7 must imply an "existing" construction status. Codelistvalues 9-15 inherit the color symbology from the constructionstatus of the item previously placed in the model.

1 = [Blank]2 = ’New’3 = ’Existing’4 = ’Revamp’5 = ’Relocate’6 = ’Temporary’7 = ’Dismantle’8 = ’Future’

CL145, Materials Grade (4500)

NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the"=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the rightof the "=" sign be displayed.

1 = [Blank]

Irons, 10-9910 = ’A47-32510’12 = ’A47-35018’15 = ’A48-20’16 = ’A48-25’17 = ’A48-30’18 = ’A48-35’19 = ’A48-40’20 = ’A48-45’21 = ’A48-50’22 = ’A48-55’23 = ’A48-60’25 = ’A74’30 = ’A126-A’31 = ’A126-B’32 = ’A126-C’35 = ’A197’40 = ’A278-20’41 = ’A278-25’42 = ’A278-30’43 = ’A278-35’44 = ’A278-40’45 = ’A278-50’46 = ’A278-60’47 = ’A278-70’48 = ’A278-80’55 = ’A338’60 = ’A395-Ductile’62 = ’A395-Ferritic Ductile’70 = ’A571’75 = ’AWWA-C110-Ductile’76 = ’AWWA-C151-Ductile’

578

B. C

od

elists


Carbon Steels, 100-499110 = ’API-5L-A’114 = ’API-5L-A25’116 = ’API-5L-B’118 = ’API-5L-X42’120 = ’API-5L-X46’122 = ’API-5L-X52’124 = ’API-5L-X65’135 = ’A36’140 = ’A53-A’142 = ’A53-B’144 = ’A53-Type F’150 = ’A105’160 = ’A106-A’162 = ’A106-B’164 = ’A106-C’170 = ’A120’180 = ’A134-A36’182 = ’A134-A283-A’183 = ’A134-A283-B’184 = ’A134-A283-C’185 = ’A134-A283-D’186 = ’A134-A285-A’187 = ’A134-A285-B’188 = ’A134-A285-C’190 = ’A134-A570-30’191 = ’A134-A570-33’192 = ’A134-A570-36’193 = ’A134-A570-40’194 = ’A134-A570-45’195 = ’A134-A570-50’200 = ’A135-A’202 = ’A135-B’210 = ’A139-A’212 = ’A139-B’214 = ’A139-C’216 = ’A139-D’218 = ’A139-E’220 = ’A179’230 = ’A181-CL60’234 = ’A181-CL70’240 = ’A211-A570-30’241 = ’A211-A570-33’242 = ’A211-A570-36’243 = ’A211-A570-40’244 = ’A211-A570-45’245 = ’A211-A570-50’250 = ’A216-WCA’252 = ’A216-WCB’254 = ’A216-WCC’264 = ’A234-WPB’266 = ’A234-WPC’270 = ’A283-A’272 = ’A283-B’274 = ’A283-C’276 = ’A283-D’280 = ’A285-A’282 = ’A285-B’284 = ’A285-C’290 = ’A333-1’293 = ’A333-6’295 = ’A334-1’

579


298 = ’A334-6’300 = ’A350-LF1’302 = ’A350-LF2’305 = ’A352-LCB’310 = ’A369-FPA’312 = ’A369-FPB’320 = ’A381-Y35’321 = ’A381-Y42’322 = ’A381-Y46’323 = ’A381-Y48’325 = ’A381-Y50’327 = ’A381-Y52’334 = ’A420-WPL6’340 = ’A515-55’342 = ’A515-60’344 = ’A515-65’346 = ’A515-70’350 = ’A516-55’352 = ’A516-60’354 = ’A516-65’356 = ’A516-70’360 = ’A520-30’361 = ’A520-33’362 = ’A520-36’363 = ’A520-40’364 = ’A520-45’365 = ’A520-50’370 = ’A524-I’372 = ’A524-II’375 = ’A537-CL1’380 = ’A587’390 = ’A671-CA55’392 = ’A671-CB60’394 = ’A671-CB65’396 = ’A671-CB70’398 = ’A671-CC60’400 = ’A671-CC65’402 = ’A671-CC70’404 = ’A671-CD70’406 = ’A671-CE55’408 = ’A671-CE60’410 = ’A671-CK75’420 = ’A672-A45’422 = ’A672-A50’424 = ’A672-A55’426 = ’A672-B55’428 = ’A672-B60’430 = ’A672-B65’432 = ’A672-B70’434 = ’A672-C55’436 = ’A672-C60’438 = ’A672-C65’440 = ’A672-C70’442 = ’A672-D70’444 = ’A672-E55’446 = ’A672-E60’448 = ’A672-N75’460 = ’A691-CMS75’464 = ’A691-CMSH70’

580

B. C

od

elists


Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels, 500-899510 = ’A182-F1’512 = ’A182-F2’514 = ’A182-F5’516 = ’A182-F5a’518 = ’A182-F6a Cl.1’519 = ’A182-F6a Cl.2’520 = ’A182-F6a Cl.3’521 = ’A182-F6a Cl.4’523 = ’A182-F6b’524 = ’A182-F7’526 = ’A182-F9’528 = ’A182-F11’530 = ’A182-F12’532 = ’A182-F21’534 = ’A182-F22’536 = ’A182-F22a’540 = ’A202-A’542 = ’A202-B’550 = ’A203-A’552 = ’A203-B’554 = ’A203-D’556 = ’A203-E’560 = ’A204-A’562 = ’A204-B’564 = ’A204-C’576 = ’A217-C5’578 = ’A217-C12’580 = ’A217-CA15’582 = ’A217-WC1’584 = ’A217-WC4’586 = ’A217-WC5’588 = ’A217-WC6’590 = ’A217-WC9’600 = ’A225-A’602 = ’A225-B’610 = ’A234-WP1’614 = ’A234-WP5’616 = ’A234-WP7’618 = ’A234-WP9’620 = ’A234-WP11’622 = ’A234-WP12’624 = ’A234-WP22’630 = ’A302-A’632 = ’A302-B’634 = ’A302-C’636 = ’A302-D’644 = ’A333-3’646 = ’A333-4’648 = ’A333-7’650 = ’A333-8’652 = ’A333-9’664 = ’A334-3’666 = ’A334-7’668 = ’A334-8’670 = ’A334-9’680 = ’A335-P1’682 = ’A335-P2’684 = ’A335-P5’686 = ’A335-P5b’687 = ’A335-P5c’690 = ’A335-P7’

581


692 = ’A335-P9’694 = ’A335-P11’696 = ’A335-P12’698 = ’A335-P15’700 = ’A335-P21’702 = ’A335-P22’710 = ’A350-LF3’720 = ’A352-LC1’722 = ’A352-LC2’724 = ’A352-LC3’730 = ’A353’740 = ’A369-FP1’742 = ’A369-FP2’744 = ’A369-FP3b’746 = ’A369-FP5’748 = ’A369-FP7’750 = ’A369-FP9’752 = ’A369-FP11’754 = ’A369-FP12’756 = ’A369-FP21’758 = ’A369-FP22’760 = ’A385-7 Cl.1’761 = ’A385-7 Cl.2’770 = ’A387-2 Cl.1’771 = ’A387-2 Cl.2’774 = ’A387-5 Cl.1’775 = ’A387-5 Cl.2’778 = ’A387-9 Cl.1’779 = ’A387-9 Cl.2’780 = ’A387-11 Cl.1’781 = ’A387-11 Cl.2’782 = ’A387-12 Cl.1’783 = ’A387-12 Cl.2’784 = ’A387-21 Cl.1’785 = ’A387-21 Cl.2’786 = ’A387-22 Cl.1’787 = ’A387-22 Cl.2’794 = ’A420-WPL3’798 = ’A420-WPL8’800 = ’A426-CP1’802 = ’A426-CP2’804 = ’A426-CP5’806 = ’A426-CP5b’808 = ’A426-CP7’810 = ’A426-CP9’812 = ’A426-CP11’814 = ’A426-CP12’816 = ’A426-CP15’817 = ’A426-CPCA15’820 = ’A426-CP21’822 = ’A426-CP22’830 = ’A553-Type I’832 = ’A553-Type II’835 = ’A645’840 = ’A671-CF70’842 = ’A671-CF71’850 = ’A672-L65’852 = ’A672-L70’854 = ’A672-L75’860 = ’A691-CM65’862 = ’A691-CM70’864 = ’A691-CM75’

582

B. C

od

elists


866 = ’A691-0.5Cr’868 = ’A691-1Cr’870 = ’A691-1.25Cr’872 = ’A691-2.25Cr’874 = ’A691-3Cr’876 = ’A691-5Cr’878 = ’A691-9Cr’

Stainless Steels, 900-1324920 = ’A167-301’922 = ’A167-302’923 = ’A167-302B’926 = ’A167-304’927 = ’A167-304L’930 = ’A167-305’932 = ’A167-308’934 = ’A167-309’935 = ’A167-309S’938 = ’A167-310’939 = ’A167-310S’942 = ’A167-316’943 = ’A167-316L’946 = ’A167-317’947 = ’A167-317L’950 = ’A167-321’952 = ’A167-347’954 = ’A167-348’960 = ’A182-F10’964 = ’A182-F304’965 = ’A182-F304H’966 = ’A182-F304L’968 = ’A182-F310’970 = ’A182-F316’971 = ’A182-F316H’972 = ’A182-F316L’974 = ’A182-F321’975 = ’A182-F321H’978 = ’A182-F347’979 = ’A182-F347H’982 = ’A182-F348’983 = ’A182-F348H’990 = ’A240-X8M’992 = ’A240-302’994 = ’A240-304’995 = ’A240-304L’996 = ’A240-304H’998 = ’A240-305’1000 = ’A240-309S’1004 = ’A240-310S’1006 = ’A240-316’1007 = ’A240-316L’1010 = ’A240-317’1011 = ’A240-317L’1014 = ’A240-321’1016 = ’A240-347’1018 = ’A240-348’1020 = ’A240-405’1022 = ’A240-410’1023 = ’A240-410S’1026 = ’A240-429’1028 = ’A240-430’1040 = ’A268-TP329’

583


1044 = ’A268-TP405’1046 = ’A268-TP409’1048 = ’A268-TP410’1050 = ’A268-TP430’1051 = ’A268-TP430Ti’1054 = ’A268-TP443’1056 = ’A268-TP446’1060 = ’A269-TP304’1061 = ’A269-TP304L’1064 = ’A269-TP316’1065 = ’A269-TP316L’1066 = ’A270-TP316L’1070 = ’A312-TP304’1071 = ’A312-TP304H’1072 = ’A312-TP304L1074 = ’A312-TP309’1076 = ’A312-TP310’1078 = ’A312-TP316’1079 = ’A312-TP316H’1080 = ’A312-TP316L’1082 = ’A312-TP317’1084 = ’A312-TP321’1085 = ’A312-TP321H’1088 = ’A312-TP347’1089 = ’A312-TP347H’1092 = ’A312-TP348’1095 = ’A351-CA15’1100 = ’A351-CF3’1102 = ’A351-CF3A’1104 = ’A351-CF3M’1106 = ’A351-CF8’1108 = ’A351-CF8A’1110 = ’A351-CF8C’1112 = ’A351-CF8M’1113 = ’A351-CF10’1114 = ’A351-CF10MC’1116 = ’A351-CN7M’1118 = ’A351-CH8’1120 = ’A351-CH10’1122 = ’A351-CH20’1124 = ’A351-CK20’1126 = ’A351-HK30’1128 = ’A351-HK40’1130 = ’A351-HT30’1140 = ’A358-304’1141 = ’A358-304L’1144 = ’A358-309S’1146 = ’A358-310S’1148 = ’A358-316’1149 = ’A358-316L’1152 = ’A358-321’1154 = ’A358-347’1156 = ’A358-348’1160 = ’A376-16-8-2H’1162 = ’A376-TP304’1163 = ’A376-TP304H’1166 = ’A376-TP316’1167 = ’A376-TP316H’1170 = ’A376-TP321’1171 = ’A376-TP321H’1174 = ’A376-TP347’1175 = ’A376-TP347H’

584

B. C

od

elists


1178 = ’A376-TP348’1179 = ’A376-TP348H’1190 = ’A403-WP304’1191 = ’A403-WP304H’1192 = ’A403-WP304L’1194 = ’A403-WP309’1196 = ’A403-WP310’1198 = ’A403-WP316’1199 = ’A403-WP316H’1200 = ’A403-WP316L’1202 = ’A403-WP317’1204 = ’A403-WP321’1205 = ’A403-WP321H’1206 = ’A403-WP347’1207 = ’A403-WP347H’1210 = ’A403-WP348’1220 = ’A409-TP304’1222 = ’A409-TP309’1224 = ’A409-TP310’1226 = ’A409-TP316’1228 = ’A409-TP317’1230 = ’A409-TP321’1232 = ’A409-TP347’1234 = ’A409-TP348’1240 = ’A430-FP304’1241 = ’A430-FP304H’1244 = ’A430-FP316’1245 = ’A430-FP316H’1248 = ’A430-FP321’1249 = ’A430-FP321H’1252 = ’A430-FP347’1253 = ’A430-FP347H’1260 = ’A451-CHP10’1262 = ’A451-CHP20’1264 = ’A451-CPF8C’1266 = ’A451-CPF8M’1268 = ’A451-CPF10MC’1270 = ’A451-CPH8’1272 = ’A451-CPK20’1280 = ’A452-TP304H’1282 = ’A452-TP316H’1284 = ’A452-TP347H’1300 = ’ASME SA479-316L’

Copper and Copper Alloys, 1325-15491325 = ’AISI-CDA Alloy 377’1330 = ’B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2’1331 = ’B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12’1334 = ’B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2’1335 = ’B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 2.5-12’1338 = ’B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2’1339 = ’B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12’1342 = ’B43 Cl.C23000, annld’1346 = ’B61 Cl.C92200’1350 = ’B62 Cl.C83600’1354 = ’B68 Cl.C10200, annld’1356 = ’B68 Cl.C12000, annld’1358 = ’B68 Cl.C12200, annld’1362 = ’B75 Cl.C10200, annld’1363 = ’B75 Cl.C10200, hrd drwn’1364 = ’B75 Cl.C10200, light drwn’1368 = ’B75 Cl.C12000, annld’

585


1369 = ’B75 Cl.C12000, hrd drwn’1370 = ’B75 Cl.C12000, light drwn’1374 = ’B75 Cl.C12200, annld’1375 = ’B75 Cl.C12200, hrd drwn’1376 = ’B75 Cl.C12200, light drwn’1380 = ’B75 Cl.C14200, annld’1381 = ’B75 Cl.C14200, hrd drwn’1382 = ’B75 Cl.C14200, light drwn’1386 = ’B88 Cl.C10200, annld’1387 = ’B88 Cl.C10200, drwn’1392 = ’B88 Cl.C12000, annld’1393 = ’B88 Cl.C12000, drwn’1398 = ’B88 Cl.C12200, annld’1399 = ’B88 Cl.C12200, drwn’1404 = ’B96 Cl.C65500, annld’1408 = ’B152 Cl.C10200, annld’1410 = ’B152 Cl.C10400, annld’1412 = ’B152 Cl.C10500, annld’1414 = ’B152 Cl.C10700, annld’1416 = ’B152 Cl.C12200, annld’1418 = ’B152 Cl.C12300, annld’1422 = ’B169 Cl.C61400, soft’1430 = ’B283 Cl.C11000’1432 = ’B283 Cl.C37700’1434 = ’B283 Cl.C46400’1436 = ’B283 Cl.C48500’1438 = ’B283 Cl.C63900’1440 = ’B283 Cl.C65500’1442 = ’B283 Cl.C67500’1450 = ’B402 Cl.C70600, annld’1452 = ’B402 Cl.C71500, annld’1456 = ’B466 Cl.C70600, annld’1458 = ’B466 Cl.C71500, annld’1462 = ’B467 Cl.C70600, annld, <=4.5in OD’1463 = ’B467 Cl.C70600, annld, >4.5in OD’1466 = ’B467 Cl.C71500, annld, <=4.5in OD’1467 = ’B467 Cl.C71500, annld, >4.5in OD’1472 = ’B584 Cl.C86200’1474 = ’B584 Cl.C86300’1476 = ’B584 Cl.C86400’1478 = ’B584 Cl.C86500’1480 = ’B584 Cl.C86700’1482 = ’B584 Cl.C90300’1484 = ’B584 Cl.C90500’1486 = ’B584 Cl.C92200’1488 = ’B584 Cl.C92300’1490 = ’B584 Cl.C95200’1492 = ’B584 Cl.C95300’1494 = ’B584 Cl.C95500’1496 = ’B584 Cl.C95600’1498 = ’B584 Cl.C97300’1500 = ’B584 Cl.C97600’1502 = ’B584 Cl.C97800’

Nickel and Nickel Alloys 1550-17741560 = ’B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt annld’1561 = ’B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt AR’1564 = ’B160-200 (N02200) annld’1565 = ’B160-200 (N02200) hot fin’1568 = ’B160-201 annld’1572 = ’B161-200 (N02200) annld, <=5in OD’1573 = ’B161-200 (N02200) annld, >5in OD’

586

B. C

od

elists


1574 = ’B161-200 (N02200) stress rlvd’1576 = ’B161-201 (N02201) annld, <=5in OD’1577 = ’B161-201 (N02201) annld, >5in OD’1578 = ’B161-201 (N02201) stress rlvd’1582 = ’B162-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt annld’1586 = ’B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt annld’1587 = ’B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt AR’1590 = ’B164-400 (N04400) annld forged’1591 = ’B164-400 (N04400) hot fin’1594 = ’B165-400 (N04400) annld, <=5in OD’1595 = ’B165-400 (N04400) annld, >5in OD’1596 = ’B165-400 (N04400) stress rlvd’1600 = ’B166-600 (N06600) annld’1601 = ’B166-600 (N06600) hot fin’1604 = ’B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld, <=5in OD’1605 = ’B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld, >5in OD’1606 = ’B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld, <=5in OD’1607 = ’B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld, >5in OD’1610 = ’B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt annld’1611 = ’B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt AR’1614 = ’B333-B (N10001) sln annld plt’1615 = ’B333-B (N10001) sln annld sheet’1616 = ’B333-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’1620 = ’B335-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’1624 = ’B366-WPHB (N10001)’1626 = ’B366-WPHX (N06002)’1628 = ’B366-WPN (N02200)’1630 = ’B366-WPNC (N04400)’1632 = ’B366-WPNC1 (N06600)’1634 = ’B366-WPNL (N02201)’1636 = ’B366-WPNLWX’1638 = ’B366-WPNWX’1642 = ’B407-800 (N08800) cold drwn annld’1643 = ’B407-800 (N08800) hot fin/hot fin annld’1646 = ’B407-800H (N08810) cold drwn sln annld/hot fin’1648 = ’B443-625 (N06625) annld’1650 = ’B444-625 (N06625) annld’1652 = ’B446-625 (N06625) annld’1654 = ’B464-20Cb (N08020) annld’1656 = ’A494-CW-12M-1’1658 = ’A494-CW-12M-2’1660 = ’A494-CY-40’1664 = ’B574-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’1666 = ’B574-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’1670 = ’B575-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’1672 = ’B575-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’1676 = ’B581-G (N06007) sln annld’1680 = ’B582-G (N06007) sln annld’1684 = ’B612-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt AR’1688 = ’B619-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’1700 = ’B619-B (N10001) sln annld’1702 = ’B619-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’1704 = ’B619-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’1706 = ’B619-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’1708 = ’B619-G1 (N06007) sln annld’1710 = ’B619-X (N06002) sln annld’1714 = ’B620-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’1718 = ’B621-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’1722 = ’B622-B (N10001) sln annld’1724 = ’B622-B-2 (N10655) sln annld’1726 = ’B622-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’1728 = ’B622-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’

587


1730 = ’B622-G (N06007) sln annld’1732 = ’B622-X (N06002) sln annld’

Aluminum Alloys 1775-22991780 = ’B26-356.0 temper T6’1782 = ’B26-356.0 temper T71’1784 = ’B26-443.0 temper F’1790 = ’B209-1060 temper 0’1792 = ’B209-1060 temper H12’1794 = ’B209-1060 temper H14’1796 = ’B209-1060 temper H112’1798 = ’B209-1100 temper 0’1800 = ’B209-1100 temper H12’1802 = ’B209-1100 temper H14’1804 = ’B209-1100 temper H112’1806 = ’B209-3003 temper 0’1808 = ’B209-3003 temper H12’1810 = ’B209-3003 temper H14’1812 = ’B209-3003 temper H112’1814 = ’B209-3004 temper 0’1816 = ’B209-3004 temper H32’1818 = ’B209-3004 temper H34’1820 = ’B209-3004 temper H112’1822 = ’B209-5050 temper 0’1824 = ’B209-5050 temper H32’1826 = ’B209-5050 temper H34’1828 = ’B209-5050 temper H112’1830 = ’B209-5052 temper 0’1832 = ’B209-5052 temper H32’1834 = ’B209-5052 temper H34’1836 = ’B209-5052 temper H112’1838 = ’B209-5652 temper 0’1840 = ’B209-5652 temper H32’1842 = ’B209-5652 temper H34’1844 = ’B209-5652 temper H112’1846 = ’B209-5083 temper 0’1848 = ’B209-5083 temper H321’1850 = ’B209-5086 temper 0’1852 = ’B209-5086 temper H32’1854 = ’B209-5086 temper H34’1856 = ’B209-5086 temper H112’1858 = ’B209-5154 temper 0’1860 = ’B209-5154 temper H32’1862 = ’B209-5154 temper H34’1864 = ’B209-5154 temper H112’1866 = ’B209-5254 temper 0’1868 = ’B209-5254 temper H32’1870 = ’B209-5254 temper H34’1872 = ’B209-5254 temper H112’1874 = ’B209-5454 temper 0’1876 = ’B209-5454 temper H32’1878 = ’B209-5454 temper H34’1880 = ’B209-5454 temper H112’1882 = ’B209-5456 temper 0’1884 = ’B209-5456 temper H321’1886 = ’B209-6061 temper T4’1888 = ’B209-6061 temper T4, wld’1890 = ’B209-6061 temper T6’1892 = ’B209-6061 temper T6, wld’1894 = ’B209-6061 temper T651’1896 = ’B209-Alclad 3003 temper 0’1898 = ’B209-Alclad 3003 temper H12’

588

B. C

od

elists


1900 = ’B209-Alclad 3003 temper H14’1902 = ’B209-Alclad 3003 temper H112’1904 = ’B209-Alclad 3004 temper 0’1906 = ’B209-Alclad 3004 temper H32’1908 = ’B209-Alclad 3004 temper H34’1910 = ’B209-Alclad 3004 temper H112’1912 = ’B209-Alclad 6061 temper T4’1914 = ’B209-Alclad 6061 temper T4, wld’1916 = ’B209-Alclad 6061 temper T6’1918 = ’B209-Alclad 6061 temper T6, wld’1920 = ’B209-Alclad 6061 temper T451’1922 = ’B209-Alclad 6061 temper T651’

1930 = ’B210-1060 temper 0’1932 = ’B210-1060 temper H14’1934 = ’B210-1060 temper H112’1936 = ’B210-3003 temper 0’1938 = ’B210-3003 temper H14’1940 = ’B210-3003 temper H18’1942 = ’B210-3003 temper H112’1944 = ’B210-5052 temper 0’1946 = ’B210-5052 temper H32’1948 = ’B210-5052 temper H34’1950 = ’B210-5083 temper 0’1952 = ’B210-5083 temper H112’1954 = ’B210-5086 temper 0’1956 = ’B210-5086 temper H32’1958 = ’B210-5086 temper H34’1960 = ’B210-5086 temper H112’1962 = ’B210-5154 temper 0’1964 = ’B210-5154 temper H34’1966 = ’B210-5456 temper 0’1968 = ’B210-5456 temper H112’1970 = ’B210-6061 temper T4’1972 = ’B210-6061 temper T4, wld’1974 = ’B210-6061 temper T6’1976 = ’B210-6061 temper T6, wld’1978 = ’B210-6063 temper T4’1980 = ’B210-6063 temper T4, wld’1982 = ’B210-6063 temper T5, wld’1984 = ’B210-6063 temper T6’1986 = ’B210-6063 temper T6, wld’1988 = ’B210-Alclad 3002 temper 0’1990 = ’B210-Alclad 3003 temper H14’1992 = ’B210-Alclad 3003 temper H18’1994 = ’B210-Alclad 3002 temper H112’2010 = ’B221-1060 temper 0’2012 = ’B221-1060 temper H112’2014 = ’B221-1100 temper 0’2016 = ’B221-1100 temper H112’2018 = ’B221-3003 temper 0’2020 = ’B221-3003 temper H112’2022 = ’B221-5052 temper 0’2024 = ’B221-5053 temper 0’2026 = ’B221-5086 temper 0’2028 = ’B221-5154 temper 0’2030 = ’B221-5454 temper 0’2032 = ’B221-5456 temper 0’2034 = ’B221-6061 temper T4’2036 = ’B221-6061 temper T4, wld’2038 = ’B221-6061 temper T6’2040 = ’B221-6061 temper T6, wld’

589


2042 = ’B221-6063 temper T4’2044 = ’B221-6063 temper T4, wld’2046 = ’B221-6063 temper T5’2048 = ’B221-6063 temper T5, wld’2050 = ’B221-6063 temper T6’2052 = ’B221-6063 temper T6, wld’2054 = ’B221-Alclad 3003 temper 0’2056 = ’B221-Alclad 3003 temper H112’2070 = ’B241-1060 temper 0’2072 = ’B241-1060 temper H112’2074 = ’B241-1100 temper 0’2076 = ’B241-1100 temper H112’2078 = ’B241-3003 temper 0’2080 = ’B241-3003 temper H18’2082 = ’B241-3003 temper H112’2084 = ’B241-5052 temper 0’2086 = ’B241-5083 temper 0’2088 = ’B241-5083 temper H112’2090 = ’B241-5086 temper 0’2092 = ’B241-5086 temper H112’2094 = ’B241-5454 temper 0’2096 = ’B241-5454 temper H112’2098 = ’B241-5456 temper 0’2100 = ’B241-5456 temper H112’2102 = ’B241-5462 temper 0’2104 = ’B241-5462 temper H112’2106 = ’B241-6061 temper T4’2108 = ’B241-6061 temper T4, wld’2110 = ’B241-6061 temper T6, <NPD 1’2112 = ’B241-6061 temper T6, =>NPD 1’2114 = ’B241-6061 temper T6, wld’2116 = ’B241-6063 temper T4’2118 = ’B241-6063 temper T4, wld’2120 = ’B241-6063 temper T5’2122 = ’B241-6063 temper T5, wld’2124 = ’B241-6063 temper T6’2126 = ’B241-6063 temper T6, wld’2128 = ’B241-Alclad 3003 temper 0’2130 = ’B241-Alclad 3003 temper H112’2140 = ’B247-3003 temper H112’2142 = ’B247-3003 temper H112, wld’2144 = ’B247-5083 temper 0’2146 = ’B247-5083 temper H112’2148 = ’B247-5083 temper H112, wld’2150 = ’B247-6061 temper T6’2152 = ’B247-6061 temper T6, wld’2160 = ’B345-1060 temper 0’2162 = ’B345-1060 temper H112’2164 = ’B345-3003 temper 0’2166 = ’B345-3003 temper H18’2168 = ’B345-3003 temper H112’2170 = ’B345-5083 temper 0’2172 = ’B345-5083 temper H112’2174 = ’B345-5086 temper 0’2176 = ’B345-5086 temper H112’2178 = ’B345-6061 temper T4’2180 = ’B345-6061 temper T4, wld’2182 = ’B345-6061 temper T6, <NPD 1’2184 = ’B345-6061 temper T6, =>NPD 1’2186 = ’B345-6061 temper T6, wld’2188 = ’B345-6063 temper T4’2190 = ’B345-6063 temper T4, wld’

590

B. C

od

elists


2192 = ’B345-6063 temper T5’2194 = ’B345-6063 temper T5, wld’2196 = ’B345-6063 temper T6’2198 = ’B345-6063 temper T6, wld’2200 = ’B345-Alclad 3002 temper 0’2202 = ’B345-Alclad 3002 temper H112’2220 = ’B361-WP1060 temper 0’2222 = ’B361-WP1060 temper H112’2224 = ’B361-WP1100 temper 0’2226 = ’B361-WP1100 temper H112’2228 = ’B361-WP3003 temper 0’2230 = ’B361-WP3003 temper H112’2232 = ’B361-WP5154 temper 0’2234 = ’B361-WP5154 temper H112’2236 = ’B361-WP6061 temper T4’2238 = ’B361-WP6061 temper T4, wld’2240 = ’B361-WP6061 temper T6’2242 = ’B361-WP6061 temper T6, wld’2244 = ’B361-WP6063 temper T4’2246 = ’B361-WP6063 temper T4, wld’2248 = ’B361-WP6063 temper T6’2250 = ’B361-WP6063 temper T6, wld’2252 = ’B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper 0’2254 = ’B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper H112’

Other Materials 2300-29992310 = ’B337-1’2311 = ’B337-2’2313 = ’B337-3’2317 = ’B337-7’2320 = ’C76-CLIII’2325 = ’C443’2350 = ’C700’2400 = ’D1785-PVC1120’2402 = ’D2467-PVC1120’2440 = ’F439-CPVC4120’2442 = ’F441-CPVC4120’

Gaskets 3000-3999]3051 = ’G51’ [Flat, org fib, nitrile binder]3052 = ’G52’ [Flat, org fib, nitrile binder, full face]3076 = ’G76’ [Flat, graph]3077 = ’G77’ [Flat, graph, full face]3078 = ’G78’ [Flat, graph, 304 tang reinf]3079 = ’G79’ [Flat, graph, 304 wire mesh reinf]3101 = ’G101’ [Flat, asb]3102 = ’G102’ [Flat, asb, full face]3103 = ’G103’ [Flat, asb, wire mesh reinf]3111 = ’G111’ [Flat, blue-asb]3112 = ’G112’ [Flat, blue-asb, full face]3154 = ’G154’ [Flat, Buna-N]3171 = ’G171’ [Flat, Hypalon]3175 = ’G175’ [Flat, Kel-F]3189 = ’G189’ [Flat, neoprene]3195 = ’G195’ [Flat, polyethylene]3204 = ’G204’ [Flat, Teflon]3210 = ’G210’ [Flat, Viton]3231 = ’G231’ [Flat, soft-iron]3234 = ’G234’ [Flat, 304]3236 = ’G236’ [Flat, 321/347

591


3241 = ’G241’ [Corr, soft-iron]3244 = ’G244’ [Corr, 304]3246 = ’G246’ [Corr, 321/347

3251 = ’G251’ [Flat dbl jktd, PTFE-J, asb-F]3256 = ’G256’ [Flat dbl jktd, Teflon-J, blue-asb-F]3261 = ’G261’ [Flat dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, graph-F]3262 = ’G262’ [Flat dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, asb-F]3266 = ’G266’ [Flat dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, graph-F]3267 = ’G267’ [Flat dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, asb-F]3271 = ’G271’ [Flat dbl jktd, 304-J, graph-F]3272 = ’G272’ [Flat dbl jktd, 304-J, asb-F]3276 = ’G276’ [Flat dbl jktd, 321/347-J, graph-F]3277 = ’G277’ [Flat dbl jktd, 321/347-J, asb-F]3281 = ’G281’ [Flat dbl jktd, I600-J, graph-F]3282 = ’G282’ [Flat dbl jktd, I600-J, asb-F]3286 = ’G286’ [Flat dbl jktd, I800-J, graph-F

3306 = ’G306’ [Corr dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, graph-F]3307 = ’G307’ [Corr dbl jktd, soft-iron-J, asb-F]3311 = ’G311’ [Corr dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, graph-F]3312 = ’G312’ [Corr dbl jktd, low-C-steel-J, asb-F]3316 = ’G316’ [Corr dbl jktd, 304-J, graph-F]3317 = ’G317’ [Corr dbl jktd, 304-J, asb-F]3321 = ’G321’ [Corr dbl jktd, 321/347-J, graph-F]3322 = ’G322’ [Corr dbl jktd, 321/347-J, asb-F]3326 = ’G326’ [Corr dbl jktd, I600-J, graph-F]3327 = ’G327’ [Corr dbl jktd, I600-J, asb-F]3331 = ’G331’ [Corr dbl jktd, I800-J, graph-F

3356 = ’G356’ [Inlaid corr, soft-iron-J, asb-chords]3361 = ’G361’ [Inlaid corr, low-C-steel-J, asb-chords]3366 = ’G366’ [Inlaid corr, 304-J, asb-chords

3403 = ’G403’ [O ring, Buna-N]3404 = ’G404’ [O ring, butyl]3408 = ’G408’ [O ring, EDPM]3429 = ’G429’ [O ring, nitrile]3435 = ’G435’ [O ring, Saran]3436 = ’G436’ [O ring, synthetic rubber]3441 = ’G441’ [O ring, Viton

3451 = ’G451’ [BX ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]3452 = ’G452’ [BX ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]3463 = ’G463’ [BX ring, 304, 140 BHN max]3466 = ’G466’ [BX ring, 316, 140 BHN max]3468 = ’G468’ [BX ring, 321, 140 BHN max]3473 = ’G473’ [BX ring, I-X-750

3476 = ’G476’ [RX ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]3477 = ’G477’ [RX ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]3488 = ’G488’ [RX ring, 304, 140 BHN max]3491 = ’G491’ [RX ring, 316, 140 BHN max]3493 = ’G493’ [RX ring, 321, 140 BHN max]3498 = ’G498’ [RX ring, I-X-750

3551 = ’G551’ [Octag ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]3552 = ’G552’ [Octag ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]3556 = ’G556’ [Octag ring, 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max]3563 = ’G563’ [Octag ring, 304, 140 BHN max]3566 = ’G566’ [Octag ring, 316, 140 BHN max]3568 = ’G568’ [Octag ring, 321, 140 BHN max]3569 = ’G569’ [Octag ring, 347, 140 BHN max]3573 = ’G573’ [Octag ring, I-X-750

592

B. C

od

elists


3601 = ’G601’ [Oval ring, soft-iron, 90 BHN max]3602 = ’G602’ [Oval ring, lo-C, 120 BHN max]3606 = ’G606’ [Oval ring, 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max]3608 = ’G608’ [Oval ring, 9Cr-1Mo, 130 BHN max]3610 = ’G610’ [Oval ring, 410, 170 BHN max]3613 = ’G613’ [Oval ring, 304, 140 BHN max]3616 = ’G616’ [Oval ring, 316, 140 BHN max]3618 = ’G618’ [Oval ring, 321, 140 BHN max]3619 = ’G619’ [Oval ring, 347, 140 BHN max]3623 = ’G623’ [Oval ring, I-X-750

3651 = ’G651’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]3653 = ’G653’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, graph-F, CS-CR]3655 = ’G655’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, asb-F, CS-CR]3657 = ’G657’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, blue-asb-F, CS-CR]3659 = ’G659’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR]3661 = ’G661’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR]3663 = ’G663’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR]3665 = ’G665’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, asb-F, CS-CR, 304-IR]3669 = ’G669’ [Sprl-wnd, 304-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR, 304-IR

3671 = ’G671’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]3673 = ’G673’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, graph-F, CS-CR]3675 = ’G675’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, asb-F, CS-CR]3677 = ’G677’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, crodidolite asb-F, CS-CR]3679 = ’G679’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR]3681 = ’G681’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 316-IR]3683 = ’G683’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, graph-F, CS-CR, 316-IR]3685 = ’G685’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, asb-F, CS-CR, 316-IR]3689 = ’G689’ [Sprl-wnd, 316-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR, 316-IR

3691 = ’G691’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]3693 = ’G693’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, graph-F, CS-CR]3695 = ’G695’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, asb-F, CS-CR]3699 = ’G699’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR]3701 = ’G701’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, mica/gra-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR]3703 = ’G703’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, graph-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR]3705 = ’G705’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, asb-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR]3709 = ’G709’ [Sprl-wnd, 316L-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR

3711 = ’G711’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]3713 = ’G713’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, graph-F, CS-CR]3715 = ’G715’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, asb-F, CS-CR]3719 = ’G719’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR]3721 = ’G721’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 321-IR]3723 = ’G723’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, graph-F, CS-CR, 321-IR]3725 = ’G725’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, asb-F, CS-CR, 321-IR]3729 = ’G729’ [Sprl-wnd, 321-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR, 321-IR

3731 = ’G731’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]3733 = ’G733’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, graph-F, CS-CR]3735 = ’G735’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, asb-F, CS-CR]3739 = ’G739’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR]3741 = ’G741’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 347-IR]3743 = ’G743’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, graph-F, CS-CR, 347-IR]3745 = ’G745’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, asb-F, CS-CR, 347-IR]3749 = ’G749’ [Sprl-wnd, 347-W, Teflon-F, CS-CR, 347-IR

3751 = ’G751’ [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]3753 = ’G753’ [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, graph-F, CS-CR]3755 = ’G755’ [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, asb-F, CS-CR]3761 = ’G761’ [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, mica/graph-F, I600-O&IR]3763 = ’G763’ [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, graph-F, I600-O&IR]3765 = ’G765’ [Sprl-wnd, I600-W, asb-F, I600-O&IR

593


3771 = ’G771’ [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, mica/graph-F, CS-CR]3773 = ’G773’ [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, graph-F, CS-CR]3775 = ’G775’ [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, asb-F, CS-CR]3781 = ’G781’ [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, mica/graph-F, I800-O&IR]3783 = ’G783’ [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, graph-F, I800-O&IR]3785 = ’G785’ [Sprl-wnd, I800-W, asb-F, I800-O&IR

Bolting 4000-4999]4011 = ’B11’ [A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3]4012 = ’B12’ [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-3]4014 = ’B14’ [A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4]4015 = ’B15’ [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-4]4021 = ’B21’ [A193-B6, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-6]4022 = ’B22’ [A193-B6, lub, w/A194-6]4031 = ’B31’ [A193-B7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H]4032 = ’B32’ [A193-B7, lub, w/A194-2H]4033 = ’B33’ [A193-B7 zinc coated w/A194-2H zinc coated]4035 = ’B35’ [A193-B7 galv w/A194-2H galv]4038 = ’B38’ [A193-B7M, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H]4039 = ’B39’ [A193-B7M, lub, w/A194-2H]4041 = ’B41’ [A193-B8 Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8]4042 = ’B42’ [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8]4044 = ’B44’ [A193-B8C Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8C]4045 = ’B45’ [A193-B8C Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8C]4046 = ’B46’ [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8]4047 = ’B47’ [A193-B8M Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M]4048 = ’B48’ [A193-B8M Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8M4050 = ’B50’ [A193-B8T Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8T]4051 = ’B51’ [A193-B8T Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8T]4061 = ’B61’ [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3]4062 = ’B62’ [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-3]4064 = ’B64’ [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4]4065 = ’B65’ [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-4]4066 = ’B66’ [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-7]4067 = ’B67’ [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-7]4068 = ’B68’ [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M]4069 = ’B69’ [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-8M]4071 = ’B71’ [A307-B w/A563-A]4074 = ’B74’ [A320-L7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4]4075 = ’B75’ [A320-L7, lub, w/A194-4]4076 = ’B76’ [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8]4077 = ’B77’ [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-8]4078 = ’B78’ [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8]4079 = ’B79’ [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-B8]4080 = ’B80’ [A320-B8T Cl.1 >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8]4081 = ’B81’ [A320-B8T Cl.1 lub, w/A194-B8]4082 = ’B82’ [A325 w/A325]4084 = ’B84’ [A453-660, >=1.5" lub, w/A453-660]4085 = ’B85’ [A453-660, lub, w/A453-660

4500 = ’Undefined’

Materials for British Standards - Ranges used 6000-7999

carbon steel pipes and tubes BS36016000 = ’BS3601:BW320’6001 = ’BS3601:ERW320’6002 = ’BS3601:ERW360’6003 = ’BS3601:ERW430’6004 = ’BS3601:S360’6005 = ’BS3601:S430’6006 = ’BS3601:SAW430’

594

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ steel pipes and tubes BS3602 part 1 1987

6010 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 1’6011 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 2’6012 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 1’6013 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 2’6014 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 1’6015 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 2’6016 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 1’6017 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 2’6018 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 1’6019 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 2’6020 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 1’6021 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 2’6022 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 1’6023 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 2’6024 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 1’6025 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 2’6026 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 1’6027 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 2’6028 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 1’6029 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 2’

steel pipes and tubes elevated temp prop BS3602 part 26030 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 1’6031 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 2’6032 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 1’6033 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 2’

steel pipes and tubes low temp prop BS3603 19776040 = ’BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 1’6041 = ’BS3603 HFS410 LT 50 Cat 2’6042 = ’BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 1’6043 = ’BS3603 CFS410 LT 50 Cat 2’6044 = ’BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 1’6045 = ’BS3603 ERW410 LT 50 Cat 2’6046 = ’BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 1’6047 = ’BS3603 CEW410 LT 50 Cat 2’6048 = ’BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 1’6049 = ’BS3603 HFS503 LT 100 Cat 2’6050 = ’BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 1’6051 = ’BS3603 CFS503 LT 100 Cat 2’6052 = ’BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 1’6053 = ’BS3603 HFS509 LT 196 Cat 2’6054 = ’BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 1’6055 = ’BS3603 CFS509 LT 196 Cat 2’

steel pipes and tubes elevated temp prop BS36046060 = ’BS3604:HFS620-460 Cat 1’6061 = ’BS3604:CFS620-460 Cat 1’6062 = ’BS3604:ERW620-460 Cat 1’6063 = ’BS3604:CEW620-460 Cat 1’6064 = ’BS3604:HFS620-460 Cat 2’6065 = ’BS3604:CFS620-460 Cat 2’6066 = ’BS3604:ERW620-460 Cat 2’6067 = ’BS3604:CEW620-460 Cat 2’6068 = ’BS3604:HFS620-440 Cat 1’6069 = ’BS3604:CFS620-440 Cat 1’6070 = ’BS3604:ERW620-440 Cat 1’6071 = ’BS3604:CEW620-440 Cat 1’6072 = ’BS3604:HFS620-440 Cat 2’6073 = ’BS3604:CFS620-440 Cat 2’6074 = ’BS3604:ERW620-440 Cat 2’

595


6075 = ’BS3604:CEW620-440 Cat 2’6076 = ’BS3604:HFS621 Cat 1’6077 = ’BS3604:CFS621 Cat 1’6078 = ’BS3604:ERW621 Cat 1’6079 = ’BS3604:CEW621 Cat 1’6080 = ’BS3604:HFS621 Cat 2’6081 = ’BS3604:CFS621 Cat 2’6082 = ’BS3604:ERW621 Cat 2’6083 = ’BS3604:CEW621 Cat 2’6084 = ’BS3604:HFS660 Cat 1’6085 = ’BS3604:CFS660 Cat 1’6086 = ’BS3604:HFS660 Cat 2’6087 = ’BS3604:CFS660 Cat 2’6088 = ’BS3604:HFS622 Cat 1’6089 = ’BS3604:CFS622 Cat 1’6090 = ’BS3604:HFS622 Cat 2’6091 = ’BS3604:CFS622 Cat 2’6092 = ’BS3604:HFS625 Cat 1’6093 = ’BS3604:CFS625 Cat 1’6094 = ’BS3604:HFS625 Cat 2’6095 = ’BS3604:CFS625 Cat 2’6096 = ’BS3604:HFS629-470 Cat 1’6097 = ’BS3604:CFS629-470 Cat 1’6098 = ’BS3604:HFS629-470 Cat 2’6099 = ’BS3604:CFS629-470 Cat 2’6100 = ’BS3604:HFS629-590 Cat 1’6101 = ’BS3604:CFS629-590 Cat 1’6102 = ’BS3604:HFS629-590 Cat 2’6103 = ’BS3604:CFS629-590 Cat 2’6104 = ’BS3604:HFS762 Cat 1’6105 = ’BS3604:CFS762 Cat 1’6106 = ’BS3604:HFS762 Cat 2’6107 = ’BS3604:CFS762 Cat 2’

SS pipes and tubes for pressure purposes BS3605:19736110 = ’BS3605 304S14’6111 = ’BS3605 304S18’6112 = ’BS3605 304S59’6113 = ’BS3605 304S22’6114 = ’BS3605 304S25’6115 = ’BS3605 316S14’6116 = ’BS3605 316S18’6117 = ’BS3605 316S59’6118 = ’BS3605 316S22’6119 = ’BS3605 316S26’6120 = ’BS3605 321S18’6121 = ’BS3605 321S59(1010)’6122 = ’BS3605 321S59(1105)’6123 = ’BS3605 321S22’6124 = ’BS3605 347S18’6125 = ’BS3605 347S59’6126 = ’BS3605 347S17’

plates BS1501 part 1 19806200 = ’BS1501-141 360A’6201 = ’BS1501-151 360A’6202 = ’BS1501-151 400A’6203 = ’BS1501-151 430A’6204 = ’BS1501-151 360B’6205 = ’BS1501-151 400B’6206 = ’BS1501-151 430B’6207 = ’BS1501-154 360A’

596

B. C

od

elists


6208 = ’BS1501-154 400A’6209 = ’BS1501-154 430A’6210 = ’BS1501-161 360A’6211 = ’BS1501-161 400A’6212 = ’BS1501-161 430A’6213 = ’BS1501-161 360B’6214 = ’BS1501-161 400B’6215 = ’BS1501-161 430B’6216 = ’BS1501-164 360A RT’6217 = ’BS1501-164 360A LT0’6218 = ’BS1501-164 360A LT20’6219 = ’BS1501-164 360B RT’6220 = ’BS1501-164 360B LT0’6221 = ’BS1501-164 360B LT20’6222 = ’BS1501-164 400A RT’6223 = ’BS1501-164 400A LT0’6224 = ’BS1501-164 400A LT20’6225 = ’BS1501-164 400B RT’6226 = ’BS1501-164 400B LT0’6227 = ’BS1501-164 400B LT20’6228 = ’BS1501-223 460A RT’6229 = ’BS1501-223 460A LT0’6230 = ’BS1501-223 460A LT15’6231 = ’BS1501-223 460A LT30’6232 = ’BS1501-223 460B RT’6233 = ’BS1501-223 460B LT0’6234 = ’BS1501-223 460B LT15’6235 = ’BS1501-223 460B LT30’6236 = ’BS1501-223 490A RT’6237 = ’BS1501-223 490A LT0’6238 = ’BS1501-223 490A LT15’6239 = ’BS1501-223 490A LT30’6240 = ’BS1501-223 490B RT’6241 = ’BS1501-223 490B LT0’6242 = ’BS1501-223 490B LT15’6243 = ’BS1501-223 490B LT30’6244 = ’BS1501-224 400A RT’6245 = ’BS1501-224 400A LT0’6246 = ’BS1501-224 400A LT20’6247 = ’BS1501-224 400A LT30’6248 = ’BS1501-224 400A LT40’6249 = ’BS1501-224 400A LT50’6250 = ’BS1501-224 400B RT’6251 = ’BS1501-224 400B LT0’6252 = ’BS1501-224 400B LT20’6253 = ’BS1501-224 400B LT30’6254 = ’BS1501-224 400B LT40’6255 = ’BS1501-224 400B LT50’6256 = ’BS1501-224 430A RT’6257 = ’BS1501-224 430A LT0’6258 = ’BS1501-224 430A LT20’6259 = ’BS1501-224 430A LT30’6260 = ’BS1501-224 430A LT40’6261 = ’BS1501-224 430A LT50’6262 = ’BS1501-224 430B RT’6263 = ’BS1501-224 430B LT0’6264 = ’BS1501-224 430B LT20’6265 = ’BS1501-224 430B LT30’6266 = ’BS1501-224 430B LT40’6267 = ’BS1501-224 430B LT50’6268 = ’BS1501-224 460A RT’6269 = ’BS1501-224 460A LT0’

597


6270 = ’BS1501-224 460A LT20’6271 = ’BS1501-224 460A LT30’6272 = ’BS1501-224 460A LT40’6273 = ’BS1501-224 460A LT50’6274 = ’BS1501-224 460B RT’6275 = ’BS1501-224 460B LT0’6276 = ’BS1501-224 460B LT20’6277 = ’BS1501-224 460B LT30’6278 = ’BS1501-224 460B LT40’6279 = ’BS1501-224 460B LT50’6280 = ’BS1501-224 490A RT’6281 = ’BS1501-224 490A LT0’6282 = ’BS1501-224 490A LT20’6283 = ’BS1501-224 490A LT30’6284 = ’BS1501-224 490A LT40’6285 = ’BS1501-224 490A LT50’6286 = ’BS1501-224 490B RT’6287 = ’BS1501-224 490B LT0’6288 = ’BS1501-224 490B LT20’6289 = ’BS1501-224 490B LT30’6290 = ’BS1501-224 490B LT40’6291 = ’BS1501-224 490B LT50’6292 = ’BS1501-225 460A LT20’6293 = ’BS1501-225 460A LT30’6294 = ’BS1501-225 460A LT50’6295 = ’BS1501-225 460A LT60’6296 = ’BS1501-225 460B LT20’6297 = ’BS1501-225 460B LT30’6298 = ’BS1501-225 460B LT50’6299 = ’BS1501-225 460B LT60’6300 = ’BS1501-225 490A LT20’6301 = ’BS1501-225 490A LT30’6302 = ’BS1501-225 490A LT50’6303 = ’BS1501-225 490B LT20’6304 = ’BS1501-225 490B LT30’6305 = ’BS1501-225 490B LT50’

steel plates BS1501 part 2 19886310 = ’BS1501-243’6311 = ’BS1501-271’6312 = ’BS1501-281’6313 = ’BS1501-620’6314 = ’BS1501-621’6315 = ’BS1501-622-515’6316 = ’BS1501-622-690’6317 = ’BS1501-660’6318 = ’BS1501-503’6319 = ’BS1501-510’6320 = ’BS1501-828’

steel plates BS1501 part 3 19736321 = ’BS1501-403S17A’6322 = ’BS1501-405S17A’6323 = ’BS1501-304S12A’6324 = ’BS1501-304S15A’6325 = ’BS1501-304S49A’6326 = ’BS1501-321S12A’6327 = ’BS1501-321S49A’6328 = ’BS1501-347S17A’6329 = ’BS1501-347S49A’6330 = ’BS1501-316S12A’6331 = ’BS1501-316S16A’

598

B. C

od

elists


6332 = ’BS1501-316S37A’6333 = ’BS1501-316S49A’6334 = ’BS1501-320S17A’6335 = ’BS1501-310S24A’6336 = ’BS1501-NA15A’6337 = ’BS1501-NA16A’6338 = ’BS1501-460S52A’6339 = ’BS1501-304S62A’6340 = ’BS1501-304S65A’6341 = ’BS1501-304S87A’6342 = ’BS1501-347S67A’6343 = ’BS1501-316S62A’6344 = ’BS1501-316S66A’6345 = ’BS1501-316S82A’6351 = ’BS1501-403S17B’6352 = ’BS1501-405S17B’6353 = ’BS1501-304S12B’6354 = ’BS1501-304S15B’6355 = ’BS1501-304S49B’6356 = ’BS1501-351S12B’6357 = ’BS1501-351S49B’6358 = ’BS1501-347S17B’6359 = ’BS1501-347S49B’6360 = ’BS1501-316S12B’6361 = ’BS1501-316S16B’6362 = ’BS1501-316S37B’6363 = ’BS1501-316S49B’6364 = ’BS1501-320S17B’6365 = ’BS1501-310S24B’6366 = ’BS1501-NA15B’6367 = ’BS1501-NA16B’6368 = ’BS1501-460S52B’6369 = ’BS1501-304S62B’6370 = ’BS1501-304S65B’6371 = ’BS1501-304S87B’6372 = ’BS1501-377S67B’6373 = ’BS1501-316S62B’6374 = ’BS1501-316S66B’6375 = ’BS1501-316S82B’6376 = ’BS1501-460S52A LT70’

steel forgings to BS1503 19806380 = ’BS1503 164-490’6381 = ’BS1503 221-410’6382 = ’BS1503 221-430’6383 = ’BS1503 221-460’6384 = ’BS1503 221-490’6385 = ’BS1503 221-510’6386 = ’BS1503 221-530’6387 = ’BS1503 221-550’6388 = ’BS1503 223-410’6389 = ’BS1503 223-430’6390 = ’BS1503 223-460’6391 = ’BS1503 223-490’6392 = ’BS1503 223-510’6393 = ’BS1503 224-410’6394 = ’BS1503 224-430’6395 = ’BS1503 224-460’6396 = ’BS1503 224-490’6397 = ’BS1503 224-510’

599


6398 = ’BS1503 245-420’6399 = ’BS1503 620-440’6400 = ’BS1503 620-540’6401 = ’BS1503 621-460’6402 = ’BS1503 660-460’6403 = ’BS1503 271-560’6404 = ’BS1503 622-490’6405 = ’BS1503 622-560’6406 = ’BS1503 622-650’6407 = ’BS1503 625-520’6408 = ’BS1503 625-590’6409 = ’BS1503 503-490’6410 = ’BS1503 509-690’6411 = ’BS1503 410S21’6412 = ’BS1503 420S29’6413 = ’BS1503 403S17’6414 = ’BS1503 405S17’

6415 = ’BS1503 304S11’6416 = ’BS1503 304S31’6417 = ’BS1503 304S51’6418 = ’BS1503 347S31’6419 = ’BS1503 347S51’6420 = ’BS1503 321S31’6421 = ’BS1503 321S51-490’6422 = ’BS1503 321S51-510’6423 = ’BS1503 316S11’6424 = ’BS1503 316S13’6425 = ’BS1503 316S31’6426 = ’BS1503 316S33’6427 = ’BS1503 316S51’6428 = ’BS1503 320S33’6429 = ’BS1503 310S31’

6430 = ’BS1503 164-490E’6431 = ’BS1503 221-430E’6432 = ’BS1503 221-460E’6433 = ’BS1503 221-490E’6434 = ’BS1503 221-510E’6435 = ’BS1503 221-530E’6436 = ’BS1503 221-550E’6437 = ’BS1503 223-410E’6438 = ’BS1503 223-430E’6439 = ’BS1503 223-460E’6440 = ’BS1503 223-490E’6441 = ’BS1503 223-510E’6442 = ’BS1503 224-410E’6443 = ’BS1503 224-430E’6444 = ’BS1503 224-460E’6445 = ’BS1503 224-490E’6446 = ’BS1503 224-510E’

6447 = ’BS1503 245-420E’6448 = ’BS1503 620-440E’6449 = ’BS1503 620-540E’6450 = ’BS1503 621-460E’6451 = ’BS1503 660-460E’6452 = ’BS1503 271-560E’6453 = ’BS1503 622-490E’6454 = ’BS1503 622-560E’6455 = ’BS1503 622-650E’6456 = ’BS1503 625-520E’

600

B. C

od

elists


6457 = ’BS1503 625-590E’6458 = ’BS1503 410S21E’6459 = ’BS1503 420S29E’6460 = ’BS1503 403S17E’6461 = ’BS1503 405S17E’

6462 = ’BS1503 304S11E’6463 = ’BS1503 304S31E’6464 = ’BS1503 304S51E’6465 = ’BS1503 347S31E’6466 = ’BS1503 347S51E’6467 = ’BS1503 321S31E’6468 = ’BS1503 321S51-490E’6469 = ’BS1503 321S51-510E’6470 = ’BS1503 316S11E’6471 = ’BS1503 316S13E’6472 = ’BS1503 316S31E’6473 = ’BS1503 316S33E’6474 = ’BS1503 316S51E’

6475 = ’BS1503 223-410-LT10’6476 = ’BS1503 223-410-LT20’6477 = ’BS1503 223-410-LT50’6478 = ’BS1503 223-430-LT10’6479 = ’BS1503 223-430-LT15’6480 = ’BS1503 223-430-LT40’6481 = ’BS1503 223-460-LT0’6482 = ’BS1503 223-460-LT10’6483 = ’BS1503 223-460-LT20’6484 = ’BS1503 223-490-LT0’6485 = ’BS1503 223-490-LT10’6486 = ’BS1503 223-510-LT0’6487 = ’BS1503 224-410-LT10’6488 = ’BS1503 224-410-LT20’6489 = ’BS1503 224-410-LT50’6490 = ’BS1503 224-430-LT10’6491 = ’BS1503 224-430-LT15’6492 = ’BS1503 224-430-LT40’6493 = ’BS1503 224-460-LT0’6494 = ’BS1503 224-460-LT10’6495 = ’BS1503 224-460-LT20’6496 = ’BS1503 224-490-LT0’6497 = ’BS1503 224-490-LT10’6498 = ’BS1503 224-510-LT0’

6499 = ’BS1503 503-490-LT80’6500 = ’BS1503 509-690-LT196’

6501 = ’BS1503 304S11-LT196’6502 = ’BS1503 304S31-LT196’6503 = ’BS1503 347S31-LT196’6504 = ’BS1503 321S31-LT196’6505 = ’BS1503 321S51-490’6506 = ’BS1503 321S51-510’6507 = ’BS1503 316S11-LT196’6508 = ’BS1503 316S13-LT196’6509 = ’BS1503 316S31-LT196’6510 = ’BS1503 316S33-LT196’

steel casting to BS1504 19766520 = ’BS1504-161 grade 430A’6521 = ’BS1504-161 grade 480A’

601


6522 = ’BS1504-161 grade 540A’6523 = ’BS1504-161 grade 430E’6524 = ’BS1504-161 grade 480E’6525 = ’BS1504-161 grade 430A-LT40’6526 = ’BS1504-245A’6527 = ’BS1504-245B’6528 = ’BS1504-245A-LT50’6529 = ’BS1504-503-LT60’6530 = ’BS1504-621A’6531 = ’BS1504-622A’6532 = ’BS1504-622E’6533 = ’BS1504-623A’6534 = ’BS1504-625A’6535 = ’BS1504-625E’6536 = ’BS1504-629A’6537 = ’BS1504-660A’6538 = ’BS1504-420C29A’6539 = ’BS1504-425C11A’6540 = ’BS1504-304C15A’6541 = ’BS1504-304C15A-LT196’6542 = ’BS1504-304C12A’6543 = ’BS1504-304C12A-LT196’6544 = ’BS1504-347C17A’6545 = ’BS1504-347C17A-LT196’6546 = ’BS1504-315C16A’6547 = ’BS1504-315C16A-LT196’6548 = ’BS1504-316C12A’6549 = ’BS1504-316C16A’6550 = ’BS1504-316C71A’6551 = ’BS1504-318C17A’6552 = ’BS1504-316C16E’6553 = ’BS1504-316C71E’6554 = ’BS1504-316C12A-LT196’6555 = ’BS1504-316C16A-LT196’6556 = ’BS1504-316C71A-LT196’6557 = ’BS1504-317C12A’6558 = ’BS1504-317C16A’6559 = ’BS1504-364C11A’6560 = ’BS1504-332C11A’6561 = ’BS1504-310C40A’6562 = ’BS1504-330C11A’

steel bars and billets for bolting BS1506 19866570 = ’BS1506-162’6571 = ’BS1506-253’6572 = ’BS1506-253-LT100’6573 = ’BS1506-509-650’6574 = ’BS1506-509-650-LT196’6575 = ’BS1506-509-690’6576 = ’BS1506-509-690-LT196’6577 = ’BS1506-630-790’6578 = ’BS1506-630-790-LT100’6579 = ’BS1506-630-790-LT75’6580 = ’BS1506-630-860’6581 = ’BS1506-630-860-LT100’6582 = ’BS1506-630-690’6583 = ’BS1506-630-690-LT100’6584 = ’BS1506-631-850’6585 = ’BS1506-670-860’6586 = ’BS1506-671-850’6587 = ’BS1506-681-820’6588 = ’BS1506-410S21-690’

602

B. C

od

elists


6589 = ’BS1506-410S21-720’6590 = ’BS1506-410S21-760’6591 = ’BS1506-410S21-750’6592 = ’BS1506-410S21-770’6593 = ’BS1506-416S29’6594 = ’BS1506-286S31’6595 = ’BS1506-286S31-LT196’6596 = ’BS1506-304S31’6597 = ’BS1506-304S31-LT196’6598 = ’BS1506-304S51’6599 = ’BS1506-304S61’6600 = ’BS1506-304S61-LT196’6601 = ’BS1506-304S71’6602 = ’BS1506-304S71-LT196’6603 = ’BS1506-303S22’6604 = ’BS1506-316S31’6605 = ’BS1506-316S31-LT196’6606 = ’BS1506-316S33’6607 = ’BS1506-316S33-LT196’6608 = ’BS1506-316S51’6609 = ’BS1506-316S53’6610 = ’BS1506-316S61’6611 = ’BS1506-316S61-LT196’6612 = ’BS1506-316S63’6613 = ’BS1506-316S63-LT196’6614 = ’BS1506-316S65’6615 = ’BS1506-316S65-LT196’6616 = ’BS1506-316S67’6617 = ’BS1506-316S67-LT196’6618 = ’BS1506-321S31’6619 = ’BS1506-321S31-LT196’6620 = ’BS1506-321S51-490’6621 = ’BS1506-321S51-520’6622 = ’BS1506-347S31’6623 = ’BS1506-347S31-LT196’6624 = ’BS1506-347S51’

7999 = ’undefined’

CL148, Piping Materials Class Description (31999)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-7999 are reserved for values that applyto US practices. Codelist numbers 8000-31999 are reserved forvalues that apply to practices in other countries.

1 = [Blank]

US Piping Material Class Descriptions, 2-7999Irons, F

2 = [FAY1W8] [8F0002] ’Gravity Head, Gray CI’3 = [FDYLW8] [8F0003] ’Gravity Head, DI Cement Lined’6 = [FDYLU9] [9F0006] ’AWWA 150# MJ, DI Cement Lined’

Carbon Steels, C14 = [CAA5UA] [AC0014] ’CL125 FFFE, CS, Brnz Trim’16 = [CAA5VA] [AC0016] ’CL125 FFFE, Brnz Trim’19 = [CAALV1] [1C0019] ’CL150 FFFE, CS Cement Lined’31 = [CAC5C1] [1C0031] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’32 = [CAC5C2] [2C0032] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’33 = [CAC5C4] [4C0033] ’CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’35 = [CAC5G1] [1C0035] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’

603


43 = [CAC5Q1] [1C0043] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)’45 = [CAC5R1] [1C0045] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’48 = [CAC5U1] [1C0048] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’49 = [CAC7C1] [1C0049] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’50 = [CAC7C2] [2C0050] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’51 = [CAC7C4] [4C0051] ’CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’65 = [CAC8C1] [1C0065] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’66 = [CAC8C2] [2C0066] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’73 = [CAC9C1] [1C0073] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’74 = [CAC9C2] [2C0074] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’75 = [CAC9C4] [4C0075] ’CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’76 = [CAC9C5] [5C0076] ’CL900 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’105 = [CAD7K1] [1C0105] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 9’106 = [CAD7K2] [2C0106] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 9’146 = [CAF5S1] [1C0146] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, SS/TFE Trim’153 = [CAF7J1] [1C0153] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 13’171 = [CAFYC1] [1C0171] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, 316 Trim’176 = [CAH5C1] [1C0176] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’177 = [CAH5C2] [2C0177] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’182 = [CAH5G1] [1C0182] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’183 = [CAH5G2] [2C0183] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’185 = [CAH7C1] [1C0185] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’186 = [CAH7C2] [2C0186] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’320 = [CALYC2] [2C0320] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, 316 Trim’389 = [CAU5P4] [4C0389] ’CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ASME-I)’390 = [CAU5P5] [5C0390] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’391 = [CAU5P6] [6C0391] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’394 = [CAU5Q2] [2C0394] ’CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)’395 = [CAU5Q4] [4C0395] ’CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)’396 = [CAU5Q5] [5C0396] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1)’397 = [CAU5Q6] [6C0397] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1)’400 = [CAU5R2] [2C0400] ’CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.3)’401 = [CAU5R4] [4C0401] ’CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.3)’402 = [CAU5R5] [5C0402] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)’403 = [CAU5R6] [6C0403] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)’405 = [CAU5RF] [FC0405] ’CL800 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)’407 = [CAU7C6] [6C0407] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 8’458 = [CAYYC1] [1C0458] ’CL150 BE, CS’459 = [CAYYC2] [2C0459] ’CL300 BE, CS’460 = [CDA1U1] [1C0460] ’CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim’461 = [CDA5U1] [1C0461] ’CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim’548 = [CJD7K1] [1C0548] ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’549 = [CJD7K2] [2C0549] ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’551 = [CJD7K5] [5C0551] ’CL900 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’557 = [CJD8K2] [2C0557] ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’564 = [CJD9K1] [1C0564] ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’577 = [CJE7C2] [2C0577] ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9’593 = [CJE9C2] [2C0593] ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9’600 = [CJF5C1] [1C0600] ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’601 = [CJF5C2] [2C0601] ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’602 = [CJF5C4] [4C0602] ’CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’609 = [CJF7C1] [1C0609] ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’610 = [CJF7C2] [2C0610] ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’611 = [CJF7C4] [4C0611] ’CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’618 = [CJF9C1] [1C0618] ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’619 = [CJF9C2] [2C0619] ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’620 = [CJF9C4] [4C0620] ’CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’630 = [CJH7C4] [4C0630] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, Trim 8’722 = [CJL7C2] [2C0722] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’723 = [CJL7C4] [4C0723] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’724 = [CJL7C5] [5C0724] ’CL900 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’730 = [CJL9C2] [2C0730] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’

604

B. C

od

elists


731 = [CJL9C4] [4C0731] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’732 = [CJL9C5] [5C0732] ’CL900 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’785 = [CJU7C6] [6C0785] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8’794 = [CJV5C6] [6C0794] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8’800 = [CJV7C6] [6C0800] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’803 = [CJV7K6] [6C0803] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’841 = [CPD5D1] [1C0841] ’CL150 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2’842 = [CPD5D2] [2C0842] ’CL300 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2’

Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels, L1669 = [LPFYG2] [2L1669] ’CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim’1670 = [LPTYG2] [2L1670] ’CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim’1671 = [LPH5B1] [1L1671] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1672 = [LPH5B2] [2L1672] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1673 = [LPH5B4] [4L1673] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1677 = [LPH7B1] [1L1677] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1678 = [LPH7B2] [2L1678] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1679 = [LPH7B4] [4L1679] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1691 = [LPH9B4] [4L1691] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1864 = [LPU5B6] [6L1864] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’1868 = [LPU5P5] [5L1868] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’1869 = [LPU5P6] [6L1869] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’1874 = [LPU5Q5] [5L1874] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1)1875 = [LPU5Q6] [6L1875] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.11882 = [LPU5R6] [6L1882] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.31885 = [LPU7B6] [6L1885] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3013 = [LTC5B1] [1L3013] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3014 = [LTC5B2] [2L3014] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3027 = [LTC7B1] [1L3027] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3028 = [LTC7B2] [2L3028] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3029 = [LTC7B4] [4L3029] ’CL600 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3040 = [LTC8B1] [1L3040] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3041 = [LTC8B2] [2L3041] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3042 = [LTC8B4] [4L3042] ’CL600 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3048 = [LTC9B1] [1L3048] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3049 = [LTC9B2] [2L3049] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3193 = [LTH7B5] [5L3193] ’CL900 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3203 = [LTH9B2] [2L3203] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8’3204 = [LTH9B4] [4L3204] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8’3390 = [LTU7B6] [6L3390] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’3725 = [LVC7B1] [1L3725] ’CL150 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’3726 = [LVC7B2] [2L3726] ’CL300 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’3746 = [LVC9B1] [1L3746] ’CL150 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’3747 = [LVC9B2] [2L3747] ’CL300 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’3748 = [LVC9B4] [4L3748] ’CL600 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’3749 = [LVC9B5] [5L3749] ’CL900 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’

Stainless Steels, S3977 = [SAC3T1] [1S3977] ’CL150 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’3978 = [SAC3T2] [2S3978] ’CL300 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’3979 = [SAC3T4] [4S3979] ’CL600 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’3980 = [SAC3T5] [5S3980] ’CL900 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’3984 = [SAD3C1] [1S3984] ’CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12’3985 = [SAD3C2] [2S3985] ’CL300 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12’3988 = [SAD3E1] [1S3988] ’CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2’3989 = [SAD3E2] [2S3989] ’CL300 RFFE, 304, Trim 2’3991 = [SAD3F1] [1S3991] ’CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2’4104 = [SAFYG1] [1S4104] ’CL150 RFFE, 304, 316 Trim’4218 = [SAM3T6] [6S4218] ’CL1500 RJFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’4396 = [SBD3C2] [2S4396] ’CL300 RFFE, 304L/316 Valves, Trim 12’4488 = [SBF3U1] [1S4488] ’CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 2’5135 = [SED5C1] [1S5135] ’CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’

605


5187 = [SEF3C1] [1S5187] ’CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’5188 = [SEF3C2] [2S5188] ’CL300 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’5189 = [SEF3C4] [4S5189] ’CL600 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’5197 = [SEF3G1] [1S5197] ’CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’6246 = [SHJ3B2] [2S6246] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’6247 = [SHJ3B4] [4S6247] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’6258 = [SHJ5B2] [2S6258] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’6449 = [SHV3B5] [5S6449] ’CL900 BE/RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’6450 = [SHV3B6] [6S6450] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’6457 = [SHV5B6] [6S6457] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’

Copper Alloys, K

Nickel Alloys, N7540 = [NGF5G1] [1N7540] ’CL150 RFFE, Inconel 600, Inconel Trim’

Aluminum Alloys, A

Other Materials, X7687 = [XCY1W8] [8X7687] ’Gravity Head, Vitrified Clay’7689 = [XEY1W8] [8X7689] ’Gravity Head, Reinforced Concrete’7733 = [XTY1U9] [9X7733] ’SCH-80, SE, PVC’

European Piping Material Class Descriptions, 8000-99998000 = ’Carbon steel’8001 = ’Stainless steel’8002 = ’Forged steel’8010 = ’Ferritic steel’8011 = ’Austenitic steel’8020 = ’Plastic’8021 = ’Fiber glass’8030 = ’Glass lined’8031 = ’Cement lined’8032 = ’Chloroprene (CR) lined’

9999 = ’Undefined’

The names of Piping Materials Classes are determined as follows:

o A list includes possible Piping Materials Classes. It consists of six chnames which are established on the basis of the naming convention ABCDEF.meaning of each of the characters in this code is defined below. Correspvalues are given in the lists included in subsequent pages.

A.......materials groupB.......materials typeC.......detail featuresD.......corrosion allowance or type of liningE.......service descriptionF.......pressure rating

o The name of a Piping Materials Class is then determined from the conventiFAXXX, where:

F.......pressure ratingA.......material groupXXX.....sequence number from list in 2090-41-SN

MATERIALS GROUP AND TYPE: (1st and 2nd character)

606

B. C

od

elists


Irons, FA= Gray ironD= Ductile ironG= Ferritic ductile ironJ= Austenitic ductile ironZ= Other 1

Carbon Steels, CA= CSD= CS, galvanizedG= CS, jacketedJ= CS, killedM= CS, killed, jacketedP= CS, low tempX= Other 1Y= Other 2Z= Other 3

Low and Intermediate Alloys, LA= 2Ni-1CuC= 3.5NiD= 5NiG= 9NiJ= C-0.5MoM= 0.75Cr-0.5MoN= 1Cr-0.5MoP= 1.25Cr-0.5MoQ= 2Cr-0.5MoR= 2.25Cr-1MoS= 3Cr-1MoT= 5Cr-0.5MoU= 7Cr-0.5MoV= 9Cr-1MoX= Other 1Y= Other 2Z= Other 3

Stainless Steels, SA= 304B= 304LC= 304HD= 310E= 316F= 316LG= 316HH= 321J= 321HK= 410SL= CHP10M= CHP20N= CPF10MCO= CPH8P= CPK20Q= UNS S31200R= UNS S31250S= UNS S31500T= UNS S31803U= UNS S32304V= UNS S32550W= Alloy 20X= Other 1Y= Other 2Z= Other 3

607


Copper Alloys, KA= BrassF= BronzeK= CopperP= 90Cu-10NiR= 70Cu-30NiX= Other 1Y= Other 2Z= Other 3

Nickel Alloys, NA= Low C NiD= MonelE= K-MonelF= R-MonelG= Inconel 600H= Inconel 601J= Inconel 625L= Incoloy 800M= Incoloy 800HN= Incoloy 801P= Incoloy 802Q= Incoloy 825T= Hastelloy BU= Hastelloy CV= Hastelloy GX= Other 1Y= Other 2Z= Other 3

Aluminum Alloys, AC= 3002 aluminumD= 3003 aluminumE= 3004 aluminumF= 5050 aluminumG= 5052 aluminumQ= 6061 aluminumR= 6063 aluminumS= AlcladX= Other 1Y= Other 2Z= Other 3

Other Materials, XA= Asbestos cementB= Borosilicate glassC= Clay, vitrifiedD= Concrete, prestressedE= Concrete, reinforcedF= CPVCG= Epoxy/Glass fibJ= Furan/CarbonK= Furan/Glass fibL= KynarN= NylonP= Polyester/Glass fibQ= Polyethylene, high densR= Polyethylene, low densS= PolypropyleneT= PVCU= TeflonV= Titanium

608

B. C

od

elists


W= ZirconiumX= Other 1Y= Other 2Z= Other 3

MATERIALS CLASS DETAILS: (3rd character)

A= Std FF, std trimB= Std FF, otherC= Std RF, std trimD= Std RF, SS trimE= Std RF, Monel trimF= Std RF, otherG= Std RF, otherH= RFSF, std trimJ= RFSF, SS trimK= RFSF, Monel trimL= RFSF, otherM= RTJ, std trimN= RTJ, SS trim0= RTJ, Monel trimP= RTJ, otherQ= MJ, std trimR= MJ, SS trimS= MJ, Monel trimT= MJ, otherU= BE, std trimV= BE, SS trimW= BE, Monel trimX= BE, otherY= Other 1Z= Other 2

CA OR LINING TYPE: (4th character)

1= None2= 0.020"3= 0.030"4= 0.050"5= 0.063"6= 0.10"7= 0.125"8= 0.188"9= 0.250"A= 405 cladB= 410S cladC= 304 cladD= 304L cladE= 316 cladF= 316L cladG= 317 cladH= 317L cladJ= 321 cladL= Cement linedM= Epoxy linedN= Glass linedO= Kynar linedP= Polyester linedQ= Polypropylene linedR= PTFE linedS= Saran linedT= Teflon lined

609


U= TK31 linedV= R11 linedW= R15 linedX= R18 linedY= Other 1Z= Other 2

SERVICE: (5th character)

A= Process, hottest (-20 to 1500+/- degF)B= Process, hotter (-20 to 1000+/- degF)C= Process, hot (-20 to 800 degF)D= Process, cold (-20 to -50 degF)E= Process, colder (-20 to -150 degF)F= Process, coldest (-20 to -425 degF)G= Process, otherH= Category MJ= AcidK= Caustic/AmineL= LPGP= Steam ASME-IQ= Steam B31.1R= Steam B31.3S= Fuel gas, fuel oilT= Lube oil, seal oilU= Category DV= FirewaterW= SewerX= InstrumentY= Other 1Z= Other 2

RATING: (6th character)

1= CL1502= CL3003= CL4004= CL6005= CL9006= CL15007= CL25008= GRAVHD9= OTHERA= CL125F= CL800G= CL2000H= CL3000J= CL4500K= CL5000L= CL6000M= CL9000N= CL10000R= CL15000T= CL20000V= CL30000

610

B. C

od

elists


CL160, Responsibility (25)

1 = [Blank]2 = ’By Contractor’3 = ’By Owner’4 = ’By A’5 = ’By B’6 = ’By C’7 = ’By D’8 = ’By E’9 = ’By Equip Vendor’10 = ’By Vendor’15 = ’By Piping’16 = ’By Instruments’25 = ’By Others’

CL180, Fabrication Category (99)

NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left ofthe "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to theright of the "=" sign be displayed.

1 = [Blank]5 = ’CSSF, Contractor supplied, shop fabricated’7 = ’CSFF, Contractor supplied, field fabricated’15 = ’SSSF, Shop supplied, shop fabricated’17 = ’SSFF, Shop supplied, field fabricated’25 = ’FSSF, Field supplied, shop fabricated’27 = ’FSFF, Field supplied, field fabricated’35 = ’ASSF, A supplied, shop fabricated’37 = ’ASFF, A supplied, field fabricated’45 = ’BSSF, B supplied, shop fabricated’47 = ’BSFF, B supplied, field fabricated’95 = ’OSSF, Owner supplied, shop fabricated’97 = ’OSFF, Owner supplied, field fabricated’

CL190, Coating Requirements (99)

1 = [Blank]2 = ’None’3 = ’Galv’4 = ’PS1.04’5 = ’PS1.07’6 = ’PS1.08’7 = ’PS1.09’8 = ’PS1.10’9 = ’PS1.11’10 = ’PS1.12’11 = ’PS1.13’12 = ’PS2.03’13 = ’PS2.05’14 = ’PS4.01’15 = ’PS4.02’16 = ’PS4.03’17 = ’PS4.04’18 = ’PS4.05’

611

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 19 = ’PS8.01’20 = ’PS9.01’21 = ’PS10.01’22 = ’PS10.02’23 = ’PS11.01’24 = ’PS12.01’25 = ’PS13.01’26 = ’PS14.01’27 = ’PS16.01’28 = ’PS18.01’40 = ’Varies’

CL200, Heat Tracing Requirements (10)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values.

1 = [Blank]2 = ’NT’ [Not heat traced]3 = ’HT’ [Heat traced]4 = ’PHT’ [Partially heat traced]

CL210, Heat Tracing Media (60)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 3-39 have been reserved for heat tracingmedia used for non-jacketed pipe heat tracing. Codelist numbers40-60 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for jacketed pipeheat tracing. It is important that this allocation be respected.1 = [Blank]2 = ’N’ [None]

For Non Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 3-393 = ’E’ [Electric]10 = ’FA’ [Heat transfer fluid A]11 = ’FB’ [Heat transfer fluid B]12 = ’FC’ [Heat transfer fluid C]16 = ’I’ [Impedance]17 = ’MI’ [Magnetic induction]18 = ’SKE’ [Skin effect]20 = ’SH’ [Steam high pressure, CL900]21 = ’SL’ [Steam low pressure, CL150]22 = ’SM’ [Steam medium pressure, CL600]23 = ’SN’ [Steam normal pressure, CL300]24 = ’SS’ [Steam superheated]

For Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 40-6040 = ’FAJ’ [Heat transfer fluid A]41 = ’FBJ’ [Heat transfer fluid B]42 = ’FCJ’ [Heat transfer fluid C]50 = ’SHJ’ [Steam high pressure, CL900]51 = ’SLJ’ [Steam low pressure, CL150]52 = ’SMJ’ [Steam medium pressure, CL600]53 = ’SNJ’ [Steam normal pressure, CL300]54 = ’SSJ’ [Steam superheated]

612

B. C

od

elists


CL220, Insulation Purpose (40)

1 = [Blank]2 = ’N’ [Not insulated]3 = ’P’ [Personnel protection insulated]4 = ’H’ [Hot insulated]5 = ’HS’ [Hot insulated with sound attenuation]11 = ’HF’ [Hot insulated with fire protection]14 = ’AS’ [Anti-sweat insulated]15 = ’C’ [Cold insulated]16 = ’CV’ [Cold insulated vacuum type]17 = ’CS’ [Cold insulated with sound attenuation]18 = ’CH’ [Cold and hot insulated]20 = ’CF’ [Cold insulated with fire protection]21 = ’S’ [Sound attenuation insulated]22 = ’SV’ [Sound attenuation insulation with vapor barrier]30 = ’R11’ [Refractory lined, insulation]32 = ’R15’ [Refractory lined, insulation/erosion]34 = ’R18’ [Refractory lined, erosion]40 = ’Varies’

CL230, Cleaning Requirements (99)

1 = [Blank]2 = ’None’3 = ’CC1’4 = ’CC2’5 = ’CC3’6 = ’CC4’7 = ’CC5’15 = ’Varies’

CL330, CP Type/Termination/Preparation (999)

NOTE: Use 2-199 for bolted types; 300-399 for male types and400-599 for female types. Refer to Reference Data Manager(PD_DATA) Reference Guide for additional data.

1 = [Blank]

2 = ’FE’ [Flanged end]

Use 11-15 for ends without integral gaskets; 16-19 for ends withintegral gaskets.10 = ’FFTP (11-19)’ [Flat-face flanged termination type]11 = ’FFFE’ [Flat-face flanged end]16 = ’FFFEWG’ [Flat-face flanged end with integral gasket]

Use 21-25 for ends without integral gaskets; 26-29 for ends withintegral gaskets.20 = ’RFTP (21-29)’ [Raised-face flanged termination type]21 = ’RFFE’ [Raised-face flanged end]26 = ’RFFEWG’ [Raised-face flanged end with integral gasket]

Use 31-35 for ends without integral gaskets; 36-39 for ends withintegral gaskets.30 = ’RJFTP (31-39)’ [RTJ-face flanged termination type]31 = ’RJFE’ [RTJ-face flanged end]

613

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Use 41-45 for ends without integral gaskets; 46-49 for ends withintegral gaskets.40 = ’TMFTP (41-49)’ [Tongue/male-face flanged termination type]41 = ’STFE’ [Small-tongue-face flanged end]42 = ’LTFE’ [Large-tongue-face flanged end]43 = ’SMFE’ [Small-male-face flanged end]44 = ’LMFE’ [Large-male-face flanged end]

Use 51-55 for ends without integral gaskets; 56-59 for ends withintegral gaskets.50 = ’GFFTP (51-59)’ [Groove/female-face flanged termination type]51 = ’SGFE’ [Small-groove-face flanged end]52 = ’LGFE’ [Large-groove-face flanged end]53 = ’SFFE’ [Small-female-face flanged end]54 = ’LFFE’ [Large-female-face flanged end]

Use 61-65 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 66-69 forlap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.60 = ’FFLFTP (61-69)’ [Flat-face lap-flanged termination type]61 = ’FFLFE [Flat-face lap-flanged end]

Use 71-75 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 76-79 forlap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.70 = ’RFLFTP (71-79)’ [Raised-face lap-flanged termination type]71 = ’RFLFE’ [Raised-face lap-flanged end]

Use 81-85 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 86-89 forlap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.80 = ’RJFLFTP (81-89)’ [RTJ-face lap-flanged termination type]81 = ’RJLFE’ [RTJ-face lap-flanged end]

Use 91-95 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 96-99 forlap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.90 = ’TMFLFTP (91-99)’ [Tongue/male-face lap-flanged termination type]91 = ’STLFE’ [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end]92 = ’LTLFE’ [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end]93 = ’SMLFE’ [Small-male-face lap-flanged end]94 = ’LMLFE’ [Large-male-face lap-flanged end]

Use 101-105 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 106-109for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets.100 = ’GFFLFTP (101-109)’[Groove/female-face lap-flanged termination type]101 = ’SGLFE’ [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end]102 = ’LGLFE’ [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end]103 = ’SFLFE’ [Small-female-face lap-flanged end]104 = ’LFLFE’ [Large-female-face lap-flanged end]

Use 111-115 for ends without integral gaskets; 116-119 for endswith integral gaskets.110 = ’FFTBTP (111-119)’[Flat-face thru-bolted termination type]111 = ’FFTBE’ [Flat-face thru-bolted end]116 = ’FFTBEWG’ [Flat-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]

Use 121-125 for ends without integral gaskets; 126-129 for endswith integral gaskets.120 = ’RFTBTP (121-129)’[Raised-face thru-bolted termination type]121 = ’RFTBE’ [Raised-face thru-bolted end]126 = ’RFTBEWG’ [Raised-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]

Use 131-135 for ends without integral gaskets; 136-139 for endswith integral gaskets.130 = ’RJTBTP (131-139)’[RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type]131 = ’RJTBE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted end]

614

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ Use 141-145 for ends without integral gaskets; 146-149 for endswith integral gaskets.140 = ’MRJTBTP (141-149)’[Male RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type]146 = ’MRJTBEWG’ [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]

Use 151-155 for ends without integral gaskets; 156-159 for endswith integral gaskets.150 = ’FFTBCSTP (151-159)’[Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination ty151 = ’FFTBCSE’ [Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end]156 = ’FFTBCSEWG’ [Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with integ

Use 161-165 for ends without integral gaskets; 166-169 for endswith integral gaskets.160 = ’RFTBCSTP (161-169)’[Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination161 = ’RFTBCSE’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end]166 = ’RFTBCSEWG’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with int

Use 171-175 for ends without integral gaskets; 176-179 for endswith integral gaskets.170 = ’RJTBCSTP (171-179)’[RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination typ171 = ’RJTBCSE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end]

Use 181-185 for ends without integral gaskets; 186-189 for endswith integral gaskets.180 = ’FFFTBTP (181-189)’[Flat-full-face thru-bolted termination type]181 = ’FFFTBE’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end]186 = ’FFFTBEWG’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket]

190 = ’MJTP (190-199)’[Mechanical joint termination type]191 = ’MJE’ [Mechanical joint end]

300 = ’MTP (301-399)’[Male termination type]

Use 301-309 for welded ends only301 = ’BE’ [Beveled end]302 = ’OLET’ [Olet beveled end]

Use 311-319 for welded ends only311 = ’TBE’ [Tapered and beveled end]321 = ’MFE’ [Male flared end]331 = ’MTE’ [Male threaded end]341 = ’MGE’ [Male grooved end]351 = ’MQCE’ [Male quick connect end]355 = ’MCE’ [Male clamp end]361 = ’MFRE’ [Male ferrule end]371 = ’MHE’ [Male hose end]381 = ’SPE’ [Spigot end]

Use 391-399 for welded ends only391 = ’PE (391-399)’[Plain end]393 = ’3"FFPE’ [Plain end, 3" field fit]395 = ’6"FFPE’ [Plain end, 6" field fit]

400 = ’STP (401-409)’[Socket termination type]401 = ’SE’ [Socket end]

Use 421-429 for welded ends only420 = ’SWTP (421-429)’[Socketwelded termination type]421 = ’SWE’ [Socketwelded end]

615

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 440 = ’FTTP (441-449)’[Female threaded termination type]441 = ’FTE’ [Female threaded end]

460 = ’FGTP (461-469)’[Female grooved termination type]461 = ’FGE’ [Female grooved end]

470 = ’FCTP (471-479)’[Female clamp termination type]471 = ’FCE’ [Female clamp end]

480 = ’FQCTP (481-489)’[Female quick connect termination type]481 = ’FQCE’ [Female quick connect end]

500 = ’FFRTP (501-509)’[Female ferrule termination type]501 = ’FFRE’ [Female ferrule end]

520 = ’FHTP (521-529)’[Female hose termination type]521 = ’FHE’ [Female hose end]

540 = ’BLTP (541-549)’[Bell end termination type]541 = ’BLE’ [Push-on bell end]542 = ’MJBE’ [Mechanical joint bell end]

590 = ’HTP (581-599)’[Hole end termination type]

Use 591-599 for welded ends only591 = ’HCE’ [Circular hole end]

600 = ’NTP (600-605)’[Null termination type]601 = ’NE’ [Null end]

650 = ’UDTP (651-659)’[User defined termination type]651 = ’UD’ [User defined end] (When a "UD"

preparation end is detected by thesystem in the piping materialsclass, it will prompt the User to definethe actual CP preparation to use. Thevalue provided by the User will be usedfor initial placement of the componentas well as for subsequent recreations ofthe piping system.)

CL332, Schedule / Thickness Override

NOTE: Schedule/thickness override values for metric projects musthave codelist values between 499 and 1000.

1 = [Blank]10 = ’.0625’11 = ’.125’12 = ’.1875’13 = ’.25’14 = ’.3125’15 = ’.375’16 = ’.4375’17 = ’.5’18 = ’.5625’19 = ’.625’20 = ’.6875’21 = ’.75’22 = ’.8125’

616

B. C

od

elists


23 = ’.875’24 = ’.9375’25 = ’1’30 = ’1.0625’31 = ’1.125’32 = ’1.1875’33 = ’1.25’34 = ’1.3125’35 = ’1.375’36 = ’1.4375’37 = ’1.5’38 = ’1.5625’39 = ’1.625’40 = ’1.6875’41 = ’1.75’42 = ’1.8125’43 = ’1.875’44 = ’1.9375’45 = ’2’50 = ’2.0625’51 = ’2.125’52 = ’2.1875’53 = ’2.25’54 = ’2.3125’55 = ’2.375’56 = ’2.4375’57 = ’2.5’58 = ’2.5625’59 = ’2.625’60 = ’2.6875’61 = ’2.75’62 = ’2.8125’63 = ’2.875’64 = ’2.9375’65 = ’3’100 = ’S-5S’101 = ’S-10S’102 = ’S-40S’103 = ’S-80S’110 = ’S-10’111 = ’S-20’112 = ’S-30’113 = ’S-40’114 = ’S-60’115 = ’S-80’116 = ’S-100’117 = ’S-120’118 = ’S-140’119 = ’S-160’130 = ’S-STD’131 = ’S-XS’132 = ’S-XXS’

617


CL340, Safety Classification (99)

1 = [Blank]2 = ’SC1’3 = ’SC2’4 = ’SC3’5 = ’SC4’6 = ’SC5’7 = ’SC6’8 = ’SC7’9 = ’SC8’10 = ’SC9’

CL360, Stress Analysis Requirements (15)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values. Some data displays require that onlyvalues to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports requirethat only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.1 = [Blank]2 = ’ANR =Analysis not required’3 = ’ATBP=Analysis to be performed’4 = ’AC =Analysis completed’

CL365, Reporting Requirements (25)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existingcodelist values.1 = ’Reportable by MTO’2 = ’Not Reportable by MTO’

CL366, Requirement to Reconstruct (10)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaningof existing codelist values. Some data displays require that onlyvalues to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports requirethat only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labelsalways require that only values to the right of the "=" sign bedisplayed.

0 = ’None’1 = ’reconstruct’2 = ’re-calculate’

CL380, Piping Component Type (2500)

1 = [Blank]

2 = ’Piping’ [Primary single line]3 = ’Piping’ [Secondary single line]4 = ’Piping’ [Primary double line]

618

B. C

od

elists


5 = ’Piping’ [Double line]6 = ’Hose’8 = ’Tubing’

18 = ’Gate valve’19 = ’Extended body gate valve’20 = ’Conduit gate valve’21 = ’Blank gate valve’22 = ’3-way valve’23 = ’Ball valve’ [2-way]24 = ’2-way valve’25 = ’3-way ball valve’28 = ’Globe valve’ [2-way]29 = ’Angle globe valve’ [2-way]30 = ’3-way globe valve’31 = ’Y globe valve’33 = ’Plug valve’ [2-way]34 = ’4-way valve’35 = ’3-way plug valve’36 = ’4-way plug valve’39 = ’Needle valve’43 = ’Butterfly valve’47 = ’Diaphragm valve’49 = ’Knife gate valve’50 = ’Slide valve’ [2-way]51 = ’3-way slide valve’54 = ’Angle valve’55 = ’Check valve’56 = ’Wafer check valve’57 = ’Angle check valve’58 = ’Stop check valve’59 = ’Angle stop check valve’60 = ’Y stop check valve’67 = ’Backflow preventer’68 = ’Automatic recirculation valve’70 = ’Angle blowdown valve’71 = ’Y blowdown valve’73 = ’Pinch valve’74 = ’Float valve’75 = ’Foot valve’79 = ’Tank drain valve’86 = ’Deluge valve’89 = ’Hose valve’90 = ’Angle hose valve’93 = ’Vent/drain valve’97 = ’Instrument root valve’98 = ’3-way instrument root valve’99 = ’4-way instrument root valve’

117 = ’Flange’119 = ’Reducing flange’120 = ’Expander flange’122 = ’Orifice flange’124 = ’Blind flange’126 = ’Open spectacle blank’127 = ’Closed spectacle blank’128 = ’Blank disc’129 = ’Blind spacer’130 = ’Tapered spacer’131 = ’Open spacer’132 = ’End’133 = ’Head’

619


135 = ’Plug’137 = ’Cap’138 = ’Diameter change’139 = ’Concentric diameter change’140 = ’Eccentric diameter change’141 = ’Coupling/connector’142 = ’Half coupling’143 = ’Concentric reducer’144 = ’Eccentric reducer’148 = ’Reducing coupling’151 = ’Concentric swage’152 = ’Eccentric swage’155 = ’Union’156 = ’Orifice union’157 = ’Dielectric union’159 = ’Hose connection’160 = ’Bushing’162 = ’Reducing insert’163 = ’Pipe bend’165 = ’5.625 deg elbow’167 = ’11.25 deg elbow’169 = ’22.5 deg elbow’171 = ’<45 deg direction change’172 = ’45 deg direction change’173 = ’45 deg elbow’175 = ’45 deg LR elbow’176 = ’45 deg long tangent elbow’177 = ’45 deg 3D elbow’179 = ’45 deg union elbow’181 = ’45 deg street elbow’182 = ’45 deg short elbow’184 = ’45 deg long elbow’189 = ’60 deg elbow’191 = ’45-90 deg direction change’192 = ’90 deg direction change’193 = ’90 deg elbow’195 = ’90 deg SR elbow’196 = ’90 deg LR elbow’198 = ’90 deg LR long tangent elbow’200 = ’90 deg reducing elbow’202 = ’90 deg 3D elbow’204 = ’90 deg union elbow’206 = ’90 deg street elbow’207 = ’90 deg reducing street elbow’209 = ’90 deg short elbow’210 = ’90 deg long elbow’216 = ’180 deg return’218 = ’180 deg SR return’220 = ’180 deg LR return’222 = ’180 deg close return’223 = ’180 deg medium return’224 = ’180 deg open return’229 = ’Miter’231 = ’45 deg miter’233 = ’90 deg miter’237 = ’Tee’239 = ’Reducing branch tee’240 = ’Reducing run and branch tee’242 = ’On-run union tee’243 = ’On-branch union tee’246 = ’Street tee’249 = ’Reducing instrument tee’

620

B. C

od

elists


251 = ’Drip ring tee’253 = ’Basin tee’260 = ’True Y’262 = ’Lateral’264 = ’Reducing branch lateral’265 = ’Reducing run and branch lateral’267 = ’90 deg short Y-branch’268 = ’90 deg reducing short Y-branch’269 = ’90 deg long Y-branch’270 = ’90 deg reducing long Y-branch’275 = ’Cross’277 = ’Reducing branches cross’278 = ’Reducing run and branches cross’279 = ’Basin cross’285 = ’Saddle’287 = ’Sweepolet’288 = ’Weldolet’289 = ’Sockolet’290 = ’Thredolet’291 = ’Nippolet’292 = ’Elbolet’293 = ’Latrolet’294 = ’Endolet’295 = ’Reinforcing pad’297 = ’Reinforcing weld’299 = ’Buttweld’303 = ’Branch nipple’304 = ’In-line nipple’310 = ’Gasket’312 = ’Stud’313 = ’Nut’

315 = ’Fire monitor’316 = ’Elevated fire monitor’317 = ’Remotely operated fire monitor’318 = ’Foam monitor’319 = ’Elevated foam monitor’320 = ’Remotely operated foam monitor’324 = ’Fire hydrant’ [2-way]325 = ’Fire hydrant w/monitor nozzle’ [2-way]327 = ’3-way fire hydrant’338 = ’Hose reel’339 = ’Hose rack station’340 = ’Foam chamber’344 = ’Wet sprinkler’345 = ’Pre-action sprinkler’346 = ’Spray sprinkler’352 = ’Eye wash’353 = ’Safety shower’354 = ’Safety shower and eye wash’374 = ’Siamese’ [2-way]380 = ’90 deg siamese’ [2-way]

513 = ’Flame arrestor’515 = ’Hammer arrestor’516 = ’Vent silencer’517 = ’In-line silencer’518 = ’Vent’519 = ’Exhaust head’521 = ’Breather vent’523 = ’Free vent w/o screen’524 = ’Free vent w/screen’

621


525 = ’Motor operated valve’527 = ’Mixing T’529 = ’Spray nozzle’533 = ’Removable spool’535 = ’Swing elbow’540 = ’Expansion joint’542 = ’Hinged expansion joint’544 = ’Swivel joint’546 = ’Mechanical coupling’548 = ’Flexible hose’552 = ’Sample cooler’556 = ’Strainer/filter’557 = ’Single basket strainer’559 = ’Duplex basket strainer’561 = ’T strainer’563 = ’Y strainer’564 = ’Temporary strainer’565 = ’Basket strainer’567 = ’Cone strainer’569 = ’Flat plate strainer’571 = ’Sump strainer’576 = ’Filter’582 = ’Steam trap’583 = ’Float steam trap’584 = ’Inverted bucket steam trap’586 = ’Thermostatic steam trap’588 = ’Thermodynamic steam trap’590 = ’Impulse steam trap’611 = ’Generic component’

613 = ’Pip seg heat tracing brk/comp 2’

747 = ’Air utility station’748 = ’Nitrogen utility station’749 = ’Water utility station’750 = ’Steam utility station’823 = ’Vent/drain detail 1’824 = ’Vent/drain detail 2’825 = ’Vent/drain detail 3’833 = ’Vent/drain detail H’873 = ’Connection detail 1’874 = ’Connection detail 2’875 = ’Connection detail 3’876 = ’Connection detail 4’877 = ’Connection detail 5’878 = ’Connection detail 6’879 = ’Connection detail 7’880 = ’Connection detail 8’

909 = ’Anchor’911 = ’1-way support’913 = ’2-way support’923 = ’Spring support’927 = ’Damping support’

1008 = ’Tie-in marker’

1018 = ’Utility connector’1019 = ’Drain connector’1020 = ’Utility station connector’1038 = ’TRM off-dwg piping connector’1039 = ’TLM off-dwg piping connector’

622

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 1040 = ’TTM off-dwg piping connector’1041 = ’TBM off-dwg piping connector’1042 = ’FRM off-dwg piping connector’1043 = ’FLM off-dwg piping connector’1044 = ’FTM off-dwg piping connector’1045 = ’FBM off-dwg piping connector’1047 = ’Utility off-dwg pip connector’1049 = ’To off-vol piping connector’1053 = ’From off-vol piping connector’1068 = ’TRM off-unit piping connector’1069 = ’TLM off-unit piping connector’1070 = ’TTM off-unit piping connector’1071 = ’TBM off-unit piping connector’1072 = ’FRM off-unit piping connector’1073 = ’FLM off-unit piping connector’1074 = ’FTM off-unit piping connector’1075 = ’FBM off-unit piping connector’1079 = ’To off-site piping connector’1083 = ’From off-site piping connector’

1108 = ’Piping node marker’

1117 = ’Terminator piping connector’

Entries above 1500 are reserved for DIN components.

1500 = ’Valve generic’1501 = ’Angle plug valve’1502 = ’Non-return valve’1503 = ’Check valve’1504 = ’Valve with continous action’1505 = ’4-way globe valve’1506 = ’4-way valve,generic’1507 = ’Steam throttling angle valve’1508 = ’Steam throttling 3-way globe valve’1509 = ’Butterfly valve with continous action’1510 = [Blank]1511 = [Blank]1512 = ’Globe valve with continous action’1513 = ’Gate valve with continous action’1514 = ’Plug valve with continous action’1515 = ’Angle globe valve with continous action’1516 = ’Free wheel check valve’1517 = ’Safety check valve’

1518 = ’Fire safety butterfly valve’1519 = ’Aeration and deaeration armature’1520 = ’Angle ball valve’1521 = ’4-way ball valve’1522 = ’Taper plug valve’1523 = ’Taper angle plug valve’1524 = ’3-way taper plug valve’1525 = ’4-way taper plug valve’1526 = ’Flat seal bottom’1527 = ’Blank disk’1528 = ’Flange connection’1529 = ’Screwed connection’1530 = ’Angle diaphragm valve’

1533 = ’Safety valve’1534 = ’Safety valve regulated with spring’1535 = ’Safety valve regulated with weight’

623

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 1536 = ’Angle safety valve’1537 = ’Angle safety valve regulated with spring’1538 = ’Rupture disk’1539 = ’Aeration with screw cap’1540 = ’Inspection glass’1542 = ’Aeration with plug’1543 = ’Flanged aeration’1544 = ’90 deg earation’1545 = ’180 deg earation’1546 = ’Tapered filter’1548 = ’Discharge valve with blind flange’1549 = ’Discharge valve’1550 = ’Discharge with blind flanged gate valve’1551 = ’Discharge with gate valve’1552 = ’Bellow expansion joint’1553 = ’Lyra expansion joint’1554 = ’90 degree elbow for JP’1555 = ’T connection for JP’1556 = ’Flange between JP’1557 = ’Valve for connecting JP media’1558 = ’Blindflange JP’1559 = ’Skewed connection JP’1560 = ’Y connection JP’1561 = ’flanged connection segment/comp type 1’1562 = ’flanged connection segment/comp type 2’1563 = ’flanged connection segment/comp type 3’1564 = ’flanged connection segment/comp type 4’1565 = ’Flange from JP to normal pipe’1566 = ’Valve for JP media supply’1567 = ’Flange connection for JP’1568 = ’Bypass for JP media’1569 = ’Flange for bypassing JP’1570 = ’Syphon’1571 = ’Ball linkage’1572 = ’Mixing component’1573 = ’Flow straightener’1574 = [Blank]1575 = ’Spring clip’1576 = ’Fire extinguishing equipment powder’1577 = ’Fire extinguishing equipment halogen’1578 = ’Fire extinguishing equipment carbonic acid’1579 = ’Fire extinguishing equipment foam’1580 = ’Fire extinguishing equipment floor connection’1581 = ’Fire extinguishing equipment overhead conn.’1582 = ’Fire extinguishing connector’1583 = ’Fire extinguishing water supply’1584 = ’Fire brigade accessory’1585 = ’Hydrant ground floor’1587 = ’Hydrant overhead’1588 = ’Wall hydrant’1590 = ’Sprinkler equipment’1591 = ’Flooding spray equipment’1592 = ’Spraying equipment’1593 = ’Refrigerating unit’1594 = ’Globe valve with open function’1595 = ’Angle valve with open function’1596 = ’Clamp joint’1597 = ’Taper pipe thread’1598 = [Blank]1599 = ’Socket joint’1600 = ’Taper pipe joint’1601 = ’Cool box’

624

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 1602 = ’Ball float valve’1603 = ’Ball check valve’1604 = ’Flanged joint’

CL390, Action (40)

1 = [Blank]

2 = ’NO’ [Normally open]3 = ’NC’ [Normally closed]5 = ’CSO’ [Car seal open]6 = ’CSC’ [Car seal closed]10 = ’LO’ [Locked open]11 = ’LC’ [Locked closed]

15 = ’FO’ [Fail open]16 = ’FC’ [Fail closed]18 = ’FL’ [Fail locked]19 = ’FLO’ [Fail locked open]20 = ’FLC’ [Fail locked closed]24 = ’FI’ [Fail indeterminate]

30 = ’EO’ [Energize to open]31 = ’EC’ [Energize to close]34 = ’DEO’ [De-energize to open]35 = ’DEC’ [De-energize to close]

CL400, Option (999)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning ofthe indicated codelist ranges. The number of codelist numbers usedin this codelist set must not exceed 5000.

1 = [Blank]2 = ’Bypass PMC’ Use to bypass PMC access

Types Options, 11-1911 = ’Type 1’12 = ’Type 2’13 = ’Type 3’14 = ’Type 4’15 = ’Type 5’16 = ’Type 6’17 = ’Type 7’18 = ’Type 8’19 = ’Type 9’

Valve Type Options, 21-6021 = ’Red port’ [Reduced port valve]24 = ’Full port’ [Full port valve]27 = ’Tight SO’ [Tight shutoff valve]30 = ’Dbl disc’ [Double disc valve]32 = ’Y pattern’ [Y pattern valve]33 = ’Wafer’ [Wafer valve]34 = ’Lug’ [Lug pattern]36 = ’Single flange’ [Single flange valve]38 = ’1/8" hole’ [1/8" diam hole in flapper]39 = ’Non lube’ [Non-lubricated valve]40 = ’3/16" hole’ [3/16" diam hole in flapper]

625


41 = ’1/4" hole’ [1/4" diam hole in flapper]42 = ’Lube’ [Lubricated valve]43 = ’Quick close’ [Quick closing valve]44 = ’Quick open’ [Quick opening valve]45 = ’Al chk’ [Alarm check valve]46 = ’Excess flow’ [Excess flow check valve]48 = ’Limit stop’ [Limit stop valve]49 = ’Hor chk’ [Horizontal check valve]50 = ’Vert chk’ [Vertical check valve]56 = ’Tap lcn G’ [Tap at location G]57 = ’Tap lcns G & H’ [Tap at locations G & H]58 = ’Tap lcns G & I’ [Tap at locations G & I]59 = ’Tap lcns G & J’ [Tap at locations G & J]60 = ’Tap lcns G & K’ [Tap at locations G & K]

Valve Operator Options, 61-10061 = ’HW op’ [Handwheel]64 = ’WR op’ [Wrench operator]67 = ’LV op’ [Lever operator]70 = ’T op’ [T-handle operator]73 = ’GTM op’ [Gear operator, top mounted handwheel]76 = ’GSM op’ [Gear operator, side mounted handwheel]79 = ’EM op’ [Electric motor operator]82 = ’ESHW op’ [Extended stem and handwheel]88 = ’ESGTM op’ [Extended stem and gear operator, top mounted handw91 = ’EXGSM op’ [Extended stem and gear operator, side mounted hand100 = ’Post ind’ [Post indicator]

Bend Radius Options, 121-140121 = ’1D bend’ [1D pipe bend]124 = ’1.5D bend’ [1.5D pipe bend]127 = ’3D bend’ [3D pipe bend]130 = ’4D bend’ [4D pipe bend]133 = ’5D bend’ [5D pipe bend]134 = ’6D bend’ [6D pipe bend]136 = ’10D bend’ [10D pipe bend]

Head Type Options, 141-150141 = ’Hemi hd’ [Hemispherical head]143 = ’Ellip hd’ [Ellipsoidal head]145 = ’2:1 hd’ [2:1 elliptical head]

Miter Options, 151-160151 = ’1 cut’ [1-cut miter]152 = ’2 cuts’ [2-cuts miter]153 = ’3 cuts’ [3-cuts miter]154 = ’4 cuts’ [4-cuts miter]

Miscellaneous Options, 161-170161 = ’Housing’ [Housing]163 = ’After vlv’ [After isolating valve]165 = ’Match branch nipple’ [Match branch nipple]167 = ’Straight ends’ [Straight ends]168 = ’Hor’ [Horizontal]169 = ’Vert’ [Vertical]

Flange Type Options, 171-200171 = ’WN’ [Weld neck flange]173 = ’LWN’ [Long weld neck flange]175 = ’SO’ [Slip-on flange]177 = ’LJ’ [Lap joint flange]179 = ’PL’ [Plate flange]

626

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 181 = ’SS-SO’ [Short-stub-end, slip-on flange]183 = ’SS-LJ’ [Short-stub-end, lap joint flange]185 = ’SS-PL’ [Short-stub-end, plate flange]187 = ’LS-SO’ [Long-stub-end, slip-on flange]189 = ’LS-LP’ [Long-stub-end, lap joint flange]191 = ’Filler’ [Filler flange]193 = ’Socket’ [Socket flange]195 = ’SW’ [Socketwelded flange]196 = ’SW Red’ [Socketwelded reducing flange]197 = ’Thd’ [Threaded flange]

Bolted End Options, 201-400202 = ’FE’ [Flanged end]211 = ’FFFE’ [Flat-face flanged end]216 = ’FFFEWG’ [Flat-face flanged end w/ integral gasket]221 = ’RFFE’ [Raised-face flanged end]226 = ’RFFEWG’ [Raised-face flanged end w/ integral gasket]231 = ’RJFE’ [RTJ-face flanged end]241 = ’STFE’ [Small-tongue-face flanged end]242 = ’LTFE’ [Large-tongue-face flanged end]243 = ’SMFE’ [Small-male-face flanged end]244 = ’LMFE’ [Large-male-face flanged end]251 = ’SGFE’ [Small-groove-face flanged end]252 = ’LGFE’ [Large-groove-face flanged end]253 = ’SFFE’ [Small-female-face flanged end]254 = ’LFFE’ [Large-female-face flanged end]261 = ’FFLFE’ [Flat-face lap-flanged end]271 = ’RFLFE’ [Raised-face lap-flanged end]281 = ’RJLFE’ [RTJ-face lap-flanged end]291 = ’STLFE’ [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end]292 = ’LTLFE’ [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end]293 = ’SMLFE’ [Small-male-face lap-flanged end]294 = ’LMLFE’ [Large-male-face lap-flanged end]301 = ’SGLFE’ [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end]302 = ’LGLFE’ [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end]303 = ’SFLFE’ [Small-female-face lap-flanged end]304 = ’LFLFE’ [Large-female-face lap-flanged end]311 = ’FFTBE’ [Flat-face thru-bolted end]316 = ’FFTBEWG’ [Flat-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]321 = ’RFTBE’ [Raised-face thru-bolted end]326 = ’RFTBEWG’ [Raised-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]331 = ’RJTBE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted end]346 = ’MRJTBEWG’ [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]351 = ’FFTBCSE’ [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end]356 = ’FFTBCSEWG’ [Flat-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integra361 = ’RFTBCSE’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end]366 = ’RFTBCSEWG’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end w/ integ371 = ’RJTBCSE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted-w/-cap-screws end]381 = ’FFFTBE’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end]386 = ’FFFTBEWG’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end w/ integral gasket]391 = ’MJE’ [Mechanical joint end]

Male End Options, 401-500401 = ’BE’ [Beveled end]402 = ’OLET’ [Olet beveled end]411 = ’TBE’ [Tapered and beveled end]421 = ’MFE’ [Male flared end]431 = ’MTE’ [Male threaded end]441 = ’MGE’ [Male grooved end]451 = ’MQCE’ [Male quick connect end]455 = ’MCE’ [Male clamp end]461 = ’MFRE’ [Male ferrule end]

627

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 471 = ’MHE’ [Male hose end]481 = ’SPE’ [Spigot end]491 = ’PE’ [Plain end] [391-399]493 = ’3"FFPE’ [Plain end, 3" field fit]495 = ’6"FFPE’ [Plain end, 6" field fit]

Female End Options, 501-696501 = ’SE’ [Socket end]521 = ’SWE’ [Socketwelded end]541 = ’FTE’ [Female threaded end]561 = ’FGE’ [Female grooved end]581 = ’FQCE’ [Female quick connect end]601 = ’FFRE’ [Female ferrule end]621 = ’FHE’ [Female hose end]641 = ’BLE’ [Push-on bell end]642 = ’MJBE’ [Mechanical joint bell end]691 = ’HCE’ [Circular hole end]

User Defined Null End Options, (697-697)697 = ’NE’ [Null end]

User Defined End Options, 699-699699 = ’UD’ [User defined]

Mixed End Options, 701-717701 = ’FE x MJE’ [Flanged end by mechanical joint end]702 = ’FE x BE’ [Flanged end by beveled end]703 = ’FE x PE’ [Flanged end by plain end]705 = ’BE x MTE’ [Beveled end by male threaded end]706 = ’BE x PE’ [Beveled end by plain end]707 = ’BE x SWE’ [Beveled end by socketwelded end]708 = ’BE x FTE’ [Beveled end by female threaded end]709 = ’OLET x FTE’ [Olet beveled end by female threaded end]710 = ’MTE x PE’ [Male threaded end by plain end]711 = ’PE x MTE’ [Plain end by male threaded end]712 = ’PE x SWE’ [Plain end by socketwelded end]713 = ’PE x FTE’ [Plain end by female threaded end]714 = ’SWE x FTE’ [Socketwelded end by female threaded end]715 = ’OLET x SWE’ [Olet beveled end by socketwelded end]716 = ’MTE x FTE’ [Male threaded end by female threaded end]717 = ’FE x FTE’ [Flanged end by female threaded end]

The following options have been modified to include mm in lengthsand add British metric pressure ratings (PN).

Nipple Options, 718-755720 = ’3.0"(75mm) BE’ [3.0" long, BE]721 = ’3.0"(75mm) MTE’ [3.0" long, MTE]722 = ’3.0"(75mm) PE’ [3.0" long, PE]723 = ’3.0"(75mm) BE x MTE’ [3.0" long, BE x MTE]724 = ’3.0"(75mm) BE x PE’ [3.0" long, BE x PE]725 = ’3.0"(75mm) MTE x PE’ [3.0" long, MTE x PE]726 = ’4.0"(100mm) BE’ [4.0" long, BE]727 = ’4.0"(100mm) MTE’ [4.0" long, MTE]728 = ’4.0"(100mm) PE’ [4.0" long, PE]729 = ’4.0"(100mm) BE x MTE’ [4.0" long, BE x MTE]730 = ’4.0"(100mm) BE x PE’ [4.0" long, BE x PE]731 = ’4.0"(100mm) MTE x PE’ [4.0" long, MTE x PE]732 = ’5.0"(125mm) BE’ [5.0" long, BE]733 = ’5.0"(125mm) MTE’ [5.0" long, MTE]734 = ’5.0"(125mm) PE’ [5.0" long, PE]735 = ’5.0"(125mm) BE x MTE’ [5.0" long, BE x MTE]

628

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 736 = ’5.0"(125mm) BE x PE’ [5.0" long, BE x PE]737 = ’5.0"(125mm) MTE x PE’ [5.0" long, MTE x PE]738 = ’6.0"(150mm) BE’ [6.0" long, BE]739 = ’6.0"(150mm) MTE’ [6.0" long, MTE]740 = ’6.0"(150mm) PE’ [6.0" long, PE]741 = ’6.0"(150mm) BE x MTE’ [6.0" long, BE x MTE]742 = ’6.0"(150mm) BE x PE’ [6.0" long, BE x PE]743 = ’6.0"(150mm) MTE x PE’ [6.0" long, MTE x PE]744 = ’7.0"(175mm) BE’ [7.0" long, BE]745 = ’7.0"(175mm) MTE’ [7.0" long, MTE]746 = ’7.0"(175mm) PE’ [7.0" long, PE]747 = ’7.0"(175mm) BE x MTE’ [7.0" long, BE x MTE]748 = ’7.0"(175mm) BE x PE’ [7.0" long, BE x PE]749 = ’7.0"(175mm) MTE x PE’ [7.0" long, MTE x PE]750 = ’8.0"(200mm) PE’ [8.0" long, PE]751 = ’9.0"(225mm) PE’ [9.0" long, PE]752 = ’1O.0"(250mm) PE’ [10.0" long, PE]753 = ’11.0"(275mm) PE’ [11.0" long, PE]754 = ’12.0"(300mm) PE’ [12.0" long, PE]755 = ’HEX’ [Hexagon]

Rating Options, 756-849756 = ’CL25’757 = ’PN2.5’758 = ’CL50’759 = ’CL75’760 = ’86#’761 = ’CL100’762 = ’CL125’763 = ’CL150’764 = ’175#’765 = ’PN6’766 = ’PN10’767 = ’CL200’768 = ’PN16’769 = ’CL250’770 = ’275#’773 = ’CL300’774 = ’350#’775 = ’PN25’776 = ’PN40’777 = ’CL400’778 = ’PN64’781 = ’CL600’782 = ’PN100’785 = ’CL800’789 = ’CL900’790 = ’PN160’792 = ’1000#’794 = ’PN250’795 = ’PN320’796 = ’PN400’797 = ’CL1500’801 = ’CL2000’805 = ’CL2500’809 = ’CL3000’813 = ’CL4500’815 = ’CL5000’817 = ’CL6000’821 = ’CL9000’823 = ’CL10000’827 = ’CL15000’

629

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 831 = ’CL20000’835 = ’CL30000’836 = ’SCH 40’838 = ’SCH 80’840 = ’GRAVHD’

Thickness Options, 851-869851 = ’0.0625"(2mm) thck’852 = ’0.125"(3mm) thck’853 = ’0.1875"(4mm) thck’854 = ’0.25"(6mm) thck’855 = ’0.3125"(8mm) thck’856 = ’0.375"(9mm) thck’857 = ’0.4375"(10mm) thck’858 = ’0.5"(12mm) thck’859 = ’0.5625"(14mm) thck’860 = ’0.625"(16mm) thck’861 = ’0.6875"(18mm) thck’862 = ’0.75"(20mm) thck’863 = ’0.8125"(21mm) thck’864 = ’0.875"(22mm) thck’865 = ’0.9375"(24mm) thck’866 = ’1.0"(25mm) thck’

End Finish Options, 870-879870 = ’63 Ra’ [63 Ra finish]871 = ’60-100 Ra’ [60-100 Ra finish]873 = ’80-150 Ra’ [80-150 Ra finish]875 = ’200 Ra’ [200 Ra finish]877 = ’Stock’ [Stock-finish]

Gasket Options, 880-899880 = ’F gskt’ [Flat gasket]881 = ’FFF gskt’ [Flat full face gasket]882 = ’C gskt’ [Corrugated gasket]883 = ’FDJ gskt’ [Flat double jacketed gasket]884 = ’CDJ gskt’ [Corrugated double jacketed gasket]885 = ’R gskt’ [Ring gasket]886 = ’SW gskt’ [Spiral-wound gasket]887 = ’MSS gskt’ [MSS-SP-44 gasket]894 = ’SP gskt’ [Special gasket]

Stud & Nut Options, 900-909900 = ’Spec bolt’ [Special bolting]

ID Basis Options, 910-910910 = ’ID basis’ [Dimensions based on inside diameter]

Code Options, 911-989912 = ’ANSI-B16.12’ [Cast iron drainage fittings]915 = ’ANSI-B16.15’ [Cast bronze fittings]922 = ’ANSI-B16.22’ [Copper solder joint pressure fittings]923 = ’ANSI-B16.23’ [Copper solder joint drainage fittings]924 = ’ANSI-B16.24’ [Bronze flanges]929 = ’ANSI-B16.36’ [Orifice flanges]930 = ’ANSI-B16.42’ [Ductile iron flanges and fittings]933 = ’ANSI-B1.20.3’ [Dryseal pipe threads]937 = ’ANSI-B1.20.7’ [Hose coupling screw threads]945 = ’ASTM-A74’ [Cast iron soil pipe and fittings]949 = ’AWWA-C110’ [Iron fittings]950 = ’AWWA-C115’ [Iron pipe and fittings]955 = ’AWWA-C151’ [Ductile iron pipe]

630

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 960 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]961 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]962 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL275]970 = ’API-5LE’ [Polyethylene fittings]975 = ’API-6A’ [Wellhead flanges and fittings]979 = ’API-605’ [API-605 flanges]980 = ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ [MSS non-blind flanges]981 = ’MSS-SP-44-B’ [MSS blind flanges]

Vendor Options, 990-999990 = ’Tube-Turn’991 = ’Dow’992 = ’Aloyco’993 = ’Yarway’994 = ’Teledyne Farris 1’995 = ’R & G Sloane’996 = ’American DI Pipe’997 = ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings]998 = ’Taylor Forge’999 = ’ITT VALVES’

European DIN Standards1001 = ’Spacer length 10 mm’1002 = ’Spacer length 15 mm’1003 = ’Spacer length 20 mm’1004 = ’Spacer length 25 mm’1005 = ’Spacer length 30 mm’1006 = ’Spacer length 35 mm’1007 = ’Spacer length 40 mm’1008 = ’Spacer length 45 mm’1009 = ’Spacer length 50 mm’1010 = ’Spacer length 60 mm’1011 = ’Spacer length 70 mm’1012 = ’Spacer length 80 mm’1013 = ’Spacer length 90 mm’1014 = ’Spacer length 100 mm’

CL420, Piping Component Type/Source (25)

NOTE: This codelist defines the type of piping component involvedand the source of the data used in its definition. In editing thiscodelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.0 = ’Piping cmdty component from PMC’1 = ’Piping cmdty component from User’2 = ’Piping flanged cmdty component from PJS’3 = ’Piping cmdty component from branch table’4 = ’Piping specialty component from PJS’5 = ’Piping specialty component from User - spec data input’6 = ’Piping specialty component from User - no spec data input’7 = ’Branch reinforcement from user’8 = ’Branch reinforcement from branch table’

631


CL425, Piping/Tubing Type (25)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning ofexisting codelist values.1 = ’Piping’2 = ’Tubing’3 = ’Hose’

CL430, Instrument Component Type/Source (25)

NOTE: This codelist defines the type of instrument componentinvolved and the source of the data used in its definition. Inediting this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existingcodelist values.0 = ’Instr specialty component from PJS’1 = ’Instr specialty component from User - spec data input’2 = ’Instr specialty component from User - no spec data input’

CL499, Piping Notes (999)

1 = [Blank]

Notes Applicable to the Piping Materials Class, 2-1993 = ’Valve and flange protectors required.’22 = ’Valves shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75.’50 = ’The Manufacturer shall be consulted for special bolting

requirements where both the design temperature is above 800 degFand the valve bonnet is insulated.’

54 = ’Unions shall not be used.’56 = ’Gasket seating surfaces shall have 125 Ra surface finish.’57 = ’Unions shall not be used. Gasket seating surfaces shall

have 125 Ra surface finish.’58 = ’Unions shall not be used. Gasket seating surfaces shall

have 125 Ra surface finish. Valves shall be in accordance withNACE MR-01-75.’

60 = ’All welds shall use compatible rod and shall be PWHTregardless of thickness and/or joint configuration.’

61 = ’All welds shall use compatible rod and shall be PWHTregardless of thickness and/or joint configuration unlessspecifically approved by Contractor and permitted byANSI-B31.3 Code.’

62 = ’Refer to AWWA-C151 for suitable installation types.’63 = ’Underground pipe and fittings shall be coated and wrapped.’64 = ’Pipe and fittings shall be cement lined.’79 = ’Extra thickness has been included.’80 = ’All components shall be bored to suit thickness of pipe.

Taper bore flanges to a depth of 1.5 inches as required to matchinside diameter of all connecting pipingand valves. Weldsshall be ground smooth to match inside diameter of pipe.’

82 = ’Use long radius bends with radius as specified on the P&IDsfor all changes in direction.’

83 = ’Do not allow galvanized or any other zinc bearing materialto come in contact with stainless steel or high nickelalloys components. This includes supports, nipples, weldsplatter, wire, bolts, paint, or any other type of contact.’

632

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ Notes Applicable to a Piping Component, 200-499201 = ’To be used only where specifically required.’202 = ’Use between blind flange and gasket.’203 = ’Use for thermowell connections.’204 = ’Use for hydrostatic vents and drains. Seal (bridge) weld

after testing in accordance with piping job specifications.’205 = ’Use bends for direction changes.’206 = ’Use at flanged equipment connections.’207 = ’Use for hydrostatic vents and drains.’208 = ’Use threaded plug for vent/drain valve; do not seal weld plug.’209 = ’To be used only where specifically required and/or between

blind flange and gasket.’210 = ’Use threaded plug for vent/drain valve; do not seal weld

plug. Vent/drain and instrument root valves with 1 inch nominaldiameter in carbon steel and 9Cr-1Mo materials provide morethan 3/16 inch but less than 1/4 inch CA.’

211 = ’Use of this component under certain pressure/temperatureconditions may provide less than 3/16 inch CA.’

214 = ’Use where full port is required.’220 = ’Install in the horizontal position only.’221 = ’Valve shall be in accordance with NACE MR-01-75.’222 = ’Use 0.75 inch diameter only at orifice flange taps.’223 = ’Use 0.5 inch diameter only at orifice flange taps.’224 = ’To be used only where specifically required. Valve sizes

16" and larger require electric motor operators.’253 = ’Use of unions and threaded fittings shall be limited to a

maximum temperature of 500 degF.’257 = ’When mating stainless steel flanges to ferritic steel

flanges, use studs corresponding to the ferritic flange.’259 = ’Double hub fittings are available in 90 degrees and 45

degrees elbows.’260 = ’Cement lined per AWWA-C205-80. Minimum lining thickness

shall be 0.3125 inch thick. Lining shall be Type II cement perASTM-C150 with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of3000 psi. Lining shall be flush with ends.’

276 = ’Remove internals of valves containing Teflon seats and/orseals prior to welding or backwelding.’

304 = ’For use in deluge systems.’325 = ’Do not use over 100 degF.’326 = ’Do not use over 150 degF.’328 = ’Do not use over 180 degF.’329 = ’Do not use over 200 degF.’330 = ’Do not use over 250 degF.’331 = ’Do not use over 300 degF.’332 = ’Do not use over 350 degF.’333 = ’Do not use over 400 degF.’334 = ’Do not use over 450 degF.’335 = ’Do not use over 500 degF.’336 = ’Do not use over 550 degF.’337 = ’Do not use over 600 degF.’338 = ’Do not use over 650 degF.’339 = ’Do not use over 700 degF.’340 = ’Do not use over 750 degF.’341 = ’Do not use over 800 degF.’

Notes Applicable to a Piping Specialty, 500-699

Notes Applicable to an Instrument Specialty, 700-899

633


CL530, Accessory/Item Type (125)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning ofexisting codelist values. Some data displays require that onlyvalues to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports requirethat only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.

1 = [Blank]

Accessory Type, 2-995 = ’AC =Actuator’10 = ’A =Alarm’20 = ’C =Controller’30 = ’I =Indicator’45 = ’PO =Positioner’50 = ’R =Recorder’55 = ’S =Switch’65 = ’T =Transmitter’75 = ’X =Unclassified’80 = ’Y =Converter’

Item Type, 100-125101 = ’Equipment nozzle’103 = ’Piping segment’105 = ’CV or regulator’107 = ’Relief device’109 = ’Other-in-line instrument’111 = ’Off-line instrument’113 = ’System function’115 = ’Instr connector’117 = ’Function label’121 = ’Other’

CL550, Operator Actuator Type (200)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-24 apply to operators for pipingcommodity valves whose dimensions are determined from tables whosenames are formed from attributes in the Piping Job Specification.Codelist numbers 25-40 apply to operators for piping commodityvalves whose dimensions are determined from tables whose namesdepend on the commodity codes for the valves. Codelist numbers41-99 apply to operators and actuators for piping and instrumentspecialty valves. Codelist numbers 101-150 should be used for userdefined operators with only primary orientaions, such as handwheelsand post indicators. Codelist numbers 151-200 should be used foruser defined operators with both primary orientations and secondaryorientations, such as levers and T-handles.

1 = [Blank]

Operators with Data Derived from Spec Parameters, 2-243 = ’Handwheel’4 = ’Handwheel if GCP > RCP’5 = ’Handwheel, inclined’9 = ’Wrench, short’11 = ’Wrench, long’17 = ’Lever’19 = ’T-handle, short’21 = ’T-handle, long’

634

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ Operators with Data Derived from Valve Codes, 25-4025 = ’Handwheel, special’27 = ’Wrench, special’29 = ’Gear, top mounted handwheel’31 = ’Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel’33 = ’Gear, side mounted handwheel’35 = ’Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel’39 = ’Lever, quick-action’40 = ’Post indicator’

Actuators, 41-9941 = ’Diaphragm’42 = ’Electro-Pneumatic’43 = ’Press-balanced diaphragm’45 = ’Regulator’49 = ’Single acting cylinder’51 = ’Double acting cylinder’53 = ’Pilot operated cylinder’57 = ’Motor’61 = ’Digital’65 = ’Electro-hydraulic’69 = ’Single solenoid’71 = ’Single solenoid w/reset’73 = ’Double solenoid’77 = ’Pilot’81 = ’Weight’85 = ’Manual’89 = ’Spring’91 = ’Capacitance sensor’93 = ’Ball float’95 = ’Displacement float’97 = ’Paddle wheel’

CL570, Design Standard (200)

1 = [Blank]10 = ’ASME-I’ [Power Boilers]11 = ’ASME-III’ [Nuclear]12 = ’ASME-VIII-1’ [Unfired Vessels]13 = ’ASME-VIII-2’ [Unfired Vessels]20 = ’ASME Fld Mets & AGA Rpt 3’ [Instruments]21 = ’ANSI-B31.1’ [Power]22 = ’ANSI-B31.2’ [Fuel Gas]23 = ’ANSI-B31.3’ [Petroleum]24 = ’ANSI-B31.4’ [Oil Transport]25 = ’ANSI-B31.5’ [Refrigeration]28 = ’ANSI-B31.8’ [Gas Transmission]29 = ’ANSI-B31.9’ [Building Services]38 = ’API-2000’ [Tank Venting]50 = ’AWWA’ [Water Services]51 = ’DIN’

60 = ’BS806’61 = ’BS3351’

635


CL572, Wall Thickness Equation

1 = [Blank]21 = ’ANSI B31.1a-1986’23 = ’ANSI B31.3-1987’

CL575, Geometry Standard (31999)

NOTE: The symbol "||" at the end of a description in this documentsignifies that the standard has been used in preparing RDB data.Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows:

o US practices 2-6999o European practices 1 (DIN) 7000-11999o European practices 2 (British) 12000-16999o European practices 3 (Finnish, French, etc. 17000-19999o International practices 1 (JIS) 20000-24999o International practices 2 (Australian, etc.) 25000-27999o Company practices 28000-31999

1 = [Blank]

US Practice Geometry Standards, 2-69996 = ’PDS-P1’ [REDE, RWELD, RPAD, BLSPC_>24"_API+/- thk varies,

BLSPO_>24"_API+/- thk varies]7 = ’PDS-P2’ [BLSPC_>24"__API+/-_0.375"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_0.375"th8 = ’PDS-P3’ [BLSPC_>24"_MSS+/- thk varies, BLSPO_>24"_MSS+/- thk vari11 = ’PDS-I1’ [BLSPC_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk]12 = ’PDS-I2’ [BLPAD_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk, BLSPA_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk]13 = ’PDS-I3’16 = ’PDS-Op1’17 = ’PDS-Op2’18 = ’PDS-Op3’

31 = ’ANSI-B16.1’ [Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||]33 = ’ANSI-B16.3’ [Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ||]34 = ’ANSI-B16.4’ [Cast Iron Threaded Fittings ||]35 = ’ANSI-B16.5’ [Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||]39 = ’ANSI-B16.9’ [Steel Beveled End Fittings ||]40 = ’ANSI-B16.10’ [Dimensions of Ferrous Valves ||]41 = ’ANSI-B16.11’ [Forged Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Fittings ||]42 = ’ANSI-B16.12’ [Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ||]44 = ’ANSI-B16.14’ [Ferrous Pipe Plugs and Bushings]45 = ’ANSI-B16.15’ [Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings ||]50 = ’ANSI-B16.20’ [RTJ Gaskets and Grooves ||]51 = ’ANSI-B16.21’ [Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges ||]52 = ’ANSI-B16.22’ [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ||]53 = ’ANSI-B16.23’ [Cast Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings ||]54 = ’ANSI-B16.24’ [Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||]55 = ’ANSI-B16.25’ [Beveled End Preparation]56 = ’ANSI-B16.26’ [Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubing]58 = ’ANSI-B16.28’ [Steel Beveled End Short Radius Elbows and Returns ||]59 = ’ANSI-B16.29’ [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings]64 = ’ANSI-B16.34’ [Valves Flanged and Beveled Ends ||]66 = ’ANSI-B16.36’ [Steel Orifice Flanges ||]69 = ’ANSI-B16.39’ [Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions ||]72 = ’ANSI-B16.42’ [Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fitting ||]73 = ’ANSI-B16.43’ [Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Solvent

Drainage Systems]

636

B. C

od

elists


81 = ’ANSI-B18.2.1’ [Square and Hex Bolts and Screws ||]82 = ’ANSI-B18.2.2’ [Square and Hex Nuts]100 = ’ANSI-B36.10M’ [Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe ||]109 = ’ANSI-B36.19M’ [Stainless Steel Pipe ||]

114 = ’API-5A’ [Casing, Tubing and Drill Pipe]115 = ’API-5B’ [Casing, Tubing and Line Pipe Threads]119 = ’API-5L’ [Line Pipe ||]120 = ’API-5LE’ [Polyethylene Line Pipe ||]122 = ’API-5LP’ [Thermoplastic Line Pipe ||]124 = ’API-5LS’ [Spiralweld Line Pipe ||]126 = ’API-5LU’ [Ultra High Test Heat Treated Line Pipe ||]127 = ’API-5LX’ [High Test Line Pipe]131 = ’API-6A’ [Wellhead Equipment]132 = ’API-6AB’ [30,000 PSI Flanged Wellhead Equipment]135 = ’API-6D’ [Pipeline Valves, End Closures, Connectors and Swivels]141 = ’API-526’ [Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valves]145 = ’API-590’ [Steel Line Blanks ||]146 = ’API-590Z1’ [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.125" CA ||]147 = ’API-590Z2’ [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.25" CA ||]153 = ’API-593’ [Ductile Iron Plug Valves]154 = ’API-594’ [Wafer Check Valves]155 = ’API-595’ [Cast Iron Gate Valves]157 = ’API-597’ [Steel Venturi Gate Valves]159 = ’API-599’ [Steel Plug Valves]160 = ’API-600’ [Steel Gate Valves ||]161 = ’API-601’ [Metallic Gaskets for Raised Face Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Connections ||]162 = ’API-602’ [Compact Steel Gate Valves]163 = ’API-603’ [Class 150 Cast Flanged End Gate Valves]164 = ’API-604’ [Ductile Iron Gate Valves]165 = ’API-605’ [Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges ||]166 = ’API-606’ [Compact Carbon Steel Gate Valves]169 = ’API-609’ [Butterfly Valves Lug and Wafer Type]

171 = ’ASTM-A74’ [Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings]172 = ’ASTM-C76’ [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe]173 = ’ASTM-C700’ [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and

Perforated Clay Pipe]174 = ’ASTM-D2464’ [Threaded PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80]176 = ’ASTM-D2466’ [Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 40 ||]177 = ’ASTM-D2467’ [Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80 ||]

179 = ’AWWA-C106’ [Cast Iron Pipe]181 = ’AWWA-C110’ [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3"-48" ||]184 = ’AWWA-C115’ [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe]186 = ’AWWA-C151’ [Ductile Iron Pipe ||]

190= ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring’[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||]

191= ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||]

192= ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’[Steel slip-on flanges CL275 ||]

193 = ’AWWA-C208’ [Steel Water Pipe Fittings]200 = ’AWWA-C500’ [Gate Valves 3"-48" for Water and Sewage Systems]204 = ’AWWA-C504’ [Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves]206 = ’AWWA-C506’ [Backflow Prevention Devices-Check Valves]207 = ’AWWA-C507’ [Ball Valves]208 = ’AWWA-C508’ [Swing Check Valves for Water Works Service 2"-24"]220 = ’AWWA-C900’ [PVC Pipe 4"-12" for Water]221 = ’AWWA-C901’ [Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for Water222 = ’AWWA-C902’ [Polybutylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for Water230 = ’AWWA-C950’ [Glass-Fiber Reinforced Pressure Pipe]

637


235 = ’PFI-ES-24’ [Pipe Bending Tolerances ||]

243 = ’ISA-S75.03’ [Face to Face Dimensions Globe Control Valves]244 = ’ISA-S75.04’ [Face to Face Dimensions Flangeless Control Valves]

252 = ’MSS-SP-42’ [CL150 Valves ||]253 = ’MSS-SP-43’ [Stainless Steel Buttwelding Fittings]254 = ’MSS-SP-44’ [Steel Pipe Line Flanges ||]255 = ’MSS-SP-51’ [CL150LW Cast Flanges and Flanged Fittings]268 = ’MSS-SP-58’ [Pipe Hangers and Supports]277 = ’MSS-SP-67’ [Butterfly Valves]278 = ’MSS-SP-68’ [High Pressure-Offset Seat Butterfly Valves]282 = ’MSS-SP-72’ [Ball Valves with Flanged or Beveled Ends]285 = ’MSS-SP-75’ [Wrought Beveled End Fittings]288 = ’MSS-SP-78’ [Cast Iron Plug Valves]289 = ’MSS-SP-79’ [Socketwelding Reducing Inserts]290 = ’MSS-SP-80’ [Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle & Check Valves]291 = ’MSS-SP-81’ [Flanged, Wafer Knife Gate Valves]293 = ’MSS-SP-83’ [Carbon Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Pipe Unions ||]295 = ’MSS-SP-88’ [Diaphragm Valves]297 = ’MSS-SP-95’ [Swage Nipples and Bull Plugs ||]

298 = ’NFPA-1963’ [Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose connections]300 = ’ASME BPE-97’

[Geometry standards that follow apply to specific manufacturers.If one of these standards is used to define a component, thefollowing information will be shown in brackets to the right of thegeometry standard:o For valves: the applicable model codes and vendor’s designationso For fittings: the applicable model codes will be shown unlessthe vendor’s designation is required to differentiate betweencomponents requiring a different geometry standard to assign themto the proper data table.1000 = ’Adamson 1’1001 = ’Adams 1’1025 = ’Aitken 1’ [BLPAD; BLSPA; TDRA; TDRB; TDRBW ||]1026 = ’Aitken Z1’ [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.125" CA ||]1027 = ’Aitken Z2’ [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.25" CA ||]1050 = ’Allied Pipe Products 1’1075 = ’Aldo Colombo 1’1100 = ’Aloyco 1’ [GATR-Fig_114; GATR-Fig_114DB; GATR-Fig_114EB; GATR-Fig_124;

GATR-Fig_2214A; GLOR-Fig_2310A; GLOR-Fig_2314A; GLOR-Fig_314; GLOR-Fig_31GLOR-Fig_314EB; GLOR-Fig_504; CKLR-Fig_554; CKLR-Fig_2554A; CKSR-Fig_2374CKSR-Fig_374; TKDR-Fig_751 ||]

1101 = ’Aloyco 2’ [GATR-Fig_2110; GATR-Fig_2114 ||]1125 = ’American Darling 1’ [H3W1-Fig_B-50-B ||]1130 = ’American DI Pipe’ [PIPE; L; LRB ||]1150 = ’American Valve 1’1175 = ’Amri 1’1200 = ’Anaconda 1’1225 = ’Anderson Greenwood 1’1250 = ’Anvil 1’1275 = ’A.O.Smith 1’1300 = ’Apollo 1’1325 = ’Argus 1’1350 = ’Armstrong 1’ [S51AC-Fig_K1SC; S70AC-Fig_2011; S70BC-Fig_2011 ||]1375 = ’Asahi/American 1’

1400 = ’Babbitt 1’1425 = ’Babcock and Wilcox 1’1450 = ’Badger Meters 1’1475 = ’Bailey Co 1’

638

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 1500 = ’Balon 1’1525 = ’Basic Engineering 1’1550 = ’Bestobel 1’1560 = ’Bete 1’ [SSP1-Series_N ||]1575 = ’Bonney Forge 1’ [GAT-Fig_9HLF-10; GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_9W-10;

GATEXB-Fig_VLL-10; GATEXB-Fig_VOLL-10; GLOR-Fig_HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30;GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60;CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50; CKLR-Fig_9WL-60; CKLR-Fig_HL-40;CKLR-Fig_9HLF-40; CKLRY-Fig_9Y-40; CKLRY-Fig_25Y-40; CAPOT; UN; L; LRB;SWOL; WOL; SOL; TOL; NOL; EOLLR; EOLSR; LOL ||]

1576 = ’Bonney Forge 2’ [GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_25W-10; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30;GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; GLOR-Fig_25W-30; GLOY-Fig_25Y-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40;CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60; CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50;CKLR-Fig_9WL-60 ||]

1577 = ’Bonney Forge 3’ [GATF-Fig_H-10; GATF-Fig_W-10; GATR-Fig_HL-10;GATR-Fig_WL-10; CKLR-Fig_HL-40; CKLR-Fig_WL-40 ||]

1585 = ’Boots & Coots 1’ [MN1-Spectrum_Allpha_6235 ||]1590 = ’Bray 1’1600 = ’Brooks Meters 1’

1625 = ’Cameron 1’1650 = ’Carbone 1’1675 = ’Ciba-Geigy 1’1700 = ’Clark Reliance 1’1725 = ’Clayton Automatic Valves 1’ [CKBP-Model_D; FLO-Series_427-01 ||]1750 = ’Clayton Mark 1’1775 = ’Clow 1’1800 = ’Cochrane 1’1825 = ’Condren 1’1850 = ’Continental Emsco 1’1875 = ’Cooper Valve 1’1900 = ’Crane 1’ [GATF-Fig_3904U; GATR-Fig_424; GATR-Fig_431UB; BALR-Fig_9302;

GLOF-Fig_3944U; GLOR-Fig_14 1/2P; GLOR-Fig_70; GLOY-Fig_7189; NEE-Fig_88;CKS-Fig_373;CKLF-Fig_3973U; CKSR-Fig_36; CKSR-Fig_137; FOOT-Fig_394;FOOT-Fig_395; FLWN; FSO; L; LRB ||]

1925 = ’Crosby 1’

1950 = ’Daniel 1’1975 = ’Demco 1’2000 = ’Dezurik 1’2025 = ’Dixon 1’2050 = ’Dresser 1’2075 = ’Dover 1’2100 = ’DOW 1’ [TRI-Lining_SL; TRI-Lining_PPL, TRI-Lining_KL ||]2150 = ’Duo Seal 1’2155 = ’Dur-O-Lock 1’ [CPL ||]2175 = ’Durco 1’

2200 = ’Elkhart 1’2225 = ’Enpro 1’2250 = ’Epsco 1’2275 = ’Everest 1’

2300 = ’Fabri-Valve 1’ [KNF-Fig_36 ||]2325 = ’Fairbanks 1’2350 = ’Fasani 1’2375 = ’Fetterolf 1’2400 = ’Fibercast 1’2425 = ’Fike 1’2450 = ’Fisher 1’2475 = ’Flexitallic 1’2500 = ’Flowline 1’2525 = ’FMC 1’2550 = ’Foxboro 1’

639

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 2575 = ’Garlok 1’2600 = ’General 1’2625 = ’Geosource 1’2650 = ’Gestra 1’2660 = ’Gladding McBean 1’ [REDC; E45; E90; M451; M452; L ||]2675 = ’Graylock 1’2700 = ’Grinnell 1’ [BALR-Fig_3022; CAPOT; UNO; E45U; E90RST; TOUB; TOUR ||]2715 = ’Grinnell Fire Prot 1’ [DEL-Model_A-4; SSP-Mulsifyre-Projector ||]2725 = ’Grove 1’2750 = ’Gulf 1’

2775 = ’Hammond 1’2800 = ’Hancock 1’ [BDA-Fig_5505W ||]2825 = ’Haws 1’ [SSEW1-Fig_8309; SSEW1-Fig 8309CRP ||]2850 = ’Heaton 1’2860 = ’Hex 1’2875 = ’Hindle-Hamer 1’2900 = ’Hitachi 1’2915 = ’Hoke 1’2925 = ’Hydril 1’

2950 = ’Imperial Eastman 1’2975 = ’Ishida 1’2980 = ’ITT 1’

3000 = ’Jacoby Tarbox 1’3025 = ’Jamesbury 1’ [BALR-Style_B; BALSP-Type_530S; BAL3W-Style_AM150FD;

BAL3W-Style_DM150FD ||]3026 = ’Jamesbury 2’ [BALR-Style_A ||]3027 = ’Jamesbury 3’ [BALR-Type_2000_Brass ||]3028 = ’Jamesbury 4’ [BALF-Type_4000; BALR-Type_4000 ||]3050 = ’Jenkins 1’3075 = ’Jerguson 1’3100 = ’Judd Valve 1’

3125 = ’Kamyr-Neles 1’3150 = ’Kemp 1’3175 = ’Kennedy 1’3200 = ’Keystone 1’3225 = ’Kinka Kikai 1’3250 = ’Kitz 1’3275 = ’KTM 1’3300 = ’Kubota 1’

3325 = ’L & M Valve 1’3350 = ’Ladish 1’ [CAPOT; L; LRB ||]3375 = ’Lamons 1’3400 = ’Lukens 1’3425 = ’Lunkenheimer 1’

3445 = ’Mac-Iron 1’3450 = ’Magnetrol 1’3475 = ’Malbranque 1’3500 = ’Maloney 1’3525 = ’Mark Controls/Centerline 1’ [BFYLP-Series_A; BFYLP-Series_LT;

BYFLP-Series_504 ||]3550 = ’Mark Controls/Flowseal 1’ [BFYHP-Style_1LB ||]3575 = ’Mark Controls/Marpac 1’3600 = ’Mark Controls/Pacific 1’ [GATSP-Fig_21555; GATSP-Fig_55509; GATSP-Fig_5GLOSP-Fig_56009; GLOSP-Fig_56015; CKSSP-Fig_58809-5-WE; CKSSP-Fig_58815-7-WE;

CKST-Fig_160S ||]3625 = ’Marlin 1’

640

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 3650 = ’Marwin 1’3675 = ’Masoneilan 1’3700 = ’Media 1’ [BFYLP]3725 = ’Milwaukee 1’3750 = ’Mueller/Muessco Brass 1’3775 = ’Mueller/Muessco Steam Specialty 1’ [S51AC-Fig_761WE; S51AC-Fig_862BC;

S51AC-Fig_762 ||]

3800 = ’Navco 1’3825 = ’Nells 1’3850 = ’Newco 1’3860 = ’Nibco 1’3875 = ’Nicholson 1’ [S78AC-Fig_N302L ||]3900 = ’Nippon-Benkan 1’ [BW fittings above 48" ||]3925 = ’Nupro 1’

3950 = ’OPW 1’3975 = ’Orbit 1’4000 = ’Oseco 1’

4025 = ’Pan Korea 1’4030 = ’Parker CPI 1’4050 = ’Parks Cramer 1’4075 = ’Peabody Dore 1’4100 = ’Penberthy 1’4125 = ’Penn-AirCheck 1’4150 = ’Persta 1’4175 = ’Petrolvalves 1’4200 = ’Posi-Seal 1’ [BFYHP-Model A31; BFYHP-Model A21; BFYHP-Model A11 ||]4225 = ’Powhatan 1’ [HOS-No_18-217; HOSA-No_18-157; HRST1-No_30-333 ||]4250 = ’Powell 1’4275 = ’Pratt 1’ [BFYLP-Model_PIVA & IBV-FM4; Groundhog ||]4300 = ’Premafu 1’4325 = ’Protectoseal 1’

4335 = ’R & G Sloane’ [BALF-Fig_1081; CAPOT; FS; INSR1]4350 = ’Resistoflex 1’ [PIN-Code_R6000D1 ||]4375 = ’Ring-O 1’4400 = ’Rockwell 1’ [DIA-Type_STD_Unlined ||]4425 = ’Rockwell/Edwards 1’ [GLOA-Fig_849; GLOA-Fig_849Y; GLOYR-Fig_848;

GLOYR-Fig_848Y; GLOYR-Fig_1048; GLOYR-Fig_1048Y; CKLRY-Fig_36178;CKLRY-Fig_36278; NEE-Fig_4152; CKST-Fig_302; CKST-Fig_302Y; CKAST-Fig_303CKAST-Fig_303Y; CKAST-Fig_869; CKAST-Fig_869Y; CKYST-Fig_302; CKYST-Fig_6BDY-Fig_1641; ||]

4426 = ’Rockwell/Edwards 2’ [CKLRY-Fig_832Y; GLOY-Fig_36124; GLOY-Fig_36128;CKLRY-Fig_1032Y; CKAST-Fig_605Y; CKAST-Fig_607Y; BDA-Fig_1643Y ||]

4427 = ’Rockwell/Edwards 3’ [GLOY-Fig_7514Y ||]4450 = ’Rockwell/McCanna 1’ [BAL3W-Type_500-3WAY ||]4475 = ’Rockwell/Nordstorm 1’ [PLUVP-Fig_4169; PLU3W-Fig_3813; PLU3W-Fig_4812;

PLU3W-Fig_4813; PLU3W-Fig_5115; PLU3W-Fig_5119; PLU3W-Fig_5215;PLU3W-Fig_5219; PLU4W-Fig_3823; PLU4W-Fig_4822; PLU4W-Fig_5125;PLU4W-Fig_5129 ||]

4500 = ’R P & C 1’

4520 = ’Sarco 1’4522 = ’Saunders 1’4525 = ’Sella 1’4550 = ’Serck Audco 1’4575 = ’Serfilco 1’4600 = ’Shoritsu 1’4625 = ’Smith 1’ [GATF-Fig_888; GATF-Fig_5870; GATR-Fig_800; GATR-Fig_870;

GATR-Fig_1500; GATR-Fig_1570; GATEX-Fig_811 & 812 MPE/THD; GATEX-Fig_876

641


& 877 MPE/THD; GATEXB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GATXBA-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/SGATXBB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GLOR-Fig_G80; GLOR-Fig_G87; GLOR-Fig_G150;GLOR-Fig_G157; CKLR-Fig_B80; CKLR-Fig_C80; CKLR-Fig_C150; CKLR-Fig_SB80;CKLR-Fig_SC80 ||]

4626 = ’Smith 2’ [GATEX-Fig_813 & 814 MPE/SW; GATEX-Fig_878 & 879 MPE/SW ||]4650 = ’Spraying Systems 1’4675 = ’Spirax Sarco 1’4700 = ’Stanco 1’4725 = ’Standard Fittings 1’ [CAPOT; SWGC; SWGE ||]4750 = ’Stang Hydronics 1’ [M1-Fig BB0309-21 w/shapertip nozzle; ME1-Fig BB35614751 = ’Stang Hydronics 2’ [M1-Fig_BB0309-21 w/fog nozzle; ME1-Fig B22999 ||]4752 = ’Stang Hydronics 3’ [ME1-Fig_BB3561 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||]4753 = ’Stang Hydronics 4’ [ME1-Fig_BB3377 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||]4775 = ’Stockham 1’4800 = ’Strahman 1’4825 = ’Swagelok 1’

4850 = ’Tapco 1’4875 = ’Taylor 1’4900 = ’Taylor Forge 1’4901 = ’Taylor Forge 2, Rev 1957’ [L; S-STD WT ||]4925 = ’Teledyne Farris 1’4950 = ’Texas Bolt 1’4975 = ’Thevignot 1’5000 = ’Titeflex 1’5025 = ’TK 1’5050 = ’TKM 1’ [GAT-Fig_100 ||]5060 = ’Top Line 1’5075 = ’Triangle 1’5085 = ’Tri-Clover 1’5100 = ’Truflo 1’5125 = ’TRW/Mission 1’ [||]5150 = ’Tubeturn 1’ [FWN; FEWN; FOWNA; FOWNB; CAPBV; E453D; E90LT; E903D; L; SA5175 = ’Tufline 1’5200 = ’Tyler 1’ [CPL; REDC; E45LT; E90LT; L ||]

5225 = ’Valvotecnic 1’5250 = ’Vanessa 1’5275 = ’Velan 1’ [S3AC-Fig_N675 ||]5300 = ’Victaulic 1’5325 = ’Viking 1’5350 = ’Vitas 1’5375 = ’Vogt 1’ [GATR-Series_15373; GLOR-Series_15141; CKLR-Series_15701;

NEE-Series_22461; NEE-Series_SW22461; CAPOT; UN; E90U; E90ST; L ||]

5400 = ’Wada 1’5425 = ’Wallworth 1’5450 = ’Watts Regulator 1’5475 = ’Weco 1’5500 = ’WFI 1’5525 = ’Winston 1’ [S49AC-T-Strainer Type-59 W/flg’d cover; S53AC-Basket-StrainFig 51-WIP W/CL150 flg’d cover & 3/4" SWE drain||]5535 = ’Wirt & Knox 1’5550 = ’WKM 1’5575 = ’Worcester 1’

5600 = ’Yarway 1’ [CKAR-Fig_5301; CKAR-Fig_5302; BDA-Fig_6909-C; BDY-Fig_6911-CTKDR-Fig_8106 ||]5625 = ’Yoneki 1’

642

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 5650 = ’Zurn 1’

o European practices 1 (DIN) 7000-11999

General Specifications7000 = ’DIN 2401-1 Pressure, nominal’7001 = ’DIN 2401-2 Pressure, nominal’7002 = ’DIN 2402 Diameter,nominal’

Pipes

7010 = ’DIN 2448’ ;Steel pipes, seamless7011 = ’DIN 2458’ ;Steel pipes, welded7012 = ’DIN 2440’ ;Threaded pipes, medium weight7013 = ’DIN 2441’ ;Threaded pipes, heavy weight7014 = ’DIN 2442’ ;Threaded pipes, spec. qualty7015 = ’DIN 2445’ ;Seamless steel pipes,dyn. load7016 = ’DIN 2460’ ;Steel pipes for water7017 = ’DIN 2462’ ;Seamless ferritic steel pipes7018 = ’DIN 2463’ ;Seamless austenitic steel pipes7019 = ’DIN 2391’ ;Seamless precision steel tubes7020 = ’DIN 2393’ ;Welded precision steel tubes

7025 = ’DIN 2848’ ;Flanged lined pipes7026 = ’DIN 2873’ ;Flanged lined enamelled pipes

7030 = ’DIN 2462’ ;Seamless stainless steel tubes7031 = ’DIN 2463’ ;Welded austenitic steel pipes and tubes

7040 = ’DIN 8062’ ;Pipes of unplasticized polyvinyl chlor.7041 = ’DIN 8077’ ;Polypropylen (PP) pipes

Flanges7100 = ’DIN 2530’ ;Cast iron flanges, PN 2,57101 = ’DIN 2531’ ;Cast iron flanges, PN 67102 = ’DIN 2532’ ;Cast iron flanges, PN 107103 = ’DIN 2533’ ;Cast iron flanges, PN 167104 = ’DIN 2534’ ;Cast iron flanges, PN 257105 = ’DIN 2535’ ;Cast iron flanges, PN 407106 = ’DIN 2543’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 167107 = ’DIN 2544’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 257108 = ’DIN 2545’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 407109 = ’DIN 2546’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 647110 = ’DIN 2547’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 1007111 = ’DIN 2548’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 1607112 = ’DIN 2549’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 2507113 = ’DIN 2550’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 3207114 = ’DIN 2551’ ;Cast steel flanges, PN 4007115 = ’DIN 2558’ ;Plain face oval screwed flange PN 67116 = ’DIN 2561’ ;Oval screwed flange w/ socket PN 10,167117 = ’DIN 2565’ ;Screwed flange PN 6 rund7118 = ’DIN 2566’ ;Screwed flange PN 10,167119 = ’DIN 2567’ ;Screwed flange PN 25,407120 = ’DIN 2568’ ;Screwed flange PN 647121 = ’DIN 2569’ ;Screwed flange PN 1007122 = ’DIN 2630’ ;Welding neck flange PN 17123 = ’DIN 2631’ ;Welding neck flange PN 67124 = ’DIN 2632’ ;Welding neck flange PN 107125 = ’DIN 2633’ ;Welding neck flange PN 167126 = ’DIN 2634’ ;Welding neck flange PN 257127 = ’DIN 2635’ ;Welding neck flange PN 407128 = ’DIN 2636’ ;Welding neck flange PN 64

643

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 7129 = ’DIN 2637’ ;Welding neck flange PN 1007130 = ’DIN 2638’ ;Welding neck flange PN 1607131 = ’DIN 2628’ ;Welding neck flange PN 2507132 = ’DIN 2629’ ;Welding neck flange PN 3207133 = ’DIN 2627’ ;Welding neck flange PN 4007134 = ’DIN 2673’ ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 107135 = ’DIN 2667’ ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 1607136 = ’DIN 2668’ ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 2507137 = ’DIN 2669’ ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 3207138 = ’DIN 2573’ ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 67139 = ’DIN 2576’ ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 107140 = ’DIN 2641’ ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 67141 = ’DIN 2642’ ;Slip-on flange, upturned wldg PN 107142 = ’DIN 2652’ ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 67143 = ’DIN 2653’ ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 107144 = ’DIN 2655’ ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 257145 = ’DIN 2656’ ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 407146 = ’DIN 2501’ ;Flanges, Dimensions7147 = ’DIN 2512’ ;Flanges, tongue & groove7148 = ’DIN 2512’ ;Rings7149 = ’DIN 2513’ ;Flanges, projection & recess7150 = ’DIN 2514’ ;Projection w/ groove & recess7160 = ’DIN 2527’ ;Flange, blind PN 6,10,16,25,40,64,1007161 = ’DIN 2848’ ;Reducing flanges, lined7162 = ’DIN 2873’ ;Reducing and blind flanges, enamelled

Elbows7200 = ’DIN 2605’ ;Tube bends f. butt wldg7201 = ’DIN 2606’ ;Tube bends, steel 5d7202 = ’DIN 2916’ ;Bending radii, seaml.& wld pipes7203 = ’DIN 2983’ ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, bends7204 = ’DIN 2987’ ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows7205 = ’DIN 2987’ ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows, reduced7206 = ’DIN 2950’ ;Malleable cast iron fittings, elbows

7210 = ’DIN 2605-1’ ;Elbows, bend radius 1d, standard 12.857211 = ’DIN 2605-1’ ;Elbows, bend radius 1.5d, standard 12.857212 = ’DIN 2605-1’ ;Elbows, bend radius 2.5d, standard 12.857213 = ’DIN 2605-1’ ;Elbows, bend radius 5d, standard 12.857214 = ’DIN 2605-1’ ;Elbows, bend radius 10d, standard 12.857215 = ’DIN 2605-2’ ;Elbows, bend radius 1d, standard 12.857216 = ’DIN 2605-2’ ;Elbows, bend radius 1.5d, standard 12.857217 = ’DIN 2605-2’ ;Elbows, bend radius 2.5d, standard 12.857218 = ’DIN 2605-2’ ;Elbows, bend radius 5d, standard 12.857219 = ’DIN 2605-2’ ;Elbows, bend radius 10d, standard 12.85

7230 = ’DIN 2848’ ;Flanged lined steel fittings, Bends7231 = ’DIN 2873’ ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Bends

7240 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Pipe bends B1,B27241 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb. W1,W2,part 67242 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb.W3,W4,part 10

Reducers7300 = ’DIN 2616’ ;Steel fittings, reducers7301 = ’DIN 2990’ ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Bushings7302 = ’DIN 2988’ ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Reducing sockets7303 = ’DIN 2950’ ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Reducing sockets7304 = ’DIN 2950’ ; - " - , male and female connections, Bushings

644

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 7310 = ’DIN 2848’ ;Flanged lined steel fittings, Reducers7311 = ’DIN 2873’ ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Reducers

7320 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. R1, part 97321 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. NRGI, part 97322 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. R2, part 107323 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. R3, part 11

Branches7400 = ’DIN 2615’ ;Butt wldg steel fittings;T7401 = ’DIN 2618’ ;Welding saddles, short7402 = ’DIN 2618’ ;Welding saddles, long7403 = ’DIN 2619’ ;Bends for welding7404 = ’DIN 2987’ ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T7405 = ’DIN 2987’ ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T;redcd7406 = ’DIN 2950’ ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Tees, Crosses

7410 = ’DIN 2848’ ;Flanged lined steel fittings, T7411 = ’DIN 2873’ ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, T

7420 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T1,T5 part 27421 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T2, part 77422 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T2G, part 77423 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T3, part 10

Caps7500 = ’DIN 2617’ ;Butt wldg steel fittings, Caps7501 = ’DIN 2991’ ;Threaded steel fittings, Caps7502 = ’DIN 2950’ ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Caps

7510 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K1, part 87511 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K2, part 10

Other fittings7600 = ’DIN 2981’ ;Threaded steel fittings with long screw thread7601 = ’DIN 2982’ ;Threaded steel fittings, Parallel Nipples7602 = ’DIN 2982’ ;Threaded steel fittings, Taper Nipples7603 = ’DIN 2986’ ;Threaded steel fittings, Sockets7604 = ’DIN 2990’ ;Threaded steel fittings, Hexagon Nipples7605 = ’DIN 2991’ ;Threaded steel fittings, Plain plugs7606 = ’DIN 2993’ ;Threaded steel fittings, Pipe unions

7610 = ’DIN 2950’ ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Sockets, Unions,;Nipples, Plugs etc.

7620 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Soc. M1,MGI, p. 8

7630 = ’DIN 2848’ ;Flanged lined steel fittings, spacers7631 = ’DIN 2873’ ;Flanged lined steel fittings enamelled, spacers

Bolts and Nuts8000 = ’DIN 934’8001 = ’DIN 931’

Gaskets8100 = ’DIN 2690’ ;Gasket for plain face C8101 = ’DIN 2691’ ;Gasket for tongue & groove8102 = ’DIN 2692’ ;Gasket for recessed faces8103 = ’DIN 2693’ ;Rings for grooved faces8104 = ’DIN 2695’ ;Diaphragm8105 = ’DIN 2696’ ;Lenticular gaskets8106 = ’DIN 2697’ ;Grooved O- rings8107 = ’DIN 2698’ ;Corrugated steel sheet

645

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Valves9000 = ’Non conform DIN 3202’9010 = ’DIN 3202-F’ ; Teil 19020 = ’DIN 3202-S’ ; Teil 29030 = ’DIN 3202-K’ ; Teil 39040 = ’DIN 3202-M’ ; Teil 49050 = ’DIN 3202-F’ ; Teil 5

Dummy standard

9999 = ’Dummy DIN Std’ ; Used for engineered items and instruments

British Standards geometry standards 12000-16999

sub ranges (provisional) :-12000-12099 pipes12100-12199 flanges12200-12599 fittings12600-12999 valves13000-13199 bolts13200-13499 gaskets

PIPES12000 = ’BS3600 table 1 carbon and low alloy steel tubes’12001 = ’BS3600 table 2 austenitic stainless steel tubes’12002 = ’BS3600 table 3 high alloy ferritic steel tubes’12003 = ’BS3600 table 4 cs tubes for compression fitting - tbi’12004 = ’BS3600 table 5 ss tubes for compression fitting - tbi’

12010 = ’BS1387 tables 3,4 and 5 light,medium and heavy’

12015 = ’BS1600 part 2 steel pipe for petroleum industry’

FLANGES

12100 = ’BS4504 p1 steel flanges for pipe,valves and fittings’12101 = ’BS4504 p1 iron flanges for pipe,valves and fittings - tbi’

12110 = ’BS1560 p2 steel pipe flanges Metric dimensions’

FITTINGS

12200 = ’BS1740 part 1 screwed wrought steel pipe fittings ’12210 = ’BS1965 part 1 butt welding pipe fittings - CS’12220 = ’BS3799 steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (mm)’12221 = ’BS3799 steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (in)’12230 = ’BS1640 part 3/4 steel butt-welding pipe fittings ’

VALVES

12600 = ’BS2080 flanged and butt-welded steel valves’12620 = ’BS5150’12625 = ’BS5151’12630 = ’BS5152’12635 = ’BS5153’12640 = ’BS5154’12645 = ’BS5155’12646 = ’BS5155 and app A’12650 = ’BS5156’12651 = ’BS5156 and app A’12655 = ’BS5157’12656 = ’BS5157 and app A’

646

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 12660 = ’BS5158’12661 = ’BS5158 and app A’12665 = ’BS5159’12666 = ’BS5159 and app A’12670 = ’BS5160’12671 = ’BS5160 and app A’

gaskets

13001 = ’BS4865:part 1 - non-metallic for BS4504 flanges’13002 = ’BS4865:part 2 - spiral wound for BS4504 flanges’13010 = ’BS3381 - spiral wound for BS1560 flanges’

bolting13200 = ’BS4882 metric series bolting’13210 = ’BS4882 inch series bolting’

dummy13999 = ’dummy BS code’

CL576, Table Suffix/End Standard - Green (999)

NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows:o US practices 2-99o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199o European practices 2 (British) 200-299o European practices 3 (Finnish, French, etc. 300-399o International practices 1 (JIS) 400-499o International practices 2 (Australian, etc.) 500-599o Company practices 900-999

1 = [Blank]

US Practice Table Suffixes, 2-995 = ’Default’ [See below for definition]6 = ’PDS-1’ [See specific table for details]7 = ’PDS-2’ [See specific table for details]8 = ’PDS-3’ [See specific table for details]10 = ’ID Duct’ [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter]

12 = ’ANSI-B16.12’ [Cast iron drainage fittings]15 = ’ANSI-B16.15’ [Cast bronze fittings]22 = ’ANSI-B16.22’ [Copper solder joint pressure fittings]23 = ’ANSI-B16.23’ [Copper solder joint drainage fittings]24 = ’ANSI-B16.24’ [Bronze flanges]29 = ’ANSI-B16.36’ [Orifice flanges]30 = ’ANSI-B16.42’ [Ductile iron flanges and fittings]33 = ’ANSI-B1.20.3’ [Dryseal pipe threads]37 = ’ANSI-B1.20.7’ [Hose coupling screw threads]

40 = ’ASME BPE-97 (PE)’41 = ’ASME BPE-97 (MCE)’

45 = ’ASTM-A74’ [Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings]46 = ’ASTM-C76’ [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe]47 = ’ASTM-C700’ [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perfor

Clay Pipe]

647

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 49 = ’AWWA-C110’ [Iron fittings]50 = ’AWWA-C115’ [Iron pipe and fittings]55 = ’AWWA-C151’ [Ductile iron pipe]60 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring’

[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]61 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’

[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]62 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’

[Steel slip-on flanges CL275]

70 = ’API-5LE’ [Polyethylene fittings]75 = ’API-6A’ [Wellhead flanges and fittings]79 = ’API-605-B’ [API-605 blind flanges. These are based on API-605 flange

bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses]80 = ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ [MSS non-blind flanges]81 = ’MSS-SP-44-B’ [MSS blind flanges]

85 = ’Crosby’86 = ’Consolidated’87 = ’Lonergan’88 = ’Top Line’90 = ’Tube-Turn’91 = ’Dow’92 = ’Aloyco’93 = ’Yarway’94 = ’Teledyne Farris 1’95 = ’R & G Sloane’96 = ’American DI Pipe’97 = ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings]98 = ’Taylor Forge’99 = ’Vendor 4’

CL No. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type", whichrepresents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tablesfor dimensional parameters will bedefined. The system will defaultto table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination typetable are required in defining the component but the component endsare other than male termination. The basis for this table suffixwill be as follows:

End Termination Type Basis for Table ValuesFlat-face flanged.................ANSI-B16.1 or B16.5

Raised-face flanged...............ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42,in this order of precedence

RTJ-face flanged..................ANSI-B16.5

Tongue/male-face flanged..........ANSI-B16.5

Groove/female-face flanged........ANSI-B16.5

Flat-face lap-flanged.............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

Raised-face lap-flanged...........ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

RTJ-face lap-flanged..............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

Tongue/male-face lap-flanged......ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

648

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ Groove/female-face lap-flanged....ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

All thru-bolted...................For sizes and ratings for which API-590 appliethe value of parameter "P" shall be taken fromAPI-590. For sizes and ratings for which API-does not apply, the bolt circle diameter fromANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in thorder of precendence, less one bolt diameter l1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P".

Male RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None

Flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None

Raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None

RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None

Flat-full-face thru-bolted........DOW

Male..............................ANSI-B36.10M, ANSI-B36-19M, API-5L, API-5LE,API-5LP, API-5LS or API-5LU

PVC & CPVC socket.................API-5LP, ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467

Socketwelded......................For pressure ratings XXXX#s, per basis definedin the applicable generic tables;for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, perANSI-B16.11 and ANSI-B16.5.

Female threadedthread engagement per Table 2.4 of 2630-33

..................................Forged steel.For pressure ratings XXXX#s,defined in the applicable generic tables; forpressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSIand ANSI-B16.5. In all cases, thread engagemewill be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33descriptions in the applicable generic tables.In all cases, thread engagement will be perTable 2.4 of 2630-33

Female grooved....................Victaulic catalog G100E

Female quick connect..............

Female ferrule....................

Female hose.......................

Mechanical joint bell.............AWWA-C110

Gasket............................Not applicable

Bolt..............................Not applicable

Nut...............................Not applicable

User defined......................None


649

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Codelist numbers used for DIN European practiceGeneric dimension data select flag access starts here

105 = ’Gen blt & fem end prep dim’

111 = ’Blt dim for cast steel flanges’112 = ’Blt dim for cast iron flanges’113 = ’Blt dim for oval screwed flanges’114 = ’Blt dim for screwed flanges’115 = ’Blt dim for sold & weld flanges’116 = ’Blt dim for lap flanges’117 = ’Blt dim lap flanges w/ plain collars’118 = ’Blt dim for loose flanges w/ weld neck’119 = ’Blt dim for loose flanges in enamelled componnents’

125 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 1’126 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 2’

129 = ’OD for plastic pipes’

130 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 100’131 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 160’132 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 250’133 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 320’134 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 400’

140 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 64-100’141 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 160’142 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 250’143 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 320’144 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 400’

150 = ’OD acc to DIN 2391’

160 = ’OD acc to DIN 2393’

170 = ’OD acc to DIN 2440’171 = ’OD acc to DIN 2441’179 = ’OD for threaded components’

British Standards

205 = ’default metric’206 = ’default converted imperial’

210 = ’plate flanges BS4504’

CL577, Table Suffix/End Standard - Red (999)

NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows:o US practices 2-99o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199o European practices 2 (British) 200-299o European practices 3 (Finnish, French, etc. 300-399o International practices 1 (JIS) 400-499o International practices 2 (Australian, etc.) 500-599o Company practices 900-999

650

B. C

od

elists


1 = [Blank]

US Practice Table Suffixes, 2-995 = ’Default’ [See below for definition]6 = ’PDS-1’ [See specific table for details]7 = ’PDS-2’ [See specific table for details]8 = ’PDS-3’ [See specific table for details]10 = ’ID Duct’ [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter]

12 = ’ANSI-B16.12’ [Cast iron drainage fittings]15 = ’ANSI-B16.15’ [Cast bronze fittings]22 = ’ANSI-B16.22’ [Copper solder joint pressure fittings]23 = ’ANSI-B16.23’ [Copper solder joint drainage fittings]24 = ’ANSI-B16.24’ [Bronze flanges]29 = ’ANSI-B16.36’ [Orifice flanges]30 = ’ANSI-B16.42’ [Ductile iron flanges and fittings]33 = ’ANSI-B1.20.3’ [Dryseal pipe threads]37 = ’ANSI-B1.20.7’ [Hose coupling screw threads]

40 = ’ASME BPE-97 (PE)’41 = ’ASME BPE-97 (MCE)’

45 = ’ASTM-A74’ [Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings]46 = ’ASTM-C76’ [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe]47 = ’ASTM-C700’ [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perfor

Clay Pipe]

49 = ’AWWA-C110’ [Iron fittings]50 = ’AWWA-C115’ [Iron pipe and fittings]55 = ’AWWA-C151’ [Ductile iron pipe]60 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring’

[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]61 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’

[Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175]62 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’

[Steel slip-on flanges CL275]

70 = ’API-5LE’ [Polyethylene fittings]75 = ’API-6A’ [Wellhead flanges and fittings]79 = ’API-605-B’ [API-605 blind flanges. These are based on API-605 flange

bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses]80 = ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ [MSS non-blind flanges]81 = ’MSS-SP-44-B’ [MSS blind flanges]

85 = ’Crosby’86 = ’Consolidated’87 = ’Lonergan’90 = ’Tube-Turn’91 = ’Dow’92 = ’Aloyco’93 = ’Yarway’94 = ’Teledyne Farris 1’95 = ’R & G Sloane’96 = ’American DI Pipe’97 = ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings]98 = ’Taylor Forge’99 = ’Vendor 4’

CL No. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type", whichrepresents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tablesfor dimensional parameters will bedefined. The system will defaultto table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination type

651

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ table are required in defining the component but the component endsare other than male termination. The basis for this table suffixwill be as follows:

End Termination Type Basis for Table ValuesFlat-face flanged.................ANSI-B16.1 or B16.5

Raised-face flanged...............ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42,in this order of precedence

RTJ-face flanged..................ANSI-B16.5

Tongue/male-face flanged..........ANSI-B16.5

Groove/female-face flanged........ANSI-B16.5

Flat-face lap-flanged.............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

Raised-face lap-flanged...........ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

RTJ-face lap-flanged..............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

Tongue/male-face lap-flanged......ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

Groove/female-face lap-flanged....ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

All thru-bolted...................For sizes and ratings for which API-590 appliethe value of parameter "P" shall be taken fromAPI-590. For sizes and ratings for which API-does not apply, the bolt circle diameter fromANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in thorder of precendence, less one bolt diameter l1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P".

Male RTJ-face thru-bolted withcap screws........................None

Flat-face thru-bolted withcap screws........................None

Raised-face thru-bolted withcap screws........................None

RTJ-face thru-bolted withcap screws........................None

Flat-full-face thru-bolted........DOW

Male..............................ANSI-B36.10M, ANSI-B36-19M, API-5L, API-5LE,API-5LP, API-5LS or API-5LU

PVC & CPVC socket.................API-5LP, ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467

Socketwelded......................For pressure ratings XXXX#s, per basis definedin the applicable generic tables;for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, perANSI-B16.11 and ANSI-B16.5.

Female threadedthread engagement per Table 2.4 of 2630-33

..................................Forged steel.For pressure ratings XXXX#s,defined in the applicable generic tables; for

652

B. C

od

elists


pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSIand ANSI-B16.5. In all cases, thread engagemewill be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33descriptions in the applicable generic tables.In all cases, thread engagement will be perTable 2.4 of 2630-33

Female grooved....................Victaulic catalog G100E

Female quick connect..............

Female ferrule....................

Female hose.......................

Mechanical joint bell.............AWWA-C110

Gasket............................Not applicable

Bolt..............................Not applicable

Nut...............................Not applicable

User defined......................None


Codelist numbers used for DIN European practiceGeneric dimension data select flag access starts here

105 = ’Gen blt & fem end prep dim’

111 = ’Blt dim for cast steel flanges’112 = ’Blt dim for cast iron flanges’113 = ’Blt dim for oval screwed flanges’114 = ’Blt dim for screwed flanges’115 = ’Blt dim for sold & weld flanges’116 = ’Blt dim for lap flanges’117 = ’Blt dim lap flanges w/ plain collars’118 = ’Blt dim for loose flanges w/ weld neck’119 = ’Blt dim for loose flanges in enamelled componnents’

125 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 1’126 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 2’

129 = ’OD for plastic pipes’

130 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 100’131 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 160’132 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 250’133 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 320’134 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 400’

140 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 64-100’141 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 160’142 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 250’143 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 320’144 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-2 PN 400’

150 = ’OD acc to DIN 2391’

653

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 160 = ’OD acc to DIN 2393’

170 = ’OD acc to DIN 2440’171 = ’OD acc to DIN 2441’179 = ’OD for threaded components’

181 = ’Wallthickness Reihe 1’182 = ’Wallthickness Reihe 2’183 = ’Wallthickness Reihe 3’184 = ’Wallthickness Reihe 4’185 = ’Wallthickness Reihe 5’

191 = ’Wallthickness selection 1’192 = ’Wallthickness selection 2’193 = ’Wallthickness selection 3’194 = ’Wallthickness selection 4’195 = ’Wallthickness selection 5’

British Standards

205 = ’default metric’206 = ’default converted imperial’

210 = ’plate flanges BS4504’

CL578, Weight Code (399)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-99 have been reserved for values thatapply to US practices. Codelist numbers 100-399 have been reservedfor values that apply to practices in other countries.

1 = [Blank]

US Practice Weight Codes, 2-999 = ’35 pcf’ [Vitrified clay]10 = ’57 pcf’ [Polypropylene]16 = ’88 pcf’ [PVC]22 = ’97 pcf’ [CPVC]28 = ’111 pcf’ [FRP, Kynar]30 = ’150 pcf’ [Reinforced concrete pipe]34 = ’165 pcf’ [Aluminum]40 = ’260 pcf’ [Titanium]46 = ’450 pcf’ [Iron]47 = ’450 pcf’ [Standard thk cement linin, ductile iron]48 = ’450 pcf’ [Double thk cement lining ductile iron]52 = ’490 pcf’ [Carbon steel, low Cr alloy steel, stainless steel]58 = ’490 pcf’ [Cement lined carbon steel]64 = ’525 pcf’ [Brass, Inconel]70 = ’555 pcf’ [Bronze, copper, Monel, nickel]76 = ’570 pcf’ [Hastelloy]

European Practice Weight Codes, 101-199101 = [Blank]

111 = ’Weight selection flag 1’112 = ’Weight selection flag 2’113 = ’Weight selection flag 3’114 = ’Weight selection flag 4’115 = ’Weight selection flag 5’

654

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 131 = ’1’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F1/K1/V1]132 = ’2’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F2/S2/K2/M2/V2]133 = ’3’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F3/S3/K3/M3]134 = ’4’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F4/K4/M4]135 = ’5’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F5/S5/K5/M5]136 = ’6’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F6/M6]137 = ’7’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F7/S7]138 = ’8’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F8/S8/M8]139 = ’9’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F9/S9/M9]140 = ’10’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-S10/M10]141 = ’11’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F11/M11]142 = ’12’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-S12]143 = ’13’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-S13]144 = ’14’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-S14/M14]145 = ’15’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F15/M15]146 = ’16’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F16]147 = ’17’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F17]148 = ’18’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F18]149 = ’19’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F19]150 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]151 = ’21’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-V21]152 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]153 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]154 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]155 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]156 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]157 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]158 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]159 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]160 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]161 = ’31’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-S31]162 = ’32’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F32/M32]163 = ’33’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F33/M33]164 = ’34’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-F34]165 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]166 = ’36’ [Acc. to DIN 3202-M36]167 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]168 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]169 = ’-’ [Not existent under DIN 3202]

British Standards numbers (200-299)units kg per cubic metre

201 = [Blank]

209 = ’561 km3’210 = ’913 km3’ [polypropylene]216 = ’1410 km3’ [pvc]222 = ’1554 km3’ [cpvc]228 = ’1778 km3’ [FRP, Kynar]230 = ’2403 km3’234 = ’2643 km3’ [Aluminium]240 = ’4165 km3’ [Titanium]246 = ’7208 km3’ [Iron]247 = ’7208 km3’248 = ’7208 km3’252 = ’7849 km3’ [CS]253 = ’7849 km3’ [low alloy st]254 = ’7849 km3’ [SS]258 = ’7849 km3’ [8mm thk cement lined CS]264 = ’8410 km3’ [Brass, Inconel]270 = ’8890 km3’ [Bronze, copper, Monel, Nickel]276 = ’9130 km3’ [Hastelloy]

655


CL990, Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms

1 = ’General Fittings’2 = ’Pipe Bends ’3 = ’Orifice Flanges ’4 = ’Branch Nipples ’5 = ’Branch Reinforcement’21 = ’Valves ’41 = ’Piping ’42 = ’Tubing ’61 = ’Gaskets ’62 = ’Bolts ’63 = ’Nuts ’

100 - 299 values are for Piping Specialties100 - 149 range of values are for specific specialties150 - 199 range of values are for typical specialties200 - 249 range of values are for specific valves250 - 299 range of values are for typical valves

100 = ’Specific - General ’150 = ’Typical - General ’200 = ’Specific - Valve ’250 = ’Typical - Valve ’

300 - 499 values are for Instruments300 - 349 range of values are for specific instruments350 - 399 range of values are for typical instruments400 - 449 range of values are for specific valves450 - 499 range of values are for typical values

300 = ’Specific - General ’350 = ’Typical - General ’400 = ’Specific - Valve ’450 = ’Typical - Valve ’

CL999, Standard Note Title (2000)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning ofexisting codelist values.

1 = [Blank]31 = ’Object Types for Mass Annotation’35 = ’Approval Status’36 = ’Structural Approval Status’37 = ’HVAC Approval Status’50 = ’Hold Status’69 = ’Equipment Division’125 = ’Fluid Code’130 = ’Construction Status’145 = ’Materials Grade’148 = ’Materials Description’160 = ’Responsibility’180 = ’Fabrication Category’190 = ’Coating Requirements’200 = ’Heat Tracing Requirements’210 = ’Heat Tracing Media’220 = ’Insulation Purpose’230 = ’Cleaning Requirements’

656

B. C

od

elists


330 = ’End Preparation’332 = ’Schedule / Thickness Override’340 = ’Safety Classification’360 = ’Stress Analysis Requirements’365 = ’Reporting Requirements’366 = ’Requirement to Reconstruct’380 = ’Piping Component Type’390 = ’Action’400 = ’Commodity Option’420 = ’Piping Component Data Source’425 = ’Piping/Tubing Type/Source’430 = ’Instrument Component Data Source’499 = ’Piping Notes’530 = ’Accessory / Item Type’550 = ’Operator / Actuator Type’570 = ’Design Standard’572 = ’Wall Thickness Equation’575 = ’Geometry Standard’576 = ’Table Suffix / End Standard - Green’577 = ’Table Suffix / End Standard - Red’578 = ’Weight Code’990 = ’Spec Writer Data Form Type’999 = ’Standard Note Title’1010 = ’Area Units’1028 = ’Weight Units’1056 = ’Temperature Units’1064 = ’Pressure Units’1074 = ’Density Units’1100 = ’Weld Type’1162 = ’Force Units’1201 = ’Drawing Scale’1202 = ’Drawing Size’1203 = ’Interference Manager Approval Status’1204 = ’Interference Clash Type’1205 = ’Interference Manager Action’1207 = ’Interference Manager Approval Method’1208 = ’Clash Checking Option’1209 = ’Clash Checking Volume Filter Option’1310 = ’Report Source’1312 = ’Report Type’1410 = ’Design Review Type’1605 = ’Model Status’1610 = ’Force Units for FrameWorks Plus’1620 = ’Drawing View Direction’1630 = ’Drawing View Composition Status’1710 = ’Document Type’1720 = ’Document Sub-Type’1900 = ’Isometric Drawing Type’2000 = ’Orthographic Drawing Type’

CL1010, Area Units (25)

Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in CLNo Unit Name Dest. Unit Factor A B1 ftˆ2 mˆ2 9.290 304* E-02 0.0 1.0* E+003 inˆ2 cmˆ2 6.451 6* E+00 0.0 6.944 444 E-035 ydˆ2 mˆ2 8.361 274 E-01 0.0 9.0* E+007 miˆ2 kmˆ2 2.589 988 E+00 0.0 2.787 840 E+0710 mmˆ2 mmˆ2 1 0.0 1.076 391 E-0512 cmˆ2 mmˆ2 1.0* E+02 0.0 1.076 391 E-0314 mˆ2 cmˆ2 1.0* E+04 0.0 1.076 391 E+01

657

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 16 kmˆ2 mˆ2 1.0* E+06 0.0 1.076 391 E+0725 [Blank] — — -9999. -9999.

CL1028, Mass Units (40)

Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in CLNo Unit Name Dest. Unit Factor A B1 lb kg 4.535 924 E-01 0.0 1.0* E+003 grain mg 6.479 891 E+01 0.0 1.428 571 E-049 USton Mg 9.071 847 E-01 0.0 2.0* E+0311 UKton Mg 1.016 047 E+00 0.0 2.24* E+0320 (Mu)g (Mu)g 1 0.0 2.204 622 E-0922 mg mg 1 0.0 2.204 622 E-0624 g g 1 0.0 2.204 622 E-0326 kg kg 1 0.0 2.204 622 E+0028 Mg Mg 1 0.0 2.204 622 E+0340 [Blank] — — -9999. -9999.

CL1056, Temperature Units (15)

Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in CLNo Unit Name Dest. Unit Factor A B1 degF degC (degF - 32)/1.8 0.0 1.0* E+002 degC degC 1 +3.2* E+01 1.8* E+003 degR K 5/9 -4.596 900 E+02 0.0* E+004 K K 1 -4.596 900 E+02 1.8* E+0015 [Blank] — — -9999. -9999.

CL1064, Pressure Units (40)

NOTE: New entries in this codelist cannot be added by the user.Changes will NOT be recognized unless the software is changed touse them.

Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in CLNo Unit Name Dest. Unit Factor A B1 psig [gage] kPa 0.0 1.0* E+2 psi [absolute] kPa 6.894 757 E+00 -1.469 595 E+01 1.0* E+004 inH2O [absolute] kPa 2.488 4 E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 3.609 119 E-026 inH2O @ 32degF kPa 2.491 14 E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 3.613 010 E-027 inHg [absolute] kPa 3.376 85 E+00 -1.469 595 E+01 4.897 707 E-018 mmHg [absolute] kPa 1.333 22 E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 1.933 672 E-029 atm [absolute] kPa 1.013 250* E+02 -1.469 595 E+01 1.469 595 E+0110 bar [absolute] kPa 1.0* E+02 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E+0111 bar (gage) [gage] psig 1.450 377 E+01 0.0 1.450 377 E+0113 dyn/cmˆ2 [absolute] Pa 1.0* E-01 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E-0515 mmH2O [absolute] kPa 9.806 38 E-03 -1.469 595 E+01 1.422 295 E-0316 inHg @ 32degF kPa 3.386 38 E+00 -1.469 595 E+01 4.911 054 E-0117 kPa [absolute] kPa 1 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E-0118 MPa [absolute] kPa 1.0* E+03 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E+0219 Pa [absolute] Pa 1 -1.469 595 E+01 1.450 377 E-0420 kg/cm*2 (gage) [gage] psig 1.422 334 E+01 0.0 1.422 334 E+0121 kg/cm*2 [absolute] kPa 9.806 65 E+01 -1.469 595 E+01 1.422 334 E+0122 Mpa_g psig 1.450 377 E+02 0.0 1.450 377 E+0240 [Blank] — — -9999. -9999.67 kPa_g psig 1.450 377 E-01 0.0 1.450 377 E-01

658

B. C

od

elists


CL1074, Density Units (35)

Convert to Destination Unit Convert To First Unit in CLNo Unit Name Dest. Unit Factor A B1 lb/ftˆ3 kg/mˆ3 1.601 846 E+01 0.0 1.0* E+003 lb/UKgal kg/mˆ3 9.977 633 E+01 0.0 6.228 834 E+005 lb/USgal kg/mˆ3 1.198 264 E+02 0.0 7.480 519 E+007 kip/ftˆ3 kg/mˆ3 1.601 846 E+04 0.0 1.0* E+039 lb/inˆ3 kg/mˆ3 2.767 990 E+04 0.0 1.728 000 E+0311 USton/ftˆ3 kg/mˆ3 3.203 692 E+04 0.0 2.0* E+0317 degAPI kg/mˆ3 Use API2564 Tbl -9999. -9999.20 kg/mˆ3 kg/mˆ3 1 0.0 6.242 797 E-0222 g/cmˆ3 kg/dmˆ3 1 0.0 6.242 797 E+0124 kg/L kg/mˆ3 1.0* E+03 0.0 6.242 797 E+0126 kg/dmˆ3 kg/mˆ3 1 E+03 0.0 6.242 797 E+0135 [Blank] — — -9999. -9999.

CL1100, Weld Type (100)

NOTE: Codelist numbers 0-19 have been reserved for shop welds,numbers 20-29 have been reserved for field welds, and 30-39 havebeen reserved for offshore welds. In editing this codelist set, do notchange the meaning of existing codelist values.

1 = [Blank]2 = ’Pipe connector’11 = ’Shop weld’21 = ’Field weld at assembly site’22 = ’Field weld at job site’23 = ’Field weld at job site for loose flange’24 = ’Field fit weld at job site’

CL1162, Force Units (40)

1 = ’lbf’3 = ’kipf’5 = ’UStonf’7 = ’UKtonf’20 = ’dyn’22 = ’mN’24 = ’N’26 = ’kgf’28 = ’kN’40 = [Blank]

CL1201, Drawing Scale (540)

(1-499) English System of Units1 = [Blank]

104 = ’=1/8"= 1’ 0"’108 = ’=1/4"= 1’ 0"’112 = ’=3/8"= 1’ 0"’116 = ’=1/2"= 1’ 0"’124 = ’=3/4"= 1’ 0"’132 = ’=1"= 1’ 0"’164 = ’=2"= 1’ 0"’

659

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ (500-599) Metric System of Units500 = ’1:10’510 = ’1:4’530 = ’1:2’540 = ’1:1’

CL1202, Drawing Size (199)

(1-99) English System of Units1 = ’A’2 = ’B’3 = ’C’4 = ’D’5 = ’E’6 = ’F’

(100-199) Metric System of Units101 = ’A0’102 = ’A1’103 = ’A2’104 = ’A3’105 = ’A4’

CL1203, Interference Manager Approval Status (99)

1 = ’Unapproved’2 = ’Approved’ [User has approved clash]99 = ’Cleared’ [Software detected that clash has been fixed]

CL1204, Interference Clash Type (10)

1 = ’Hard versus Hard’2 = ’Hard versus Soft’3 = ’Hard versus Construction’4 = ’Soft versus Soft’5 = ’Soft versus Construction’6 = ’Construct vs Construct=Construction versus Construction’

CL1205, Interference Manager Action (10)

1 = ’No Action by user’2 = ’Approve Real Clash’3 = ’Approve False Clash’4 = ’Transfer Responsibility’

660

B. C

od

elists


CL1207, Interference Manager Approval Method(10)

1 = ’Not Approved’2 = ’Accepted by Graphical Review’3 = ’Accepted from List’

CL1208, Clash Checking Option

1 = ’Unknown’2 = ’Project Mode’3 = ’Design Area Mode’4 = ’Pre-defined Volume Mode’

CL1209, Clash Checking Volume Filter Option

1 = ’Volume Filter Is Inactive’2 = ’Volume Filter Is Active’

CL1310, Report Source (99)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning ofexisting codelist values. Codelist values are reserved as follows:0-10 from design data, 11-20 from project data, 21-30 referencedata.

1 = ’ MTO Report ’2 = ’ Drawing Report ’3 = ’ PID Report Header ’11 = ’ Project Control Report ’12 = ’ Clash Management Report ’21 = ’ Piping Job Spec Report ’22 = ’ Table Checker Report ’

CL1312, Report Type (999)

NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identicalto those defined in CL1720, Document Type; codelist numbers usedmust not exceed ’999’. In editing this codelist set, do not changethe meaning of existing codelist values.

601 = ’Piping RDB Reports’682 = ’Equipment List’685 = ’Piping Line List’687 = ’Piping Segments Report’689 = ’Piping Components MTO Report’690 = ’Pipe Supports Report’692 = ’Instrument List’696 = ’Piping Release Report’

661


CL1410, Design Review Type (10)

NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning ofexisting codelist values.

1 = ’Client Review’2 = ’Informal Review’

CL1605, Model Status

1 = ’Undefined’11 = ’Preliminary’12 = ’Temporary’21 = ’Permanent’

CL1610, Force Units for FrameWorks Plus (40)

1 = ’LBS’2 = ’KIPS’3 = ’N’4 = ’kN’

CL1620, Drawing View Directions (7)

1 = ’Plan’2 = ’East Elevation’3 = ’North Elevation’4 = ’Isometric’5 = ’West Elevation’6 = ’South Elevation’7 = ’Plan (Vertical)’

CL1630, Drawing View Composition Status (4)

1 = ’Drawing View Not Composed’2 = ’Drawing View Composed’3 = ’Composite Drawing View Not Composed’4 = ’Composite Drawing View Composed’

CL1710, Document Source (99)

NOTE: Do not make any new entries to this codelist. In editingthis codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values.

1 = ’Process RDB report’2 = ’Process TDB report’5 = ’Process TDB drawing’

662

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 11 = ’P&I RDB report’12 = ’P&I TDB report’15 = ’P&I TDB drawing’

21 = ’Vessel RDB report’22 = ’Vessel TDB report’25 = ’Vessel TDB drawing’

31 = ’Heat Transfer RDB report’32 = ’Heat Transfer TDB report’35 = ’Heat Transfer TDB drawing’

41 = ’Mechanical RDB report’42 = ’Mechanical TDB report’45 = ’Mechanical TDB drawing’

46 = ’Piping Specialty RDB report’47 = ’Piping Specialty TDB report’

51 = ’Civil/Structural RDB report’52 = ’Civil/Structural TDB report’55 = ’Civil/Structural TDB drawing’

61 = ’Piping RDB report’62 = ’Piping TDB report (PD_Report)’65 = ’Piping TDB drawing (PD_Draw)’67 = ’Piping isometric TDB drawing’

71 = ’Instrument RDB report’72 = ’Instrument TDB report’75 = ’Instrument TDB drawing’

81 = ’Electrical RDB report’82 = ’Electrical TDB report’85 = ’Electrical TDB drawing’

91 = ’HVAC RDB report’92 = ’HVAC TDB report’95 = ’HVAC TDB drawing’

99 = ’No planned PDS source’

CL1720, Document Type (999)

NOTE: The PDS source of each document type is shown to the rightof the document type separated from it by the character ’|’ on thebasis of codelist numbers defined in CL1710, Document Source. Inediting this codelist set, respect the number ranges identified below.

(100-199) Process Documents101 = ’Process RDB Reports | 1’121 = ’Process Flow Diagrams | 5’125 = ’Materials of Construction Drawings | 5’127 = ’Temperature/Pressure Diagrams | 5’131 = ’Equipment Process Datasheets | 2’133 = ’Instrument Process Datasheets | 2’199 = ’Other Process Documents | 99’

663

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ (200-299) Vessel Documents201 = ’Vessel RDB Reports | 21’205 = ’Vessel Job Specifications | 99’211 = ’Vessel Requisitions | 22’231 = ’Reactor Drawings | 25’233 = ’Regenerator Drawings | 25’235 = ’Cyclone Drawings | 25’237 = ’Transfer Line Drawings | 25’239 = ’Tower Drawings | 25’241 = ’Drum Drawings | 25’243 = ’Tank Drawings | 25’245 = ’Silo Drawings | 25’247 = ’Stack Drawings | 25’299 = ’Other Vessel Documents | 99’

(300-399) Heat Transfer Documents301 = ’Heat Transfer RDB Reports | 31’305 = ’Heat Transfer Job Specifications | 99’311 = ’Heat Transfer Requisitions | 32’331 = ’Heat Transfer Drawings | 35’399 = ’Other Heat Transfer Documents | 99’

(400-499) Mechanical Equipment Documents401 = ’Mechanical RDB Reports | 41’405 = ’Mechanical Equipment Job Specifications | 99’411 = ’Mechanical Equipment Requisitions | 42’431 = ’Mechanical Equipment Drawings | 45’499 = ’Other Mechanical Equipment Documents | 99’

(500-599) Civil/Structural Documents501 = ’Civil/Structural RDB Reports | 51’505 = ’Civil/Structural Job Specifications | 99’511 = ’Civil/Structural Requisitions | 99’531 = ’Site Preparation Drawings | 99’535 = ’Foundation Location Drawings | 65’537 = ’Piling Drawings | 65’538 = ’Foundation Drawings | 55’540 = ’Structural Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’545 = ’Concrete Structural Drawings | 55’550 = ’Steel Structural Drawings | 55’570 = ’Building Drawings | 99’599 = ’Other Civil/Structural Documents | 99’

(600-699) Piping Documents601 = ’Piping RDB Reports | 61’602 = ’Piping Specialty RDB Reports | 46’605 = ’Piping Job Specifications | 99’611 = ’Piping Commodity Requisitions | 99’612 = ’Piping Specialty Requisitions | 47’631 = ’P&IDs | 15’633 = ’Hydrotest P&IDs | 15’641 = ’Plot Plans | 65’643 = ’Equipment Arrangement Drawings | 65’651 = ’Piping Underground Drawings | 65’661 = ’Equipment Orientations | 65’663 = ’Piping One Line Drawings | 65’665 = ’Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’667 = ’Pipeline Alignment Drawings | 65’669 = ’Piping Isometric Drawings | 67’671 = ’Piping Spool Drawings | 67’673 = ’Spring Hanger Drawings | 99’675 = ’Pipe Support Details | 99’

664

B. C

od

elists

Appendix B: General Comments________________ 681 = ’P&ID Equipment List | 12’682 = ’Equipment List | 62’684 = ’P&ID Line List | 12’685 = ’Piping Line List | 62’687 = ’Piping Segments Report | 62’689 = ’Piping Components MTO Report | 62’690 = ’Pipe Supports Report | 62’692 = ’Instrument List | 62’696 = ’Piping Release Report | 62’699 = ’Other Piping Documents | 99’

(700-799) Instrument Documents701 = ’Instrument RDB Reports | 71’705 = ’Instrument Job Specifications | 99’711 = ’Instrument Requisitions | 72’721 = ’Instrument Logic Diagrams | 75’723 = ’Instrument Loop Diagrams | 75’731 = ’Instrument Location Plans | 65’733 = ’Instrument Control House/Panel Drawings | 99’735 = ’Instrument Hook Up Drawings | 75’737 = ’Instrument Heat Tracing Drawings | 75’739 = ’Instrument Wiring Drawings | 99’771 = ’Instrument Index | 72’799 = ’Other Instrument Documents | 99’

(800-899) Electrical Documents801 = ’Electrical RDB Reports | 81’805 = ’Electrical Job Specifications | 99’811 = ’Electrical Requisitions | 99’831 = ’Electrical One Line Diagrams | 99’841 = ’Electrical Area Classification Drawings | 65’851 = ’Electrical Underground Drawings | 65’861 = ’Electrical Power Drawings | 99’863 = ’Electrical Communications Drawings | 99’865 = ’Lighting Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’867 = ’Electrical Heat Tracing Drawings | 99’899 = ’Other Electrical Documents | 99’

(900-999) HVAC Documents901 = ’HVAC RDB Reports | 91’905 = ’HVAC Job Specifications | 99’911 = ’HVAC Requisitions | 99’931 = ’HVAC Flow Diagrams | 99’971 = ’HVAC Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’999 = ’Other HVAC Documents | 99’

CL1900, Isometric Drawing Type


1 = ’Fabrication’2 = ’Spool’3 = ’Stress’

665


CL2000, PD_Draw Document Type (999)

NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identicalto those defined in CL1720, Document Type; codelist numbers usedmust not exceed ’999’. In editing this codelist set, do not changethe meaning of existing codelist values.

535 = ’ Foundation Location Drawings’537 = ’ Piling Drawings’540 = ’ Structural Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’641 = ’ Plot Plans’643 = ’ Equipment Arrangement Drawings’651 = ’ Piping Underground Drawings’661 = ’ Equipment Orientations’663 = ’ Piping One Line Drawings’665 = ’ Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’667 = ’ Pipeline Alignment Drawings’731 = ’ Instrument Location Plans’841 = ’ Electrical Area Classification Drawings’851 = ’ Electrical Underground Drawings’865 = ’ Lighting Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’971 = ’ HVAC Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’

666

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

Glossary

absolute path name The sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/) thatlocates a file. See also path name and relative path name.

active depth The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and performmanipulations.

active process The process which is displayed in the Process ID field; it controls themessage fields, the menus, and the keyboard. The active process has ahighlighted window icon strip.

application software Software designed to meet specific needs, unlike system software whichruns other software.

batch processing A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into agroup (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream withoutuser intervention.

batch queue A queue, or channel for moving requests, created through NQS. A batchqueue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batchoptions screen menu.

branch point A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can beassigned different segment parameters. A branch point allows forplacement of branch components.

cancel button The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X orthe word cancel. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option.

cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as agroup, and then manipulated as individual elements.

character A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data.

client In network operations, a node which accesses data or performs a function onthe remote resource (usually a server). All network operations (database,NFS, NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/serverrelationship.

column An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in adatabase.

command Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data.

confirm button A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains agreen check mark or the word confirm. Select the confirm button to initiatea specified option.

667


coordinate The location of a point along the X, Y, or Z axis.

coordinate system A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the designcube. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinatesystem, whereby points are located by traversing the X, Y, and Z axes of thedesign cube. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as0,0,0, though this is not required. Other coordinate systems are used to moreeasily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. For example,you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere,and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on acylinder.

coordinates An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in acoordinate system.

core files The image files written by System V for a number of reasons, the mostcommon of which are memory violations, illegal instructions, bus errors,and user-generated quit signals.

cursor The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area.

data button The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points, to acceptpreviously selected elements, and to select commands from forms andmenus.

data entry field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known askey-in field.

data point A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Data points selectcommands from the panel menus and Menu Bar, place elements, identifyand accept elements, and activate windows and perform windowmanipulations.

database A collection of comprehensive informational files having predeterminedstructure and organization that can then be communicated, interpreted, orprocessed by a specific program.

database table The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and containsinformation about the project and design elements.

default The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied bythe system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user.

delete To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase.

delimiter A separating mark or space; a character or sequence of contiguouscharacters that mark the end of a string of characters.

device A nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a component onto whicha user cannot log, for example, tape drive, disk drive, and floppy disk.

668

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

directory A file that contains the names of other files.

display-list box A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field.When selected, a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Inputcan then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in theinformation.

domain The set of acceptable values for a value within a component.

dragging Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an elementso you can see it move.

easting A term used in plane surveying that describes an east, or positive, differencein longitude.

entity An object (project, drawing, element, and so forth.) of interest about whichinformation is stored; a relational database table.

envelope file See interference envelope.

file specification A UNIX path name that tells the system where to locate a file.

filename A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. The name shouldbe relevant to the contents of the file.

form An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. Becausemany of the screen menus in the application software are built withI/FORMS, you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation.

full path name The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the filename. See also relative path name.

gadget A portion of a form, such as a button, a field, or a checklist, that responds toinformation. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas.

header The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. Theheader contains information on the structure and contents of the file.

hierarchy A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents)for grouping files or commands.

icon A pictorial representation or image; a symbol that graphically identifies acommand.

Informix A relational database management system supported by RIS.

Ingres A relational database management system supported by RIS.

interference envelope An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used inconjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking.Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology todistinguish them from primitives.

669


invert elevation The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe.

isometric Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes atright angles; a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn atan angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from thebase.

key An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle toindividual rows of the table.

key-in field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as adata entry field.

keypoint A point on an element, including vertices, to which you can snap.

keyword A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certainfunction.

menubar The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selectingcommands.

message area The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you areworking in a design file. It is divided into the Command Status field, theCurrent Command field, the Prompt field, and the Key-in field.

model A graphic representation or schema.

network An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them toshare data and control. The term network can mean the devices that connectthe system, or it can mean the connected system.

NFS Network File System, the system that provides access to data that isdistributed among machines through an interconnection of host computersand workstations. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your localworkstation so you can access the data as though it were local. NFS isusually used to access centralized data on a server.

node Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connectedto a network. The network enables the connected nodes to share data andsystem control.

node address The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it ismanufactured. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicatewith another node in the network.

node name A name, or alias, that can be assigned to the node address of a device on anetwork.

northing A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinatesystem.

670

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection pointto piping. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance, but ratherrepresents the face-of-flange coordinate.

NQS Network Queuing System, the software package that allows you to definenetwork-wide batch and device queues. Use of NQS involves setting uplocal resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside andsetting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to theresources.

Oracle A relational database management system supported by RIS.

origin In coordinate geometry, the point where the x, y, and z-axes intersect.

origin point The point at which the coordinate system is placed.

orthogonal view A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines whichare orthogonal to the plane.

parameter A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior ofsomething.

path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading toa command.

path name The sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolute path nameand relative path name.

PDS Plant Design System

pipe queue A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues onremote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response.

place data point To identify a specific element, or indicate a specific point in the design file.

plane A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary, but islevel, having no elevations or depressions, and is three-dimensional.

RDB Reference Database.

reference database A collection of reference data containing information relative to industrydesign codes, vendor’s catalog data, job specifications, commodity libraries,graphics symbology, label descriptions, report formats and otherinformation of a similar manner.

relative path name The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particularfile. See also path name and absolute path name.

rotate To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by revolution abouta specific axis.

671


row A unit of related information in a table. One collection of column values fora table.

rubberbanding The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a datapoint while the element changes as you move the cursor.

schema A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.

schema file A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database.

server In network operations, the node which maintains common data or performsa common task needed by clients. All network operations (database, NFS,NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.

Structured QueryLanguage SQL

Language developed by IBM for creating, modifying, and queryingrelational databases.

style The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes, dash-dot, solid,and so forth.

surface The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element.

symbology The display style of an element, including color, style, and weight.

table A collection of data for quick reference, either stored in sequential locationsin memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of thesame type.

toggle To switch; to change between two alternatives.

user name A name that provides access to an account on the system.

values Data, either entered by the user or determined by the software, that arestored in an attribute.

variable A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values.

vector A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally representedas a line. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented asa coordinate triple (x,y,z).

view The defined area of vision on a screen. A view allows you to see aprescribed volume of the design cube. Views are created with their own x,y, and z axes. The x,y plane of the view is parallel to the screen, while thez-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you.The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation withrespect to the design cube. See also active depth.

virtual memory External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extensionof the computer’s internal memory. The software uses virtual memory tostore data. This means that unneeded files and data, stay on the disk untilthey are called for. Because the internal processing memory stores aminimal amount of data, the software can perform processing more quickly.

672

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.

673


674

Ind

ex

Index________________

Index

Aabbreviations 314accessory/item type 634action 625actuator type 634alphanumeric

labels 466approval status 573

HVAC 573structural 573

area units 657assembly

data managementcreate/batch 529create/interactive 528delete 532extract 535list 534report 533revise 530

Bbasic

tables 215bend deflection table 219bolt commodity code 230commodity item name 216component mirror 233field fit length 232, 234gasket diameter table 231pipe length threshold table 222preferred bolt length table 223segment pipe run length threshold table 221weld clearance 228weld graphics dimensions 229weld type 226

batchprocesses 40

bend deflection table 219bends and branches 271bolt

commodity code table 230bolted

connections 326, 328ends 324

bolts 272branch

insertion tables 208reinforcement equations 203

Cclash

managementlabels 468

clash approval action 660clash approval method 661clash checking

volume filter option 661clash checking option 661clash type 660cleaning requirements 613coating requirements 611code lists

sets 449codelist

1010 6571028 6581056 6581064 6581074 6591100 6591162 6591201 6591202 6601203 6601204 6601205 6601207 6611208 6611209 661125 5741310 6611312 6611410 662148 603160 6111605 6621610 6621620 6621630 6621710 662

675

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ codelist (continued)

1720 663180 611190 6111900 665200 6122000 666210 612220 613230 61331 572330 613332 616340 61835 57336 573360 618365 618366 61837 573380 618390 625400 625420 631425 632430 632499 63250 574530 634550 634570 635572 636575 636576 647577 650578 65469 574990 656999 656

codelist names 656codelist sets 567

comments 569commodity

codeattribute message 467

implied data 140item name table 216specification data 67

componentinsulation exclusion data 95mirror table 233

connectpoint

data 270connector type 574construction

toleranceexclusion data 101

construction status 578conventions

forms 37copy

report discrimination data 169report format 159

cp type/termination/preparation 613create

assembly data 529graphic commodity data 278, 279implied material data 141instrument

specification data 134label

attribute data 478data 473graphic data 475

material description library 378physical commodity data 291, 292piping

specialtyspecification data 130

piping assembly data 528PJS table 243, 244report

discrimination data 165report format 159standard note type 456tap

properties data 138tutorial definition file 441

create/batch 244

Ddata

retrievalfrom the physical data library 267

databaseinformation 30structure

reference 56DBAccess 463default

project control data 53

676

Ind

ex

Index________________ delete

graphic commodity data 283label data 487physical commodity data 296piping assembly data 532PJS table 247spec data 151standard note data 461tutorial definition file 446

delivered reference data 31density units 659design review type 662design standard 635dimension data

example of data look-up 268directions

drawing view 662discrimination

data file 155, 390displayable attribute

labels 466message 466

documentorganization 16purpose 15

document source 662document type 663, 666drawing scale 659drawing size 660drawing type

isometric 665drawing view

composition status 662directions 662

Eempty weight

GCP and RCP data 352GCP data 348valves 350

overflow data 351end prep 613end standard

green 647red 650

equationwall thickness 636

equipment and piping codelist names 656equipment divisions/form code 574error

messages 565

examplephysical data look-up 268

extractassembly data 535graphic commodity data 286physical commodity data 300PJS tables 251standard note type 462tutorial definition file 447

Ffabrication category 611female ends 332field

fit length table 232, 234fire and safety components 316fittings 316flange

insulation exclusion data 98flanges 272fluid code 574force units 659, 662forms

conventions 37piping commodity data 656

Ggadgets

conventions 37gaskets 272

diameter table 231separation table 212

generic tables 319bolted ends 324female ends 332male ends 330studs in bolted connections 326

w/ term type 328variables 320weight and thickness data, male ends 333

geometry standard 636graphic

commoditydata 27library 254

manager 275parametric shape definitions 263physical data definitions 259sub-symbol processor 258symbol processors 256

data

677

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ graphic (continued)

data (continued)library 253

graphic commodity library 254notes for graphic commodity data 270physical data tables 266

managementcreate/batch 279create/interactive 278delete 283extract 286list 285report 284revise 281

green and red connect pointdata 342overflow data 344

green connect pointdata 339end standard 647overflow data 341table suffix 647

Hheat tracing media 612heat tracing requirements 612help 41hold status 574hose 273HVAC approval status 573

Iimplied

material data 91instrument

component specification data 81components 318data 133physical data tables 355

body 355operators 358

instrument component type/source 632insulation

exclusion data 95, 98insulation purpose 613interactive

spec writer 103table check 144

interference clash type 660interference manager action 660

interference manager approval method 661interference manager approval status 660introduction

database information 30delivered reference data 31project organization 22reference data overview 23reference data setup 32

isometricdrawing labels 467

isometric drawing type 665

Llabel

descriptiondata management

create attribute data 478create graphic data 475delete 487report 489revise 485

library 29, 465label types 466manager 471merge 495

library managercreate 473

types 466alphanumeric labels 466clash management 468commodity code attribute message 467displayable attribute

labels 466message 466

isometric drawing labels 467report labels 468

librarieslocation 48

libraryverify RDB 561

library managertutorial definition file 438

listassembly data 534graphic commodity data 285physical commodity data 299PJS tables 250standard note data 460tutorial definition file 445

loadspec neutral files 148

678

Ind

ex

Index________________ load (continued)

standard note data 463load/revise

material description data 379, 380long material description library 372

Mmale ends 330

weight and thickness data 333mass units 658material

descriptiondata 28, 361

long material description library 372material description library manager 376short material description library 367specialty material description library 374

library manager 376create 378load/revise batch 380load/revise option 379replace option 381, 382report 383unapproved ==> approved 378

material reference database 366reference database

material description data 366structure 56

component insulation exclusion data 95flange insulation exclusion data 98implied data 91instrument 81piping

commodity 67materials class 62specialty 77

size-dependent data 88tap properties 85

materials data table 200materials grade 578model status 662MTO

tables and functions 237MTO flag 618

Nnaming conventions

tables 303neutral files

location 53spec data 59

nominal piping diametertable 194

notesgraphic commodity data 270

bends and branches 271bolts, gaskets, and flanges 272connect point data 270pipe, tubing, and hose 273

Oobject types

orthographic drawings 572on-line help 41operator type 634operators and actuators 345

overflow data 347option code 625options

reference data 43orthographic drawings

object types 572override

schedule/thickness 616

Pparametric shape definitions 263PDS environment 33

PD_Shell 34PD_Shell 34

form conventions 37physical

datadefinitions 259library

manager 287management

create 291create/batch 292delete 296extract 300list 299report 297revise 294

tables 266data look-up 268data retrieval 267

pipe 273length

threshold table 222piping

assembly

679

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ piping (continued)

assembly (continued)language 506

examples 521placing taps in assemblies 520

library 29, 505manager 525piping assembly language 506

commoditydata 117implied material data 91size-dependent material data 88specification data 67

component tables 334empty weight

GCP and RCP data 352GCP data 348valves 350

overflow data 351GCP

data 339overflow data 341

green and red cpdata 342overflow data 344

operators and actuators 345overflow data 347

specialty components 354variables 336

componentsrequired tables 315

construction tolerance exclusion data 101job specification 27, 55

database structure 56manager 145

delete option 151interactive 103load and replace options 148report option 152

report managerreport

discrimination data 163tables 189, 190, 239

create/batch 244create/interactive 243data management 239delete table 247extract 251library management 239list 250report 248

piping (continued)job specification (continued)

tables (continued)revise table 245

materials classdata 113

materials class data 62specialty

data 129dimension data 354specification data 77

piping commodity data forms 656piping component type 618piping component type/source 631piping materials class description 603piping notes 632piping/tubing type 632PJS

tables and functions 189branch insertion tables 208gasket separation table 212materials data table 200nominal piping diameters table 194temperature and pressure service limits table

191thickness data tables 197wall thickness and branch reinforcement

equations 203place

taps in assemblies 520preferred bolt length table 223pressure units 658project

organization 22

RRDB

proposed changes report 555tables and functions 215

MTO tables and functions 237verify RBD library 561

red connect pointend standard 650table suffix 650

referencedata

conflict report 540location 47

default project control data 53reference database management data 48

manager 43

680

Ind

ex

Index________________ reference (continued)

data (continued)overview 23

graphic commodity data 27label description library 29material description data 28piping assembly library 29piping job specification 27standard note library 28

setup 32data impact report 551database

management data 48revision manager 537, 539

proposed RDB changes report 555reference data impact report 551table change report 546

reference data conflict report 540replace

material description data 381, 382spec neutral files 148

reportassembly data 533discrimination data 163

copy 169create 165

files 155, 390format

copy 159create 159revise 159

graphic commodity data 284label data 489labels 468material description library 383output 155, 390physical commodity data 297PJS tables 248proposed RDB changes 555records 155, 390reference data conflict 540reference data impact 551spec data 152standard note library contents 459table change 546tutorial definition file 444

report datadiscrimination data file 155, 390files and records 155, 390format file 155, 390report output 155, 390

report source 661report type 661reporting requirements 618required tables 315requirement to reconstruct 618requirements

reporting 618responsibility 611revise

graphic commodity data 281implied material data 141instrument

specification data 134label data 485physical commodity data 294piping

specialtyspecification data 130

piping assembly data 530PJS table 245report format 159standard note type 457tap

properties data 138tutorial definition file 442

revision manager 537reference database

hierarchy of reported discrepancies 539revision markers 305

Ssafety classification 618sample

piping assembly language file 521table checker output 422

schedule/thickness override 616segment

pipe run length threshold table 221short material description library 367size-dependent material data 88source files

location 53spec 55spec tables

library 239spec writer 103special tables and functions

piping job specification 190specialty

material description library 374piping components 317

681

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide — April 2002________________ specialty (continued)

specification data 77standard note 449

library 28, 449create standard note type 456delete 461extract 462list 460load database 463report contents 459revise standard note type 457

library manager 453PID RDB 450

standard note titles 656status

drawing viewcomposition 662

model 662stress analysis requirements 618structural approval status 573studs

in bolted connections 326w/ term type 328

sub-symbol processor 258symbol processors 256

Ttable

201 113202 117203 129204 133205 137212 140change report 546checker 144, 385conventions 303, 304

abbreviations 314revision marks 305

formats 303basic tables 215generic tables 319instrument components 355piping component tables 334table conventions 304table requirements 315

requirements 315instrument components 318piping components 315

fire and safety 316fittings 316

table (continued)requirements (continued)

piping components (continued)specialty components 317valves 315

revision marks 305table suffix

green 647red 650

tablesfemale ends 332GCP data 339GCP overflow data 341green and red cp data 342green and red cp overflow data 344instruments 355

body 355operators 358

male ends 330operators and actuators 345

tapproperties

data 137properties data 85

TDFmanager 437

temperature and pressure service limits table 191temperature units 658thickness data tables 197tubing 273tutorial definition file

create 441delete 446extract 447library manager 438list 445report 444revise 442

tutorial definition manager 437typefaces 17

Uunapproved ==> approved

material description library 378units

area 657density 659force 659

FrameWorks Plus 662mass 658pressure 658

682

Ind

ex

Index________________ units (continued)

temperature 658units of measure 569

Vvalves 315variables

generic tables 320specific tables 336

verifyRDB library 561tables 385

Wwall thickness

equations 203wall thickness equation 636weight and thickness data

male ends 333weight code 654weld

clearance table 228graphics dimensions 229type table 226

weld type 659

683


684

Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200034B For PDS version 07.02.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200034A.

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003

686

Table of Contents Branch Insertion Tables (replaces 6.1.6) ................................................................. 687 CL1204, Interference Clash Types .......................................................................... 691

687

Branch Insertion Tables (replaces 6.1.6) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide (pp 208-211 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).

The following information has been modified:

• Removed “tee with reducing inserts,” “tee with reducing bushing, and reducing tee with reducer(s)” from list of tee branch connections

See the following text for details.

A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. You must specify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the reinforcement data.

Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the piping system as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the intersecting lines. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Y’s and crosses.

For them, the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design. The types of tee branch connections include branch weld, coupling, threadolet, reducing tee, nipolet, branch weld with reinforcing pad, sockolet, tee, and weldolet.

The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when no reinforcement component has been specifically defined.

The system uses the information in this table and the header nominal diameter (first size) and branch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to be used at the intersection. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed.

Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition ’BWWWW_WW’

! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ

No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6

! Nom Diam Preferred Branch! Header Branch AABBCC Codes

WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’WWWWW WWWWW ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZ’ ’ZZZZZZZ’

END


688

Example Table_Data_Definition ’BA501_90’

! Description= A,0.063CA, Use with TA501! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=3 Date=17-Aug-1988

No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 3Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6

! Nom Diam Preferred Branch! Header Branch AABBCC Codes

0.75 0.75 ’6Q3C22’ - -1 0.75 ’6Q3C24’ - -1 1 ’6Q3C22’ - -1.5 0.75 ’6Q3C24’ - -1.5 1 ’6Q3C24’ - -1.5 1.5 ’6Q3C22’ - -2 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -2 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -2 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -2 2 ’6Q3C22’ - -3 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -3 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -3 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 3 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -3 3 ’6Q3C22’ - -4 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -4 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -4 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 4 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 4 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -

4 4 ’6Q3C22’ - -6 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -6 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -6 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 6 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 6 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 6 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -

6 6 ’6Q3C22’ - -8 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -8 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -8 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 8 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 8 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 8 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 8 6 ’6Q3C73’ - -

8 8 ’6Q3C22’ - -10 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -10 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -10 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

> 10 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 10 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 10 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -

10 6 ’6Q3C82’ - -10 8 ’6Q3C82’ - -10 10 ’6Q3C22’ - -12 0.75 ’6Q3C74’ - -12 1 ’6Q3C74’ - -12 1.5 ’6Q3C74’ - -

689

> 12 2 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 12 3 ’6Q3C73’ - -> 12 4 ’6Q3C73’ - -

12 6 ’6Q3C82’ - -12 8 ’6Q3C82’ - -12 10 ’6Q3C82’ - -12 12 ’6Q3C22’ - -

END

Parameters Table_Data_Definition - Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) — This field

identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the Branch Table entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of intersection between the header and the branch.

These tables use the following naming conventions:

— first character: B

— second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the PMC, as defined below. Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys, stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys.

A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria

— third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended, per the following criteria:

1= None

2= 0.020"

3= 0.030"

4= 0.050"

5= 0.063"

6= 0.10"

7= 0.125"

8= 0.188"

C= 304 clad

D= 304L clad

E= 316 clad

F= 316L clad

G= 317 clad

H= 317L clad

J= 321 clad

L= Cement lined

P= Polyester lined

Q= Polypropylene lined

R= PTFE lined

S= Saran lined

T= Teflon lined

U= TK31 lined

V= R11 lined

W= R15 lined


690

9= 0.250"

A= 405 clad

B= 410S clad

M= Epoxy lined

N= Glass lined

O= Kynar lined

X= R18 lined

Y= Other 1

Z= Other 2

— fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique.

The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection. Negative values and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid.

However, when dealing with branch reinforcements, negative values and values less than 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI B31.1 and ANSI B31.3).

The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD.

Nom Diam Header - NPD for Run (integer) — This field identifies the nominal diameter of the header at the intersection. This is the member with the largest nominal diameter.

Nom Diam Branch - NPD for Branch (integer) — This field identifies the nominal diameter of the branch member at the intersection. This is the member with the smallest nominal diameter.

Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) — These fields identify the commodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection.

— If only one item name is listed, no branch reinforcement calculation is performed. The specified item is placed at the intersection.

— If two or more item names apply in one line, the system calculates the branch reinforcement thickness. The system tests the listed item names sequentially (from left to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied.

Therefore, these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (for example, reinforcing welds, followed by reinforcing pads, followed by weldolets.)

Typically, the codes are from one of the following types:

— Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads.

— Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets.

— Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.

691

CL1204, Interference Clash Types Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide (p. 660 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).

The following information has been added:

• New clash types See the following text for details.

1 = ' Hard versus Hard' ;2 = ' Hard versus Soft' ;3 = ' Hard versus Construction' ;4 = ' Soft versus Soft' ;5 = ' Soft versus Construction' ;6 = ' Construct vs Construct=Construction versus Construction' ;

105 = ' Hard vs Fproof' ;106 = ' Hard vs Insul' ;110 = ' Hard vs HardMaint' ;111 = ' Hard vs HardAccess' ;112 = ' Hard vs HardSafety' ;113 = ' Hard vs HardOperating' ;120 = ' Hard vs SoftMaint' ;121 = ' Hard vs SoftAccess' ;122 = ' Hard vs SoftSafety' ;123 = ' Hard vs SoftOperating' ;206 = ' Soft vs Insul' ;220 = ' Soft vs SoftMaint' ;221 = ' Soft vs SoftAccess' ;222 = ' Soft vs SoftSafety' ;223 = ' Soft vs SoftOperating' ;501 = ' Fproof vs Hard' ;502 = ' Fproof vs Soft' ;504 = ' Fproof vs CT' ;505 = ' Fproof vs Fproof' ;506 = ' Fproof vs Insul' ;510 = ' Fproof vs HardMain' ;511 = ' Fproof vs HardAccess' ;512 = ' Fproof vs HardSafety' ;513 = ' Fproof vs HardOperat' ;520 = ' Fproof vs HardMain' ;521 = ' Fproof vs HardAccess' ;522 = ' Fproof vs HardSafety' ;523 = ' Fproof vs HardOperat' ;602 = ' Insul vs Soft' ;604 = ' Insul vs CT' ;606 = ' Insul vs Insul' ;620 = ' Insul vs SoftMain' ;621 = ' Insul vs SoftAccess' ;622 = ' Insul vs SoftSafety' ;623 = ' Insul vs SoftOperat' ;

1001 = ' HardMain vs Hard' ;1002 = ' HardMain vs Soft' ;


692

1004 = ' HardMain vs CT' ;1005 = ' HardMain vs Fproof' ;1006 = ' HardMain vs Insul' ;1010 = ' HardMain vs HardMain' ;1012 = ' HardMain vs HardSafety' ;1013 = ' HardMain vs HardOperat' ;1020 = ' HardMain vs SoftMain' ;1021 = ' HardMain vs SoftAccess' ;1022 = ' HardMain vs SoftSafety' ;1023 = ' HardMain vs SoftOperat' ;1101 = ' HardAcc vs Hard' ;1102 = ' HardAcc vs Soft' ;1104 = ' HardAcc vs CT' ;1105 = ' HardAccess vs Fproof' ;1106 = ' HardAccess vs Insul' ;1110 = ' HardAcc vs HardMain' ;1111 = ' HardAcc vs HardAcc' ;1112 = ' HardAcc vs HardSafety' ;1113 = ' HardAcc vs HardOperat' ;1120 = ' HardAcc vs SoftMain' ;1121 = ' HardAcc vs SoftAcc' ;1122 = ' HardAcc vs SoftSafety' ;1123 = ' HardAcc vs SoftOperat' ;1201 = ' HardSafety vs Hard' ;1202 = ' HardSafety vs Soft' ;1204 = ' HardSafety vs CT' ;1205 = ' HardSafety vs Fproof' ;1206 = ' HardSafety vs Insul' ;1210 = ' HardSafety vs HardMain' ;1211 = ' HardSafety vs HardAcc' ;1212 = ' HardSafety vs HardSafety' ;1213 = ' HardSafety vs HardOperat' ;1220 = ' HardSafety vs SoftMain' ;1221 = ' HardSafety vs SoftAccess' ;1222 = ' HardSafety vs SoftSafety' ;1223 = ' HardSafety vs SoftOperat' ;1301 = ' HardOperat vs Hard' ;1302 = ' HardOperat vs Soft' ;1304 = ' HardOperat vs CT' ;1305 = ' HardOperat vs Fproof' ;1306 = ' HardOperat vs Insul' ;1310 = ' HardOperat vs HardMain' ;1311 = ' HardOperat vs HardAccess' ;1312 = ' HardOperat vs HardSafety' ;1313 = ' HardOperat vs HardOperat' ;1320 = ' HardOperat vs SoftMain' ;1321 = ' HardOperat vs SoftAccess' ;1322 = ' HardOperat vs SoftSafety' ;1323 = ' HardOperat vs SoftOperat' ;2002 = ' SoftMain vs Soft' ;2004 = ' SoftMain vs CT' ;2006 = ' SoftMain vs Insul' ;2020 = ' SoftMain vs SoftMain' ;2021 = ' SoftMain vs SoftAccess' ;2022 = ' SoftMain vs SoftSafety' ;2023 = ' SoftMain vs SoftOperat' ;2102 = ' SoftAccess vs Soft' ;

693

2104 = ' SoftAccess vs CT' ;2106 = ' SoftAccess vs Insul' ;2120 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftMain' ;2121 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftAccess' ;2122 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftSafety' ;2123 = ' SoftAccess vs SoftOperat' ;2202 = ' SoftSafety vs Soft' ;2204 = ' SoftSafety vs CT' ;2206 = ' SoftSafety vs Insul' ;2220 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftMain' ;2221 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftAccess' ;2222 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftSafety' ;2223 = ' SoftSafety vs SoftOperat' ;2302 = ' SoftOperat vs Soft' ;2304 = ' SoftOperat vs CT' ;2306 = ' SoftOperat vs Insul' ;2320 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftMain' ;2321 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftAccess' ;2322 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftSafety' ;2323 = ' SoftOperat vs SoftOperat' ;


694

Index branch

insertion tables, 687 codelist

1204, 691